Introduction To Environmental Engineering 0132347474 9780132347471 Compress

Introduction to
Environmental Engineering
This page intentionally left blank
Introduction to
RICHARD O. MINES, Jr., Ph.D., P.E.

Mercer University
LAURA W. LACKEY, Ph.D., P.E.

Mercer University
Prentice Hall
New York • Boston • San Francisco • London • Toronto
Sydney • Tokyo • Singapore • Madrid • Mexico City
Munich • Paris • Cape Town • Hong Kong • Montreal
CIP information can be obtained by contacting the Library of Congress
Editorial Director, ECS: Marcia Horton

Senior Editor: Holly Stark
Associate Editor: Dee Bernhard
Editorial Assistant: William Opaluch
Managing Editor: Scott Disanno
Production Editor: Clare Romeo
Art Director: Jayne Conte
Cover Designer: Bruce Kenselaar
Art Editor: Greg Dulles
Manufacturing Manager: Alan Fischer
Manufacturing Buyer: Lisa McDowell
Marketing Manager: Tim Galligan
© 2009 Pearson Education, Inc. Upper Saddle River, New Jersey 07458. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This
publication is protected by copyright and permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in
a retrieval system, or transmission in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information
regarding permission(s), write to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, 1 Lake Street, Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
The author and publisher of this book have used their best efforts in preparing this book. These efforts include the development, research,
and testing of theories and programs to determine their effectiveness. The author and publisher make no warranty of any kind, expressed
or implied, with regard to these programs or the documentation contained in this book. The author and publisher shall not be liable in any
event for incidental or consequential damages with, or arising out of, the furnishing, performance, or use of these programs.
Pearson Education Ltd., London

Pearson Education Singapore, Pte. Ltd
Pearson Education Canada, Inc.
Pearson Education—Japan
Pearson Education Australia PTY, Limited
Pearson Education North Asia, Ltd., Hong Kong
Pearson Educación de Mexico, S.A. de C.V.
Pearson Education Malaysia, Pte. Ltd.
Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, New Jersey
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ISBN 10: 0-13-234747-4

ISBN 13: 978-0-13-234747-1
Contents
ABOUT THIS BOOK xiv
1 • ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING AS A PROFESSION 1
1.1 Welcome 1
1.2 What’s Your Definition of Environmental Engineering? 1
1.3 Environmental Engineers Make a Difference 2
1.3.1 Jobs in Demand 2
1.3.2 A Lousy Report Card 2
1.3.3 Basic Necessities—New Challenges 3
1.4 Duties and Important Characteristics of Environmental Engineers 3
1.4.1 Multidisciplinary Teams 4
1.4.2 Work Outdoors 4
1.4.3 Consulting Firms 4
1.4.4 Government 4
1.4.5 Regulatory Agencies 5
1.4.6 Industry 5
1.4.7 Academia 5
1.4.8 Does Environmental Engineering Match My Interests? 5
1.5 Environmental Calamities 5
1.5.1 Love Canal 5
1.5.2 Milwaukee Cryptosporidium Outbreak 6
1.5.3 Chernobyl Nuclear Disaster 7
1.6 Becoming an Environmental Engineer: A Lifelong Process 7
1.6.1 College Education 7
1.6.2 Professional Licensure 7
1.6.3 Engineering Ethics 8
1.6.4 Continuing Education 9
1.7 Problem Solving 10
1.8 Environmental Management 12
v
vi Contents
Summary 12
Key Words 13
Exercises 13
References 14
2 • INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING

CALCULATIONS: DIMENSIONS, UNITS, AND CONVERSIONS 15
2.1 Introduction 15
2.2 Dimensions and Units 15
2.3 Essential Derived Units and Conversion Practice 18
2.3.1 Density 18
2.3.2 Concentration 20
2.3.3 Flow rate 26
2.3.4 Residence time 27
2.4 Precision, Bias, and Accuracy 28
2.5 Significant Figures 29
Summary 30
Key Words 30
References 30
Exercises 30
3 • ESSENTIAL CHEMICAL CONCEPTS 32
3.1 Introduction 32
3.2 Fundamentals 32
3.2.1 Atoms 32
3.2.2 Elements 32
3.3 Chemical Reactions 37
3.3.1 Stoichiometry 38
3.4 Solution Chemistry—Aqueous Phase 42
3.4.1 Acid-Base Chemistry 42
3.4.2 Strong Acids and Bases vs. Weak Acids and Bases 45
3.4.3 The Carbonate System and Alkalinity 47
3.5 Solid-Phase Equilibrium Reactions 48
3.6 Solution Chemistry—Gas Phase 51
3.6.1 Ideal Gas Law 51
3.6.2 General Gas Laws—Boyle’s, Charles’, Gay-Lussac, Combined Gas 51
3.6.3 Dalton’s Law of Partial Pressure 53
3.6.4 Raoult’s Law and Henry’s Law 54
Summary 56
Key Words 56
References 56
Bibliography 57
Exercises 57
4 • BIOLOGICAL AND ECOLOGICAL CONCEPTS 59
4.1 Introduction 59
4.2 Biological Systems 59
Contents vii
4.2.1 Cell Structure 60

4.2.2 Classification of Organisms 60
4.2.3 Major Groups of Organisms 61
4.2.4 Microbial Growth 66
4.3 Ecological Systems 69
4.3.1 Energy Flow in Ecosystems 70
4.3.2 Food Chains 71
4.3.3 Bioconcentration, Bioaccumulation, and Toxicity 74
4.4 Nutrient Cycles 75
4.4.1 Carbon Cycle 75
4.4.2 Nitrogen Cycle 76
4.4.3 Phosphorus Cycle 79
4.4.4 Sulfur Cycle 80
4.5 Limnological Concepts and Eutrophication 81
4.5.1 Stratification 82
4.5.2 Lake Classification 84
4.5.3 Dissolved-Oxygen Depletion in Streams 85
Summary 93
Key Words 93
References 93
Exercises 94
5 • RISK ASSESSMENT 98
5.1 Concept or Perception of Risk 98

5.2 Risk Assessment 101
5.2.1 Data Collection and Evaluation 102
5.2.2 Toxicity Assessment 102
5.2.3 Exposure Assessment 107
5.2.4 Risk Characterization 110
5.3 Risk Management 112
5.4 Environmental Impact Analysis 113
5.4.1 Overview of Environmental Impact Statement 113
5.4.2 Environmental Impact Statement 113
Summary 116
Key Words 117
References 117
Exercises 117
6 • DESIGN AND MODELING OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS 120
6.1 Introduction 120

6.2 Chemical and Biochemical Reactions 120
6.2.1 Rates of Reaction 121
6.2.2 Rate Law and Order of Reaction 121
6.2.3 Zero-Order Reactions 122
6.2.4 First-Order Reactions 123
6.2.5 Second-Order Reactions 125
6.2.6 Temperature Corrections 128
6.3 Material Balances 130
viii Contents
6.4 Flow Regimes and Reactors 134

6.4.1 Flow Regimes 134
6.4.2 Reactors 134
6.5 Energy Balances 143
6.5.1 Definition of Energy and Work 143
Summary 150
Key Words 150
References 150
Exercises 150
7 • SUSTAINABILITY AND GREEN DEVELOPMENT 154

7.2 Sustainable Development and Green Engineering 155
7.2.1 Sustainable Development 155
7.2.2 Green Engineering 155
7.2.3 Material Selection 156
7.3 Nuclear Physics 158
7.3.1 Radioactivity 159
7.4 Case Histories 165
7.4.1 New Chairs from Haworth and Steelcase 165
7.4.2 Paper or Plastic Bags? 165
7.4.3 Selection of Materials for Beverage Containers 166
7.4.4 Coal versus Nuclear Energy 167
7.4.5 Advanced Integrated Wastewater Pond System (AIWPS) 167
Summary 169
Key Words 169
References 169
Exercises 171
8 • WATER QUALITY AND POLLUTION 172
8.1 Importance of Water 172

8.2 Beneficial Uses of Water 172
8.2.1 Public Supply 173
8.2.2 Domestic 174
8.2.3 Irrigation 174
8.2.4 Livestock 174
8.2.5 Aquaculture 174
8.2.6 Industrial 174
8.2.7 Mining 175
8.2.8 Thermoelectric Power 175
8.3 Hydrologic Cycle 175
8.4 Water Pollution 175
8.5 Water Quality Parameters 177
8.5.1 Conventional Water Quality Assessment Parameters 177
8.6 Water Quality Standards 194
8.6.1 Drinking Water Standards 194
8.6.2 Wastewater Effluent Standards 195
8.6.3 Surface Water Quality Standards 196
Contents ix
8.7 Kepone Contamination of the James River 197

Summary 197
Key Words 198
References 198
Exercises 199
9 • WATER TREATMENT 201

9.2 General Considerations for Selecting Technology 202
9.2.1 Water Source and Quality 202
9.2.2 Drinking Water Standards 202
9.2.3 Microconstituents 203
9.3 Overview of Surface Water Treatment Systems 203
9.3.1 Conventional Surface Water Treatment 203
9.3.2 Membrane Treatment 205
9.4 Overview of Groundwater Treatment Systems 205
9.4.1 Conventional Lime-Soda Ash Treatment 206
9.4.2 Reverse Osmosis Treatment 206
9.5 Surface Water Treatment Processes 207
9.5.1 Coagulation and Flocculation 207
9.5.2 Mixing 210
9.5.3 Flocculation Tanks 213
9.5.4 Water Softening 215
9.5.5 Sedimentation 220
9.5.6 Filtration 226
9.5.7 Disinfection 233
9.6 Treatment of Water Treatment Plant Residuals 238
Summary 239
Key Words 239
References 239
Exercises 240
10 • DOMESTIC WASTEWATER TREATMENT 243

10.2 Wastewater Treatment Categorization 245
10.2.1 Secondary Wastewater Treatment 245
10.2.2 Advanced Wastewater Treatment (AWT) 246
10.3 Overview of Wastewater Treatment Systems 246
10.4 Preliminary Treatment 247
10.4.1 Screening 248
10.4.2 Grit Removal 248
10.5 Primary Treatment 249
10.6 Secondary Treatment 252
10.6.1 Activated Sludge 253
10.6.2 Aerator Systems 258
10.6.3 Trickling Filters 260
10.7 Secondary Clarification 262
10.8 Disinfection of Wastewater 264
x Contents
10.8.1 Disinfectants Used in Wastewater Treatment 264

10.8.2 Chlorination of Wastewater 264
10.8.3 Chlorine Contact Basin 264
10.9 Sludge Treatment and Disposal 266
10.9.1 Sludge Weight and Volume Relationships 266
10.9.2 Thickening Operations 267
10.9.3 Stabilization 269
10.9.4 Dewatering 275
10.9.5 Sludge Disposal 275
Summary 275
Key Words 276
References 276
Exercises 277
11 • AIR POLLUTION 279

11.2 History 280
11.3 Regulatory Overview 281
11.4 Sources and Effects 282
11.4.1 Particulates 282
11.4.2 Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) 283
11.4.3 Carbon Monoxide (CO) 284
11.4.4 Sulfur Oxides (SOx) 284
11.4.5 Lead 285
11.4.6 Ozone (O3) 285
11.4.7 Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) 286
11.4.8 The Greenhouse Effect and Global Climate Change 286
11.5 Control of Particulate Matter From Stationary Sources 289
11.5.1 Mechanical Separators—Settling Chambers 290
11.5.2 Electrostatic Precipitators (ESPs) 293
11.6 Gas and Vapor Control Technology 297
11.6.1 Incineration 297
11.6.2 Absorption—Packed-Bed Scrubbers and Flue Gas Desulfurization 298
Summary 302
Key Words 302
References 302
Exercises 303
12 • FUNDAMENTALS OF HAZARDOUS WASTE SITE REMEDIATION 305
12.1 The Problem 305

12.1.1 Highlights in Hazardous Waste History 305
12.2 Contaminant Characteristics and Phase Distribution 309
12.2.1 Contaminants of Concern 309
12.2.2 Contaminant Characteristics 315
12.2.3 Darcy’s Law 320
12.3 Overview of Microbial Processes 323
12.3.1 An Overview of Bacteria 323
12.3.2 Environmental Factors Affecting Microbial Metabolism 323
Contents xi
12.4 Introduction to Engineered Remediation Processes 324

12.4.1 In situ Remediation Schemes 324
12.4.2 Ex situ Remediation Schemes – Composting and Landfarming 328
Summary 331
Key Words 331
References 331
Exercises 332
13 • INTRODUCTION TO SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 333

13.2 Regulations and Solid Waste Management 335
13.2.1 RCRA Solid Waste Definition 335
13.2.2 RCRA Hazardous Waste Definition 336
13.2.3 RCRA Nonhazardous Waste 337
13.3 Waste Generation (Quantifying MSW Generation) 337
13.4 Solid Waste Collection 340
13.4.1 Types of Collection Systems 340
13.4.2 Equipment 341
13.4.3 Problems and Concerns 341
13.5 Landfill Containment and Monitoring Systems 343
Summary 345
Key Words 345
References 345
Exercises 346
Index 349
ESource Reviewers
We would like to thank everyone who helped us with or has reviewed texts in this series.
Naeem Abdurrahman, University of Texas, Austin Donald Herling, Oregon State University
Stephen Allan, Utah State University Thomas Hill, SUNY at Buffalo
Anil Bajaj, Purdue University A. S. Hodel, Auburn University
Grant Baker, University of Alaska–Anchorage Kathryn Holliday-Darr, Penn State U Behrend
William Beckwith, Clemson University College, Erie
Haym Benaroya, Rutgers University Tom Horton, University of Virginia
John Biddle, California State Polytechnic University James N. Jensen, SUNY at Buffalo
Tom Bledsaw, ITT Technical Institute Mary Johnson, Texas A & M Commerce
Fred Boadu, Duke University Vern Johnson, University of Arizona
Gregory Boardman, Virginia Tech Jean C. Malzahn Kampe, Virginia Polytechnic
Tom Bryson, University of Missouri, Rolla Institute and State University
Ramzi Bualuan, University of Notre Dame Autar Kaw, University of South Florida
Dan Budny, Purdue University Kathleen Kitto, Western Washington University
Betty Burr, University of Houston Kenneth Klika, University of Akron
Fernando Cadena, New Mexico State University Harold Knickle, University of Rhode Island
Joel Cahoon, Montana State University Terry L. Kohutek, Texas A&M University
Dale Calkins, University of Washington Bill Leahy, Georgia Institute of Technology
Linda Chattin, Arizona State University John Lumkes, Purdue University
Harish Cherukuri, University of North Carolina–Charlotte Mary C. Lynch, University of Florida
Arthur Clausing, University of Illinois Melvin J. Maron, University of Louisville
Barry Crittendon, Virginia Polytechnic and State James Mitchell, Drexel University
University Robert Montgomery, Purdue University
Donald Dabdub, University of CA Irvine Nikos Mourtos, San Jose State University
Kurt DeGoede, Elizabethtown College Mark Nagurka, Marquette University
John Demel, Ohio State University Romarathnam Narasimhan, University of Miami
James Devine, University of South Florida Shahnam Navee, Georgia Southern University
Heidi A. Diefes-Dux, Purdue University James D. Nelson, Louisiana Tech University
Jerry Dunn, Texas Tech University Soronadi Nnaji, Florida A&M University
Ron Eaglin, University of Central Florida Sheila O’Connor, Wichita State University
Dale Elifrits, University of Missouri, Rolla Matt Ohland, Clemson University
Timothy Ellis, Iowa State University Paily P. Paily, Tennessee State University
Christopher Fields, Drexel University Kevin Passino, Ohio State University
Patrick Fitzhorn, Colorado State University Ted Pawlicki, University of Rochester
Susan Freeman, Northeastern University Ernesto Penado, Northern Arizona University
Howard M. Fulmer, Villanova University Michael Peshkin, Northwestern University
Frank Gerlitz, Washtenaw Community College Ralph Pike, Louisiana State University
John Glover, University of Houston Andrew Randall, University of Central Florida
John Graham, University of North Carolina–Charlotte Dr. John Ray, University of Memphis
Ashish Gupta, SUNY at Buffalo Stanley Reeves, Auburn University
Otto Gygax, Oregon State University Larry Richards, University of Virginia
Malcom Heimer, Florida International University Marc H. Richman, Brown University
xii http://www.prenhall.com/esource/
ESource Reviewers xiii
Christopher Rowe, Vanderbilt University Dennis Truax, Mississippi State University

Liz Rozell, Bakersfield College Raman Menon Unnikrishnan, Rochester Institute of
Heshem Shaalem, Georgia Southern University Technology
Tabb Schreder, University of Toledo Michael S. Wells, Tennessee Tech University
Randy Shih, Oregon Institute of Technology Ed Wheeler, University of Tennessee at Martin
Howard Silver, Fairleigh Dickenson University Joseph Wujek, University of California, Berkeley
Avi Singhal, Arizona State University Edward Young, University of South Carolina
Tim Sykes, Houston Community College Garry Young, Oklahoma State University
Toby Teorey, University of Michigan Steve Yurgartis, Clarkson University
Neil R. Thompson, University of Waterloo Mandochehr Zoghi, University of Dayton
About this Book
Introduction to Environmental Engineering aims to excite freshman-level students

about the field of environmental engineering. It presents engineering concepts in an
engaging way to high school graduates who have limited skills in introductory cal-
culus, chemistry, and physics. To understand some of the more advanced material
presented here, students may need to complete a course in general chemistry and
calculus I; most engineering-school freshmen meet this requirement after their first
term of college-level study. Some topics covered are appropriate for sophomores,
and portions of the text could be used as supplemental reading in upper-level envi-
ronmental engineering courses typically taken by juniors and seniors.
Primarily, this book is intended for use in the first course that civil and envi-
ronmental engineers take in their curriculum; but many of its chapters could well be
assigned in an Introductory Engineering survey course to expose students to vari-
ous areas of environmental engineering.
The book is written in a straightforward manner for easy reading, and it pre-
sents numerous examples in each chapter. A Solutions Manual is available that
includes complete solutions to the end-of-chapter exercises.
A brief description of the topics presented covered in the book may be sum-
marized as in the text follows. Chapter 1 presents a synopsis of the exciting field of
environmental engineering and the need for environmental engineers. Chapter 2
focuses on mathematical equations and proper units used by engineers. A review of
essential chemical concepts, such as calculating molecular and equivalent weights,
balancing chemical equations, and acid/base reactions, is presented in Chapter 3.
Chapter 4 describes the major types of microorganisms encountered in environmental
engineering, along with biological and ecological concepts. Energy balances are
explained, and the carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus, and sulfur cycles are introduced.
The definition of risk, the calculation of risk, risk assessment, and environmental
impact analysis (EIS) are presented in Chapter 5. Chapter 6 discusses zero-, first-, and
second-order reactions encountered in environmental systems. Batch, completely
mixed, and plug-flow reactors used for treating water, wastewater, and air are described
along with the equations used for modeling these systems. Chapter 7 defines sustain-
able development and green engineering and introduces these current and relevant
xiv
About This Book xv
topics. It presents case studies illustrating designs that are sustainable while mini-
mizing adverse affects on the environment. A review of nuclear physics is included,
since nuclear reactors will certainly be more widely used in the future to reduce
greenhouse-gas emissions. The major parameters used by environmental engineers
for assessing water quality are presented in Chapter 8.
Chapter 9 introduces the major unit operations and processes used for treat-
ing sources of potable drinking water. Chapter 10 follows up with an introduction to
the unit operations and processes used for treating municipal wastewater and the
sludge that is produced. Chapter 11 presents an overview of air pollution, global
warming theory, regulatory issues, and the major technologies used for treating par-
ticulate and gaseous air pollutants. Solid-waste generation, collection, and disposal
issues are discussed in Chapter 12.
Finally, Chapter 13 presents techniques used for remediating hazardous wastes,
along with background information on the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act
(RCRA) and Superfund, which encompasses the Comprehensive Environmental
Response, Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA) and Superfund Amendments
and Reauthorization Act (SARA).
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
We extend our sincere appreciation and gratitude to Dr. W. Jack Lackey (Professor
Emeritus, George W. Woodruff School of Mechanical Engineering, Georgia Institute
of Technology) for his thorough review of the manuscript and his ideas for improve-
ment. Laura’s Dad has far exceeded his role as a fabulous father by spending long
hours in reviewing our work and formulating invaluable suggestions.
We are also highly appreciative of the feedback from our students at Mercer
University, who used the manuscript in EVE 290, Introduction to Environmental
Engineering. And finally, Rich would be remiss if he did not acknowledge his major
professor, mentor, colleague, and friend, Dr. Joseph H. Sherrard (1942–2004), who
inspired and encouraged him through doctoral studies at Virginia Tech.
We are most grateful for the patience exhibited and support provided by our
families.
CHAPTER
Environmental
Engineering as a
1
Profession
1.1 WELCOME
Objectives
As you begin your exploration of the environmental engineering profession,
In this chapter, you will you may be curious, excited—perhaps even a little fearful of what will be
learn about: expected of you. You are encountering the first challenge of your professional
The demand for journey. This book will give you tools to develop the skills you need for solving
environmental engineers, environmental engineering problems as a college student and later as a prac-
and the ways ticing engineer. This chapter will show you some of the exciting things you can
environmental do in environmental engineering.
engineering enhances the Your adventure with learning will not stop when you graduate. During
health and well-being of your career, you will continue to learn, as technology and regulations change
society and new environmental dilemmas evolve. Environmental engineering is a
Duties and important dynamically growing field, and you will be a part of its future.
characteristics of This book is an excellent source for students in the field of Civil Engi-
environmental engineers neering, and for students in biology, chemistry, and geology. It provides a
good background to the practical and valuable field of Environmental Engi-
Three major environmental
neering.
calamities that have
Welcome!
occurred since 1947
Professional licensure and
lifelong learning as an 1.2 WHAT’S YOUR DEFINITION OF ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING?
environmental engineer
When we asked three people “on the street” what they thought an environ-
A five-step, structured
mental engineer would do, they replied:
approach for solving
engineering problems “Take care of garbage and stuff like that.”
“Keep the air and water clean so we can use it.”
“Take care of pollution.”
While these descriptions may be accurate to some degree, they only scratch
the surface of the responsibilities of an environmental engineer today.
2 Chapter 1 Environmental Engineering as a Profession
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERS MAKE A DIFFERENCE

Environmental engineering has traditionally been a subspecialty of Civil Engineer-
ing, and at some colleges and universities it is housed in the Chemical Engineering
department. Environmental engineers protect the health and well-being of the pub-
lic by minimizing the release and impact of pollutants into the air, land, and water.
Professionals in the field have studied chemistry, biology, mathematics, and engi-
neering sciences. They work each day to design control and treatment systems that
reduce or limit the negative effects that humans have on the many ecosystems of the
world.
1.3.1 Jobs in Demand

The demand for environmental engineers continues to grow. The Bureau of Labor
(http://www.bls.gov/oco/ocos027.htm) indicates that environmental engineers
should have employment growth of 25% during the projected decade (2006–2016);
this growth is much faster than the average for all occupations. The same data sug-
gest that Computer Hardware, Electrical, and Mechanical engineering jobs are
expected to have slower-than-average rates of employment growth through 2016.
Civil and industrial engineers are expected to experience employment growth of
18% and 20%, respectively, over the projections decade.
An article in Fortune Magazine (Fisher, 2005) quoted David Levy (Chairman,
Jerome Levy Forecasting Center) as declaring: “The greatest increase in demand by
far will be folks who know how to clean up spaceship earth. That’s because an
increasingly health-conscious public is eager to find environmental engineers who
can prevent problems rather than simply control those that already exist.” Indeed,
future professionals in this field will be in demand because they have skills and
knowledge that governments, businesses, and industries will need to solve and pre-
vent environmental problems.
1.3.2 A Lousy Report Card

Since 1998, the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) has been rating the
state of America’s infrastructure. Table 1.1 shows scores from several recent report
cards. The grades assigned to our systems that treat drinking water, wastewater,
solid waste, and hazardous waste are alarming, as it appears that our country is
barely passing! For nearly a decade, little to no progress has been made to improve
our nation’s deteriorating infrastructure.
This report is unacceptable, and improving these grades will require the exper-
tise of environmental engineers. ASCE (2005) estimates that about $1.6 trillion must
be invested to upgrade and renovate the environmental infrastructure. Additionally,
Table 1.1 ASCE Report Card on America’s Infrastructure

1998 grade 2001 grade 2005 grade
Drinking water D D D-
Wastewater D+ D D-
Solid waste C- C+ C+
Hazardous waste D- D+ D
Source: ASCE (2005), ASCE (2001), ASCE (1998).
Section 1.4 Duties and Important Characteristics of Environmental Engineers 3
America’s airports, bridges, dams, national power grid, public parks and recreation
areas, railroads, security, schools, transit systems, and waterways will encounter prob-
lems to be solved by a team of professionals including environmental engineers.
The Water Infrastructure Network (WIN, a broad-based coalition of elected
officials, water and wastewater providers, regulators, administrators, engineers, and
environmentalists dedicated to preserving and protecting America’s water and
wastewater infrastructure) also cited the enormity of the work ahead. They fore-
casted unprecedented financial problems over the next 20 years for America’s water
and wastewater infrastructure. WIN (2004) projects that an annual investment of
$23 billion over current allocations will be needed to meet the priorities as stated in
the Clear Water Act (passed by Congress in 1977). The purpose of the act was to
establish the “best available technology economically achievable” for wastewater
discharges containing toxic substances and to provide the “best conventional pollu-
tant control technology” for discharges containing conventional pollutants such as
biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) and suspended solids (SS).
1.3.3 Basic Necessities—New Challenges

There will always be a high demand for qualified professional environmental engi-
neers, since there is a continuous need for high-quality drinking water, clean air, and
uncontaminated ground and surface water and land. Moreover, changes in popula-
tion growth, habits, and lifestyles of people around the world create new challenges
for environmental engineers. As the world’s population approaches 7 billion, the
auxiliary problems associated with providing sanitary living conditions are enor-
mous and ever changing.
Here’s a brief look at some changes that will impact future work in the field:
• Population increases create greater amounts of waste in terms of human excre-
ment, discarded products, and food waste.
• Citizens tend to become more wasteful as their economic well-being increases.
• Modern lifestyles require considerable amounts of energy and resources from the
earth. The liquids, solids, and gaseous wastes that are produced must be properly
treated before being reintroduced into the environment.
• Endocrine disruptors such as human and veterinarian antibiotics, anti-inflammatory
medicines, blood lipid regulators, and sex and steroidal hormones are being found in
water and wastewater.
Environmental engineers must be proactive to develop alternative technolo-
gies and processes that minimize the production of pollutants and the needless wast-
ing of the earth’s resources. Sustainable processes are also required to enable us to
meet not just our present needs but also those of future generations.
Challenges. Dilemmas. Ethical problems. Legal concerns. Political battles. Demands
for cost-effective solutions. Balance between needs of the earth and needs of people. Reme-
diation. Innovation. New technology. New problems. Each of these will require a team of
new professionals ready to meet a future of environmental engineering!
1.4 DUTIES AND IMPORTANT CHARACTERISTICS

OF ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERS
Being an environmental engineer is tremendously rewarding, because your skills
can improve the quality of life and help sustain the ecological balance for future
generations. The profession is a challenging one, requiring a strong foundation in
science, math, and engineering. Professionals integrate knowledge in these areas to

create engineered systems that treat pollutants in the atmospheric, aquatic, and ter-
restrial environments.
Most environmental problems are complex, because the treatment and trans-
port of pollutants involve multiple mediums. For example, using a scrubber for
removing particulate matter and gases from the discharge of a fossil-fuel power plant
involves working with pollutants in three different phases. It requires knowledge of
the chemical reactions involved in the combustion process and in the production of
the air contaminants. The pollutants in the exhaust gas are transferred to the liquid
phase during scrubbing, wherein the gases are neutralized and particles separated by
gravity. Ultimately, the particulate matter removed will be disposed of in a landfill.
There are other complex systems such as groundwater contamination from leaking
underground storage tanks (LUSTs) in which physical, chemical, and biological
processes must be understood and manipulated to engineer appropriate solutions.
Environmental engineers work in a variety of settings, managing an array of tasks.
1.4.1 Multidisciplinary Teams

Environmental engineering jobs are stimulating, since you get to work on a wide
range of projects and on multidisciplinary teams consisting of structural, mechani-
cal, electrical, and geotechnical engineers and biologists, chemists, planners, econo-
mists, lawyers, and politicians. As a team player, you must have good communication
skills and be able to convey your thoughts and designs to nontechnical and technical
audiences in both written and oral forms. You will need to be able to deliver good
oral presentations as well as make sketches and use appropriate software to prepare
schematic diagrams and other types of engineering drawings.
1.4.2 Work Outdoors

Environmental engineering is especially appealing to those who enjoy outdoor
activities and wish to sustain a healthy environment. It is not unusual for environ-
mental engineers to develop and implement protocols for collecting air, water, and
soil samples. On occasion, they will actually supervise the collection of the samples.
Where construction projects involve building new water or wastewater treatment
facilities or managing and supervising the cleanup of a contaminated hazardous
waste site, environmental engineers may serve as resident observers. Performing soil
surveys, environmental assessments, water-quality surveys, and hydraulic and hydro-
logic surveys all involve activities outdoors.
1.4.3 Consulting Firms

Many environmental engineers work for engineering consulting firms to solve a
variety of environmental problems. Newly graduated environmental engineers tend
to focus on technical issues related to the selection and design of appropriate tech-
nologies to treat water, wastewater, air pollution, groundwater, and contaminated
soil. After several years of perfecting their technical expertise, they may progress to
project management or to formation of their own firms as entrepreneurs.
1.4.4 Government
Some environmental engineers work for city or county governments and municipal-
ities. They oversee the operation of public works departments, engineering depart-
ments, water treatment plants, and wastewater reclamation facilities. Planning and
budgeting of major projects is their prime responsibility.
Section 1.5 Environmental Calamities 5
1.4.5 Regulatory Agencies

Environmental engineers also work at federal and state regulatory agencies. They
are responsible for reviewing and permitting of new water and wastewater treat-
ment plants, air-pollution control technologies, cleanup of contaminated land sites,
and the siting and operation of sanitary landfills.
1.4.6 Industry
Industries such as pulp and paper manufacturing, textile processing, petroleum and
petrochemical, pharmaceutical, and meat processing employ environmental engi-
neers to ensure compliance with environmental regulations. Some environmental
engineers develop ways to reduce and minimize the quantity of water used and the
amount of pollutants produced at such facilities; while others are responsible for
operating on-site industrial wastewater treatment plants or pretreatment systems,
baghouses and electrostatic precipitators for air emissions, and disposal of residuals
and sludges in landfills.
1.4.7 Academia
Environmental engineers employed in academia teach and serve as mentors to the
next generation of engineers. They are rewarded and motivated by seeing their stu-
dents learn and become productive citizens in society. Professors also engage in
scholarly activities, such as research to explore innovative and cost-effective ways
to reduce the effects of pollution on the environment. They also develop new
teaching strategies and paradigms to enhance learning in the classroom. An impor-
tant aspect of being a professor is presenting ideas and research results on techni-
cal and education-related activities at conferences and in peer-reviewed journals.
1.4.8. Does Environmental Engineering Match My Interests?

The foregoing information should help you understand whether environmental
engineering suits your personality. At this point in your career, you are just begin-
ning to develop the skills needed by a professional environmental engineer. The
environmental engineering curriculum has been designed to provide both the soft
and hard skills you will require. Your faculty advisor and instructors will mentor and
assist you in your development along the way. Your commitment and perseverance
will lead you to your goals.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CALAMITIES

A number of environmental calamities have occurred in recent decades. Table 1.2 pro-
vides references for these tragedies, three of which are described below. In some
instances, defining the effects associated with the release of certain pollutants (such as
synthetic organic compounds, SOCs) into the environment took several years, since new
technology was needed to detect and monitor the compounds at low levels, and the links
between SOCs and their metabolites to related health effects were difficult to identify.
1.5.1 Love Canal

One stark example of chemical contamination of the environment occurred at Love
Canal near Niagara Falls, New York. During the 1890s, William T. Love envisioned
building a canal to connect the upper and lower Niagara Rivers to facilitate the pro-
duction of hydroelectricity. Because of economic fluctuations, Love’s project was
doomed. In 1920, Love’s land was sold to the City of Niagara Falls in a public auction
Table 1.2 Environmental Calamities in Recent History

Pollutant
Name Released Date Reference
Milwaukee Cryptosporidium March 23, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Milwaukee_
in drinking 1993–April 8, Cryptosporidium_outbreak
water 1993
Chernobyl Radiation April 26, 1986 www.chernobyl.com/info.htm
Love Canal Toxic wastes 1920 to 1950s www.epa.gov/history/topics/lovecanal/01.htm
Bhopal, India Methyl December 2–3, www.bhopal.org/whathappened.html

isocyanate 1984
Exxon Valdez Crude oil March 23, 1989 www.bytesurgery.com/missionpossible/mp/text/exxon.html
Smog in Great Ozone and 1991 to 2001 www.aldha.org/smoky2.htm

Smoky acid rain
Mountains
Hurricane Pathogens, August 29, 2005 Environmental Health Perspectives, Vol 114, No 1, January 2006.
Katrina pesticides,
(Natural dioxins,
Calamity) and debris
and was later used as a chemical waste disposal site. The Hooker Chemical Company
(a subsidiary of Occidental Petroleum) acquired the site in 1947 and buried 21,800
tons of toxic waste in the area in a five-year period. In 1952, Hooker closed the site
and covered the canal with earth. The company later sold the site to the Niagara Falls
Board of Education, and a school and 100 homes were built on it.
During the intervening years, residents complained of strange odors and sub-
stances percolating to the surface in their yards. Numerous miscarriages and birth
defects were reported by the New York State Health Department. In 1978, after Lois
Gibbs and an associate held two Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) officials
hostage in her home, President Carter declared a federal emergency at Love Canal.
Finally on May 21, 1980, because of to the persistence of Lois Gibbs and other resi-
dents, President Carter and the Environmental Protection Agency agreed to relo-
cate all families living at Love Canal. Occidental Petroleum eventually spent more
than $200 million to clean up the site. This calamity led Congress to pass the Super-
fund Law, which holds companies responsible for the cleanup of hazardous waste
sites. Was it ethical for Hooker Chemical Company to sell the Love Canal to the Nia-
gara Falls Board of Education?
1.5.2 Milwaukee Cryptosporidium Outbreak

From March 23 through April 8, 1993, ineffective filtration at one of Milwaukee’s
water treatment plants caused an estimated 403,000 residents to become ill due to
the inadequate removal of the protozoan parasite, Cryptosporidium parvum (Corso
et al., 2003). Turbidity levels in the treated water exceeded normal levels. Over 100
deaths, mainly of the elderly and those with compromised immune systems, were
attributed to this outbreak. Could anything have been done to prevent this parasite
from entering the water distribution system?
Section 1.6 Becoming an Environmental Engineer: A Lifelong Process 7
1.5.3 Chernobyl Nuclear Disaster

On April 26, 1986, for a period of 10 days, radioactive material was released into the
atmosphere from Number 4 nuclear reactor at the Chernobyl Power Plant (www.
chernobyl.com/info.htm). Numerous safety precautions had not been followed,
resulting in a meltdown of the reactor core. Estimates indicate that local residents
were exposed to radioactivity 100 times greater than that of the Hiroshima bomb.
Thirty people were killed immediately, and estimates suggest that over 15 million
people were impacted by this disaster. Babies are still being born in this area with no
arms, no eyes, and only stumps for limbs. What actually caused the meltdown, and is
there an antidote for radiation poisoning?
1.6 BECOMING AN ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEER: A LIFELONG PROCESS

Becoming an environmental engineer is a lifelong journey. First, one must receive
four years of formal training and meet the requirements for professional licensure.
Then, one must continue one’s education in order to remain technically competent
and current.
1.6.1 College Education

Traditionally, environmental engineers have been trained as civil engineers and pur-
sued graduate degrees in “Sanitary” or “Environmental” Engineering. Formal train-
ing normally consisted of obtaining a four-year, Bachelor of Science (BS) degree in
civil engineering from an ABET, Inc. accredited engineering program; and then spe-
cializing at the graduate level in a particular area such as water, wastewater, air pol-
lution, solid wastes, or hazardous wastes.
Obtaining a Master of Engineering (ME) or Master of Science (MS) in Envi-
ronmental Engineering normally takes one or two years past the baccalaureate. Two
or three more years beyond the master’s are normally required to obtain the Doctor
of Philosophy (PhD) or Doctor of Science (DSc).
Several colleges and universities now offer four-year undergraduate degrees
in environmental engineering. Table 1.3 shows a typical undergraduate environmen-
tal engineering curriculum by semester.
1.6.2 Professional Licensure

During the senior year, most environmental engineering students take the Funda-
mentals of Engineering (FE) examination. This nationally normalized test, adminis-
tered by the National Council of Examiners for Engineering and Surveying
(NCEES), leads to becoming a licensed professional engineer (PE). The 8-hour FE
examination tests environmental engineers on their understanding of the basic sci-
ences, math, ethics, engineering economy, statics, dynamics, thermodynamics, electri-
cal, and engineering sciences. Upon passing the FE, graduates work four years under
the mentorship of a licensed PE before they become eligible to take the 8-hour Pro-
fessional Engineering (PE) exam, which focuses on design and the application of
environmental engineering principles. Passing the PE exam permits one to become
a registered or licensed professional engineer, allowed to sign and seal engineering
drawings, plans, and specifications and essentially to practice environmental engi-
neering. It is anticipated by 2015 that students graduating from civil and environ-
mental engineering programs will have an additional 30-credit-hour requirement
for professional licensure imposed by the National Council of Examiners for Engi-
neering and Surveying (NCEES).
Table 1.3 Undergraduate Environmental Engineering Curriculum

Fall Spring
Freshman Chemistry I Chemistry II
Computer Programming Introduction to Design
Calculus I Calculus II
Humanities I Humanities II
Freshman Experience Ethics
Sophomore Physics I Physics II
Statics Dynamics
Electrical I Electrical II
Intro Environmental Engineering Probability & Statistics
Differential Equations Thermodynamics
Junior Engineering Economy Engineering Systems Analysis
Biology Geology
Technical Communication Hydrology
Hydraulics Wastewater Treatment
Humanities III Solid Waste Management
Senior Air Pollution Control Air Chemistry
Public Health Remediation
Water Treatment Environmental Engineering Lab
Senior Design I Senior Design II
Groundwater Hydrology Technical Elective
Humanities IV Humanities V
1.6.3 Engineering Ethics

The engineering occupation consists of professionals who must make ethical deci-
sions. Ethics is the study of morals, which guide our conformance to a standard of
what is right and wrong. By definition, professionals possess sophisticated skills, for-
mal education, and standards that have been established by societies or organiza-
tions for admission to the profession. Each person makes moral choices in his or her
relationships. Engineering ethics involves rules and standards governing the con-
duct of engineers in their professional lives.
Many professional societies have prepared codes of ethics to provide guidance
for the working engineer. The National Society of Professional Engineers (NSPE)
has sought to promote professional licensure and a code of ethics across the engi-
neering field. Listed below are the fundamental canons promulgated by NSPE.
Note how each canon reflects a specific precedence with respect to the engineer’s
consideration for clients, employers, the profession, and the public.
Section 1.6 Becoming an Environmental Engineer: A Lifelong Process 9
Engineers, in the fulfillment of their professional duties, shall (http://www.nspe.

org/index.html):
1. Hold paramount the safety, health, and welfare of the public.
2. Perform services only in areas of their competence.
3. Issue public statements only in an objective and truthful manner.
4. Act for each employer or client as faithful agents or trustees.
5. Avoid deceptive acts.
6. Conduct themselves honorably, responsibly, ethically, and lawfully so as to
enhance the honor, reputation, and usefulness of the profession.
1.6.4 Continuing Education

Environmental engineers must remain knowledgeable of current technologies. Pro-
fessional engineering societies and organizations play a vital role in helping envi-
ronmental engineers maintain their technical competency and currency. They
promote training seminars, workshops, and conferences to keep their constituents
informed. To promote lifelong learning, each professional society publishes journals
with peer-reviewed articles on technical issues, engineering ethics, regulatory
updates, and innovative technologies.
The American Academy of Environmental Engineers is the primary society that
promotes environmental engineering. A variety of organizations, however, focus on
environmental issues. The American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) is probably
the engineering society most familiar to many environmental engineers, as historically
most have been trained as civil engineers. Municipal and industrial wastewater treat-
ment and sludge treatment and disposal issues are promoted by the Water Environ-
ment Federation (WEF). Environmental engineers interested in water treatment and
related water issues are normally members of the American Water Works Association
(AWWA). For those interested in air pollution and solid and hazardous waste man-
agement, the Air and Waste Management Association (AWMA) is the society to con-
tact. The Association of Environmental Engineering and Science Professors (AEESP)
is an environmental organization for those affiliated with academia. Table 1.4 lists the
websites for some of the most prominent societies associated with environmental
issues.
Table 1.4 Website Addresses for Organizations with Environmental Engineers

Organization Web Address
Air and Waste Management Association www.awma.org
American Academy of Environmental Engineers www.aaee.net
American Society of Civil Engineers www.asce.org
American Society for Engineering Education www.asee.org
American Water Works Association www.awwa.org
Association of Environmental Engineering and Science Professors www.aeesp.org
Solid Waste Association of North America www.swana.org

Water Environment Federation www.wef.org
1.7 PROBLEM SOLVING

Environmental engineers solve a variety of problems. One must first identify and
understand the problem or system, then define the parameters used to model the
system; and finally solve the problem. For many environmental problems, you will
need to perform energy and material balances around the system to solve them.
Most engineers use a structured approach to solve problems or to develop
computer algorithms. The following five-step method is recommended for solving
most engineering problems.
1. Identify and define the problem clearly and concisely. List all pertinent data,
the knowns and unknowns, along with the appropriate units.
2. Make a sketch or diagram of the system and label all parts.
3. Select the appropriate theory or equations, estimate values where data are
missing, and make assumptions to simplify the solution.
4. Solve the problem using mathematical equations, graphical procedures, or
trial-and-error methods. In many cases, an energy and materials balance must
be completed.
5. Check your answer to see if it makes sense, is reasonable/correct, and verify
results by an alternative method if possible.
EXAMPLE 1.1
Computing velocity of flow in a pipe
Calculate the average velocity of water flowing in a 6-inch-diameter pipe if the flow
rate is 3.0 cubic feet per second.
Solution
1. Find the average velocity of water in the pipe.
Q = volumetric flow rate = 3.0 ft3/s
pipe diameter = D = 6 inches
2. Draw a figure.
Q 3.0 cfs Q 3.0 cfs

6 in
3. Assume that the pipe is flowing full.

area of a circle: A = pD2/4
A = cross-sectional area of pipe, ft2 (cross-hatched area in figure)
D = pipe diameter, ft
continuity equation: Q = A * V
Q = volumetric flow rate, ft3/s
V = average flow velocity in pipe, ft/s
4. Solve for the cross-sectional area of the pipe.
A = pD2/4
p16 in22 1 ft2
A = = 28.27 in2 * = 0.196 ft2
4 144 in2
Section 1.7 Problem Solving 11
Solve for velocity by rearranging the continuity equation.

Q = AV
Q
V =
A
3.0 ft3>s ft
V = 2
= 15.3
0.196 ft s
5. Check by comparing the original Q 13.0 ft3/s2 in the problem statement with the
calculated Q 12.99 ft3/s2 based on the area and the calculated velocity.
Q = AV
ft ft3
Q = 0.196 ft2 * a15.3 b = 2.99 ⬵ 3.0 Checks
s s
EXAMPLE 1.2
Calculating mass removal rates
Groundwater from a deep well is being pumped to a small water treatment plant at
5 m3/min. The water contains 0.05 mg/L of arsenic (As), and the primary drinking-
water standard is set at 0.01 mg/L of arsenic. Calculate the number of grams of
arsenic that must be removed from the water each day to meet the standard.
Solution
1. Find the mass of arsenic that must be removed daily.
Q = volumetric flow rate = 5 m3/min
C1 = concentration of arsenic in raw water = 0.05 mg/L
C2 = concentration of arsenic in treated water = 0.01 mg/L
2. Draw a figure.
Q 5 m3/min Q 5 m3/min
Water Treatment
Plant
C1 0.05 mg/L C2 0.01 mg/L
3. Assume that the volumetric flow rate is the same into and out of the water treatment
plant.
mass removed = mass in - mass out
mass of arsenic = Q * C
Q = volumetric flow rate, m3/min
C1 = concentration of arsenic in raw water = 0.05 mg/L
C2 = concentration of arsenic in treated water = 0.01 mg/L
4. Solve for the mass of arsenic entering and exiting the water treatment plant.
m3 mg 1000 L 60 min 24 h 1g
mass in = Q * C1 = 5 a0.05 b¢ 3
≤a ba ba b
min L 1m 1h 1d 1000 mg
mass in = Q * C1 = 360 g>d
m3 mg 1000 L 60 min 24 h 1g
mass out = Q * C2 = 5 a 0.01 b¢ 3
≤a ba ba b
min L 1m 1h 1d 1000 mg
mass out = Q * C2 = 72 g>d

mass of arsenic removed = mass in - mass out = 360 - 72 = 288 g>d
5. Check by subtracting C2 from C1 and multiplying this difference by the volumet-
ric flow rate.
mass of arsenic removed = Q 1C1 - C22
m3 mg 1000 L 60 min
Q 1C1 - C22 = ¢ 5 ≤ a0.05 - 0.01 b¢ ≤a b
min L 1 m3 1h
24 h 1g
a ba b
1d 1000 mg
Q 1C1 - C22 = 288 g>d, which is equal to the mass of arsenic removed in Step 4.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT

Environmental issues related to our air, land, and water resources will continue as
high-quality water sources diminish; global warming affects climate, causing drought
in some areas and flooding in others; and with the loss of rain forests and fertile land
for growing crops continues. Environmental engineers must work closely with the
civil engineering profession to develop sustainable processes and designs to main-
tain worldwide infrastructure (transportation systems, wastewater collection and
treatment systems, water distribution and treatment systems, sanitary landfills, etc.)
while minimizing adverse affects on the ecosystem.
Environmental management involves managing human interaction and impact
on the living (biotic) and nonliving (abiotic) environment. The International Organi-
zation for Standardization (ISO) has developed ISO 14000 environmental manage-
ment standards to help companies minimize adverse affects from their operations on
the environment. In the United States, all federal agencies must prepare a detailed
statement known as an Environmental Impact Statement (EIS), as required by the
National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA). The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) reviews EISs prepared by all federal agencies and ensures that its
own actions are in compliance with NEPA.
To sustain our ecosystem and our modern way of life, environmental engineers
will be called upon to develop innovative and better solutions with regard to man-
agement of air resources, water supply and treatment systems, wastewater collection
and treatment systems, and solid and hazardous waste collection, treatment, and dis-
posal systems. Problems associated with pollution must be prevented and minimized
by using alternative processes and fuels. Companies must produce products that
have long life and the potential to be reused, and that require less energy and water
to manufacture.
S U M M A RY
Environmental engineering is an engineering specialty that involves identifying,
designing, and implementing systems to protect human health and well-being and
the environment. Environmental engineers have a prominent role in maintaining a
high quality of life by providing potable water and clean air, remediating contami-
nated land, and minimizing the adverse effects of pollution on the environment.
Exercises 13
Graduating from an ABET-accredited engineering program provides students

with the formal training necessary to become environmental engineers. Tradition-
ally, environmental engineers were trained as civil engineers at the undergraduate
level and pursued graduate work at the master’s or doctoral level to become envi-
ronmental engineers. Several colleges and universities now offer undergraduate and
graduate environmental engineering programs.
Completing the requirements for the bachelor’s degree in environmental engi-
neering is just the first step in becoming an environmental engineer. Learning is a
lifelong process, and environmental engineers must remain current with new tech-
nologies and ever-changing regulations. This may be accomplished by actively par-
ticipating in professional societies and reading technical literature to keep abreast
of state-of-the-art science and technology.
Most often, environmental engineers work on multidisciplinary teams along
with lawyers, chemists, biologists, planners, regulators, and other engineers to solve
environmental problems. Employment opportunities for environmental engineers
are diverse, ranging from engineering consulting to environmental law, from acade-
mic to governmental, and from municipal to industrial. It is anticipated that the
strong demand for environmental engineers will continue into the next decade.
environmental engineer life long learning air, land, and water KEY WORDS
ecological balance professional engineer environments
pollution problem solving
EXERCISES
For Exercises 1 through 6, use the Internet to perform a Google search for help in
answering the questions. If necessary, seek out a professor or environmental engineer
to discuss the topics presented.Then prepare a written paragraph or two for each topic,
including the ideas discussed with the professor or engineer. Discuss the role each topic
plays in environmental engineering. Include comments on the types of problems that
the engineer may confront and how to solve these problems for each topic.
1.1 How are the principles from microbiology used in the design of wastewater
treatment processes and the remediation of contaminated soil?
1.2 List and discuss two equations from fluids and hydraulics that are used by
environmental engineers in the design of water distribution and wastewater
collection systems. [Hint: Continuity and Bernoulli’s equation.]
1.3 Environmental engineers and scientists have reported that global warming
may be a real problem. List and discuss the major causes and the air pollu-
tants that are associated with this phenomenon.
1.4 Environmental engineers are responsible for designing water treatment
plants that provide safe, potable drinking water to the public. What chemical
principles are used for removing pollutants from water? Give some examples
of unit processes used for treating water. [Hint: Oxidation/reduction, gas
transfer, precipitation.]
1.5 Many environmentalists promote the idea of recycling solid wastes. Collec-
tion, separation, and recycling systems are often designed by environmental
engineers. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of recycling metals,
glass, and paper discarded in solid wastes. Some politicians advocate recycling
and reusing 50% of the materials discarded. Is this realistic or even possible?
Why or why not?
1.6 Hydrology is another area in which environmental engineers are highly

involved. During storm events, rain that falls to the surface either percolates
into the soil to replenish ground water supplies or becomes surface runoff.
Stormwater runoff from impervious areas in cities or from agricultural areas
contributes large volumes of water of poor quality, due to pollutant entrap-
ment and dissolution. List and discuss some of the contaminants that might
be found in urban stormwater runoff versus agricultural runoff. Typically, the
rational method or equation is used for estimating the volume of runoff.
Write down the equation and list the variables along with the appropriate
units for each parameter in the equation.
1.7 A long, rectangular settling basin is used for removing suspended solids during
water treatment. The basin’s length-to-width ratio is 4:1 and its width-to-depth
ratio is 1:1. Determine the basin’s volume in cubic feet if its depth is 25 feet.
1.8 A 25-meter-diameter circular tank 10 meters deep is used for storing liquid
sodium hydroxide solution at a wastewater treatment plant. Determine the
tank’s cross-sectional area in square meters and its circumference in meters.
1.9 Bituminous coal containing 5% (weight basis) sulfur is burned at a power
plant to provide energy for generating electricity. Assume the combustion of
coal is complete and the following equation can be used for modeling the oxi-
dation of sulfur into sulfur dioxide.
S + O2 : SO2
Determine the kilograms of sulfur dioxide produced daily if 20,000 kilograms
of coal are combusted each day.
1.10 Chlorine is the most widely used disinfectant for killing pathogens during
water treatment. Determine the kilograms of chlorine used daily at a water
treatment plant handling 10,000 cubic meters per day of flow at a chlorine
dosage of 10 mg/L. [Hint: Multiply the flow rate by chlorine dosage and make
appropriate conversions.]
REFERENCES
ASCE (2005). 2005 Report Card for America’s Infrastructure. Accessed May 21, 2008 from
http://www.asce.org/reportcard/2005/page.cfm?id=103&print=1m.
http://www.asce.org/pressroom/news/pr030801_reportcard.cfm.
http://www.asce.org/pdf/reportcard.pdf.
Bureau of Labor (2008). Occupational Outlook Handbook, 2006–07 Edition. Accessed May
21, 2008, 2007 from http://www.bls.gov/oco/ocos027.htm.
Corso, P.S., Kramer, M.H., Blair, K.A., Addiss, D.G., Davis, J.P, and Haddix, A.C. (2003). Cost
of illness in the 1993 waterborne Cryptosporidium outbreak, Milwaukee: Emerging Infec-
tious Diseases, Vol. 9, No. 4, 426–431.
Fisher, Anne (2005). Hot careers for the next 10 years, Fortune Magazine, March 21, 2005.
WIN (2004). Water Infrastructure Network Recommendations for Clean and Safe Water in the
21st Century. Accessed October 16, 2008 from http://www.win-water.org/reports/winow.pdf.
CHAPTER
Introduction to
2
Calculations: Dimensions,
Units, and Conversions
2.1 INTRODUCTION
Objectives
A number without an associated dimension has no meaning in engineering; a
In this chapter, you will number with an improper unit has a misleading meaning. The importance of
learn about: proper units was highlighted by the loss of the 1999 NASA Mars Climate
Units and dimensions Observer, a 125-million-dollar spacecraft that was destroyed when it entered
Units of concentration for the Mars atmosphere traveling too fast. The error was blamed partially on the
liquid and gas phases failed translation of English units into metric units (Isbell et al., 1999). This
chapter introduces the units and dimensions commonly used by environmen-
Density
tal engineers and presents practice problems that require you to master the
Concept of flow rate and manipulation and conversion of these units.
residence time
Precision and accuracy
2.2 DIMENSIONS AND UNITS
Dimensions can be used to describe the measurable aspects of any object or
system, while units provide the increments necessary to quantify the dimen-
sions. All numerical engineering measurements should be dimensioned with
proper units. Common dimensions associated with environmental engineering
problems include length, mass, time, and temperature. Associated units that
scale the measured quantity for these dimensions include meters (m), kilograms
(kg), seconds (s), and degrees Fahrenheit (°F), respectively. Notice that dimen-
sions and units only qualitatively describe a measurement and that a numerical
value matched properly with units is required for a quantitative description
(e.g., 2.0 meters, 4 minutes). Four systems of units are commonly used: the
International System of Units, the Imperial Units (closely related to the
British engineering system), the U.S. Customary Units, and the Absolute or cgs
(centimeter-gram-second) system. The International System of Units is com-
monly referred to as the SI, metric, or MKS (meter-kilogram-second) system.
Because the SI hierarchy of units is founded on a decimal basis, such that the
addition of a prefix to a unit simply changes its value by a factor of 10, it has
been widely adopted internationally. Many seasoned engineers, as well as
American citizens in general, have continued to use the U.S. Customary Units,
so it is important to master both the U.S. Customary and the SI systems of units.
16 Chapter 2 Introduction to Environmental Engineering Calculations: Dimensions, Units, and Conversions
The list of fundamental dimensions includes length, mass, time, and often tempera-
ture. All other quantities are derived from these dimensions. Derived units commonly used
by environmental engineers include those of volume 1length32, density 1mass/length32,
and concentration 1mass/length32. Notice the similarity between density and concentra-
tion as this will become important in subsequent sections of this chapter. Some specific
units include the newton 1N = mass * length/time22, which quantifies the force on an
object, the joule 1N * length2, which quantifies the energy of a system, and the
pascal 1Pa = N * m-22, which describes a system pressure.Table 2.1 shows fundamental
dimensions, derived dimensions, and associated units for the four common systems of units.
Common prefixes used to describe units in the SI system are defined in Table 2.2, and some
frequently used conversions are listed in Table 2.3.
Table 2.1 Commonly Used System of Units—Fundamental and Derived Units

System Length Mass Time Temperature Force* Energy*
International System of Units (SI) meter kilogram second K, °C newton joule
U.S. Customary Units (commonly referred foot pound mass second, °R, °F pound force BTU
to as English or Standard Units) 1lbm2 hour 1lbf2
Imperial Units (derived from English units; foot slug* second °R, °F pound force BTU ft # lb
often referred to as the British system) 1lbf2
Absolute System (cgs) centimeter gram second K, °C dyne joule or

calorie
*Derived unit defined as follows:
newton 1N2 = kg # m
冫s2 joule 1J2 = N # m = kg # m2
冫s2
#
pound force 1lbf2 = 32.2 lbm ft冫s2 British thermal unit 1BTU2 = 252 cal = 1.054 J
pound weight = lbm # g 1where g = 9.8 m/s22

#2
slug = lbf s 冫ft
#
dyne = g cm冫s2 calorie 1cal2 = 4.184 J
Table 2.2 Commonly Used SI Unit Prefixes

Prefix name Symbol Factor
tera T 1012
giga G 109
mega M 106
kilo k 103
10
deka da
deci d 10-1
centi c 10-2
milli m 10-3
micro m 10-6
nano n 10-9
pico p 10-12
Section 2.2 Dimensions and Units 17
Table 2.3 Common Conversion Factors

Value known with this
initial unit Multiply by To obtain
Length
m 3.281 ft
m 1.094 yd
mile 5280 ft
in 2.54 cm
ft 12 in
mile 1.609 km
Å 10-10 m
Mass
lbm 453.6 g
kg 2.2 lbm
lbm 16 oz
ton (short) 2000 lbm
ton (metric) 1000 kg
Volume
gal 3.785 L
ft3 7.481 gal
m3 1000 L
3
ft 28.32 L
m3 35.31 ft3
m3 1.308 yd3
cm3 1 ml
Pressure
atm 760 mm Hg
atm 101.37 kPa
atm 1.013 bar
atm 14.70 psi
psi 2.307 ft H2O @4°C
atm 1.01325 * 105 N/m2

(continued)
Table 2.3 Common Conversion Factors (continued)

Value known with this
initial unit Multiply by To obtain
Energy
kWh 3412.8 BTU
kWh 8.6057 * 105 cal
kWh 1.341 hp # hr
1 cal 4.184 J
BTU 1055 J
Power
kW 1000 J/s
kW 1.34 hp
BTU/sec 1.055 kW
kW 737.56 ft # lbf/s
Temperature
°F = 1.81°C2 + 32
K = °C + 273.15
°R = °F + 459.67
2.3 ESSENTIAL DERIVED UNITS AND CONVERSION PRACTICE

2.3.1 Density
The density of a substance is defined as the ratio of its mass to a unit volume and can
be shown mathematically as:
m
r = (2.1)
V
where:
r = density, kg/m3,
m = mass, kg, and
V = volume, m3.
From this definition, we can conclude that the density of a substance is an intrinsic
property and therefore independent of sample size. Take note, however, that density
varies with temperature as well as with the concentration of any impurities dis-
solved in a solution. For example, the density of water at 0°C and 80°C is
0.9998 g/cm3 and 0.9718 g/cm3, respectively. If water at 0°C contains 1% sodium
chloride (table salt), the density of the aqueous solution is 1.0075 g/cm3, noticeably
higher than that of pure water. Possibly you have noticed that floating on your back
in ocean water seems easier than floating in a lake. This is because the salt content of
the ocean is higher than that of most lakes, causing the density of ocean water at the
Section 2.3 Essential Derived Units and Conversion Practice 19
Table 2.4 Densities of Common Substances

Substance Density (g/cm3)
Air @ STP 0.001293
Southern pine 0.65
Gasoline 0.72
Ethanol 0.802
Ice @ 0°C 0.92
Water @ 4°C 1.00
Rubber 1.5
Glass 2.6
Aluminum 2.7
Wrought iron 7.6
Uranium 18.7
sea surface to be approximately 1.1027 g/cm3. The two main factors that control
ocean water’s density are its temperature and its salinity. The density of some com-
mon items is shown in Table 2.4.
EXAMPLE 2.1
Density practice
Recall the story of Archimedes, a Greek mathematician who lived in the third
century BCE. Hiero II, the King of Syracuse on the Ionian Sea, charged
Archimedes to determine whether his newly acquired crown was made of pure
gold. While bathing in a public bath, the legend tells us, the famous mathemati-
cian discovered a method to test the purity of the crown and was so enamored
with his discovery he ran naked through the streets yelling “Eureka!” Archimedes’
principle can be simply stated as follows: When an object is submerged in a liquid,
the amount of liquid displaced is equal to the volume of the object. Use this idea to
solve the following problem.
A 2-liter graduated cylinder initially contains 500 ml of water. An irregularly
shaped object having a mass of 105 g is submerged into the water. The final volume
of the water in the cylinder is 1025 ml. Determine the density of the object.
Solution
Calculate the volume of the object by determining the difference in water-volume
readings within the graduated cylinder.
V = 1025 ml - 500 ml = 525 ml
Now, determine the density of the object by using the mass that was given and
substituting into Equation (2.1).
m 105 g
r = = = 0.20 g/ml
V 525 ml
EXAMPLE 2.2
Problem solving with density
During an environmental assessment of a natural wetland in the Everglades, it was
determined that 1.5 cubic meters of the dry native soil had a mass of 420 kg. Deter-
mine the mass of a cubic foot of that same soil.
Solution
Calculate the density of the wetland soil.
m 420 kg 1000 g 1m 3
r = = * * a b = 0.28 g/cm3
V 1.5 m3 1 kg 100 cm
Use the density found to calculate the mass associated with 1 ft3 of the Ever-
glades soil.
0.28 g 2.54 cm 3 12 in 3
m = rV = * a b * a b * 1 ft3 = 7929 g
cm3 1 in 1 ft
1 kg
m = 7929 g * = 7.9 kg
1000 g
2.3.2 Concentration
Concentrations of substances dissolved in a liquid phase are often described on a
mass-per-unit-volume basis such that
m
C = (2.2)
V
where:
C = concentration of dissolved substance, mg/L,
m = mass of solute or dissolved substance, mg, and
V = total volume, L.
Notice the similarity between Equations (2.1) and (2.2), which describe,
respectively, the density of a substance and the gravimetric-based definition for
concentration. The most commonly used mass-based concentration units include
milligrams per liter (mg/L) and micrograms per liter 1mg/L2. Although not as com-
mon, micrograms per cubic meter 1mg/m32 may also be used to express a mass-
based contaminant concentration.
In contrast, the concentration of dissolved substances in liquid phases may
alternatively be described on a mass-per-unit-mass basis (the mass of the solute dis-
solved per the mass of solution). The most common mass-based units are parts per
million (ppm) and parts per billion (ppb). For perspective, the maximum contami-
nant level goal (MCLG) of mercury in drinking water allowed by the Environmen-
tal Protection Agency (EPA) is 0.002 ppm (40 CFR, §141.51). This means that there
can be no more than 0.002 grams of mercury in every million grams of drinking
water purified and distributed by your local municipality. Assuming the density of
water is 1.0 g/ml, this is equivalent to allowing only 2 grams 10.0044 lbm2 of mercury
in approximately 264,000 gallons of drinking water.
EXAMPLE 2.3
Determine relationship between mg/L and ppm
In many environmental aqueous systems, it is appropriate to make the simplifying
assumption that 1 mg/L is equal to 1 ppm, provided that the fluid in question is pri-
marily water, so that the density of the solution essentially is 1 g/ml. (This assump-
tion is often made by environmental engineers.) Show that 1 mg/L = 1 ppm.
Solution
The solution requires that the concentration on a mass-per-unit-volume basis
(mg/L) be divided by the solution density, followed by simple unit conversions.
mg 1g 1 ml 1L 1
1 * * * = = 1 ppm
L 1000 mg 1g 1000 ml 106
The concentration unit molarity 1M = moles per liter2 is defined as one mole
per unit volume of substance. Avogadro’s number is used to define a mole (mol)
such that there are 6.02 * 1023 molecules of any material per mole. By definition,
the atomic mass of an element or substance is equal to the mass of one mole of that
substance. Example 2.4 applies this concept to a solution of water containing
sodium nitrate.
Concentrations may also be described on a molar, mass, or volume percentage
basis. For example the mass percent of species A in solution is defined as follows:
MA
mass A 1%2 = * 100 (2.3)
MA + MB
where:
MA = mass of compound A, lbm 1g2, and
MA + MB = total mass of the solution, lbm 1g2.
The volume percent concentration is defined similarly, with the volumes of sub-
stances A and B substituted into Equation (2.3) for mass. The molar concentration
or the mole fraction of species A is defined as
moles A in solution
xA =
total moles of solution
EXAMPLE 2.4
Determining solution concentration
A researcher has added 2.06 g of the salt sodium nitrate, NaNO3 , to a cylinder con-
taining water. The cylinder diameter is 2 inches and the depth of the water in the
cylinder is 4 inches (refer to Figure 2.1). Determine the concentration of salt in solu-
tion, showing your answer in the units specified.
a. mg/L
b. mass %
c. molarity
D 2 in.
h 4 in.
Figure 2.1
Schematic of cylinder
described in Example 2.4.
Solution
First, calculate the molecular weight of NaNO3 by summing the atomic weights of
the individual compound elements. The atomic weights of sodium, nitrogen, and
oxygen are 23, 14, and 16 g/mole, respectively.
MW NaNO3 = 23 + 14 + 31162 = 85 g/mole
Assume the density of water is 1 g/ml.
Part a. Calculate the volume of water stored in the cylinder.
pD2h
V =
4
2.54 cm 2
p B 12 in.2a bR
1 in. 2.54 cm
V = * 4 in. a b = 206 cm3
4 1 in.
1 ml 1L
V = 1206 cm32a 3
ba b = 0.206 L
1 cm 1000 ml
2.06 g 1000 mg
CNaNO3 1mg/L2 = a ba b = 10,000 mg/L
0.206 L 1g
Recognize that if the solution density is assumed to be 1 g/ml, then 10,000 mg/L
is equal to 10,000 ppm.
MA
Part b. Mass A 1%2 = * 100
MA + MB
Find the mass of solution (MA + MB) by multiplying the solution volume found
in Part a above with the density.
2.06 g
mass A 1%2 = * 100 = 1.0%
1g
206 ml *
ml
The solutions to Parts a and b guide us to a good “rule of thumb” to remem-

ber! Referring back to this example, we notice that if a solution has a density
near 1 g/ml, then:
1% = 10,000 mg/L = 10,000 ppm

Part c. Brackets [ ] are often used to symbolize concentration in molarity.

Brackets will be used in this problem and throughout this book.
moles NaNO3
3NaNO34 =
L
1 mol
12.06 g NaNO32 ¢ ≤
85 g NaNO3
3NaNO34 = = 0.118 M
0.206 L
Molecular weight can be used to convert between mass- and molar-based con-
centrations. Using the information from Example 2.4, we can show that:
CNaNO3 = MWNaNO3 3NaNO34
g mol g
CNaNO3 = 85 * 0.118 = 10
mol L L
Gas-phase concentration units are usually presented on a mass-per-unit-vol-
ume-of-air basis 1mg/m32 at a known temperature and pressure or as parts per
million on a volume basis (ppmv). The ppmv is simply the volume or mole
fraction of the pollutant in the gas multiplied by 106.
volume of pollutant gas moles of pollutant gas
ppmv = 11062= 11062 (2.4)
volume of gas mixture total moles of gas mixture
Conversion between mass per unit volume and ppmv concentration requires
knowledge of the ideal gas law:
PV = nRT (2.5)
where:
P = absolute pressure, atm,
V = volume occupied by n moles of gas, L,
n = number of moles of gas,
#
R = universal gas constant, 0.08206 L atm冫gmol # K, and
T = absolute temperature, K.
R, the “universal gas constant,” has the same value for all gases. The values for R
with different pressure, volume, and temperature units are shown in Table 2.5.
Notice that a common set of units must be used to solve Equation (2.5).
Table 2.5 Universal Gas Constant, R

# atm 3#
0.08206 L 冫gmol # K = 0.08206 m atm冫kgmol # K
# m3
8.314 J冫gmol # K = 8.314 kPa 冫kgmol # K
1.987 cal冫gmol # K = 1.987 BTU冫lbmol # °R
3 # atm
82.06 cm 冫gmol # K
3 # atm
0.7302 ft 冫lbmol # °R
EXAMPLE 2.5
Practice with the ideal gas law
Use the ideal gas law to calculate the volume of one mole of gas at standard tem-
perature and pressure (STP), defined as 0°C and 1 atmosphere.
Solution
Convert 0°C into Kelvin:
T = 0°C + 273 = 273 K
and recognize that 1 gram mole = 1 gmol.
Solving for the volume of the gas sample by rearranging Equation (2.5), the ideal
gas law becomes
nRT
V =
P
Since we are interested in the volume of just one mole of gas, substitution provides
L # atm
gmol # K
11 gmol2a0.08206 b1273 K2
V = = 22.4 L
1 atm
So, for a gaseous system at STP, one mole of gas occupies 22.4 L.A similar calculation
shows that at 25°C and atmospheric pressure, one mole of gas occupies 24.5 L.
Consider committing both of these numbers to memory.
EXAMPLE 2.6
Unit-conversion practice
At standard conditions, the exhaust gas from a well-controlled coal-burning power
plant contains 5 ppmv sulfur dioxide 1SO22. At STP, determine the concentration of
SO2 emitted on a mg/m3 basis. MW SO2 32 2(16) 64 g/mol.
Solution
mg 5 m3 SO2 mol 1000 L

SO2 ¢ 3
≤ = 6 3
* *
m 10 m exhaust gas 22.4 L m3
64 g SO2 106 mg mg
* * = 14,286 3
mol g m
Simplifying the above solution, we obtain Equation (2.6), which can be used to con-
vert between mg/m3 and ppmv in gaseous environments.
mg ppmv * MW * 103
= 1at STP2 (2.6)
m3 22.4
In Equation (2.6), MW represents the molecular weight of the contaminant, and the
number 22.4 is the volume of one mole of an ideal gas at standard conditions. This
number is a variable in the conversion equation but can easily be calculated for any
environmental condition, as shown in Example 2.5 above. For example, if the system
temperature were 25°C at atmospheric conditions, Equation (2.6) would become:
mg ppmv * MW * 103
= 1T = 25°C; standard P = 1 atm2
m3 24.5
EXAMPLE 2.7
Conversion of gas-phase concentration units
The concentration of carbon dioxide exiting a car’s tailpipe is approximately 12%
on a volume basis. Assuming the exhaust-gas temperature is 500°C, determine the
concentration of CO2 in the gas stream in the units and temperature specified.
a. ppmv at 500°C and 25°C, respectively
b. mg/m3 at 500°C and 25°C, respectively
Solution
Part a. The tailpipe’s concentration is 12% at 500°C. This can easily be made
into a ratio.
12 X X parts
12% = = 6
=
100 10 million parts
12 * 10 6
ppmv = X = = 120,000 ppmv
100
To determine the exhaust-gas concentration in ppmv at a temperature of 25°C,
it is important to notice that the ratios of different gas volumes in a system
remain the same at any temperature, as long as condensation does not occur,
and that all gases retain an ideal character. So, the concentration of the tailpipe
exhaust at 25°C is 120,000 ppmv, equal to the value at 500°C.
Part b. Use Equations (2.5) and (2.6) to solve for the gravimetric concentra-
tions of CO2 . Calculate the volume of 1 mole of ideal gas at 500°C.
L # atm
gmol # K
11 gmol2a0.08206 b1273 + 5002 K
V = = 63.4 L
1 atm
Modify Equation (2.6), such that 63.4 L is the volume representing a mole of
gas at 500°C and solve for the mass-based concentration. The molecular weight
of CO 2 is 44 g/mol.
g
120,000 * 44 * 103
mg ppmv * MW * 10 3
mol
= =
m3 63.4 63.4
7 mgCO2 gCO2
= 8.33 * 10 = 83.3
m3 m3
In a similar fashion, the gravimetric concentration of carbon dioxide at 25°C,

where the volume of one mole of gas occupies 24.5 L, was found to be approx-
g CO2
imately 215 .
m3
Gas-phase concentration can also be expressed as a mole fraction, yA . Gas-

phase mole fractions are simply defined as the ratio of the moles of com-
pound A 1nA2 to the total moles (n) in the gas phase or mathematically as
yA = nA>n. Furthermore, if we assume an ideal system, the partial pressure
of compound A 1PA2 is determined using the ideal gas law such that:
nA
PA = RT
V
The partial pressure 1Pi2 is defined as the pressure that would be exerted by a
single component in a gas mixture if it alone occupied the same volume at the
same temperature of the mixture. Combining this knowledge with Dalton’s
law, which explains that the total system pressure is equal to the sum of all the
partial pressures 1Pi2 of the parts (mathematically, Dalton’s law is expressed
RT
as P = a Pi = ni ), we can now express yA as a ratio of either moles
i V a i
or pressures as follows:
nA PA
yA = = (2.7)
n P
2.3.3 Flow rate

The concept of flow rate appears in many types of environmental engineering
applications, such as stream flow, pipe flow for water distribution, groundwater
flow, flue gas flow, and many (many) others. Flow rate can be presented on either
a mass or volumetric basis. The mass-based flow rate, Qm , has dimensions of mass
per unit time, with typical units being kg/s and lbm/hr. Similarly, when flow rate is
described on a volumetric basis, Q, typical units are million gallons/day (MGD),
m3/d, ft3/s, L/s, and gal/min (gpm). The density of the fluid flowing is used to
relate mass flow to volumetric flow, as shown in Equation (2.8). Typical units for
each quantity are included to verify the relationship between mass and volumetric
flow.
Qm = r * Q
kg kg m3
= 3 * (2.8)
s m s
Earlier in the chapter we noted the similarity between Equations (2.1) and
(2.2), which define density and gravimetric concentration, respectively. This knowl-
edge lets us replace r in the above equation with C from Equation (2.2), allowing us
to calculate the mass flow of a substance in a stream or pipe if we know the associ-
ated volumetric flow rate and the compound concentration.
EXAMPLE 2.8
Illustration of flow-rate calculation
Drinking water delivered to homes from a municipality contains a residual free-
chlorine concentration of approximately 0.5 mg/L. If a sprinkler system delivers
6 gpm of water, calculate the mass flow rate of free chlorine released into the yard.
Solution
Assume that no residual chlorine evaporates (this is a convenient but probably not
a very good assumption). Modify Equation (2.8) by substituting C for to calculate
the mass flow rate of chlorine spread onto the lawn.
Qm = C * Q
mg g gal 60 min 24 h 3.785 L
= a0.5 * b * a6 * * * b
L 1000 mg min h d gal
g
= 16.3
d
Let’s work another example and pay particular attention to conversions. Assume
that a wastewater treatment system effluent flow is 20 million gallons per day
(MGD) and it contains 10 mg/L of solids. Calculate the mass flow rate of solids dis-
charged with units of lbm/day.
Qm = C * Q
mg MG kg 2.2 lbm 106 gal 3.785 L
= 10 * 20 ¢ 6 * * * b
L d 10 mg kg MG gal
lbm
= 1665
d
All unit conversions are done within the parentheses in the equation above. Cancel-
ing all units inside the parentheses and proceeding with the multiplication of the
conversion factors, we derive the following well-known conversion factor:
lbm * L
8.34
mg * MG
This conversion factor makes it simple to determine the mass flow rate in lbm/day
when concentration and volumetric flow data are given in mg/L and MGD, respec-
tively. We now solve the above example as
mg lbm * L lbm
Qm = 10 * 20 MGD * 8.34 = 1668
L mg * MG d
2.3.4 Residence time

The term residence time ( ) has two meanings, but we need only one equation for both.
By definition, residence time (also known as “detention time” and “retention time”) is:
1. the time required to fill a container, and
2. the average time a fluid spends in a given reactor or control volume (V).
Residence time, u, is easily calculated for both definitions as follows:
V
u = (2.9)
Q
EXAMPLE 2.9
Residence-time calculation
Consider a lagoon that can be modeled as a perfect hemisphere having a diameter
of 50 m (refer to Figure 2.2). If river water flows into (and out of) the reservoir at
7.5 m3/min, calculate the residence time of the lagoon.
Solution
4 3
sphere volume = pr
3
Use Equation (2.9) combined with unit-conversion skills to solve for the
lagoon retention time.
1 4
¢ p125 m23 ≤
V 2 3
u = = = 3.0 d
Q m3 60 min 24 h
¢ 7.5 ≤a ba b
min h d
D = 50 m
Q 7.5 m3/min
Figure 2.2 Q 7.5 m3/min

Schematic of pond
described in Example 2.9.
2.4 PRECISION, BIAS, AND ACCURACY

Most of us have been taught in mathematics courses how to deal with exact num-
bers. In this section we consider how to interpret measured or approximated values
that might be obtained in a laboratory or industrial environment. The discussion
first introduces the concepts of precision and accuracy, which are used to describe
the quality or “truth” of a measurement. Although these terms are often used inter-
changeably, they should not be, because they have distinctly different meanings.
Accuracy describes how close a measurement is to the true value, while precision
indicates how well the measurement is made. So, precision depends on the repro-
ducibility or repeatability of the measurement. Reproducibility, in turn, depends on
the user’s ability and on the precision of the measuring device. Calibration or stan-
dardization influences accuracy. One way to communicate the precision of a mea-
surement is by properly assigning and then manipulating significant figures.
Unfortunately, being precise does not insure that the average of the measure-
ments is correct. Bias is the difference between the average of the measured values
and the true value.
Section 2.5 Significant Figures 29
(a) (b) (c)
Figure 2.3
Illustrating the concepts of accuracy and precision: (a) accuracy, (b) precision, (c) accuracy with precision.
The concepts of bias, accuracy, and precision can be represented in terms of the
results obtained by marksmen of differing degrees of skill, as shown in Figure 2.3. If
the bull’s-eye represents the truth, the marksman firing the three shots shown in
Figure 2.3(a) was accurate but not very precise. Figure 2.3(b) shows the results from
a precise but inaccurate shooter: the shots are close together, but far from the bull’s-
eye. Notice that the bias was caused by a systematic (built-in) error. Consider target
practice with a rifle equipped with a scope. If the scope is not properly aligned with
the rifle barrel, the shots of even the most precise shooter will be directed to one side
of the bull’s-eye. The marksman producing the results shown in Figure 2.3(c) was
both accurate and precise.
2.5 SIGNIFICANT FIGURES

Engineers and scientists use significant figures to identify the precision of a measured
number. Appropriately applying significant figures to laboratory measurements allows
to describe the level of confidence we have in our measurements. Use the following
guidelines to determine which digits are significant.
1. When the number contains a decimal, the leftmost digit that is not a zero is
considered significant. All other digits within the number are considered sig-
nificant. For example, the numbers 0.254, 0.0254, and 2.54 all contain three sig-
nificant figures, but 0.025 and 0.0025 each contain only two.
2. Terminal zeros placed to the right of a decimal point are assumed to be signif-
icant. Thus, the numbers 10.40 and 10.00 each have four significant figures,
while 10.0 has three.
3. If the number does not contain a decimal, the rightmost nonzero digit is con-
sidered significant, as are all other digits in the number. This rule can cause
uncertainty. For example, the number 400 has only one significant figure, while
the number 400. has three. It is recommended that scientific notation be used
to reduce this ambiguity. For example, 3000 is expressed as 3 * 103 if one digit
is significant or as 3.00 * 103 if three digits are significant.
4. Internal zeros are assumed to be significant, such that 30.24 has four signifi-
cant figures.
When measured values are used in calculations, the precision of the result
obtained should not exceed the precision of the measured values. In general, the
following rules should be applied:
1. For addition and subtraction, the solution should contain the same number of
decimal places as the measurement that contained the least number of signifi-
cant figures. For example, 3.23 + 1.0 = 4.2. Notice that the solution is given to
only one decimal place and two significant digits—the same number of signif-
icant digits as in 1.0.
2. When a value is obtained by multiplying or dividing measured quantities, the
result should contain only as many significant figures as there were in the mea-
surement with the fewest significant digits. Applying this rule, the product of
3.07 * 3.1 should be reported with only two significant digits—that is, as 9.5.
S U M M A RY
Analytical problem solving is a skill all engineering students need to practice. This
chapter introduced some basic concepts that the competent problem solver must
master. The ideas associated with units and dimensions were introduced. Several
schemes used to classify units were presented, including the SI and U.S. Customary
systems. Four derived units (density, concentration, flow rate, and residence time)
were defined. The concept of unit conversion was explored and a variety of examples
were completed that exemplify this skill. The precision and accuracy of measure-
ments taken in the laboratory were discussed.
KEY WORDS accuracy flow rate residence time

concentration ideal gas law significant figures
Dalton’s law mass percent volume percent
density molarity
dimension precision
REFERENCES
Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40: Protection of Environment, Chapter 1: Environmen-
tal Protection Agency, Subchapter D: Water Programs, Part 141: National Primary Drink-
ing Water Regulations, §141.51: Maximum contaminant level goals for inorganic
contaminants.
Isbell, D., Hardin, M., and Underwood, J. (1999). Mars Climate Orbiter Team Finds Likely
Cause of Loss. Retrieved July 20, 2006 from http://mars.jpl.nasa.gov/msp98/orbiter/.
EXERCISES
2.1 Perform the following unit conversions by hand. You may use the unit-
conversion feature on your calculator to check your work.
(a) Convert 4000 grams into pounds.
(b) Convert 237.4 feet to meters.
(c) Convert 80 years to seconds.
(d) Convert 55 mph into a speed of nm per second.
(e) Convert 0.004 gallons into ml.
(f) Convert 10.8 mm to angstroms.
Exercises 31
(g) Convert 87ºF into Celsius and Kelvin.

(h) Convert 54ºC to degrees Fahrenheit.
(i) Convert 13.2 atmospheres to newtons per square meter (pascals).
(j) Convert 20.4 kilocalories to joules.
(k) Convert 1000 megawatts to horsepower.
(l) Convert 20.8 ft/s to mi/hr.
2.2 A cube occupies 0.3358 ft3. What is its volume in mm3?
2.3 A box measures 4.35 ft in length, 0.03899 yd in width, and 8.12 inches in
height. Determine its volume in cubic centimeters.
2.4 The density of a given object is known to be 3.25 * 10-4 lbm /in3. Determine
its density in g/ml.
2.5 A Styrofoam cooler is made with outside dimensions of 4.00 ft * 3.00 ft *
2.00 ft and inside dimensions of 3.50 ft * 2.50 ft * 1.50 ft. Assume the aver-
age density of the Styrofoam is 0.03 g/cm3. Determine the volume of Styro-
foam used in cubic meters and the weight in pounds.
2.6 Consider a piece of platinum having a volume of 13.4 ml and mass of 286.8 g.
Calculate the density of platinum in g/ml.
2.7 A liter of water was found to contain 5 mg of benzene 1C 6H 62. What is the
concentration of benzene in (a) mg/l, (b) ppm, and (c) molarity?
2.8 The density of ethanol is 0.789 g/ml. Find the mass of 20 ml of ethanol.
2.9 A mass of 0.525 g of sodium chloride 1NaCl2 has been added to a cylinder con-
taining water.The cylinder diameter is 1.5 inch and the depth of the water in the
container is 5 inches. Determine the concentration of the sodium ion in solu-
tion, showing your answer in units of (a) mg/L, (b) mass %, and (c) molarity.
2.10 The sulfur dioxide 1SO22 stack-gas concentration from fossil-fuel combustion
is 2 ppmv. Determine the stack-gas SO2 concentration in units of mg>m3.
Assume 0ºC and 1 atm pressure.
2.11 Calculate the volume of 1 mole of SO2 at 25ºC and 1 atm. Express your
answer in m3.
2.12 The smoke inhaled from a cigarette contains approximately 400 ppmv carbon
monoxide. Express this concentration as a percentage of air inhaled.
2.13 The average exhaled carbon dioxide 1CO22 concentration from a human
breath is 4%. Convert this concentration value to ppmv.
2.14 Fill a rigid cylinder having a volume of 25.0 L with nitrogen gas to a final pres-
sure of 20,000 kPa at 27ºC. Determine the number of moles of N2 gas the
cylinder contains.
2.15 A 1-kg block of dry ice (solid CO2) vaporizes to gas at room temperature.
Determine the volume of gas produced at 25ºC at 975 kPa.
2.16 Assume the discharge from a wastewater treatment plant has a flow of 30 MGD
with a solids concentration of 5 mg/L. Determine the mass flow rate of solids dis-
charged in unit of lbm/day.
2.17 Consider a rectangular wastewater treatment cell having a length of 100 ft,
width of 20 ft, and depth of 20 ft. If the flow into the cell is 50 ft3/min, calcu-
late the residence time of the treatment cell.
CHAPTER
Essential Chemical
3
Concepts
3.1 INTRODUCTION
Objectives
A solid foundation in chemical concepts is vital to both the environmental
In this chapter, you will learn engineering practitioner and the student. Chemistry is central to your under-
about: standing water and wastewater treatment processes and the design of treat-
Fundamental concepts in ment strategies for mitigating hazardous waste. You will need a knowledge of
atomic theory chemistry to understand issues associated with anthropogenic emissions caus-
Chemical reactions ing tropospheric ozone generation, acid rain, and the greenhouse effect. This
chapter gives an overview of essential chemistry concepts.
Acid-base chemistry
Carbonate system and
alkalinity 3.2 FUNDAMENTALS
Solid-phase reactions 3.2.1 Atoms
Gas laws The atom is the smallest part of an element that can exist and still retain all the
chemical properties associated with the element. The most current model of
the atom, provided by nuclear physicists and often referred to as the Standard
Model, includes components such as mesons, baryons, and quarks. The model
developed by Niels Bohr in 1913, however, is still useful. Bohr postulated that
the atom maintains a neutral charge and consists of a positively charged
nucleus and a negatively charged atomic shell that contains electrons. The
nucleus is composed of positively charged protons and of neutrons that have
no charge. For an atom to maintain a neutral charge, the number of protons
and electrons must be equal.
3.2.2 Elements
All matter is composed of 103 fundamental substances called elements, which
are distinguished by the number of protons within the atom.The number of pro-
tons in the nucleus, Z, is the element’s atomic number. The sum of protons and
neutrons in an atom’s nucleus is the element’s mass number, A. Atoms of the
same element contain the same number of protons, but the number of neutrons
may vary to form isotopes. Isotopes are atoms of the same element that contain
a different number of neutrons and thus have different weights.
Periodic Table of the Elements
1 18
1A 8A
1 2
11 Atomic number
1 H He
Hydrogen 2 Na Element symbol 13 14 15 16 17 Helium
1.01 2A Sodium Element name 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 4.00
3 4 22.99 5 6 7 8 9 10
Average atomic mass*
2 Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
6.94 9.01 10.81 12.01 14.01 16.00 19.00 20.18
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
3 Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Aluminum Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
22.99 24.31 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 1B 2B 26.98 28.09 30.97 32.07 35.45 39.95
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
4 K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
39.10 40.08 44.96 47.87 50.94 52.00 54.94 55.85 58.93 58.69 63.55 65.39 69.72 72.61 74.92 78.96 79.90 83.80
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
5 Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
85.47 87.62 88.91 91.22 92.91 95.94 (98) 101.07 102.91 106.42 107.87 112.41 114.82 118.71 121.76 127.60 126.90 131.29
55 56 57 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
6 Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Cesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
132.91 137.33 138.91 178.49 180.95 183.84 186.21 190.23 192.22 195.08 196.97 200.59 204.38 207.2 208.98 (209) (210) (222)
87 88 89 104 105 106 107 108 109
7 Fr Ra Ac Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt
Francium Radium Actinium Rutherfordium Dubnium Seaborgium Bohrium Hassium Meitnerium
(223) (226) (227) (261) (262) (266) (264) (269) (268)
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
* If the average atomic mass number is in 140.12 140.91 144.24 (145) 150.36 151.96 157.25 158.93 162.50 164.93 167.26 168.93 173.04 174.97
Section 3.2
parentheses it refers to the atomic mass 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
of the most stable isotope.
Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
232.04 231.04 238.03 (237) (244) (243) (247) (247) (251) (252) (257) (258) (259) (262)
Fundamentals 33
Figure 3.1
Periodic table.
34 Chapter 3 Essential Chemical Concepts
The atomic weight (AW) of an element is relative to the weight of carbon-12

and is equal to the mass of one mole of that element. The atomic weight of each ele-
ment is listed in the periodic table (Figure 3.1) and is the weighted average AW
based on the abundance of individual isotopes found in nature. The molecular
weight (MW) of a compound is the sum of the AWs of the individual elements in the
compound. Sometimes we incorrectly use the term MW to refer to the AW of an ele-
ment, even though single atoms of elements are not molecules. Strictly speaking, the
term AW should be used for a single atom and MW for molecules. Consider hydro-
gen: the AW is 1 g/mol, and the MW for H 2 is 2 g/mol.
EXAMPLE 3.1
Determine atomic and molecular weights
Find the AW of each element and the MW of each compound in grams per mole
(g/mol) for each item in the list below. Use AW information from the periodic table.
Solution
After using the periodic table to determine the AW of each element, calculate the
molecular weight of calcium carbonate and sodium bicarbonate by summing the
atomic weights of the elements in each of these compounds. In most environmental
engineering problems, it is acceptable to round AWs and/or MWs to two (and often-
times fewer) decimal places.
Element or compound Symbol Atomic or molecular weight (g/mol)

Carbon C 12.01
Hydrogen H 1.01
Calcium Ca 40.08
Sodium Na 22.99
Oxygen O 16.00
Calcium carbonate CaCO3 40.08 + 12.01 + 3 1162 = 100.09
Sodium bicarbonate NaHCO3 22.99 + 1.01 + 12.01 + 31162 = 84.01
A radical or free radical is typically a very reactive element, compound, or ion

(such as H +, F -, or Cl-) that has an unpaired electron in its outermost electron shell.
Table 3.1 identifies some radicals frequently observed within the environment that are
generally treated as a single unit, because they are assumed not to dissociate in solution.
The equivalent weight (EW) of an element or radical provides information on
its reactivity. EW is calculated by dividing the element’s AW or radical’s MW by its
assumed valence (or charge), z:
MW
EW = (3.1)
z
In Equation (3.1), z represents the valence1 of the reactive unit. Although commonly
used to describe acid-base reactions, the reactive unit in any chemical reaction is often
1
Note that the concept introduced in Equation (3.1) has been simplified. Equivalent weight is commonly
defined using three methods. As discussed above, the first method relies on use of the valence the ele-
ment or radical assumes in a given compound. In acid-base reactions, the equivalent weight depends on
the number of protons or hydroxyl radicals that react. The equivalent weight for oxidation-reduction
reactions is based on the number of moles of electrons transferred. Further discussion of these topics is
beyond the scope of this book.
Section 3.2 Fundamentals 35
referred to as an equivalent. (A reactive species can have multiple EWs because of its
involvement in multiple types of reactions.) Typical units for EW include both grams
per equivalent (g/eq) and milligrams per milliequivalent (mg/meq).
Normality, N, relates the mass of solute per volume of solution, as presented in
Equation (3.2). A 1 N solution contains 1 equivalent weight of a substance per liter
of solution.
mass of material>L of solution number of equivalents

N = = (3.2)
EW L of solution
Recalling that the concentration unit molarity (M) is defined as the moles of solute
per liter of solution, the relationship between N and M is a simple one, indicating that the
normality of a solution is never less than the concentration of a molarity-based solution.
N = z * M (3.3)
Table 3.1 Common Ions and Radicals Associated with Environmental Chemistry
Radical Chemical formula MW (g/mol) EW (g/eq)
Bicarbonate HCO3- 61 61
Carbonate CO2-
3 60 30
Ammonium NH4+ 18 18
-
Hydroxyl OH 17 17
Hypochlorite OCl- 51.5 51.5
Nitrate NO3- 62 62
Nitrite NO2- 46 46
Orthophosphate PO3-
4 95* 31.7*
Sulfate SO2-
4 96 48
Hydrogen sulfate HSO4- 97 97
-
Cyanide CN 26 26
Permanganate MnO4- 119 119
Chromate CrO2-
4 116 58
Dichromate Cr2O2-
7 216 108
*Example calculations for both molecular and equivalent weight of the free radical orthophosphate follows:
Molecular weight for phosphorus (P) is 31 and for oxygen (O) is 16. So, the MW of
PO3-
4 = 31 + 41162 = 95 g>mol. The equivalent weight for the radical is simply the MW divided by its
95 g>mol
valence of 3, giving EW of PO3-
4 = = 31.7 g>eq.
3 eq>mol
EXAMPLE 3.2
Calculation of equivalent weight
Determine the equivalent weight for the following species:
a. magnesium ion, Mg 2+
b. calcium carbonate, CaCO3
c. carbon dioxide, CO2
Solution part a
From the periodic table (Figure 3.1), the AW of Mg 2+ is 24.3 g/mol, and the valence
is z = 2 in solution. Calculate the EW using Equation (3.1).
MW 24.3 g>mol g
EW for Mg 2+ = = = 12.15
z 2 eq>mol eq
Solution part b
AW for Ca = 40, for C = 12, and for O = 16 g/mol, so the MW of CaCO3 is 100 g/
mol. In solution, calcium carbonate dissociates into calcium and the free radical car-
bonate, as follows:
CaCO3 Δ Ca2+ + CO2-
3
Notice that the valence associated with the reaction is z = 2, so
MW 100 g>mol g
EW for CaCO3 = = = 50
z 2 eq>mol eq
Solution part c
The MW of CO2 is 44. In solution, carbon dioxide forms carbonic acid and has the
potential of giving up 2 H + ions.
CO2 + H2O Δ H2CO3 Δ H+ + HCO3- Δ 2H+ + CO2-
3
MW 44 g>mol g
EW for CO2 = = = 22
z 2 eq>mol eq
EXAMPLE 3.3
Calculate concentration in normality
Find the normality (N) of the following solutions:
a. 0.25 M solution of CaCO3 .
mg
b. 588 solution of K 2Cr2O7
L
Solution part a
Using Example 3.2, Part b, the equivalent weight of CaCO3 is 50 g/eq and z = 2.
Use Equation (3.3).
N = z * M = 2 * 0.25 M = 0.50 N solution of CaCO3
Solution part b
AW for K = 39, and for Cr2O2- 7 MW = 112 * 522 + 17 * 1622 = 216 g/mol. In
solution, potassium dichromate dissociates into potassium (K) and the free radical
dichromate 1Cr2O2- 7 2 as follows:
K 2Cr2O7 Δ 2 K+ + Cr2O2-
7
Section 3.3 Chemical Reactions 37
Notice the valence associated with the reaction is z = 2.

g g
MW for K 2Cr2O7 = 112 * 392 + 2162 = 294
mol mol
Convert the solution concentration to M:
588 mg g mol K 2Cr2O7
* * = 0.002 M = 2 mM K 2Cr2O7
L 1000 mg 294 g
Using Equation (3.3) to determine normality gives:

N = z * M = 2 * 0.002 M = 0.004 N solution of K 2Cr2O7
3.3 CHEMICAL REACTIONS

Chemical reactions describe the transformation of one or more elements or compounds
(reactants) into different products. A chemical equation shows what happens during a
chemical reaction. Chemical reactions traditionally are grouped into five classifications:
1. Synthesis or combination reactions––two or more reactants combine to form a

third compound. In general, this type of reaction can be written as A + B : AB,
where A and B represent either elements or compounds.
2. Decomposition reactions––a reactant decomposes or breaks down into multi-
ple elements or compounds. A decomposition reaction is the opposite of a syn-
thesis reaction and can be represented as AB : A + B.
3. Single-replacement reactions––an element reacts with a compound and trades
places with another element in that compound such that A + BC : AC + B.
4. Double-replacement reactions (metathesis reaction)—reacting compounds
exchange cations (positively charged ions) such that AB + CD : AD + CB.
5. Combustion reactions––an organic substance reacts with oxygen to form car-
bon dioxide and water. Such reactions are typically exothermic (giving off
heat) and can be represented, for example, by the burning of propane:
C 3H 8 + 5 O2 : 3 CO2 + 4 H 2O.
The following equations present two simple synthesis reactions involving lime or
calcium oxide (CaO). Equation (3.4) examines the reaction often referred to as slaking
that involves heating a mixture of water and lime to produce calcium hydroxide. Equa-
tion (3.5) presents the reaction where lime is added to sewage to remove phosphates
by precipitation.
CaO1s2 + H 2O1l2 : Ca1OH221s2 (3.4)
-
3 CaO1s2 + 3 H 2O1l2 + 2 PO3-
4 1aq2 : Ca 31PO4221s2 + 6 OH 1aq2 (3.5)
Notice, in both reaction equations, that the reactants and products are sepa-
rated by an arrow, indicating that products to the right are yielded by or formed from
the specified reactants located to the left of the arrow. Although not required, the
state of the reactant and product is given in parentheses as a subscript. The subscripts
(s), (l), and (aq) refer to solid, liquid, and aqueous, respectively. Finally, the equations
must be balanced such that the mass of each element involved is conserved through-
out the reaction, so each side of the equation must contain the same number of moles
of each element. From Equation (3.4), notice that 1 mole of CaO and 1 mole of water
are required (for a total of 2 moles of reactant) to produce 1 total mole of product,
Ca1OH22 . Similarly, Equation (3.5) requires 3 moles of CaO to form one mole of
product, Ca31PO422 . Although balancing an equation is often an arduous task for
students as they begin their chemistry endeavors, when it is done properly the ratio
of the number of moles produced to reactants involved is apparent.
Recognize that essentially all reactions are reversible and that both the for-
ward and reverse reactions are taking place simultaneously. Consider the reversible
reaction shown in Equation (3.6).
aA + bB Δ cC + dD (3.6)
At equilibrium, the quantitative relationship between reactants and products

present in solution, or the extent of the reaction, is described by the equilibrium con-
stant, K. For sufficiently diluted solutions, as commonly found in environmental
systems, K, as defined in Equation (3.7), is a constant for a given temperature and is
independent of the initial concentrations of reactants and products. Pure solids are
excluded from the equilibrium-constant equation, because they have a constant ten-
dency to dissolve, and by definition their activity (or concentration in dilute solutions)
is equal to 1. Water, or the solvent, is not included, as it has no effect on equilibrium.
3C4c 3D4d
K = (3.7)
3A4a 3B4b
where a, b, c, and d are the number of moles of constituents A, B, C, and D, respec-
tively. The brackets, [ ], denote concentration of a constituent in moles per liter.
3.3.1 Stoichiometry
Environmental engineers often use chemical equations for estimating the quantity
of chemicals that must be added to water or wastewater to achieve a specific result.
For example, the quantity of sludge that will be produced can be determined from a
balanced chemical equation. An equation is balanced when the law of the conservation
of mass is reflected: elements are not created or destroyed, just rearranged by the reac-
tion. Mass and charge are conserved in all chemical reactions, such that the quantity
of each type of element is equal on both sides of the equation and each compound
has a net charge of zero. When mass and charge are properly balanced, the chemical
equation should represent the stoichiometry observed in a reaction.
The concept of balancing reactions is fundamental to chemistry. Although equa-
tions can be balanced algebraically using linear systems, usually they are balanced by
inspection. To balance an equation by inspection, follow these simple rules:
1. Insure that all products and reactants are represented by the correct chemical
formula, appropriately written on the proper side of the equation, and are sep-
arated by plus signs.
2. Identify the most complicated compound in the equation. Assume that only
one unit or mole of this compound is in the reaction. Balance the elements in
this compound one at a time, placing coefficients appropriately in front of
products and reactants in the equation.
3. Focus your initial attention on those atoms present in the fewest compounds.
4. Continue the trial-and-error process for the remaining compounds. As a gen-
eral rule, balance the atoms that are most prevalent (i.e., hydrogen and oxygen)
near the end of the inspection.
5. Remove fractions and simplify such that the group of coefficients remaining
are the smallest whole numbers possible.
Use these rules of inspection to balance the equations in the example that follows.
EXAMPLE 3.4
Balancing chemical reactions
a. Because of the promulgation of the 1970 Clean Air Act, tetraethyl lead
was phased out of gasoline, and methyl tertiary-butyl ether (MTBE)
was added instead to serve as an octane booster. The aim was to make
the internal combustion engine “knock” less and burn “cleaner,”
emitting fewer unburned hydrocarbons into the atmosphere. Balance
the combustion reaction of MTBE 31CH 323COCH 34 in a pure oxygen
environment.
b. The formation of rust is a single-replacement reaction (it is also an
oxidation-reduction reaction) that commonly occurs in the environment.
Rust is formed when the iron (Fe) present in steel is oxidized to a
hydrated form, iron(III) oxide or ferric oxide, in the presence of oxygen
and water. Balance the reaction that describes the formation of rust.
[Hint: Hydrous ferric oxide 1Fe2O3 # 3 H 2O2 is the primary component in
red-brown rust.]
Solution part a
1. Recognize that carbon dioxide and water will be formed in the combustion of a
hydrocarbon and write appropriate products and reactants.
1CH 323 COCH 3 + O2 : CO2 + H 2O
2. Assume only 1 mole of MTBE is reacting, and balance CO2 production by observ-
ing that 5 moles of C are reacting for each mole of MTBE.
1CH 323 COCH 3 + O2 : 5 CO2 + H 2O
3. Count the number of H atoms present on the left-hand side of the equation and
add the coefficient 6 to the H 2O on the right, forcing both sides of the equation
to have 12 moles of hydrogen.
1CH 323 COCH 3 + O2 : 5 CO2 + 6 H 2O
15
4. Balance the O by adding the coefficient in front of the O2 on the left-hand
2
side of the equation. Now each side has 16 moles of oxygen.
15
1CH 323 COCH 3 + O : 5 CO2 + 6 H 2O
2 2
5. Remove the fractions by multiplying through by 2.
2 1CH 323 COCH 3 + 15 O2 : 10 CO2 + 12 H 2O
Solution part b
1. Write the reactant and products present in the reaction.
Fe + O2 + H 2O : Fe2O3 # 3 H 2O
2. Recognize that 2 moles of Fe are needed to form the product. Add the coefficient
2 before the reactant Fe.
2 Fe + O2 + H 2O : Fe2O3 # 3 H 2O
3. Balance the hydrogen molecules on each side of the reaction.
2 Fe + O2 + 3 H 2O : Fe2O3 # 3 H 2O
4. Balance the oxygen molecules on each side of the reaction.
O + 3 H 2O : Fe2O3 # 3 H 2O
3
2 Fe +
2 2
5. Remove the fractions by multiplying through by 2.
4 Fe + 3 O2 + 6 H 2O : 2 Fe2O3 # 3 H 2O
EXAMPLE 3.5
Reaction stoichiometry
Methane is a greenhouse gas that is about 23 times more effective on a molecular
basis than carbon dioxide in causing global warming. Methane is emitted by a vari-
ety of anthropogenic sources, including rice fields and cattle (IPCC, 2001). Accord-
ing to a recent study by Neue (1993), rice fields annually produce 20–100 teragrams
(1 Tg = 1 million metric tons) of methane through the anaerobic decomposition
(methanogenesis) of organic materials that are either applied to or native to the
fields. Estimating annual methane emissions of approximately 500 Tg (Cicerone and
Oremland, 1988), rice growing contributes 5% to 20% of annual anthropogenic
methane emissions. Using formic acid as an example of an organic that is anaerobi-
cally reduced,
a. Calculate the molar ratio of methane production to carbon dioxide pro-
duction when formic acid (CHOOH) is reduced. Reaction products will
include methane, carbon dioxide, and water.
b. Calculate the mass and volume of methane emitted from reducing 161 g of
formic acid.
Assume conditions of standard temperature and pressure (STP; T = 25°C and
P = 1 atm) and eventual emission of all products to the gas phase.
Solution part a
1. Write the reactants and products participating in the microbially mediated
reaction:
CHOOH : CH 4 + CO2 + H 2O
2. Balance the equation by confirming that all quantities of atoms are equal on
both sides of the equation.
4 CHOOH : CH 4 + 3 CO2 + 2 H 2O
3. From reaction stoichiometry, recognize that 1 mole of methane and 3 moles of

carbon dioxide are produced per 4 moles of formic acid.
mol CH 4 1
=
mol CO2 3
Solution part b
1. Determine the mass of both methane and carbon dioxide produced from 161 g of
formic acid reacting. Begin by determining the number of moles of formic acid
available to react by dividing by the molecular weight of the compound.
1 mol CHOOH
161 g CHOOH * = 3.5 mol CHOOH
46 g
2. Determine the mass of methane and carbon dioxide produced. Remember that
the molecular weights of methane and carbon dioxide are 16 and 44, respectively.
1 mol CH4 produced 16 g CH 4
mass of CH4 1g2 = 3.5 mol CHOOH * *
4 mol CHOOH reacting 1 mol CH 4
= 14 g CH 4
And similarly for carbon dioxide:

3 mol CO2 produced 44 g CO2
mass of CO2 1g2 = 3.5 mol CHOOH * *
4 mol CHOOH reacting 1 mol CO2
= 115.5 g CO2
To find the volume of methane and carbon dioxide gas produced at STP
(25°C and 1 atm), utilize the ideal gas law (Section 3.6.1), PV = nRT.
Rearrange and solve for the volume of methane:
L # atm
mol # K
a0.08206 b1273 + 252 K
nRT 14 g CH 4
V = = * = 21.4 L
p g 1 atm
16
mol CH 4
Similarly for CO2 , 64.2 L of gas are produced for every 161 g of formic
acid reduced. Notice that the volume of CO2 produced is three times that
for CH 4 , as expected from the stoichiometry observed in Part a.
EXAMPLE 3.6
Reaction stoichiometry
Calculate the moles of oxygen required to react with 1 mole of glucose 1C 6H 12O62
according to the following balanced chemical equation. Also determine the mass of
oxygen required to oxidize 1 gram of glucose.
1 C 6H 12O6 + 6 O2 : 6 CO2 + 6 H 2O
MW = 180 192
Solution:
The stoichiometric or molar ratio of O2 to glucose 1C 6H 12O62 is 6:1. This means that 6
moles of oxygen are required for the oxidation of 1 mole of C 6H 12O6 to form carbon
dioxide and water. On a mass basis, 192 grams of oxygen are required to react with 180
grams of glucose to completely oxidize it to carbon dioxide and water.Therefore, 1.07 g
of oxygen are required to oxidize 1 g of glucose 1192/180 = 1.072.
EXAMPLE 3.7
Practice with reaction stoichiometry
a. Calculate the grams of oxygen required to oxidize 1 mole of C 5H 7O2N

(general formula representing the composition of a bacterial cell) accord-
ing to the following balanced chemical equation.
1 C5H7O2N + 5 O2 : 5 CO2 + 2 H2O + NH3
MW = 113 160
b. Determine the concentration of oxygen required in mg/L to oxidize a 500
mg/L solution of C 5H 7O2N.
Solution part a
160 grams of oxygen are required per mole of C 5H 7O2N, or 160 grams of oxygen
are required per 113 grams of C 5H 7O2N.
Solution part b
The concentration of oxygen required to oxidize 500 mg/L of C 5H 7O2N is given as:
500 mg C 5H 7O2N 160 g 708 mg O2
O2 concentration = a b =
L 113 g L
Recognize that this is also the theoretical chemical oxygen demand (COD) of a
500-mg/L solution of C 5H 7O2N.
3.4 SOLUTION CHEMISTRY—AQUEOUS PHASE

Water covers approximately 70% of the earth’s surface. Air at 75ºC having a relative
humidity of 70% contains 0.013 pounds of water per pound of dry air. Clearly,
understanding the basic concepts of reactions that occur in the aqueous phase is
important to environmental engineers.
3.4.1 Acid-Base Chemistry

The concept of pH describes acidity by providing a logarithmic relationship
between the H + and OH - ion concentrations in a solution. For aqueous solutions,
the pH scale is often cited as 0 to 14 without explanation. This range provides an
arbitrary convenience, because it places the value for neutrality of pure water at
25ºC precisely in the middle with a pH = 7. At 25°C, if pH 6 7, the system is acidic,
while a pH 7 7 indicates a more basic solution. Values of pH less than 0.0 and
Section 3.4 Solution Chemistry—Aqueous Phase 43
greater than 14.0 are possible, however, and are frequently prepared in laboratory
settings, and also exist in nature. For example, acid mine waters characterized with a
pH = - 3.6 have been encountered underground in the Richmond Mine at Iron
Mountain, CA (Nordstrom et al., 2000). By definition, the pH is the negative of the
logarithm of the activity or the relative hydrogen-ion concentration. For dilute solu-
tions, pH is well defined mathematically as
pH = - log 3H +4 (3.8)
where 3H +4 represents the molar 1moles H +/L2 concentration of the hydrogen ions
in solution. Similarly, pOH can be defined as pOH = - log 3OH -4 such that
pH + pOH = 14.
The pH is useful when evaluating surface-water quality, regional and global
acid-rain effects, and industrial effluent and makeup waters. Surface-water pH is
influenced naturally by photosynthesis and respiration processes as well as by
regional geology, such as limestone or glacial deposits. Anthropogenic sources such
as acid-rain deposition and wastewater discharge also modify stream and lake pH.
Although some aquatic life species can thrive under extreme pH conditions, the
United States. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) has identified that lakes
having a pH 6 5 are stressed and considered acidic. In particular, fish prefer a pH
between 6 and 9. Figure 3.2 shows pH ranges of common items.
As defined by J.N. Brønsted and T.M. Lowry in 1923, a Brønsted-Lowry acid is a
compound that donates a hydrogen ion or proton to another substance, while a base is
any substance that accepts a proton. A generic acid-base reaction is shown in Equa-
tion (3.9), where on the left-hand side, HA represents an acid and B- is the base.
HA B A HB
Acid Base Base Acid
(3.9)
Acid-conjugate base pairs
Increasing Acidity
pH Scale 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1M HCl Rain Antacid 1 M NaOH

water Blood tablets Household
Raw apples bleach
Stomach Strawberries Household
Grapefruit Baking
Acid soda ammonia Drain
Peanut
Raspberry butter Glass cleaner openers
jam
Household
white vinegar
Wheaties
Black coffee
Figure 3.2
pH Estimates for common household items.
According to the Brønsted-Lowry theory, every time a proton is donated by an

acid (HA), the conjugate base is formed 1A-2. The donated proton is accepted by a
base, and an acid is formed (HB). In solution, amphoteric compounds can react as
either an acid or a base. Amphoteric compounds commonly found reacting in envi-
ronmental systems include NH 3 , HCO3- , HSO 4- , and H 2O. The autoionization of
water is an example.
H2O H2O HO H3O

Acid Base Base Acid
(3.10)
In aqueous systems, the H + ion does not actually exist, because it readily com-
bines with water to form H 3O +, but throughout this text and many others, H + and
H 3O + are used interchangeably. Equation (3.11) describes the weak acid-base reac-
tion that occurs within a simple aqueous system.
H 2O Δ OH - + H + (3.11)
The equilibrium constant for the dissociation of water is:
3OH -43H +4
K = (3.12)
3H 2O4
For dilute solutions, the molar concentration of water is 55.6 mol/L at 25°C, allowing
Equation (3.12) representing the ionization of water to simplify as follows:
Kw = 3OH -43H +4 = 10-14 1at 25°C2 (3.13)
where Kw is the dissociation constant for water at 25°C.

This equation can also be written as pH + pOH = 14.
EXAMPLE 3.8
Calculation of system pH and pOH
Determine the pH, pOH, and 3OH -4 of an aqueous system known to have a hydro-
gen-ion concentration of 10-3.5 M. Assume the system is at 25°C.
Solution
From Equation (3.8), we know that
pH = - log3H +4
Substitute 10-3.5 M for the concentration of hydrogen and solve for pH.
pH = - log110-3.52
pH = 3.5
Calculate pOH and then 3OH -4 by applying Equation (3.13).
pH + pOH = 14
pOH = 14 - 3.5 = 10.5
Solve for the hydroxide-ion concentration.

pOH = - log3OH -]
10.5 = - log3OH -4
3OH -4 = 3.16 * 10-11 M
3.4.2 Strong Acids and Bases vs. Weak Acids and Bases
Strong acids and bases will almost completely dissociate in water. The strength of an
acid or base is quantified by its dissociation constant. The dissociation constant
(often called equilibrium constant) for acids is Ka and for bases is Kb and can be
generalized by Equations (3.14) and (3.15), respectively. These equations provide
generic acid and base dissociation reactions, followed by their associated equation,
which determines the equilibrium constant. In the equations, HA is a generic acid
and BOH is a generic base.
HA Δ H + + A-
3H +43A-4
Ka = (3.14)
3HA4
BOH Δ B+ + OH -
3B+43OH -4
Kb = (3.15)
3BOH4
Similar to the log-based system used to describe water acidity (pH), acid and
base strength is described by the negative logarithm of the dissociation constant, as
shown below:
pKa = - log Ka (3.16)
pKb = - log Kb (3.17)
In general, if the pKa 6 1, the acid is considered strong, and it is appropriate to

assume that this acid will completely dissociate in water. Similarly, base strength, or
the ability to accept protons, increases as the Kb increases. The pH of a system con-
taining a strong acid or base is relatively independent of the dissociation constant
and depends instead on the concentration of acid or base added to the system. Table
3.2 shows equilibrium constants for acids and their conjugate bases that commonly
participate in environmentally engineered and natural systems. The strongest acids
are in the upper portion of the left column, the strongest bases in the lower portion
of the right column.
Notice that the product of a Ka with its conjugate Kb always equals the disso-
ciation constant for water:
Ka * Kb = Kw = 10-14 at 25°C (3.18)

Table 3.2 Equilibrium Constants for Acids and Their Conjugate Base That Are
Commonly Found in the Environment (T ⴝ 25°C)
Acid pK a Base pKb
-
HCl Hydrochloric acid -3 Cl Chloride ion 17
H2SO4 Sulfuric acid -3 HSO4- Bisulfate ion 17
HNO3 Nitric acid 0 NO3- Nitrate 14
HSO4- Bisulfate ion 2 SO2-

4 Sulfate 12
HF Hydrofluoric acid 3.4 F- Fluoride ion 10.8
HNO2 Nitrous acid 4.5 NO3- Nitrate 9.5
H2CO…3 Carbon dioxide and carbonic acid 6.3 HCO3- Bicarbonate 7.7
-
H2S Hydrogen sulfide 7.1 HS Bisulfide 6.9
NH4+ Ammonium 9.3 NH3 Ammonia 4.7
HCO3- Bicarbonate 10.3 CO2-

3 Carbonate 3.7
HPO2-
4 Monohydrogen phosphate 12.3 PO3-
4 Phosphate 1.7
HS- Bisulfide 14 S2- Sulfide 0

-
H2O Water 14 OH Hydroxide 0
OH- Hydroxide 24 O2- Oxide -10

Source: CRC, 2006
Table 3.2 shows that both HCl and H 2SO4 are strong acids, and CO2- 3 and
-
OH are considered strong bases. Note that the stronger the acid, the weaker its
conjugate base, and the weaker the acid, the stronger its conjugate base.
EXAMPLE 3.9
pH calculation for a strong acid
Calculate the pH of a 0.01 M HNO3 solution at 25°C.
Solution
From Table 3.2, notice that nitric acid is a strong acid with pKa 6 1. Therefore, it is
reasonable to assume that the acid completely dissociates.
HNO3 : H + + NO3-
Stoichiometry provides that 0.01 M H + and 0.01 M NO3- are in solution, so
pH = - log3H +4
pH = - log10.012 = 2
3.4.3 The Carbonate System and Alkalinity

The chemical compounds associated with the carbonate system include carbonate
-
solids such as CaCO3(s), carbonate 1CO2- 3 2, bicarbonate 1HCO 3 2, carbonic acid
(H2CO3), aqueous carbon dioxide 1CO21aq22, and gaseous carbon dioxide 1CO21g22.
In environmental water chemistry, the carbonate species participate in some of the
most important acid-base reactions. For example, the carbonate system provides
surface and ground waters with an acid-conjugate base pair for a natural buffer.
Carbon dioxide is significant because it is produced during microbial respiration
and consumed by the photosynthesis process.
Carbonate species enter the atmosphere through two major pathways
• By the dissolution of carbonate- or bicarbonate-containing complexes into solu-
tion. Equation (3.19) shows the equilibrium reaction involving calcium carbonate.
• By the absorption of CO21g2 into the aqueous phase, shown in Equation (3.20).
Ksp represents the solubility product and KH represents Henry’s Law con-
stant. Both are similar to an equilibrium constant and will be introduced in detail in
Sections 3.5 and 3.6.4.
-8.34
CaCO31s2 Δ Ca2+ + CO2-
3 ; Ksp = 3Ca2+43CO2-
3 4 = 10 (3.19)
3CO21aq24 mol
= 10-1.5
L # atm
CO21g2 Δ CO21aq2 ; KH = (3.20)
CO21g2
Aqueous phase carbon dioxide reacts with water to form carbonic acid.
CO21aq2 + H 2O Δ H 2CO3
Because it is analytically difficult to distinguish between H 2CO3 and CO21aq2 ,

H 2CO…3 is commonly used to represent the sum of the two species.
3H 2CO…34 = 3H 2CO34 + 3CO21aq24 (3.21)
The term alkalinity quantifies the buffering capacity of a system, meaning how
well the system can resist changes in pH with the addition of an acid. Typically, alka-
linity is a function of the carbonate system and additional weak acids and bases such
as ammonia, silicates, and phosphates.
In natural systems, alkalinity depends strongly on regional bedrock composi-
tion. For instance, if a region’s bedrock contains dolomite 1CaMg1CO3222 or calcite,
i.e., limestone 1CaCO32, —high alkalinity carbonates—the buffering capacity of
surface waters is expected to be high. In contrast, surface waters in areas containing
primarily igneous bedrock typically exhibit low alkalinity and therefore have a min-
imal capacity to buffer the system. Wastewaters may contain additional compounds
such as hydroxide, ammonia, phosphates, organic acids, and silicates that contribute
to alkalinity.
The susceptibility of surface water to pH variations resulting from acid rain
and/or industrial effluents are classified by the EPA. Table 3.3 summarizes this clas-
sification. The table indicates that surface waters with an alkalinity concentration of
less than 20 mg/L as CaCO3 are deemed susceptible to acidity.
Table 3.3 Classification of Surface Water Susceptibility to Acidity, Based on Alkalinity

Classification Alkalinity concentration (mg/L as CaCO3)
Critical 62
Endangered 2–5
Highly sensitive 5–10
Sensitive 10–20
Not sensitive 7 20
Source: Godfrey et al.,1996; Van Loon and Duffy, 2005.
Equation (3.22) represents total alkalinity for most natural water systems and
holds true for all waters having proton activity from CaCO3 only. In the equation, the
carbonate concentration 3CO2- 3 4 is multiplied by 2 because it can consume 2 moles of
protons or acidity per mole of CO2- 3 .
eq
alk a b = 3HCO 3-4 + 23CO2- - +
3 4 + 3OH 4 - 3H 4 (3.22)
L
where brackets, [ ], denote concentration in moles/liter.
3.5 SOLID-PHASE EQUILIBRIUM REACTIONS

Solids participate in a variety of environmental reactions. The impact of calcite dis-
solution on the alkalinity of natural waters has already been discussed. Equation
(3.23) shows a generic equilibrium reaction for an ionic compound A aBb .
Dissolution is the forward reaction, when the solid dissolves, and precipitation is the
reverse reaction, when the solid is formed by ions A and B combining.
A aBb Δ aA + bB (3.23)
Equation (3.24) is an equilibrium equation based on the reaction shown in

Equation (3.23).
3A4a3B4b = Ksp (3.24)
There is no denominator in Equation (3.24) [compare to Equation (3.14) for

acid-base equilibrium systems] because the concentration of a solid in solution
remains effectively constant. The equilibrium constant representing a product’s solu-
bility is Ksp , the solubility product. The relationship between Ksp and solubility indi-
cates that sparingly soluble salts have small Ksp values while soluble salts have
relatively large Ksp values. Unsurprisingly, table salt has a large Ksp value, and silver
nitrite is sparingly soluble. Reviewing the solubility products of several common salts
shown in Table 3.4 provides more examples. Comparing the values of Ksp for spar-
ingly soluble solids does not predict relative solubility if the number of ions produced
by the dissolution is different. Example 3.10 examines the relationship between solu-
bility product and solubility. Recognize that the ions in the evaluated solutions are
participating in only one equilibrium reaction. This is typically an inappropriate
assumption for environmental samples, so the common ion effect must be considered.
Section 3.5 Solid-Phase Equilibrium Reactions 49
Table 3.4 Typical Solubility Product Constants, Ksp , for Solids Commonly Found in the
Environment (T ⴝ 25°C)
Compound *Solubility product (Ksp)
NaCl – sodium chloride 36

C12H22O11 – sucrose (common table sugar) 1.97
Al1OH23 – aluminum hydroxide 1 * 10-32
AgNO2 – silver nitrite 6.0 * 10-4
AgCl – silver chloride 1.8 * 10-10
Ca31PO422 – calcium phosphate 1 * 10-27
Ca1OH22 – calcium hydroxide 5 * 10-9
CaCO3 – calcium carbonate 5 * 10-9
Cr1OH23 – chromium(III) hydroxide 6.3 * 10-31
Fe1OH23 – iron(III) hydroxide 6 * 10-38
FeS – iron(II) sulfide 6 * 10-18
MgCO3 – magnesium carbonate 4 * 10-5
Mg1OH22 – magnesium hydroxide 9 * 10-12
Ni1OH22 – nickel hydroxide 2 * 10-16
PbCO3 – lead carbonate 7.4 * 10-14
PbCrO4 – lead(II) chromate 2.8 * 10-13

*Ksp values for many of these solids widely vary among sources. The values presented represent typical of
those observed.
Source: Sawyer et al., 2003.
EXAMPLE 3.10
Solubility of solids
Calculate the solubility of the following ionic compounds. Assume a chunk of each
solid such that an excess exists, and assume T = 25°C.
Present results in g/L.
a. Ca1OH221s2
b. CaCO31s2
Solution part a
Referring to Table 3.4, the Ksp for Ca1OH22 is 5 * 10-9.
The dissolution reaction for Ca1OH22 is
-
Ca1OH221s2 Δ Ca 2+
1aq2 + 21OH 21aq2
The equilibrium expression can be expressed as

Ksp = 5 * 10-9 = 3Ca2+4 3OH -42
Within the equilibrium expression, both 3Ca2+4 and 3OH -4 concentrations are
unknown. Mole ratios observed in the dissolution reaction show that for every 1 mole of
Ca2+ formed, 2 moles of OH - are formed. If x represents the concentration of Ca2+ ions,
then 2x moles of OH - will be produced at equilibrium. So the equilibrium expression is:
5 * 10-9 = 1x212x22
Use algebra to solve for x:
4x3 = 5 * 10-9
5 * 10-9
x = 3
B 4
x = 1.08 * 10-3 M
So, the solubility of Ca2+ and the Ca1OH22 solid is equal to 1.08 * 10-3 M.
Knowing the molecular weight of Ca1OH22 is 74 grams per mole, convert to a
mass-per-volume concentration:
1.08 * 10-3 mol Ca 1OH22 74 g Ca 1OH22 g Ca1OH22
* = 0.080
L 1 mol Ca 1OH22 L
Solution part b
The process for determining the solubility of CaCO3 is similar. From Table 3.4, the
solubility product is 5 * 10-9. Notice that the Ksp values for both Ca salts analyzed
in this example are the same. Write the equilibrium dissolution reaction and the sol-
ubility-product expression.
Ksp = 5 * 10-9 = 3Ca2+43CO2-

3 4
Allow x to represent the equilibrium concentration of Ca2+ in solution and

rewrite the equilibrium expressions.
5 * 10-9 = 1x21x2
5 * 10-9 = x2
-5
x = 3Ca2+4 = 3CO2-
3 4 = 7.07 * 10 M
Converting to a mass basis, the solubility of CaCO3 in solution is 7.07 * 10-3 g/L.
Notice that for both salts represented in the example, their Ksp was the same but their
solubilities differ. The take-home message: it is infeasible to compare or predict solubil-
ity by observing only the quantity of solubility products for sparingly soluble solids,
because they may form different numbers of ions in solution.
EXAMPLE 3.11
U s i n g s o l u b i l i t y k n o w l e d g e t o d e t e r m i n e Ksp
The solubility of AgCl is 1.34 * 10-5 M in pure water. Calculate the value of Ksp .
AgCl Δ Ag + + Cl-
x = solubility = 3Ag +4 = 3Cl-4 = 1.34 * 10-5 M
Ksp = 3Ag +4 3Cl-4 = 1x2 1x2 = x2 = 11.34 * 10-5 M22 = 1.8 * 10-10
Section 3.6 Solution Chemistry—Gas Phase 51
3.6 SOLUTION CHEMISTRY—GAS PHASE

An understanding of gas-phase chemistry is imperative to the study of atmospheric
chemistry, including global issues such as climate change, hazardous air pollutants,
acid deposition, photochemical smog production, and stratospheric ozone deple-
tion. Gas-phase chemistry is also important to an environmental engineer focused
on Title V permitting, the design engineer focused on unit operations used to remove
particulates or hazardous volatile organic compounds from industrial emissions, or
the engineer responsible for supplying oxygen to an aerobic digester found at a
wastewater treatment facility. An introduction to broadly useful gas-phase chemistry
concepts is provided in this section.
3.6.1 Ideal Gas Law

In 1834, Benoît Paul Émile Clapeyron, an engineer and physicist, discovered that
the ratio produced when (pressure * volume) is divided by (number of moles
PV
absolute temperature) in gas systems was a constant, such that = R. The ideal
nT
gas law, shown in Equation (3.25), relates system pressure, volume, temperature, and
number of moles. Gases that can be well characterized by this equation are termed
ideal gases. In general, the ideal gas law gives a good characterization of monatomic
gases (all the noble gases are monotonic, and at sufficiently high temperatures all
other elements are considered monotonic in their gaseous state) and provides a
basis for reasonable approximation for most gases.
PV = nRT (3.25)
where:
P = absolute pressure, atm,
V = volume occupied by gas, L,
n = moles of gas,
R = universal gas law constant; 0.08206 atm # L>mol # K, and
T = temperature, K 1273.15 + °C2.
EXAMPLE 3.12
Practice with the ideal gas law
Calculate the volume that one mole of an ideal gas occupies at standard conditions
of 1 atm of pressure and 0°C.
atm # L
mol # K
11 mol2a0.08206 b13273 + 04K2
nRT
V = = = 22.4 L
P 11 atm2
3.6.2 General Gas Laws—Boyle’s, Charles’, Gay-Lussac, Combined Gas

Rearranging the ideal gas law produces a variety of general gas laws relating P,
V, n, and T. For example, consider two gas systems where temperature and
the number of moles are kept constant but the pressures and volumes are
different. Writing the law for each case with numerical subscripts to the vari-
ables produces:
P1V1 = nRT for system 1 and,

P2V2 = nRT for system 2. The quantity nRT is the same for both, so
P1V1 = P2V2 (3.26)
This relationship is Boyle’s law and shows that for an isothermal system containing
a finite amount of gas, pressure and volume are inversely proportional such that as
pressure increases, the volume must decrease.
Similarly, Charles’ law is easily derived when the molar quantity of gas and
system pressure remain constant, and volume and temperature vary. Writing the
ideal gas law and assigning subscripts to the system variables produces:
PV1 = nRT1
PV2 = nRT2
Algebraically collecting the constant terms in both equations produces:
V1 V2 nR
= = = constant (3.27)
T1 T2 P
Charles’ law implies that volume and temperature are directly proportional; when
temperature increases, volume increases.
V1 V2
= (3.28)
T1 T2
Similarly, the Gay-Lussac law relates pressure and temperature for ideal gases such
that when temperature increases, pressure increases.
P1 P2
= (3.29)
T1 T2
The combined gas law is easily derived when system pressure, temperature,
and volume are all allowed to vary while the quantity of gas stays constant:
P1V1 P2V2
= (3.30)
T1 T2
EXAMPLE 3.13
Illustrating Charles’ law
A stack gas leaving a paint-drying oven has a volumetric flow rate of 1000 standard
cubic feet per minute (scfm) and an operating temperature of 400ºF.
a. Find the actual volumetric flow rate exiting the stack at 400ºF.
b. Determine the actual volumetric flow rate if the process temperature is
altered such that the temperature of the stack gas as it exits is 600ºF.
Solution part a
Charles’ law, Equation (3.28), relates the volume and temperature of a gas such that
V1 V2
=
T1 T2
Allow variable 1 to represent current operating conditions of 1000 scfm and 400ºF
and variable 2 to coincide with standard temperature and pressure (STP). As defined
by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, the temperature for standard condi-
tions is 68ºF (20ºC) and the pressure is 1 atm (101.325 kPa). Always use either the
Kelvin or Rankin absolute temperature scale when solving problems with the gas
laws. Recall that T1K2 = T1°C2 + 273 and that T1R2 = T1°F2 + 460. Begin by cal-
culating the absolute temperature for both conditions.
T1 = 168 + 4602 = 528 R

T2 = 1400 + 4602R = 860 R
V1 = 1000 scfm
Apply Charles’ law to find the volumetric flow rate at operating conditions.
1000 scfm V2
=
528 R 860 R
1000 cfm
actual volumetric flow rate = V2 = * 860 R = 1629 cfm
528 R
Solution part b
Apply Charles’ law again to determine the volumetric flow rate for the gas phase, once
process conditions have changed such that the exit gas temperature is 600°F = 1060 R.
V1 V2
=
T1 T2
1629 cfm V2
=
860 R 1060 R
V2 = 2008 cfm
3.6.3 Dalton’s Law of Partial Pressure

In a mixture of ideal gases, each gas exerts pressure independently of the others. The
partial pressure of each gas is proportional to the percentage by volume of that gas
in the mixture, or, the partial pressure is equal to the pressure that gas would exert if
it were the sole occupant of the available volume. Dalton’s law shows that the sum
of all the partial pressures is equal to the total pressure of the system.
PT = P1 + P2 + P3 + Á + Pi (3.31)
PT is equal to the total system pressure and P1 , P2 , etc. represent partial

pressures of each component in the system. Recall that the partial pressure
of component i is equal to the mole fraction of component i times the total

pressure:
Pi = yiPT (3.32)
ni Pi
where: yi = = ;
n PT
yi = mole fraction of component i in the gas phase,
ni = the number of moles of gaseous component i, and
n = the total number of moles of gas in the system.
3.6.4 Raoult’s Law and Henry’s Law

Both Raoult’s law and Henry’s law relate the amount of gas that at equilibrium can
dissolve in a liquid to the vapor pressure of the gas. Raoult’s law provides a rela-
tionship between the partial pressure and the vapor pressure of a pure component.
More specifically, Raoult’s law [Equation (3.33)] relates the partial pressure of a gas
component present above a liquid to the vapor pressure of the pure component and
the mole fraction of the component in the liquid phase.
Pi = P…i xi (3.33)
Table 3.5 Henry’s Constants Provided for Common Environmental Gases

in an Aqueous System at 25ºC
Common Presentations of Henry’s Law
Henry’s law expression PA = k HA xA PA = kCH 3A4
kH dimension atm L soln # atm

molsoln
Common Gases of Environmental Concern
O2 4.26 * 104 769
N2 8.5 * 104 1540
CO2 1.66 * 103 29.9
NH3 -1 0.017
9.38 * 10
Cl2 6.08 * 102 11.0
H2 7.1 * 104 128
H2S 2 10
5.53 * 10
CH4 4.257 * 104 769
SO2 4.61 * 101 0.83
O3 4.26 * 103 76.9
3A4 = aqueous-phase concentration of A, moles/L.

PA = partial pressure of A, atm
xA = mole fraction of A in the liquid phase
P…i = pure component vapor pressure, atm,

Pi = partial pressure of component i, atm, and
xi = mole fraction of i in the liquid phase.
Similarly, Henry’s law, written in terms of a liquid-phase mole-fraction con-
centration 1xi2, states that the equilibrium aqueous and gas-phase concentrations
are related.
Pi = kiHxi (3.34)
where kiH = Henry’s constant based on liquid-phase mole fraction, atm.

For ideal solutions, P…i = kiH . For most solutions, unfortunately, the relation-
ship is not this simple. In general, Raoult’s law best models the solution solvent and
Henry’s law best describes the solute behavior.
A variety of references provide Henry’s law constants, but caution should be
used when applying the law, because it is presented in a variety of forms, and constants
vary as different concentration units are applied. Table 3.5 provides a brief overview
of two common formulations of Henry’s law and associated appropriate units.
EXAMPLE 3.14
U s e H e n r y ’s l a w t o d e t e r m i n e e q u i l i b r i u m l i q u i d - p h a s e
concentrations
The concentration of oxygen in the atmosphere is approximately 20.9% by volume.
Oxygen, however, is only slightly soluble in water, and its solubility is a function of
temperature. As temperature increases, oxygen solubility in water decreases. For
many aquatic systems that rely on the presence of oxygen, this poses a potential
problem during summer months, when both temperature and the rate of biological
activity are at their highest. Use Henry’s law to estimate the maximum oxygen con-
centration available to aquatic life during both summer and winter months in Norris
Lake located in Maynardville, Tennessee, assuming 1 atm of pressure. Assume that
L # atm
average winter and summer high temperatures in Maynardville are 43.5ºF and 87.2ºF,
respectively. The Henry’s law constant for oxygen in water is 527.3 at 43.5°F
L # atm mol
and 857.7 at 87.2°F.
mol
Solution
Use the following form for Henry’s law (from Table 3.5), PA = kCH 3A4, to deter-
mine the oxygen solubility in water at 43.5ºF (6.4ºC) and 87.2ºF (30.7ºC). First,
determine the partial pressure of oxygen in the environment.
20.9
PO 2 = 1 atm * = 0.209 atm
100
Now, solve for the aqueous-phase concentration at 43.5ºF
PO2 0.209 atm mol O2
3O2143.5°F24 = = # = 3.96 * 10-4
kC
H L atm L
527.3
mol
Converting to a mass-per-unit-volume basis gives:
mol O2 32.0 g 1000 mg mgO2

O2143.5°F2 = ¢ 3.96 * 10-4 ≤¢ ≤a b = 12.7
L 1 mol O2 1g L
mg O2
Similarly at 87.2ºF, the solubility of oxygen is O2187.2°F2 = 7.8 .
L
S U M M A RY
Fundamental chemistry concepts often used by environmental engineers were pro-
vided. The concepts of elements and molecules were introduced and units of concen-
tration and chemical reactions were reviewed. Reaction stoichiometry was defined
and practice in balancing reactions was provided. A working definition of pH was
introduced and its importance in acid-base chemistry discussions was illuminated.
The chemical compounds associated with the carbonate system were highlighted in a
summation on alkalinity that outlined its importance in both natural and engineered
environments. Concepts of gas-phase chemistry were introduced. The behavior of
ideal gases was characterized using the ideal gas, Boyle’s, Charles’, and Henry’s laws.
Practical exercises were provided to highlight key ideas.
KEY WORDS atom common ion effect law of conservation of

acid Dalton’s law mass
alkalinity dissociation constant mass number
amphoteric dissolution molecular weight
atomic number electrons neutrons
atomic shell elements normality
atomic weight equivalent nucleus
base equivalent weight pH
Boyle’s law free radicals precipitation
Charles’ law Gay-Lussac law protons
chemical equation Henry’s law Raoult’s law
chemical reactions ideal gas law stoichiometry
combined gas law isotope valence
REFERENCES
Cicerone, R.J., and Oremland, R.S. (1988). Biogeochemical Aspects of Atmospheric Methane.
Global Biochem Cycles 2/4: 299–327.
CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 87th ed., Ed. D.L. Lide, Taylor & Francis, Boca
Raton, FL, 2006.
Godfrey, P.J., M.D. Mattson, M.F. Walk, P.A. Kerr, O.T. Zajicek, and A. Ruby III (1996). The
Massachusetts Acid Rain Monitoring Project: Ten Years of Monitoring Massachusetts Lakes
and Streams with Volunteers. Publication No. 171. University of Massachusetts Water
Resources Research Center. Available online at: http://www.umass.edu/tei/wrrc/
WRRC2004/pdf/ARMfinalrpt.PDF.
IPCC (2001). Climate Change 2001: The Scientific Basis. Contribution of Working Group I to the
Third Assessment Report of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change, Ed. Houghton, J.T.,
Ding,Y., Griggs, D.J., Noguer, M., van der Linden, P.J., Dai, X., Maskell, K., and Johnson, C.A.,
Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, United Kingdom, and New York.
Exercises 57
Neue, H. (1993). Methane Emission from Rice Fields: Wetland Rice Fields May Make a
Major Contribution to Global Warming. BioScience 43:7, 466–73.
Nordstrom, D.K, C.N. Alpers, C.J. Ptacek, and D.W. Blowes (2000). Negative pH and Extremely
Acidic Mine Waters from Iron Mountain, California, Environ. Sci. Technol., 34 (2):254–258.
Sawyer, C. L., McCarty, P. L., and Parkin, G. F. (2003). Chemistry for Environmental Engineers,
McGraw-Hill, New York.
VanLoon, G.W., and S.J. Duffy (2005). Environmental Chemistry a Global Perspective, 2nd ed,
Oxford University Press, Great Britain.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Benefield, L.D., Judkins, J.F., and Weand, B.L. (1982). Process Chemistry for Water and Waste-
water Treatment, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ.
Reynolds, T.D., and Richards, P.A. (1996). Unit Operations and Processes in Environmental
Engineering. PWS Publishing Company, 20 Park Plaza, Boston, MA.
Sander, R. (1999). Compilation of Henry’s Law Constants for Inorganic and Organic Species
of Potential Importance in Environmental Chemistry (Version 3). Available online at
http://www.henrys-law.org.
Sanks, R.M. (1982). Water Treatment Plant Design for the Practicing Engineer, Ann Arbor
Science, 230 Collingwood, Ann Arbor, Michigan.
Snoeyink, V.L., and Jenkins, D. (1980). Water Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, New York.
Viessman,W., and Hammer, M.J. (2005). Water Supply and Pollution Control, Pearson/Prentice Hall,
Upper Saddle River, NJ.
EXERCISES
3.1 In the accompanying table, calculate the atomic or molecular weight in grams
per mole for each of the elements or compounds listed. Also provide the chemi-
cal symbol or formula for each element or compound.
Element or compound Symbol or formula Atomic or molecular weight (g/mole)

Nitrogen
Potassium
Magnesium
Iron
Nitrate
Sodium carbonate
Manganese
3.2 In the accompanying table, calculate the equivalent weight in grams per
equivalent (g/eq) for each of the elements or compounds listed. Also provide
the chemical symbol or formula for each element, radical, or compound.
Element or compound Symbol or formula Equivalent weight (g/mole)

Sulfate SO2-
4
Bicarbonate
Magnesium
Iron (III) Fe3+
Nitrate
Sodium carbonate
Phosphate PO3-4
3.3 This problem involves an understanding of molarity and normality.

(a) Calculate the grams of hydrochloric acid (HCl) that must be diluted to a
volume of 1 liter to produce a concentration of 0.5M.
(b) Calculate the normality of 1 L of solution containing 45 grams of sodium
hydroxide (NaOH).
3.4 Balance the following reactions.
(a) CH 3OH + NO3- : N2 + CO2 + H 2O + OH -
(b) C 6H 14O2N + O2 + H + : CO2 + NH 4+ + H 2O
3.5 Calculate the pH and pOH of a 0.5N solution of hydrochloric acid (HCl) at
25ºC
3.6 Calculate the pH and pOH of a 0.001M solution of sodium hydroxide
(NaOH) at 25ºC.
3.7 Calculate the solubility of the following ionic compounds. Assume T = 25°C.
(a) Mg1OH22 1s2
(b) FeS1s2
3.8 Determine the volume in cubic feet occupied by 120 pounds of carbon diox-
ide at 1.5 atm and 40ºC.
3.9 What volume of oxygen at 30ºC and 0.21 atm is required for combustion of 20
g of propane gas 1C3H82?
3.10 A VOC incinerator is to be designed to oxidize an off-gas containing 1600
ppmv of toluene vapor and 12,000 actual cubic feet per minute (acfm) of air
at a temperature of 250ºF.
(a) Determine the standard volumetric air flow rate (scfm) that must be
treated by the VOC incinerator.
(b) Determine the actual volumetric air flow rate that must be treated by the
incinerator if the temperature is increased to 400ºF.
CHAPTER
Biological and Ecological

4
Concepts
4.1 INTRODUCTION
Objectives
When evaluating natural and engineered systems that involve living organisms,
In this chapter, you will it is important to consider biological and ecological concepts, especially the role
learn about: that microorganisms play with regard to the flow of energy and nutrients in
The abiotic and biotic the biosphere.
components of planet We begin with a brief introduction to ecology, the branch of biology that
Earth deals with the way living organisms (biota) interrelate and interact with the
Cell structure and environment.
classification of organisms Ultimately, the radiant energy of the sun sustains all life on Earth; initiat-
ing the flow of energy through the biosphere. Through photosynthesis, green
The major groups of
plants and algae utilize the sun’s energy to transform inorganic compounds
organisms found in
and nutrients from the soil into organic compounds that are used in the syn-
biological and ecological
thesis of starches, sugars, amino acids, and proteins. Plants, algae, and phyto-
systems
plankton are primary producers that are ultimately consumed by animals and
Microbial growth and the humans (consumers). When plants and animals die, their remains are used by
equations used in decomposers, consisting primarily of bacteria and fungi, allowing nutrients and
modeling the growth rate organic matter to be recycled.
of microorganisms The consumption of plants by animals that are in turn eaten or consumed
The flow of energy in by higher animal forms is called a food chain. Each step in the food chain is
ecological systems and called a trophic level, with energy being transferred up through the levels. The
through the food chain transfer of energy through the food chain is very inefficient, and, unlike the
The cycling of carbon, nutrients, the energy is not recyclable. At each trophic level, much of the energy
nitrogen, phosphorus, and is dissipated and irrecoverably lost as heat.
sulfur in ecological
systems
Lake classification and 4.2 BIOLOGICAL SYSTEMS
stratification Planet Earth consists of abiotic and biotic components. The abiotic or non-
Streeter-Phelps Dissolved living component is represented by the atmosphere (air), lithosphere (soil),
Oxygen Sag Model for and hydrosphere (water). It includes, for example, organic and inorganic
streams compounds, nonliving elements, climate, and the hydrologic cycle. The biotic
component (biosphere) contains all the living organisms on Earth and
includes plants, animals, microorganisms, and humans.
60 Chapter 4 Biological and Ecological Concepts
DNA Cell wall
Lipid
Cell membrane
Figure 4.1 Ribosomes

Capsule or slime layer
Schematic of a rod-shaped
Flagellum
bacterial (prokaryotic) cell. 1–2 mm in diameter and 10 mm long
4.2.1 Cell Structure

The basic functional and structural unit of all living organisms is the cell. There are
two types of cells, prokaryotic and eukaryotic, categorized primarily according to
their genetic material and the complexity of their structure. Prokaryotes’ cells are
the simplest. They have no nucleus or nuclear membrane; their genetic material,
deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) is contained in a circular loop called a plasmid.
Figure 4.1 is a simple schematic of a prokaryotic cell. Eukaryotes’ cells are more
complex, containing a true nucleus with a nuclear membrane, several chromosomes,
and a respiratory system located in mitochondria. Figure 4.2 shows a schematic of a
eukaryotic cell. The Acaryote, a third category sometimes mentioned, contains
viruses (Lester and Birkett, 1988). Viruses are entities that carry the information
necessary for replication but must invade and rely upon a living host cell in order to
replicate. Figure 4.3 shows a schematic of a virus.
4.2.2 Classification of Organisms

Biologists and microbiologists have developed several methods of classifying organ-
isms. Conventional taxonomic classification methods rely on organisms’ observable
properties, such as appearance or morphology, metabolic characteristics, and how
they interact with dyes or staining.A widely used system proposed by Whittaker (1969)
Figure 4.2 Mitochondrion Cytoplasm

Schematic of a eukaryotic
cell.
Nuclear Nucleolus
membrane
Nucleus
Ribosomes
Vacuole
Cytoplasmic
membrane
2 mm to > 100 mm in diameter

Section 4.2 Biological Systems 61
Hexagonal
head
Nucleic
acid
core
Contractile
sheath
Base
plate
Tail
fiber
Figure 4.3
20 nm up to 400 nm in diameter Schematic of a virus.
is made up of five kingdoms: Monera, Protista, Fungi, Plantae, and Animalia. Each
kingdom is further classified in the following order: phylum, class, order, family, genus,
and species. In the 1970s, microbiologists developed a new system that relies on phy-
logeny. Phylogeny classifies organisms according to their genetic characteristics and is
based on their evolutionary history. Under the phylogenetic classification (Madigan et
al., 2000), three domains (kingdoms) comprise all organisms: Archaea, Bacteria, and
Eukarya. All prokaryotic organisms are found in the Archaea or Bacteria domain.
Microbiologists and environmental engineers need to identify and classify
microbes for many reasons. For example, the identification and enumeration of
pathogens or disease-causing microorganisms in drinking water is essential, so that
the proper disinfectant can be selected and added to the water to prevent disease.
Engineers are also interested in optimizing biological processes associated with
wastewater treatment and remediation of contaminated groundwater and soil;
therefore, it is imperative to identify and classify the microorganisms involved.
The basic taxonomic classification unit is species. Species are groups of indi-
vidual organisms or strains that have similar characteristics or attributes. Groups of
species that have major similarities are called genera. For example, the bacterium
that causes cholera is Vibrio cholera (Brock, 1979). The species name is cholera and
the genus (singular for genera) is called Vibrio.
Two genera of microorganisms typically encountered during the biological
treatment of wastewater using the activated sludge process are responsible for nitri-
fication. Nitrification is modeled as a two-step, sequential process, mediated by the
genera Nitrosomonas and Nitrobacter.
4.2.3 Major Groups of Organisms

The major groups of organisms applicable to environmental problems are algae, bac-
teria, crustaceans, fish, fungi, helminths, macrophytes, metazoa, protozoa, rotifers,
stalk ciliates, and viruses. These organisms are found in natural systems such as lakes,
rivers, wetlands, and soils as well as engineered systems such as wastewater treatment
plants, landfills, and bioremediation sites. Each group will be briefly discussed in the
paragraphs that follow.
Algae
Algae are protists that range in size from unicellular phytoplankton to large multi-
cellular seaweeds. All algal cells contain plastids or chloroplasts and are capable of
photosynthesis. With the exception of the blue-green algae (cyanobacteria), all algal
Anabaena
Chlorella
Figure 4.4
Schematics of Anabaena
and Chlorella algae. 0.5–1.0 mm up to 60 mm in diameter
cells are eukaryotes. Algae are autotrophic organisms that utilize inorganic carbon
as their carbon source. Algae are the primary producers in the aquatic food chain. A
major concern to environmental engineers is excessive algal growth or blooms in
water-supply lakes and reservoirs, where they can clog intake structures and cause
taste and odor problems in water. In wastewater treatment lagoons, algae play a sig-
nificant role by producing oxygen, which bacteria and other microbes use for the
oxidation and degradation of organics in the wastewater. Figure 4.4 shows two types
of algae: Anabaena and Chlorella.
Bacteria
Bacteria are essential in the recycling of nutrients through ecosystems. They are
used in treating contaminated water and wastewater, and some species cause plant
and animal diseases. Figure 4.5 shows three bacterial cellular forms and arrange-
ments: Micrococcus, Streptococcus, and Bacillus. They are classified as Monerans,
normally reproducing by binary fission (splitting into two identical cells). Individual
bacteria are shaped spherically, cylindrically, or spirally. Most bacteria range in size
from 0.5 to 14 mm (Sullia and Shantharam, 1998). All bacteria have a rigid cell wall
that maintains the shape of the cell. The genetic material of bacteria is not contained
in a true nucleus but just incorporated into their cytoplasm.
Figure 4.5 Micrococcus Streptococcus Bacillus

Three bacterial cellular
forms and arrangements. 0.5–1.0 mm in diameter up to 25 mm long
Daphnia
0.2 to 5 mm long
Figure 4.6
Diaptomus
Examples of a Diaptomus
0.5 to 5 mm long and Daphnia.
Crustaceans and Microcrustaceans

Crustaceans are multicellular organisms that possess a hard body or shell belonging to
the arthropod group. Large crustaceans include shrimp and lobsters. Microscopic crus-
taceans (microcrustaceans), which serve as food for fish, include Cyclops, Daphnia
(water flea), ostracods, and copepods. They feed on other microorganisms, algae,
and organic matter. Figure 4.6 shows examples of the Diaptomus and Daphnia
microcrustaceans.
Fish
Fish are among the animals that have a spine or backbone (vertebrates). They are a
key unit in natural food webs and have a significant impact on plankton, macrophytes
(aquatic plants), and other aquatic organisms. Bioassays using fish and minnows are
used in toxicity testing of wastewater effluent. Change in the composition of a fish
may be attributed to pollution or to a change in its habitat.The diversity of fish species
is another indicator of environmental change. Figure 4.7 shows Dr. W. Jack Lackey
holding a rockfish.
Fungi
Fungi are nonphotosynthetic, eukaryotic protists. They are typically aerobic and
referred to as saprophytes, since they degrade and utilize decaying organic matter
from plant and animal remains. Fungi can tolerate low-pH or acidic conditions, low-
moisture, and low-nitrogen conditions better than most other microorganisms. They
are subdivided into molds, yeasts, and mushrooms. Molds are filamentous; yeasts are
nonfilamentous and are unicellular.
Mushrooms are a more highly differentiated form of fungi, forming basidia (the
structures we call mushrooms) above the ground. Molds and mushrooms reproduce
asexually (by budding or spores) and sexually (by spores). Yeasts reproduce asexu-
ally by binary fission or budding and sexually through the formation of ascospores;
they are facultative organisms that can grow either aerobically or anaerobically.
Yeasts are used in fermentation processes such as beer and wine production, in mak-
ing bread, and in producing antibiotics.
Fungi are important in the degradation of cellulose and in the composting of
sludge. Fungi cause athlete’s foot and ringworm. Two examples of fungi are shown in
Figure 4.8.
Figure 4.7
Photograph of Dr. W. Jack Lackey holding a rockfish (up to 200 cm long and 57 kg in weight).
Helminths
Worms collectively are described as helminths. They are macroinvertebrates—
that is, they lack a spine or backbone, and they are large enough to see with the
naked eye. Helminths are among the principal causative agents of disease in the
world and fall into three major phyla: Nematoda (roundworms), Platyhelminthes
(flatworms), and Annelida (segmented worms). Their primary significance is that
the species that cause most human diseases are infective as either adults or larvae,
while in other species it is the eggs that are infective. Helminth eggs have been
found to survive in oxidation pond sediments up to 10 years (Metcalf and Eddy,
2003). Chlorine disinfection and anaerobic digestion have been shown to be inef-
fective at inactivating helminth eggs. This raises questions regarding the applica-
tion of biosolids or sludge on land. Figure 4.9 shows an example of a leech and
flatworm.
Macrophytes
Macrophytes are large aquatic plants that may be attached to lake bottoms or
may be free floating; some are totally submersed, and others emergent. They pro-
vide habitat for microorganisms and other aquatic life. Examples of macrophytes
include duckweed, watercress, hydrilla, water lilies, water hyacinth, and water let-
tuce. Eutrophic lakes generally have an abundance of macrophytes; these can cause
Ascus Sporangiospores Figure 4.8

8–20 mm 1–5 mm Examples of fungi.
nuisance conditions in lakes used for recreational purposes. When these aquatic
plants die, aerobic bacteria consume large quantities of oxygen in degrading and oxi-
dizing the carbon and nitrogen that becomes available.This may lead to low dissolved-
oxygen levels in the water column. Examples of macrophytes are presented in
Figure 4.10.
Figure 4.9
Examples of a leech
and flatworm.
Leech Planaria
3–6 cm 5–13 mm
Figure 4.10
Examples of macrophytes.
Ceratophyllum Lily pad

1–3 m in length Up to 25 cm in diameter
Protozoa
Protozoans are motile, eukaryotic protists that typically range in size from 10 to
300 mm. Most are aerobic, nonphotosynthetic, and reproduce by binary fission. Pro-
tozoa feed on bacteria and particulate matter, serving as polishers of the effluent
from biological wastewater treatment facilities. Well-known protozoans include
Entamoeba histolytica, which causes amebic dysentery; Giardia lamblia, which is
responsible for beaver’s disease or Giardiasis; and Cryptosporidium parvum, which
Amoeba causes cryptosporidiosis. Giardia and Cryptosporidium form cysts and oocysts that
30–600 mm are resistant to traditional chlorine disinfection (Metcalf and Eddy, 2003). Figure
4.11 shows an amoeba.
Figure 4.11
Example of a protozoan. Rotifers
Rotifers are microscopic eukaryotic animals. Figure 4.12 shows a rotifer. Rotifers
are aerobic heterotrophs that consume bacteria and particulate organic matter by
ingestion. The presence of rotifera and/or stalk ciliates indicates a highly efficient
aerobic system.
Viruses
Viruses are submicroscopic particles ranging in size from 10 to 250 nm (1nm
10-3 mm2 (Henry and Heninke, 1996). According to cell theory, viruses are not liv-
ing organisms and are considered as parasites, since they can reproduce only in a
living host.Viruses are composed of a nucleic core consisting of either deoxyribonucleic
acid (DNA) or ribonucleic acid (RNA), surrounded by a protein capsid. All viruses
are pathogenic.
Each type of virus can infect only a specific type of host cell. There are specific
viruses that infect bacteria, plants, animals, and humans. Viruses that infect bacteria
are called bacteriophages. Human enteric viruses that cause waterborne disease
include Norwalk viruses, rotaviruses, reoviruses, and adenoviruses (Metcalf and
Eddy, 2003). A diagram of the Herpes Simplex virus is presented in Figure 4.13.
0.4 mm
4.2.4 Microbial Growth
Figure 4.12
Example of a rotifer. Microorganisms play a critical role in recycling nutrients in the biosphere and in
the treatment of wastewater, contaminated groundwater, and hazardous wastes. We
need to understand their nutritional requirements for growth and their phases of
growth in order to develop technologies that can be implemented to treat wastes
biologically. Microorganisms known as decomposers are especially important in
breaking down dead plants and animals, and excreta, thus enabling the recycle of
organics and nutrients in the biosphere.
Bacteria are ubiquitous in nature and are found in water, air, and soil. Hoover
Herpes simplex
and Porges (1952) proposed the following formula as the composition of a bacterium:
180–200 nm C5H7O2N. Another well-known formula (McCarty, 1970) includes phosphorus:
C60H87O23N12P. Based on the latter composition, a bacterial cell has a total formula
Figure 4.13 weight of 1374 and consists of approximately 52.4% carbon, 12.2% nitrogen, and
Diagram of a virus.
2.3% phosphorus by dry weight. It is easy to recognize that bacteria and other
microbes require carbon, nitrogen, and phosphorus so that their growth will not be
limited. Other trace nutrients such as sodium, iron, and potassium are also required.
In order to flourish, all microorganisms require acceptable environmental
conditions, including proper moisture, a pH in the range of 6 to 8.5, and a tempera-
ture ranging from 15° to 30°C. Various species of organisms can withstand extreme
pH and temperature conditions, and even a lack of moisture; however, this is not
routinely the case.
1 2 3 4 5
Log mass of microbes

En
do
gen
ou
ial
Declining growth
s
nt
Stationary
ne
po
Ex
Lag
Figure 4.14
Time Bacterial growth curve.
If a pure culture of bacteria were grown in the laboratory in a batch reactor

under proper environmental conditions, the growth curve depicted in Figure 4.14
would result. Normally, microbiologists measure the number of organisms grown,
while environmental engineers and scientists quantify the mass of organisms grown,
expressed as a concentration in milligrams of dry mass per liter of solution. Sus-
pended and volatile solids analyses are used in most environmental engineering
applications for measuring the concentration of microorganisms.
During Phase 1 of the growth curve, called the “lag phase,” the bacteria
become acclimated to their new environment. It takes time for organisms to
develop enzymes to synthesize from the media the compounds they need for
growth—thus the lag. During Phase 2, the “exponential growth phase,” the bacteria
are growing at their maximum rate. Excess substrate (food) and nutrients exist, so
there is nothing to limit growth. Phase 3 is the “declining growth phase”; the
growth rate slows and the bacterial death rate increases. Substrate becomes growth
limiting, and accumulation of metabolic waste products may inhibit growth. Phase 4
is the “stationary phase,” where the growth rate equals the death rate. As the death
rate starts to exceed the growth rate, the mass or concentration of bacteria starts to
decline. Exogenous or external substrate has been exhausted by this time. Finally,
Phase 5, the “endogenous phase” occurs, in which the death rate exceeds the
growth rate. Bacteria that are still alive oxidize their own cellular components and
feed on the remains of dead bacteria. The concentration of biomass decreases at an
exponential rate.
Microbial Growth Equations

Microbial growth in a batch reactor, as depicted in Figure 4.14, can be expressed by
the following equation.
dX
a b = mX (4.1)
dt G
b = microorganism growth rate, mass/(volume # time),

dX
where: a
dt G
m = specific growth rate of microorganism, time-1, and
X = microorganism concentration, mass/volume.
The specific growth rate of a microorganism 1m2 is associated with a particular

species. In most environmental engineering applications, heterogeneous cultures of
microbes are used, and so biokinetic coefficients for the overall heterogeneous cul-
ture are used in designing biological treatment systems.
The French microbiologist Monod (1949) found that the specific growth rate of
a microorganism depends on some growth-limiting substrate or nutrient. He devel-
oped Equation (4.2), which indicates that the microorganism’s specific growth rate is
a function of both the maximum specific growth rate and the concentration of the
limiting substrate.
mmax S
m = (4.2)
KS + S
where: S = growth limiting substrate or nutrient concentration, mass/volume,

mmax = maximum specific growth rate, time-1, and
Ks = half-saturation constant, concentration of limiting substrate or
nutrient at which half the maximum specific growth rate occurs,
mass/volume.
Combining Equations (4.1) and (4.2) yields Equation (4.3), which represents
microbial growth rate under batch operating conditions.
dX mmax XS
a b = (4.3)
dt G KS + S
Most full-scale engineered biological treatment systems use continuous-flow

reactors rather than a batch reactor. Equation (4.3) must be modified to account for
the portion of biomass or microorganisms lost through death and decay (endoge-
nous decay). Endogenous decay is represented by Equation (4.4).
dX
a b = - kdX (4.4)
dt ED
dX
where: a b = endogenous decay rate, mass/(volume·time), and
dt ED
kd = endogenous decay-rate constant, time-1.
The net growth rate of microorganisms in a biological reactor can then be
expressed as Equation (4.5).
dX dX dX
a b = a b + a b (4.5)
dt NG dt G dt ED
Substituting Equations (4.3) and (4.4) into the above expression yields:
dX mmax XS
a b = - kdX (4.6)
dt NG KS + S
Section 4.3 Ecological Systems 69
Cell yield or yield coefficient of a microbe is another useful biological term.

Qualitatively, it is defined as the quantity of biomass produced per unit of substrate
oxidized. Mathematically, the yield coefficient is expressed as follows:
1dX>dt2G
Y = (4.7)
1dS>dt2U
where: Y = microbial yield coefficient, mass of biomass produced/mass of

substrate utilized,
b = microbial growth rate, mass/(volume # time), and
dX
a
dt G
a b = substrate utilization rate, mass/(volume # time).

dS
dt U
The specific substrate utilization rate, U, with units of inverse time 1time-12 is
defined by the following equation.
dS
a b = UX (4.8)
dt U
Equation (4.9) may be developed by substituting Equations (4.1) and (4.8)

into Equation (4.7).
1dX>dt2G m
Y = = (4.9)
1dS>dt2U U
The specific substrate utilization rate (U) may be expressed as a Monod-type

function; Equation (4.10) shows substrate utilization as a function of both the maximum
specific substrate utilization rate 1Umax2 and the limiting substrate concentration (S).
Umax S
U = (4.10)
Ks + S
Equation (4.11) is another way of expressing net microbial growth rate by sub-
stituting Equations (4.4) and (4.7) into Equation (4.5).
dX dS
a b = Ya b - kdX (4.11)
dt NG dt U
The net growth rate of a heterogeneous culture is normally expressed as

Equation (4.11). This derived equation has been successfully demonstrated in actual
studies performed by Heukelikian et al. (1951) and is used in many environmental
texts: Peavy et al., 1985; Mihelcic, 1999; Reynolds and Richards, 1996; Metcalf and
Eddy, 2003; and Viessman and Hammer, 2005. Equation (4.11) is used in the design
and operation of activated sludge treatment processes.
4.3 ECOLOGICAL SYSTEMS

The study of the interrelationships among plants and animals (biota) and their
interactions with the environment is the branch of biology called ecology. Eco-
logical systems or ecosystems consider the organisms living together in a specific
environment, such as a pond, field, forest, or desert, and their dependence upon
each other and the abiotic environment for their survival. As an example, in a
lake ecosystem, the biotic components could consist of phytoplankton, Daphnia,
fish, submergent plants, and emergent plants. The abiotic components would include
temperature, inorganic and organic compounds, and nutrients in the water column
in addition to those found in the lake sediments. In an ecosystem, a population
denotes a group of organisms belonging to one species. A community is defined as a
number of populations living together.
4.3.1 Energy Flow in Ecosystems

Organisms that live in the biosphere use solar radiation along with organic and inor-
ganic compounds found in the Earth’s crust for energy. Table 4.1 lists the scientific
names for organisms based on their energy source, carbon source, and electron accep-
tor. Both energy and mass flow through ecosystems. The sun provides the energy for
sustaining all biological life on earth through the process of photosynthesis, which is
carried out by green plants in terrestrial ecosystems and phytoplankton (algae) in
aquatic ecosystems. Organisms that utilize sunlight as a source of energy are called
phototrophs.
Green plants and algae use inorganic carbon in the form of carbon dioxide
1CO22, bicarbonate 1HCO3-2, and/or carbonate 1CO32-2. Organisms that use inor-
ganic carbon for synthesizing cellular components are called autotrophs.
Green plants and algae are called primary producers and are at the bottom of
the food chain. Equation (4.12) is a simple representation of the photosynthesis
reaction carried out by green plants and any organisms that contain chlorophyll,
which allows them to convert sunlight into chemical energy.
6 CO2 + 6 H2O + 2800 kJ energy from sun

chlorophyll " C H O + 6 O (4.12)
6 12 6 2
Sunlight provides the energy for driving the reaction, and carbon dioxide pro-
vides the carbon source for the synthesis of glucose 1C6H12O62. The standard free
energy for the synthesis of glucose is 2800 kJ per mole. The glucose is then used
for synthesizing other organic compounds and plant biomass with the uptake of
nitrogen, phosphorus, sulfur, and other trace nutrients as needed by the plant. An
Table 4.1 Classification of Organisms Based on Nutrient Requirements

Function Source Name
Energy Organic compounds Chemoorganotroph
Inorganic compounds Chemoautotroph
Sunlight Phototroph
Carbon source Organic compounds Heterotroph
Inorganic compounds Autotroph
Electron acceptor Oxygen Aerobic
Nitrites, nitrates, sulfates Anoxic
Organic compounds Anaerobic, fermentative

Primary Primary Secondary

producers consumers consumers
(Autotrophs) (Herbivores) (Carnivores)
Figure 4.15
Trophic Trophic Trophic Representation of a food
level 1 level 2 level 3 chain.
important by-product of photosynthesis is the production of oxygen, which is

released to the atmosphere by the terrestrial plants or dissolved in water by the
aquatic plants. During the night, when energy from the sun is not available, plants
and algae use a process called aerobic respiration to meet their energy needs.
Organic compounds such as glucose and starches are oxidized to carbon dioxide
and water with the release of energy. In essence, aerobic respiration is the reverse
of Equation (4.12).
4.3.2 Food Chains

Energy is transferred through the biosphere via food chains. The food chain
involves a sequence of steps or trophic levels by which a smaller consumer is
eaten by a larger consumer. A simplified representation of a food chain is pre-
sented in Figure 4.15. Trophic Level 1 is represented by the primary producers
(plants and algae) that are eaten by the primary consumers. The primary con-
sumers (herbivores) are chemotrophic animals that eat or consume the primary
producers, and they represent Trophic Level 2. Trophic Level 3 is represented by the
secondary consumers, or carnivores, including humans, which are flesh eating ani-
mals. The “decomposers” are secondary consumers that derive their energy from
dead and decaying animal and plant remains. The decomposers, consisting of bac-
teria and fungi (chemoheterotrophic organisms), are primarily responsible for
the recycling of nutrients through the ecosystem. In the oceans, phytoplankton
are the primary producers, consumed by fish at a higher trophic level, with whales
or sharks consuming at the highest trophic level. In the terrestrial environment,
humans are at the highest trophic level. Figure 4.16 shows an example of a simple
food chain.
A food web is a representation of the complex relationships between organ-
isms and their food chains. Figure 4.17 is an example of a food web showing the
interdependence of a variety of species, including humans, fish, and microorganisms.
As energy flows through the ecosystem, it is lost at each trophic level due to
inefficiency. Most of the loss takes the form of waste heat that cannot be recovered.
Henry and Heinke (1996) present an example of the flow of energy in a midwestern
U.S. cornfield. The energy utilization by the cornfield was only 1.6%. They also
report that most natural ecosystems operate with overall energy-utilization efficien-
cies of 0.1% to 2%, with the most efficient agricultural systems operating around 3%.
A general rule of thumb is that only 10% of the energy consumed is converted to
biomass (Davis and Masten, 2004). Examples 4.1 and 4.2 show the loss of energy
through the food chain.
Trophic level Figure 4.16

1 2 3 4
Simple food chain.
Grass Grasshopper Mouse Hawk
Humans
Eagle
Herring gull
Cormorant Snapping
Salmon/lake trout Turtle
Forage Fish
Sculpin
Smelt
Chub Alewife
Invertebrates Plankton Waterfowl
Mineral nutrients
Note:
Bacteria and fungi Vegetation This is a simplified representation of the
food web showing the main pathways.
Food (energy) moves in the direction of
the arrows. The driving force is sunlight.
Depictions of the various organisms are
Dead animals and plants not to scale.
Figure 4.17
Example of a food web.
Source: http://www.epa.gov/glnpo/atlas/images/big05.gif
EXAMPLE 4.1
Energy balance and efficiency
A cow has consumed 100 kJ of energy in the form of grass, with 63% of it being
wasted in the form of excrement, urine, and gas.
a. If 5 kJ of energy is stored in the form of body tissues, how much energy was
used in respiration?
b. What is the energy efficiency of conversion for this trophic level?
Solution part a
energyin = energyout + energyrespiration + energyexcreta
energyexcreta = 0.63 1100 kJ2 = 63 kJ
100 kJ = 5 kJ + energyrespiration + 63 kJ
energyrespiration = 100 - 5 - 63 = 32 kJ
Solution part b
The energy efficiency of conversion is calculated using the following equation.
useful energy output 5 kJ

energy efficiency = 1100%2 = 1100%2 = 5.0%
total energy input 100 kJ
EXAMPLE 4.2
Energy use through food chain
Using the rule of thumb that 10% of the energy consumed is used in the production of
biomass, calculate the amount of energy passing up through the food chain depicted in
Figure 4.16, assuming that the grass contains 1000 joules of energy.
Solution
First, determine the energy passing through each trophic level by using the 10% rule.
For trophic level 1 (Grass), 100 J 11000 J * 0.10 = 100 J2 are passed to trophic level 2
(Grasshopper). From trophic levels 2 to 3 and 3 to 4, 10 J 1100 J * 0.10 = 10 J2 and
1 J 110 J * 0.10 = 1 J2, respectively, are passed up through the food chain.
1000 J 100 J 10 J 1J
Grass ¡ Grasshopper ¡ Mouse ¡ Hawk
At trophic level 4 (Hawk), only 1 J of energy from the grass goes into produc-
tion of biomass or body tissue in the hawk. The overall energy efficiency through
this food chain is calculated as follows:
useful energy output 1J

energy efficiency = 1100%2 = 1100%2 = 0.10%
total energy input 1000 J
4.3.3 Bioconcentration, Bioaccumulation, and Toxicity

Bioconcentration and bioaccumulation are important terms dealing with the accu-
mulation of toxic compounds in organisms. Bioconcentration relates to the sorption
of a toxic compound into an organism from the aqueous phase. For example, fish take
in harmful substances from the water as it passes their gills. Bioaccumulation is a seri-
ous problem that results in the accumulation of a toxic substance in the lipids and
fatty tissues of animals; the concentration of the compound or toxicant increases as
it passes up through the food chain. At the highest trophic level, humans may be
exposed to a contaminant that is several orders of magnitude higher in concentra-
tion than was observed in the water column and in the organisms at the lowest
trophic level. Table 4.2 shows the bioaccumulation or biomagnification of poly-
chlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) in the aquatic environment. Mercury and dichloro-
diphenyl-trichloroethane (DDT) are examples of toxic compounds that biomagnify
as they pass up through the food chain. This biomagnification depends on the spe-
cific compound ingested, its concentration, the length of exposure to the compound,
and the metabolism of the organism. In some instances, the organism may be able to
degrade and metabolize the toxic compound.
Toxicity effects of various chemical compounds on humans and animals may be
manifested as acute or chronic symptoms leading to death or serious illness. Acute
toxicity effects are normally expressed in periods of hours to days, whereas chronic
or long-term effects are manifested over weeks to years. Chemicals that cause cancer
or tumors in animals are called carcinogens. Certain other chemicals, even if they do
not cause cancer, may cause specific problems affecting the kidneys, liver, or other
vital organs.
Studying the effects of chemical compounds is complex, because a person may
be exposed to the contaminant in several different pathways or venues: ingestion
with food and water; inhalation during breathing; or absorption through the skin
(dermal). If a person or animal is exposed to several different chemicals or toxic
compounds, how is it possible to identify which one is causing the detrimental effect?
Exposure to some compounds individually may have a mild effect or none. How-
ever, if an animal is exposed to a mix of chemical compounds simultaneously, a syn-
ergistic effect may occur which causes a significant adverse effect more severe than
that of a compound acting by itself. Antagonistic effects may be realized for other
compounds, where the adverse effect of one compound is negated by a positive
effect from another.
The toxicological effects of various chemicals depend on several factors.
Not only the type of compound, but also the duration of the exposure and the
Table 4.2 An Example of the Biomagnification of PCBs

in an Aquatic Food Chain (Great Lakes)
Organism PCB concentration, ppm
Phytoplankton 0.025
Zooplankton 0.123
Smelt (fish) 1.04
Lake trout 4.83

Herring gull eggs 124
Source: http://www.epa.gov/glnpo/atlas/glat-ch4.html#3
Section 4.4 Nutrient Cycles 75
concentration of the contaminant may be important. In general, babies, children, the

elderly, and individuals with compromised immune systems are susceptible to adverse
effects at low concentration and short duration (i.e., low exposure). Environmental
toxicologists study the effects of suspected toxicants in laboratory animals and extrap-
olate the results, so that regulatory agencies may establish standards to minimize the
adverse effects on the public.
A group of chemicals called “endocrine disruptors” pose a serious threat to
humans and wildlife. These compounds interfere with hormones responsible for
growth, metabolism, and reproduction. Suspected organic compounds identified as
endocrine disruptors include pesticides and prescription drugs, as well as blood-
pressure medication and antibiotics. The next generation of environmental engineers
will develop the analytical tools for quantifying and monitoring these compounds in
addition to providing innovative technologies for removing them from surface and
groundwaters and wastewater.
4.4 NUTRIENT CYCLES

The principal sources of nutrients to ecosystems are the soil and geologic forma-
tions. Oxygen, nitrogen, and carbon dioxide are abundant in the atmosphere. Most
organisms are not capable of fixing atmospheric nitrogen into an organic form and
must consume other plants or animals for their source of nitrogen. Plants take up
nitrogen, phosphorus, and sulfur for synthesis of biomass. Plant-eating animals (her-
bivores) consume plants that in turn are consumed by herbivore-consuming animals
(carnivores) to complete the food chain.
Animal excreta and the remains of plants and animals undergo degradation and
decomposition by the decomposers. The decomposers, consisting primarily of bac-
teria and fungi, facilitate the decomposition process, making residual organics and
nutrients available for recycling in the biosphere. These organisms break down dead
plant and animal materials, releasing nutrients to the environment. Nutrients can be
recycled in the biosphere, whereas energy flows through the ecosystem. As energy
flows through the food chain, it is converted to heat and is lost as useful energy.
The next subsection briefly describes the carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus, and
sulfur cycles with particular emphasis on the environmental engineering signifi-
cance of each.
4.4.1 Carbon Cycle

Organic chemistry deals with various carbon-containing compounds. The term organic
matter, or organic carbon, has been applied to substances that originated from plants
and animals. All organic compounds contain carbon in combination with one or more
elements. Hydrogen is almost always a constituent. Organic compounds consisting
of only hydrogen and carbon are called hydrocarbons. The majority of organic com-
pounds contain carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen. Minor elements found in combination
with carbon include nitrogen, phosphorus, and sulfur. Uniquely, carbon has the ability
to bond with other carbon atoms to form chains or rings.
Carbon is the building block of life on earth. Compounds that contain carbon—
excluding carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, carbonates, cyanides, cyanates, and carbides—
are considered organic. Inorganic forms of carbon encountered in environmental
engineering include carbon dioxide (CO2), aqueous carbon dioxide (CO2)aq , car-
bonic acid (H2CO3), carbonate (CO 23 - ), and bicarbonate 1HCO3- 2. The inorganic
forms of carbon are used by plants for synthesizing carbohydrates; autotrophic
organisms use them for synthesizing lipids, amino acids, and proteins.
Carbon is cycled through the ecosystem as producers are eaten by consumers,

which in turn are eaten by other consumers in the food chain. When plants and ani-
mals die, decomposers facilitate the decomposition process, releasing nutrients and
organic matter to be utilized by other organisms. In the process, some of the organic
matter and residual nutrients will remain in place where the plant or animal has
expired. A portion of the organic matter is also oxidized to carbon dioxide and
released into the atmosphere. In aquatic ecosystems, the decomposition of plant and
animal matter may occur in the water column or in the sediments at the bottom of a
lake or river. The carbon dioxide released by the decomposers dissolves in the water,
reaching an equilibrium concentration according to Henry’s law, or escapes to the
atmosphere.Algae, in turn, during photosynthesis use the carbon dioxide as their car-
bon source for the production of starches and other organic compounds, releasing
oxygen as a by-product into the water to be used by other aquatic organisms.
Organic carbon forms found in nature include fossil fuels (crude oil, natural
gas, coal, and peat), organic matter found in detritus, and organic compounds found
in living plants and animals. When fossil fuels are combusted for the production of
energy, carbon dioxide, water vapor, particulates, nitrogen oxides, and sulfur oxides
are discharged into the atmosphere. Carbon dioxide and water vapor are considered
“greenhouse” gases and are involved in the theory of global warming. Two prevalent
forms of inorganic carbon are found in natural geological deposits of limestone
1CaCO32 and dolomite [CaMg1CO322]. Figure 4.18 shows a simplified diagram of
the carbon cycle.
4.4.2 Nitrogen Cycle

Nitrogen and nitrogenous compounds are very important in biological systems.
Nitrogen is a macronutrient required by all life forms. Microorganisms prefer
ammonium/ammonia 1NH4+/NH32 as their source of nitrogen, however; nitrates
1NO3-2 can be used at the cost of higher energy expenditure in converting them
into ammonium. Algae and plants prefer to use nitrates as their source of nitrogen.
Some bacteria are capable of fixing nitrogen from the atmosphere 1N22 and live in a
symbiotic relationship with plants to provide them with the nitrogen they need.
Figure 4.19 is a simplified schematic of the nitrogen cycle in surface water. As
was the case for carbon, nitrogen has gaseous components, with diatomic nitrogen
1N22 being the predominant form.
The control of nitrogen species entering water bodies from municipal and
industrial wastewater treatment plant discharges, as well as in stormwater runoff
Figure 4.18 CO2 Atmosphere

Simplified diagram of the
CO2 CO2 O2 O2 CO2
carbon cycle.
Photosynthesis Respiration
Fossil fuel
CO2 aqueous combustion, Plants Animals
Volcanic activity,
Forest firess Decomposition,
Aquatic Plants and Organisms Accumulation,
Compaction of
Water Peat, Dead Plants
Coal, Oil,
Natural Gas Land
Carbonate Rocks
Wastewater Precipitation
Effluent Dustfall Runoff Atmosphere
NH3/NH4 NO3 NH3/NH4 NO3 NH3/NH4 NO3 N2 N2

Organic N Organic N Organic N
Fixation NH3
NH3/NH4 NO3 Volatilization
Organic N Synthesis
Water NO33-
NO
Column
+
/NH44
NH33/NH
NH
Sedimentation Ammonification Nitrification Denitrification
Sediment
Layer Ammonification
Organic N NH3/NH4 Denitrification
Synthesis
Figure 4.19
The nitrogen cycle in surface water.
Source: EPA Nitrogen Control Manual (1993), p. 7.
from agricultural and urban areas, must be properly managed if cultural eutrophica-
tion is to be curtailed. The discharge of ammonia to receiving waters promotes the
consumption of large quantities of oxygen by the nitrification process, leading to
anaerobic conditions and the death of fish and other aquatic life. Free undissociated
ammonia is toxic to fish at a concentration of approximately 0.02 mg/L as nitrogen
(Benefield and Randall, 1980).
Nitrification
Nitrification is an aerobic transformation process that uses autotrophic microorgan-
isms to oxidize ammonium 1NH4+2 into nitrate 1NO3-2. Biological nitrification is
modeled as a two-step sequential reaction mediated by bacteria consisting of the
genera Nitrosomonas and Nitrobacter (EPA, 1993). Equations (4.13) and (4.14) show
the oxidation of ammonium and nitrite, respectively. Equation (4.15) is the overall
nitrification reaction excluding the synthesis of biomass.
NH4+ + 1.5 O2
Nitrosomonas " NO- + 2 H+ + H O (4.13)
2 2
NO2- + 0.5 O2
Nitrobacter " NO- (4.14)
3
NH4+ + 2 O2
Nitrifiers " NO- + 2 H+ + H O (4.15)
3 2
Equation (4.15) indicates that 4.57 g of O2 are required per g of ammonium

nitrogen 12 * 32/14 = 4.572 that is oxidized to nitrate. Using the equivalent weight
of CaCO3 as 50 g per equivalent, 7.14 grams of alkalinity expressed as CaCO3 are
required per gram of ammonium nitrogen oxidized 312 * 1/142 * 50 = 7.144. If the
alkalinity concentration is too low, nitrification will be inhibited, since the nitrifiers
require inorganic carbon as their carbon source for synthesizing biomass. Homework
Problem 3 presents the nitrification reaction, including the synthesis of biomass from
carbon dioxide.
EXAMPLE 4.3
Nitrification stoichiometric coefficients
Calculate the stoichiometric coefficients for oxygen consumption and alkalinity con-
sumption during nitrification using Equation (4.15).
Solution
For oxygen consumption:
2 moles O2 32 g O2 1 mole NH4+ - N

¢ ≤¢ ≤¢ ≤
1 mole NH4+ - N 1 mole O2 14 g N
g O2 consumed
= 4.57
g NH4+ - N oxidized
For alkalinity consumption:
2 moles H+ 1 g H+ 1 mole NH4+ - N 1 eq

¢ +
≤ ¢ +
≤ ¢ ≤¢ ≤
1 mole NH4 - N 1 mole H 14 g N 1 g H+
50 g alkalinity as CaCO3 g alkalinity as CaCO3 consumed
¢ ≤ = 7.14
eq g NH4+ - N oxidized
Denitrification
Denitrification is a biologically mediated, anoxic process that involves the reduction
of nitrate 1NO3-2 into nitrogen gas 1N22. It is widely used in advanced wastewater
treatment for the removal of nitrogen. A carbon source is required, since the denitri-
fiers are heterotrophic organisms. Biological dissimilatory denitrification is typically
modeled as a two-step sequential reaction, as follows, when synthesis of biomass is
excluded and methanol 1CH3OH2 is used as the carbon source.
6 NO3- + 2 CH 3OH ¡ 6 NO2- + 2 CO2 + 4 H 2O (4.16)
6 NO2- + 3 CH 3OH ¡ 3 N2 + 3 CO2 + 3 H 2O + 6 OH - (4.17)
The overall denitrification reaction is summarized in Equation (4.18).
6 NO 3- + 5 CH 3OH
Denitrifiers " 3 N + 5 CO + 7 H O + 6 OH - (4.18)
2 2 2
A significant point about denitrification is that a portion of the alkalinity

destroyed or consumed during the nitrification process is restored. Based on the stoi-
chiometric equation (4.18) for the overall denitrification process, 3.57 g of alkalinity
as CaCO3 are produced per g of nitrate nitrogen reduced (see Example 4.4).
EXAMPLE 4.4
Denitrification stoichiometric coefficients
Calculate the stoichiometric coefficient for alkalinity production during denitrifica-
tion using Equation (4.18).
Solution
6 moles OH- 17 g OH- 1 mole NO3- - N 1 eq

¢ - ≤ ¢ - ≤ ¢ ≤¢ ≤
6 moles NO3 - N 1 mole OH 14 g N 17 g OH-
50 g alkalinity as CaCO3 g alkalinity as CaCO3 produced
¢ ≤ = 3.57
eq g NO3- - N reduced
Deamination
Deamination or ammonification is the conversion of organic nitrogen to ammo-
nium/ammonia nitrogen 1NH4+/NH32. When plants and animals die, proteins are
first hydrolyzed by hydrolytic enzymes produced by bacteria. Specific types of bac-
teria are capable of removing the amino group 1NH22 from amino acids under
either aerobic or anaerobic conditions, releasing ammonia nitrogen and making it
available for recycling in the biosphere.
4.4.3 Phosphorus Cycle

Organic compounds containing phosphorus are found in all living organisms. Unlike
the carbon, nitrogen, and sulfur cycles, the phosphorus cycle has no gas-phase com-
ponent. Both inorganic and organic forms of phosphorus exist. Because of its rela-
tively low concentration in natural waters, as compared to the available quantities of
carbon and nitrogen, it is often the growth-limiting nutrient. Figure 4.20 is a simpli-
fied schematic of the phosphorus cycle.
Phosphorus occurs naturally in soils and rocks as calcium phosphate 3Ca31PO4224
and calcium hydroxyapatite 3Ca51PO4231OH24. These calcium compounds are only
slightly soluble in water, resulting in phosphorus concentrations of approximately 1 part
per billion (ppb) in most natural aquatic systems. Concentrations of phosphorus in nat-
ural waters would remain low if they were not impacted by human activity. Wastewater
discharges from industrial and municipal wastewater treatment plants (WWTPs) and
agricultural runoff from fertilizers are the major contributors of phosphorus release to
the environment.
Orthophosphate 1PO43-2, a soluble form of inorganic phosphorus, is readily
used by microorganisms and plants. Enhanced biological phosphorus removal
(EBPR) wastewater treatment processes utilize phosphorus accumulating organisms
(PAOs) that can take up excess phosphorus in the orthophosphate form. Chemical
precipitation of phosphorus from wastewater relies on the use of aluminum and iron
salts, such as aluminum sulfate and ferric chloride, for precipitating orthophosphate
to form insoluble forms, such as AlPO4 and FePO4 .
Water Column
Zooplankton Fish
Algae Particulate organic

Bacteria
phytoplankton phosphorus
Dissolved inorganic phosphate

and
dissolved organic phosphorus
Insoluble inorganic
Organic phosphorus
phosphates
Sediments
Figure 4.20
The phosphorus cycle.
4.4.4 Sulfur Cycle

Sulfur is essential for the synthesis of animal protein. In nature, the primary inor-
ganic form of sulfur is the sulfate ion A SO2-4 B found in natural waters. Sulfate is
taken up by plants and microorganisms for the production of cell tissue. Then ani-
mals consume plants and microorganisms for synthesizing their own cell tissue.
Upon death, sulfur is released to the environment through degradation of proteins
contained in the plant and animal tissues. Degradation is microbially mediated and
may occur either under aerobic or anaerobic conditions. Elemental sulfur 1S02 and
combined forms of sulfur such as pyrite 1FeS22 are found in geological deposits.
Figure 4.21 shows a schematic of the sulfur cycle.
Several important environmental problems are associated with sulfur and its
combined compounds. Odor and corrosion problems frequently occur in sanitary
sewer systems and at the headworks of wastewater treatment facilities, when sulfate
is reduced under anaerobic conditions to sulfides and hydrogen sulfide gas. Hydro-
gen sulfide is a malodorous gas that smells like rotten eggs and potentially causes
death to humans at a concentration Ú 100 ppm (EPA, 1985). The following equa-
tions show the reduction of sulfates as described above.
Anaerobic Bacteria " S2- + H O + CO
4 + organic matter
SO2- 2 2 (4.19)
S2- + H+ 4 HS- (4.20)

- +
HS + H 4 H2S (4.21)
Section 4.5 Limnological Concepts and Eutrophication 81
Oxidation: Beggiotoa, Oxidation: Beggiotoa,

Thiobacillus, Thiothrix Thiobacillus, Thiothrix
Elemental
Sulfur
S0
Reduction: Desulfovibrio
H2S SO3
Sulfide Sulfates
S2 SO32
Oxidation: Thiobacillus
Organic S
Figure 4.21
Degradation/Mineralization R-SH Assimilation Schematic of simplified
sulfur cycle.
In the presence of oxygen, sulfur bacteria (Thiobacillus) oxidize hydrogen

sulfide, converting it to sulfuric acid according to Equation (4.22).
H2S + 2 O2
Sulfur Bacteria " H SO (4.22)
2 4
Metallic components of screens and grit-removal equipment located at the

front of wastewater treatment facilities, and concrete, cast iron, and steel pipes, may
be corroded by the sulfuric acid produced.
Acid Mine Drainage

A serious environmental problem resulting from the mining of coal and precious
metals is acid mine drainage. When pyrite and other sulfide-bearing deposits are
exposed to water under aerobic conditions, bacteria will convert the sulfide to sul-
fate, releasing hydrogen ions and causing the pH of the water to drop. This phenom-
enon results in streams that are devoid of aquatic life. Equations (4.23) through
(4.25) illustrate the oxidation of pyrite by microorganisms such as Thiobacillus
thiooxidans, Thiobacillus ferrooxidans, and Ferrobacillus ferrooxidans:
+
4 FeS2 + 14 O2 + 4 H2O : 4 Fe2+ + 8 SO2-
4 + 8H (4.23)
4 Fe2+ + 4 H+ + O2 : 4 Fe3+ + 2 H2O (4.24)
4 Fe3+ + 12 H2O : 4 Fe1OH231S2 + 12 H+ (4.25)
Sulfur Dioxide Emissions

Although not shown in Figure 4.21, sulfur dioxide 1SO22 and other gaseous oxides of
sulfur are emitted to the atmosphere from the combustion of fossil fuels. The primary
sources are electrical power generating facilities and industries that burn fossil fuels
for energy. In the atmosphere, sulfur oxides form sulfuric acid causing “acid rain.”
4.5 LIMNOLOGICAL CONCEPTS AND EUTROPHICATION

Limnology is the study of the biological, chemical, and physical characteristics of
fresh-water lakes and rivers. Free-floating or suspended organisms that live in a body
of water are called plankton. Plankton in turn are subdivided into phytoplankton
DO Concentration, mg/L
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0
20
40
Depth, ft
60
80
100
120
Figure 4.22
DO profile for Norris Lake, September 5, 2007.
Source: http://tnfish.org/WaterQualitySampling_TWRA/.
(plant species such as algae) and zooplankton (animal species such as crustacean,
rotifers, and protozoa). Macrophytes are large aquatic plants that may be free
floating or attached to the bottom (emergent). Water-quality data for various
lakes are accessible by the internet. Typical data collected include: conductivity,
dissolved-oxygen (DO) concentration, pH, and temperature as a function of
depth. Figures 4.22 and 4.23 show the DO and temperature profile of Norris Lake
near Knoxville, Tennessee. Other water-quality data for Norris Lake and other
lakes in Tennessee may be accessed at the following website: http://tnfish.org/
WaterQualitySampling_TWRA/.
4.5.1 Stratification
Twice annually in temperate latitudes, normally during summer and winter, lakes
undergo stratification—i.e., formation of layers of water at different temperature
and density. Three distinct zones develop in a lake from the surface to the bottom:
the epilimnion, metalimnion, and hypolimnion, as shown in Figure 4.24. This phe-
nomenon is attributed to the affect of temperature on the density of water. Water
has a unique characteristic, in that the solid form (ice) has a lower density than the
liquid at 0°C. The maximum density occurs at a temperature of approximately 4°C.
At freezing, or 0°C, the ice that forms has a lower density than water at 4°C, so the
ice floats. Therefore, lakes freeze from the top down, making it possible for fish and
other aquatic life to live when ice covers the surface.
During the spring, energy from the sun heats the upper layer of water in the
lake (epilimnion), warming it from 0°C toward 4°C. The denser water sinks to the
bottom, creating currents that bring colder water to the surface. During this spring
Temperature, F
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
0
20
40
Depth, ft
60
80
100
120
Figure 4.23
Temperature profile for Norris Lake, September 5, 2007.
Source: http://tnfish.org/WaterQualitySampling_TWRA/.
turnover, because of the mixing action, sediments along with nutrients re-enter the
water column. During both the spring and the fall turnover, the contents of the lake
are well mixed, resulting in uniform levels of temperature, dissolved oxygen, and
nutrients throughout the water column.
As spring turns into summer, the top layer or epilimnion continues to be heated,
so that a warm layer of water overlies the cooler, denser layers. The epilimnion is well
mixed, well oxygenated, and essentially has the same temperature throughout. Below
the epilimnion is a layer of more dense water known as the metalimnion. During sum-
mer stratification, a significant change in the temperature occurs with depth ( Ú 1°C
per meter of depth) in the metalimnion, and this temperature gradient is known as the
thermocline. Below the metalimnion is the bottom layer of water, the densest and
coolest one, known as the hypolimnion. The temperature in the hypolimnion is essen-
tially the same throughout. Figure 4.24 also shows the temperature and DO profile
during summer and winter stratification in a typical lake. Note that these profiles are
similar in shape to those presented in Figures 4.22 and 4.23. Figure 4.25 shows the mix-
ing patterns during spring and fall turnover, and the temperature profile during winter
and summer stratification of a typical lake.
During the fall, the temperature in the epilimnion decreases, resulting in denser
water overriding warmer water beneath it. Eventually it cools and sinks to the bot-
tom, causing the warmer water to be forced to the surface. This is known as the fall
turnover. It causes complete mixing of the lake, allowing sediments, organics, and
nutrients to re-enter the water column. As temperatures drop during the winter
months, the lake continues to cool, and ice forms at the surface that is less dense than
the cooler water below it. The temperature profile increases from 0°C at the surface
to 4°C, causing winter stratification of the lake.
Epilimnion Epilimnion
Metalimnion
Metalimnion
Hypolimnion
Hypolimnion
4C 0 mg/L DO
Lake Stratification Temperature and DO Profile of Lake During Summer Stratification
0C 9.5 mg/L DO
Epilimnion
Metalimnion
Hypolimnion
44˚C
C 0 mg/L DO
Temperature and DO Profile of Lake During Winter Stratification
Figure 4.24
Lake stratification during summer and winter.
4.5.2 Lake Classification

Lakes are classified according to nutrient and organic enrichment as oligotrophic,
eutrophic, or mesotrophic. Oligotrophic lakes are typically found in colder climates,
have low concentrations of nutrients and organics, low levels of algae and macro-
phytes, abundant dissolved oxygen, and good transparency. Eutrophic lakes have the
opposite characteristics: high levels of organics and nutrients, low dissolved oxygen in
the hypolimnion, high concentrations of algae and macrophytes, and poor trans-
parency. Intermediate between these two types are mesotrophic lakes, which have
intermediate levels of organics, nutrients, and oxygen, but generally have an abun-
dance of fish.
Over time, a build up of nutrients, organics, and sediments leads to natural
aging or eutrophication of a lake or body of water. This may take several hundred
years, ultimately turning the lake into a swamp or bog. Cultural eutrophication
accelerates this natural aging process due to the discharge of organics, nitrogen,
and phosphorus from wastewater treatment facilities and stormwater runoff that
contains nutrients and sediment. Both nitrogen and phosphorus stimulate algal
growth, and the concentration of these nutrients should be limited in wastewater
discharges and from surface runoff. Scientists and engineers tend to agree that
Ice Cover
0C 4C
2C 4C
4C 4C
4C
4C
Winter Stratification Spring Turnover
25C
4C 4C
22C
20C
8C 8C
8C
7C
8C
6C 6C
Summer Stratification Fall Turnover
Figure 4.25
Temperature and mixing profiles during turnover and stratification.
phosphorus is the growth-limiting nutrient in the prevention of eutrophication

and excessive algal growth, since there are several organisms that are capable of
fixing nitrogen from the atmosphere. According to Liebig’s law of the minimum,
the yield of any organism is directly related to the concentration of the least
abundant nutrient or substrate necessary for growth. With regard to phosphorus,
a total phosphorus (TP) concentration of 0.01 g/m3 1mg/L2 is recommended as
the boundary condition between an oligotrophic and mesotrophic lake. The
boundary TP concentration between a mesotrophic and eutrophic water body is
0.02 g/m3 1mg/L2.
4.5.3 Dissolved-Oxygen Depletion in Streams

The discharge of wastes into a stream or lake can lead to unfavorable conditions for
the aquatic life when the water body’s assimilative capacity is exceeded. Streams
have natural assimilative abilities to oxidize organic and nitrogen compounds by
indigenous heterotrophic and autotrophic bacteria. In this process, oxygen serves
as the electron acceptor and is utilized by the bacteria in the oxidation of car-
bonaceous (organic) and nitrogenous compounds. Therefore, the dissolved-oxygen
Table 4.3 Solubility of Oxygen in Fresh Water at Atmospheric Pressure

Temperature (°C) Dissolved-oxygen concentration (mg/L)
0.0 14.62
1.0 14.22
2.0 13.83
3.0 13.46
4.0 13.11
5.0 12.77
6.0 12.45
7.0 12.14
8.0 11.84
9.0 11.56
10.0 11.29
11.0 11.03
12.0 10.78
13.0 10.54
14.0 10.31
15.0 10.08
16.0 9.87
17.0 9.67
18.0 9.47
19.0 9.28
20.0 9.09
21.0 8.92
22.0 8.74
23.0 8.58
24.0 8.42
25.0 8.26
Source: Standard Methods (1998), pp. 4–132.
(DO) concentration will decrease with time and distance downstream from the
point of discharge. This process is known as deoxygenation; typically it is modeled
by a first-order reaction using the parameter, ultimate biochemical oxygen
demand (L):
RDEOXYGENATION = kDL (4.26)

where:
RDEOXYGENATION = rate of deoxygenation, equal to the rate at which oxygen
is being removed from a stream, mg/L # d,
kD = deoxygenation rate coefficient (base e), equal to the BOD rate con-
stant (k), d-1, and
L = ultimate biochemical oxygen demand (BOD), mg/L.
The ultimate BOD represents the total quantity of oxygen consumed by bacteria at
20°C for the oxidation of organic compounds to carbon dioxide and water.
As dissolved oxygen is being removed from the stream due to deoxygenation,
another process called reaeration is occurring simultaneously. Reaeration is the
process in which oxygen is transferred by diffusion across the water surface exposed
to the atmosphere. Water traveling over rocks and through rapids entrains more oxy-
gen than does a slower-moving river. The equilibrium or saturation concentration of
dissolved oxygen is estimated using Henry’s law and is a function of temperature.
Table 4.3 lists the DO concentrations in fresh water as a function of temperature. A
listing of reaeration-rate coefficients for various types of water bodies is presented in
Table 4.4. The reaeration process is modeled as a first-order reaction:
RREAERATION = - k2D (4.27)
where:
RREAERATION = rate of reaeration which is equal to the rate at which oxy-
gen is transferred into the stream or water body, mg/L # d,
k2 = reaeration rate coefficient (base e), d-1, and
D = dissolved-oxygen deficit, mg/L.
The DO deficit is the difference between the DO saturation concentration and
the actual or measured dissolved-oxygen concentration in the water:
D = DOsat - DO (4.28)
where:
D = DO deficit, mg/L,
DOsat = DO saturation concentration at a specified temperature and pres-
sure, mg/L, and
DO = actual or measured DO concentration in the water, mg/L.
Figure 4.26 shows a plot of DO versus time of travel in a river.The concepts of deoxy-
genation and reaeration are illustrated in this figure.
Table 4.4 Reaeration Coefficients 1k22

Water Body k2 @ 20°C, d-1
Small ponds and backwaters 0.1 – 0.23
Sluggish streams and large lakes 0.23 – 0.35
Large streams of low velocity 0.35 – 0.46
Large streams of normal velocity 0.46 – 0.69
Swift streams 0.59 – 1.15
Rapids and water falls Greater than 1.15
Source: Peavy, Rowe, and Tchobanoglous (1985), p. 87.

DO Saturation Concentration
Dissolved Oxygen Concentration

Do Dc D
Critical
Deficit
Reaeration Rate
Exceeds Deoxygenation Rate
Deoxygenation Rate
Exceeds Reaeration Rate
Figure 4.26
DO versus time. Time of Travel
Should the deoxygenation process exceed the reaeration process in a stream,

the DO level will drop, which may lead to anaerobic conditions. Anaerobic condi-
tions in a water body will result in the death of most fish and aquatic organisms, along
with the production of obnoxious odors and floating solids. A DO concentration of
greater than 4 or 5 mg/L is necessary to support game fish.
Point sources of pollution (such as industrial and municipal wastewater treatment
plant discharges) along with nonpoint sources (agricultural and urban stormwater
runoff) can overwhelm the assimilative capacity of a stream or lake. Heterotrophic and
autotrophic bacteria indigenous to these water bodies will degrade the carbonaceous
and nitrogenous compounds, consuming large quantities of oxygen, as discussed earlier
in this chapter. It is imperative that environmental engineers understand the mecha-
nisms of deoxygenation and reaeration and the implications of discharging organic and
nitrogenous compounds into surface waters.
Streeter-Phelps DO Depletion Model

The concept of “dissolved-oxygen depletion” was first described by Streeter and
Phelps (1925). They provided what is now considered the classical approach for mod-
eling the impact of organic wastes discharged into receiving streams. Their model
describes the simultaneous transfer and uptake of oxygen in a river by the following
differential equation:
dD
= kDL - k2D (4.29)
dt
where:
= change in the DO deficit (D) with time, mg/L # d.

dD
dt
All other terms have been previously defined. The ultimate BOD (L) as a
function of time (t) is modeled as a first-order reaction.
L = Lo e-kD t (4.30)
where:
Lo = ultimate BOD concentration after the stream and wastewater discharge
have mixed, mg/L,
t = time of travel of wastewater discharge downstream, days, and
e = base “e”, 2.71828.
The ultimate BOD concentration 1Lo2 is calculated using Equation (4.31).

Qstream 1Lstream2 + Qww 1Lww2
Lo = (4.31)
Qstream + Qww
where:
Qstream = flow rate in stream, volume/time,
Qww = flow rate of wastewater discharged into stream, volume/time,
Lstream = ultimate BOD concentration of stream prior to wastewater dis-
charge, mg/L, and
Lww = ultimate BOD concentration of wastewater, mg/L.
Substituting Equation (4.30) into Equation (4.29) results in Equation (4.32).
dD
= kDLoe-kD t - k2D (4.32)
dt
Equation (4.32) may be integrated using the boundary conditions at t 0,
D D0, and L = Lo , and at t = t, D = Dt , and L = Lt , resulting in the general
form of the Streeter-Phelps Equation (4.33) used for estimating the DO deficit
at downstream locations from the point of discharge:
kDLo
Dt = C e1-kDt2 - e1-k2t2 D + Doe1-k2t2 (4.33)
k2 - kD
where:
Dt = DO deficit at any time t, downstream of the discharge point, mg/L,
t = time of travel of wastewater discharge downstream, days, and
Do = DO deficit at the point of discharge, mg/L.
To calculate the DO deficit at the point of discharge, the DO concentration at
the point of discharge must be calculated using Equation (4.34).
Qstream 1DOstream2 + Qww 1DOww2
DOo = (4.34)
Qstream + Qww
where:
DOstream = DO concentration of stream prior to wastewater discharge,
mg/L, and
DOww = DO concentration of wastewater, mg/L.
The DO deficit 1Do2 at the point of discharge can then be calculated using Equa-
tion (4.35).
Do = DOsat - DOo (4.35)
Temperature variations affect biological and chemical reactions. Equation (4.36)

is the general form of the equation used for making temperature corrections to any type
of rate constant or coefficient. It was derived from the Arrhenius-van’t Hoff equations.
k1T°C2 = k120°C2 1u21T°C - 20°C2 (4.36)
where:
k1T°C2 and k120°C2 = rate constant or coefficient at specified temperature in
°C and at 20°C, respectively, and
u = temperature-correction coefficient, dimensionless.
Both the reaeration 1k22 and deoxygenation 1kD2 rate coefficients must be
corrected for temperature variations other than 20°C. Metcalf and Eddy (1991)
recommend the following temperature-correction coefficients 1u2 for adjusting
these rate coefficients for temperature variations. A theta 1u2 value of 1.024 should
be used for correcting k2 . The deoxygenation 1kD2 rate coefficient should be cor-
rected with a 1u2 value of 1.145 when the temperature is … 20°C and 1.056 when
the temperature is between 20 and 30°C.
The maximum dissolved-oxygen deficit will occur where the reaeration rate
equals the deoxygenation rate. This point is known as the critical point, and the time
required to reach it can be determined by differentiating Equation (4.33) and set-
ting the derivative equal to zero. Solving for time gives:
1 k2 Do 1k2 - kD2
tc = ln B ¢1 - ≤R (4.37)
k2 - kD kD kDLo
where tc = time of travel to the critical deficit point in the stream, days.
The distance traveled (x) for a river flowing at a constant velocity (u) can be deter-
mined by multiplying the stream velocity by the travel time (t). Example 4.5 illustrates
how to use the Streeter-Phelps equations for locating the critical deficit point in a stream.
EXAMPLE 4.5
Calculating critical deficit point in a stream
A municipal WWTP discharges 22.5 million gallons per day of secondary effluent
containing 30 mg/L of ultimate BOD at 26.7°C with 1.5 mg/L of dissolved oxygen.
The stream flow is 161 cubic feet per second (cfs) at a velocity of 1.5 feet per second
(fps) and an average depth of 5 ft. The temperature of the stream before the waste-
water enters is 21°C. The stream is 85% saturated with oxygen and has an ultimate
BOD of 2.0 mg/L. The reaeration 1k22 and deoxygenation 1kD2 rate coefficients are
0.35 d-1 and 0.20 d-1, respectively at 20°C. Determine the following:
a. the wastewater flow rate in cfs;
b. the temperature of the combined wastewater and stream;
c. the dissolved-oxygen concentration of the mixture of wastewater and
stream;
d. the DO deficit of the mixture of wastewater and stream;
e. the ultimate BOD concentration of the mixture of wastewater and stream;
f. the distance downstream 1xc2 to the point of minimum DO concentra-
tion, and
g. the minimum DO concentration in stream. Also:
h. Plot the DO deficit versus time starting at 0 and going to 3.0 days in incre-
ments of 0.1 day.
Solution part a
The wastewater flow rate is converted from million gallons per day to cubic feet per
second to be consistent with the flow units for the stream. Alternatively, the stream-
flow units of cfs could be converted to million gallons per day.
MG 106 gal 1d 1h 1 min 1 ft3

Qww = 22.5 ¢ ≤a ba ba b¢ ≤ = 34.8 cfs
d MG 24 h 60 min 60 s 7.48 gal
Solution part b
The temperature of the mixture of the stream and wastewater is determined as follows:
Qstream 1Tstream2 + Qww 1Tww2 161 cfs121°C2 + 34.8 cfs126.7°C2
To = = = 22°C
Qstream + Qww 161 cfs + 34.8 cfs
Solution part c
Determine the DO concentration of the combined water and wastewater at the point of
discharge. The DO concentration in the stream above the discharge is estimated as fol-
lows.The DO saturation in water at 21°C is 8.92 mg/L; however, the stream is only 85%
saturated, therefore the saturated concentration must be multiplied by 0.85, as follows:
DOstream = 0.8518.92 mg>L2 = 7.6 mg>L
Qstream 1DOstream2 + Qww 1DOww2
DOo =
Qstream + Qww
161 cfs17.6 mg>L2 + 34.8 cfs11.5 mg>L2
= = 6.5 mg>L
161 cfs + 34.8 cfs
Solution part d
Calculate the initial oxygen deficit 1Do2 at the point of discharge. First, look up in
Table 4.3 the DO saturation concentration of water at 22°C (the temperature of the
mixture of water and wastewater), which is 8.74 mg/L.
Do = DOsat - DOo = 8.74 mg>L - 6.5 mg>L = 2.2 mg>L
Solution part e
Determine the ultimate BOD concentration 1Lo2 of the mixture of water and
wastewater at the point of discharge.
Qstream 1Lstream2 + Qww 1Lww2 161 cfs12.0 mg>L2 + 34.8 cfs130 mg>L2
Lo = =
Qstream + Qww 161 cfs + 34.8 cfs
= 7.0 mg>L
Solution part f
Next, correct the reaeration and deoxygenation rate coefficients for the tempera-
ture of 22°C. Use theta values 1u2 of 1.024 and 1.056 for correcting k2 and kD ,
respectively.
k1T°C2 = k120°C21u21T°C - 20°C2
k2122°C2 = k2120°C211.0242122°C - 20°C2 = 0.35d -111.0242122°C - 20°C2 = 0.37d -1
kD122°C2 = kD120°C211.0562122°C - 20°C2 = 0.20d-111.0562122°C - 20°C2 = 0.22d -1
Determine the time of travel 1tc2 to reach the point of minimum DO in the stream.
1 k2 Do1k2 - kD2
tc = ln B ¢ 1 - ≤R
k2 - kD kD kDLo
mg
-1 2.2 10.37 - 0.22 d-12
1 0.37 d L
tc = -1 -1
ln C £1 - ≥ S = 1.9 days
0.37 d - 0.22 d 0.22 d-1 0.22 d-117.0 mg>L2
The distance downstream to the point of minimum DO concentration is deter-

mined by multiplying the critical time of travel 1tc2 by the stream velocity.
ft 24hr 60 min 60s
xc = tc * velocity = 1.9d * 1.5 * * *
s 1d 1hr min
xc = 246, 240 ft = 46.6 miles
Solution part g
The value of the minimum deficit is found by substituting the critical time 1tc2 into
Eq. (4.33).
kDLo
Dc = C e1-kDtc2 - e1-k2tc2 D + Doe1-k2tc2
k2 - kD
0.22 d-1 17.0 mg>L2 -1 -1

Dc = -1 -1 C e 1-0.22d * 1.9d2
- e 1- 0.37d * 1.9d2
D
0.37 d - 0.22 d
mg 1-0.37d-1 * 1.9d2
+ 2.2 e = 2.8 mg>L
L
The minimum DO concentration in the stream may be calculated by substi-
tuting into Eq. (4.28) and rearranging it.
Dc = DOsat - DOc
DOc = DOsat - Dc = 8.74 mg /L - 2.8 mg /L = 5.9mg /L
Solution part h
A plot of the dissolved oxygen deficit versus time from 0 to 3.0 days in increments of
0.1 days is presented in the following figure. Notice the deficit at the critical time of
1.9 days is 2.8 mg/L.
3.00
Dc 2.8
2.50
Dissolved oxygen deficit, mg/L
2.00
1.50
1.00
0.50
0.00
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 tc 1.9 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
Time of travel, days
References 93
S U M M A RY
This chapter introduced the basic concepts of biology and ecology that are important
to environmental engineers. Ecology was defined as the branch of biology dealing
with the interrelationships between living organisms and the interactions between
these organisms and their environment. Biological concepts were presented in
which the cell was described as the basic functional and structural unit of all living
organisms. The taxonomic classification of organisms based on genus and species
was discussed. This was followed by a description of the major groups of organisms
encountered in environmental problems: algae, bacteria, crustaceans, fish, fungi,
helminths, macrophytes, protozoa, rotifers, and viruses. Microbial growth rate and
the equations used for modeling microbial growth were presented. The importance
of photosynthesis and the flow of energy from the sun through ecosystems was
explained. Food chains consisting of primary producers (plants and algae) that are
consumed by primary and secondary consumers (herbivores and carnivores) allow
energy to be transferred through the biosphere. Bioconcentration of a toxic com-
pound involves the uptake of the compound into an organism from the aqueous
phase whereas bioaccumulation is the magnification in concentration of a com-
pound as it passes up through food chains. The use and recycling of nutrients in
ecosystems was discussed by presenting the carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus, and sulfur
cycles. The chapter concluded with an introduction to limnology, the study of the
physical, chemical, and biological characteristics of fresh water lakes and rivers. The
Streeter-Phelps Dissolved Oxygen Sag Model was presented along with an example
problem to illustrate how the discharge of municipal wastewater effluent can lead to
low dissolved oxygen levels in receiving streams.
abiotic component ecological systems photosynthesis KEY WORDS

bioaccumulation eukaryotic cell prokaryotic cell
bioconcentration eutrophication producers
biotic component food chain reaeration
consumers limnology stratification
denitrification microbial growth turnover
deoxygenation nitrification
dissolved oxygen sag nutrient cycles
REFERENCES
American Public Health Association, American Water Works Association, Water Environment
Federation (1998). Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 20th ed.,
American Public Health Association, Washington, DC.
Benefield, L.D., and Randall, C.W. (1980), Biological Process Design for Wastewater Treatment,
Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ.
Brock, T.D. (1979). Biology of Microorganisms, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ.
Crites, R., and Tchobanoglous, G. (1998). Small and Decentralized Wastewater Management
Systems, WCB/McGraw-Hill, New York, NY.
Davis, M.L., and Masten, S.J. (2004). Principles of Environmental Engineering and Science,
McGraw Hill, New York, NY.
Environmental Protection Agency (1985). Design Manual Odor Control and Corrosion Control
in Sanitary Sewerage Systems and Treatment Plants, EPA/625/1-85/0187, Office of Research
and Development, Washington, DC.
Environmental Protection Agency (1993). Manual Nitrogen Control, EPA/625/R-93/010,
Office of Research and Development, Washington, DC.
Environmental Protection Agency (2007). http://www.epa.gov/glnpo/atlas/images/big05.gif,

accessed October 20, 2008.
Henry, J.G., and Heinke, G.W. (1996). Environmental Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall,
Heukelekian, H., Oxford, H.E., and Manganelli, R. (1951). Factors Affecting the Quantity of
Sludge Production in the Activated Sludge Process, Sewage and Industrial Wastes,Vol. 23, 945.
Hoover, S.R., and Porges, N. (1952). Assimilation of Dairy Wastes by Activated Sludge, II: The
Equation of Synthesis and Oxygen Utilization, Sewage and Industrial Wastes, Vol. 24.
Lester, J.N., and Birkett, J.W. (1988). Microbiology and Chemistry for Environmental Engineers,
E & FN Spon, London, England.
Madigan, M.T., Martinko, J.M., and Parker, J. (2000). Brock Biology of Microorganisms, 9th
ed., Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ.
McCarty, P.L. (1970). Phosphorus and Nitrogen Removal by Biological Systems, in Proceedings,
Wastewater Reclamation and Reuse Workshop, Lake Tahoe, CA, June 25–27, 1970.
Metcalf and Eddy (1991). Wastewater Engineering, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Metcalf and Eddy (2003). Wastewater Engineering: Treatment and Reuse, McGraw-Hill,
New York.
Monod,J.(1949).The Growth of Bacterial Cultures,Annual Review of Microbiology,Vol. 3,371–394.
Mihelcic, James R. (1999). Fundamentals of Environmental Engineering, John Wiley & Sons,
Inc., Danvers, MA.
Peavy, H.S., Rowe, D.R., and Tchobanoglous, G. (1985). Environmental Engineering, McGraw-
Hill Book Company, New York.
Reynolds, T.D., and Richards, P.A. (1996). Unit Operations and Unit Processes in Environmental
Engineering, PWS Publishing, Boston.
Streeter, H.W., and Phelps, E.B. (1925). A Study of the Pollution and Natural Purification of
the Ohio River, U.S. Public Health Service Bulletin No. 146.
Sullia, S.B., and Shantharam, S. (1998). General Microbiology, Science Publishers Inc., Enfield, NH.
Viessman, W., and Hammer, M.J. (2005). Water Supply and Pollution Control, Pearson Prentice
Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ.
Whittaker, Robert (1969). New Concepts of Kingdoms or Organisms. Evolutionary Relations
Are Better Represented by New Classifications than by the Traditional Two Kingdoms,
Science, Vol. 163, 150–160.
EXERCISES
4.1 The following chemical formula is often used for representation of a bacterial
cell, C60H87O23N12P1 .
(a) Determine the mass (mg) of each element in 3000 mg of bacterial cells.
(b) Suppose 25 mg/L of ammonia nitrogen and 5 mg/L of orthophosphate as
phosphorus are available for growing bacteria. If other nutrients are in
abundance, which is the limiting nutrient—nitrogen or phosphorus?
(c) What mass of bacterial cells could be produced in terms of milligrams of
bacterial cells per liter of water based on the limiting nutrient in Part b?
(d) Suppose the nitrogen source was cut to 15 mg/L of ammonia nitrogen.
How much bacterial cell mass (mg/L) could be produced?
(e) Suppose the phosphorus source was cut to 4 mg/L of orthophosphate as
phosphorus. How much bacterial cell mass (mg/L) could be produced?
4.2 The term C10H19O3N1 is often used to represent the biodegradable organic
material in wastewater. In the past, most biological denitrification processes
occurred after aerobic treatment of the wastewater, necessitating the addition
of a carbon source such as methanol 1CH3OH2. If the denitrification process
precedes aerobic treatment, the organic matter in the influent wastewater can
serve as the carbon source for denitrification. The following stoichiometric
Exercises 95
equation shows the overall denitrification reaction when the biodegradable

organic matter in the incoming wastewater is used rather than adding an exter-
nal source such as methanol or acetate.
C10H19O3N1 + 10 NO3- : 5 N2 c + 10CO2 + 3 H2O + NH3 + 10 OH-
(a) Using the above equation, list the organic donor (species being oxidized)
and the electron acceptor (species being reduced).
(b) Calculate the grams of alkalinity as CaCO3 produced per gram of nitrate
nitrogen 1NO3- - N2 utilized.
(c) Determine the grams of organic matter required per gram of 1NO3- - N2
converted to nitrogen gas.
4.3 Nitrification is an aerobic process in which ammonium/ammonia nitrogen is
transformed into nitrate. The genera Nitrosomonas and Nitrobacter are the
two bacterial organisms that mediate the process. Equations (4.13), (4.14),
and (4.15) show the reactions when synthesis of biomass is neglected. Crites
and Tchobanoglous (1998) show the following overall nitrification reaction,
including synthesis of biomass. Because of rounding of the coefficients, the
equation does not balance exactly; however, this error is negligible.
NH4+ + 1.863 O2 + 0.098 CO2 : 0.0196 C5H7O2N + 0.98 NO3-
+ 0.941 H2O + 1.98 H+
(a) Calculate the quantity (grams) of alkalinity as CaCO3 consumed per gram
of ammonium nitrogen 1NH4+ - N2 oxidized.
(b) How does this compare with the alkalinity consumption from
Equation (4.15)?
(c) Calculate the quantity (grams) of oxygen required per gram of NH4+ - N
oxidized.
(d) How does this compare with the oxygen consumption from Equation (4.15)?
4.4 A continuous-flow, completely mixed reactor was operated at various flow
rates to collect specific growth-rate data. The specific microorganism growth
rate and soluble substrate concentration data are presented below.
S (mg/L) M(h-1)
20.0 0.66
10.0 0.50
6.6 0.40
5.0 0.33
4.0 0.28
(a) Determine the maximum specific microorganism growth rate 1mm2 and
the half-velocity rate constant (Ks) by making a double-reciprocal plot
(Lineweaver-Burke Plot) of Equation (4.2). Plot 1 versus S1. See
linearized form of Equation (4.2) below:
1 KS 1 1
= +
m mmax S mmax
Alternatively, the above coefficients may be found by using the Solver
function in Excel.
(b) Give the magnitude and units for each of the coefficients determined.
4.5 A pure culture of bacteria was grown at 25°C under batch conditions. The fol-
lowing experimental data were collected.
Time (h) Bacterial concentration, X (mg/L)

2.0 3470
3.4 3700
4.8 4100
6.1 4400
7.7 4780
Integration of Equation (4.1) results in the following equation, which can be

used for determining the specific growth rate of the culture.
ln1X2 = ln1Xo2 + mt
A plot of the ln(X) versus time (t) will yield a straight line with the slope
equal to m and the y-intercept equal to the ln1Xo2 or Xo = eY-intercept.
(a) Determine the magnitude and give the units for m.
(b) Determine the magnitude and give the units for Xo .
4.6 Equation (4.11) is used in the design and operation of activated sludge waste-
water treatment processes. The term 1dX/dt2NG/X is equal to SRT-1, where
SRT is the solids retention time that represents the average unit of time that the
microorganisms remain in the system. The substrate utilization rate 1dS/dt2U is
equal to Q1Si - Se2/V for a completely mixed reactor. Dividing both sides of
Equation (4.11) by X, the microorganism concentration, results in the following
equation:
1 Q3Si - Se4
= Y¢ ≤ - kd
SRT XV
A plot of 1/SRT versus Q1Si - Se)/1XV2 yields a slope equal to Y, the yield
coefficient, and the endogenous decay coefficient 1kd2 as the Y-intercept.
Determine the magnitude and units for Y and kd , given the following data
collected on a continuous-flow activated sludge bench-scale unit.
SRT (days) Q (gallons/day) V (gallons) X (mg/L) Si (mg/L) Se (mg/L)

2.94 20 20 4165 2462 546
5.13 20 20 6566 2406 305
7.15 20 20 8966 2383 224
10.5 20 20 10781 2436 172
4.7 Draw a simplified food chain with at least four trophic levels of organisms in
a fresh-water pond feeding on plankton.
4.8 Draw a sketch of a lake in the Northern Hemisphere, and label and describe
the epilimnion, hypolimnion, and thermocline. Explain what happens during
spring turnover and summer stratification.
4.9 Draw a simplified diagram showing the major carbon forms comprising the
carbon cycle.
4.10 An industrial WWTP discharges into a large river 0.5 m3/s of industrial waste-
water containing an ultimate BOD concentration of 220 mg/L at a temperature
Exercises 97
of 26°C and a DO concentration of 2.0 mg/L. The velocity of the river is 0.85
m/s. Upstream of the point of discharge, the river has a temperature of 12°C, an
ultimate BOD of 15 mg/L, and flow rate of 2.5 m3/s. The deoxygenation- and
reaeration-rate coefficients are 0.2 d-1 and 0.4 d-1 at 20°C.
(a) Calculate the dissolved-oxygen concentration (mg/L) at the point of
discharge.
(b) Calculate the dissolved-oxygen deficit 1Do2 in mg/L at the point of
discharge.
(c) Calculate the ultimate biochemical oxygen demand 1Lo2 in mg/L at the
point of discharge.
(d) Calculate the dissolved-oxygen deficit (mg/L) 50 km downstream, assuming
that the temperature in the river remains the same as at the point of
discharge.
(e) Calculate the dissolved-oxygen concentration (mg/L) 50 km downstream,
assuming that the temperature in the river remains the same as at the point
of discharge.
CHAPTER
5
Risk Assessment
5.1 CONCEPT OR PERCEPTION OF RISK

Objectives
Risk and safety are complementary concepts used in making decisions concern-
In this chapter, you will learn ing environmental matters. Risk relates to the probability that an adverse effect
about: or outcome will occur, whereas safety is the probability that no adverse effect will
The concept or perception occur. Risk is expressed numerically and has no units. It is reported either as a
of risk fraction or as a percentage. If expressed as a fraction, it will have a value between
How to calculate risk 0 and 1. The closer the risk is to 1, the higher the probability or likelihood of an
event’s happening. Risk may be calculated as a lifetime risk or an annual risk. It
The steps involved in
also may be calculated with regard to certain groups or individuals that engage in
performing risk
specific activities, or it may be expressed as an average risk for the general public.
assessments
The best way to explain risk is to present a few examples illustrating high-
Environmental Impact and low-level-risk activities. Risk is a part of everyday life, and certain activities
Statements (EIS) incur a higher level of risk than others. Piloting a plane, skydiving, and NASCAR
racing are examples of high-risk activities. Low-risk activities include walking on
a trail, watching TV, and sleeping. Other activities that have high risk associated
with them include: smoking, binge drinking, unsafe sex, sleep deprivation, and
unwise use of prescription and nonprescription drugs. Although the riskiness of
such activities is often overlooked, they can result in severe consequences.
A stark reminder of reality is to calculate the probability of death. We all
know that the Grim Reaper will come for us some day. Each of us will eventu-
ally die, so the risk of death can be expressed as 100% or 1.0. The risk associated
with specific activities or exposure to toxic chemicals can also be estimated.
There is a lot of uncertainty in calculating risk. There may be insufficient
data or no data available. Some procedures may have doubtful validity, such as
extrapolating results from animal studies and applying them to humans.
The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) establishes specific concen-
tration limits for various types of pollutants in different media to minimize the risk
to the public. Normally, the concentration of a specific contaminant is set so that
the risk of developing cancer ranges from one additional cancer per million people
110-62 to one hundred additional cancers per million people 110-42. More often
than not, the one-in-a-million scenario is typically used in risk-analysis calculations.
Section 5.1 Concept or Perception of Risk 99
Table 5.1 Fifteen Leading Causes of Death in the United States, 2004
Cause Annual deaths Risk (%)
1. Heart disease 654,092 27.3
2. Malignant neoplasms (cancer) 550,270 22.9
3. Cerebrovascular (strokes) 150,147 6.3
4. Chronic low respiratory disease 123,884 5.2
5. Accidents (unintentional injury) 108,694 4.5
6. Diabetes mellitus 72,815 3.0
7. Alzheimer’s disease 65,829 2.7
8. Influenza and pneumonia 61,472 2.6
9. Nephritis 42,762 1.8
10. Septicemia 33,464 1.4
11. Suicide 31,647 1.3
12. Chronic liver and cirrhosis 26,549 1.1
13. Essential hypertension and hypertensive renal disease 22,953 1.0
14. Parkinson’s disease 18,018 0.8
15. Pneumonitis due to solids and liquids 16,959 0.7
All other causes 418,810 17.5
Total deaths 2,398,365 100.0

Source: Centers for Disease Control, http://webappa.cdc.gov, final 2003 and preliminary 2004.
Table 5.1 lists the fifteen leading causes of death in the United States during
2004. Cardiovascular or heart disease was the leading cause of death and cancer was
the second leading cause. Neglecting age, gender, and ethnicity, an American’s risk of
dying from heart disease is estimated at 27.3% (or, expressed first as a fraction,
654,092/2,398,365 = 0.273). According to Wilson and Crouch (2001), there are about
40,000 fatalities per year from automobile accidents. The annual risk of dying in a
motor vehicle accident is approximately 40,000/2,398,365 = 0.017 or 1.7%.
EXAMPLE 5.1
Calculating risk
Using the data in Table 5.1, estimate the risk or probability of an American dying from
influenza (flu) or pneumonia in 2004. Express the risk as a fraction and as a percentage.
Solution
First, identify the number of individuals who died from influenza and pneumonia in
2004 from Table 5.1. There were 61,472 deaths attributed to this category, which
ranked eighth.
Second, from Table 5.1, identify the total number of deaths recorded in the
United States during 2004, which was 2,398,365.
100 Chapter 5 Risk Assessment
Next, calculate the risk or probability of dying from the flu or pneumonia by
dividing the number of deaths attributed to flu or pneumonia by the total number of
deaths recorded for 2004:
61,472
risk = = 0.026 or 2.60 %
2,398,365
EXAMPLE 5.2
Additional risk calculation
Bath County, Virginia, is located in the northwest portion of the state. The county
population is approximately 5000. Using the data from Table 5.1, estimate the num-
ber of persons in Bath County who died from cancer in 2004. Assume that 100 per-
sons passed away in Bath County in 2004.
Solution
First, in Table 5.1, look up the risk or percentage of Americans dying from can-
cer in the United States. In 2004, approximately 22.9% 1risk = 550,270/
2,398,365 * 100 = 22.9%2 of the deaths in the United States were attributed to
some form of cancer.
Next, estimate the number of persons dying from cancer in Bath County by
multiplying the number of deaths in Bath County for 2004 (100) by the risk or frac-
tion of deaths attributed to cancer in the entire United States 122.9/100 = 0.2292.
100 * 0.229 = 22.9 ⬵ 23
The number of persons dying from cancer in Bath County is estimated to be approx-
imately 23.
Activities that increase mortality risk by one in a million 110-62 are presented
in Table 5.2. Each of these activities produces essentially the same amount of risk.
Table 5.2 Activities that Increase Mortality Risk by One in a Million

Activity Type of risk
Smoking 1.4 cigarettes Cancer, heart disease
Drinking 1冫2 liter of wine Cirrhosis of the liver
Spending 1 hour in a coal mine Black lung disease
Living 2 days in Boston or New York Air pollution
Traveling 484 km (300 mi) by car Accident
Flying 1613 km (1000 mi) by jet Accident
Flying 9677 km (6000 mi) by jet Cancer by cosmic radiation
Traveling 16 km (10 mi) by bicycle Accident
Traveling 6 minutes by canoe Accident
Living 2 summer months in Denver on vacation from New York Cancer by cosmic radiation
Section 5.2 Risk Assessment 101
Table 5.2 (continued)

Activity Type of risk
Living 2 months with a cigarette smoker Cancer, heart disease
Eating 40 tablespoons of peanut butter Liver cancer caused by aflatoxin B
Eating 100 charcoal-broiled steaks Cancer from benzopyrene
Risk of accident by living within 8 km (5 mi) of a nuclear reactor for 50 years Cancer caused by radiation
Source: Wilson, 1979.
Smoking 1.4 cigarettes has the same probability or risk of causing death as driving
484 km (300 miles) in a car. A person has a one-in-a-million chance of dying from
drinking 0.5 liters of wine or from living for 50 years within an 8-km (5-mile) radius
of a nuclear reactor.
In this chapter, we will focus on the risk to human health due to the release of
chemicals and pollutants into the environment.
5.2 RISK ASSESSMENT

Risk assessment is a scientific methodology used by engineers, scientists, and regula-
tors to quantify the risk or perceived risk of a contaminant’s adverse effect on
human health and the environment. By definition, risk is a function of hazards and
exposures. Anything that produces an adverse effect on human health and the envi-
ronment or ecosystem is defined as a hazard. Exposure as defined by the U.S. EPA
is the qualitative or quantitative assessment of contact to the skin or orifices of the
body by a chemical. Figure 5.1 shows the four-step risk-assessment process adopted
by the EPA (1989): data collection and evaluation, toxicity assessment, expo-
sure assessment, and risk characterization. Risk management follows this risk-
assessment process.
Data Collection Figure 5.1

and Evaluation Four-step risk assessment
process followed by risk
management.
Exposure Toxicity
Assessment Assessment
Risk
Characterization
Risk
Management
5.2.1 Data Collection and Evaluation

The first steps in the risk-assessment process are the collection and evaluation of
data at the proposed site. The types of site data required for the baseline risk assess-
ment include the following: the identification of potential contaminants; concentra-
tion of contaminants in the major sources and media; and characterization of
sources and environmental setting with regard to contaminant fate and transport,
release potential, and persistence.
A sampling plan for determining background levels of naturally occurring and
anthropogenic levels of chemicals must be developed and implemented. After com-
pletion of the site sampling investigation, the large quantity of analytical data col-
lected must be evaluated. Major steps in this phase are evaluating the analytical
methods used, evaluating quality of data with respect to sample quantitation limits
(SQL) and detection limits (DL), comparing concentrations in blanks to concentra-
tions in samples, and developing a set of data to be used in the risk assessment.
5.2.2 Toxicity Assessment

Toxicology involves studying the adverse effects of exposure of living organisms to
chemicals or toxicants. Toxic effects may range from mild allergic reactions to death.
Whether or not a chemical produces a toxic effect, and how severe it is, depends on
the susceptibility of the exposed individual. An individual’s susceptibility is a function
of sex, age, diet, genetics, prior exposure to the chemical or other toxicants, and health.
The toxicity component of the baseline risk assessment considers the types of
adverse health effects associated with the exposure to specific chemicals, the rela-
tionship between the magnitude of exposure and adverse effects, and the related
uncertainties of a compound’s carcinogenicity (cancer-causing ability) to humans.
Toxicity assessment is accomplished in two steps: hazard identification and dose-
response assessment.
Hazard Identification
Hazard identification is the process of determining whether exposure to a chemical,
biological, or physical agent (toxicant) is linked to a particular health effect such as
cancer or birth defect. This stage of the process relies on toxicity studies performed
on animals, such as mice and rats, or animal tissue. Since living organisms are used,
such tests are called bioassays.
Once in the body, the toxicant is absorbed by the blood and transported
throughout the body, where it may accumulate in tissues and organs, be transformed
into less innocuous compounds or more harmful metabolites, and/or excreted in
urine and feces. For example, both the liver and kidneys are susceptible to chlori-
nated organic compounds and heavy metals.
Some toxicants promote acute toxicity, whereas others accumulate over time,
causing chronic toxicity. Chronic toxicity may result in mutagenesis—mutation of the
genetic material, deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA). This may lead to cancer, tumors, birth
defects, or miscarriages and other reproductive failure. Toxicants capable of causing
cancer are called carcinogens and those causing birth defects are called teratogens.
Dose-Response Assessment
Dose-response assessment is the process of evaluating the relationship between the
level of exposure to the toxicant and the incidence and extent of adverse effect on
the exposed individual (animal, human, cell, tissue). The response to the agent may
be carcinogenic or noncarcinogenic and the tests conducted may be short-term
acute tests or long-term chronic tests.
100
Cumulative
Mortality
Percent
50
0 Figure 5.2
1 10 LD50 100 1000 10000 Typical dose-response
Dose (mg/kg) mortality curve and LD50.
The dose of a toxicant is a major factor determining the level of harm caused.
Dose is defined as the mass of chemical received by the exposed individual or ani-
mal, with units expressed in milligrams per kilogram (mg/kg) of body weight. It is not
unusual to express the dose with units of time if the individual or animal receives the
compound over time. Typical units would be expressed as milligrams per kilogram
per day 1mg/kg # d2. (Although they share similar units, the concentration of a com-
pound or toxicant is not the same as the dose. Concentration is related to the mass of
the compound per unit volume in the ambient air, soil, or water.)
One way to predict the toxicity of a chemical is to perform acute-toxicity tests
on rats or mice. The quantity of a specific chemical that is required to kill the organ-
ism is determined. The relationship between dose and response of a population of
living organisms normally follows a logistic or S-shape curve, as shown in Figure 5.2.
This curve is developed by exposing the test organisms to increasing doses of a spe-
cific toxic compound. As the dose is increased, the number of deaths also rises. Dose
expressed in mg of toxicant per kilogram of body weight (mg/kg) is plotted on the
abscissa scale versus the cumulative mortality (number of deaths). The dose at
which 50% of the organisms die is called the median lethal dose (LD50).
Carcinogenic Effects Instead of mortality, the response could be reported as the
probability or risk of causing cancer. Figure 5.3 shows dose-response curves for
Figure 5.3
Typical carcinogenic
dose-response curves.
Carcinogen
Linear
Cumulative
Response
or
Risk
Carcinogen
Non-linear
Dose
Non-Carcinogen
Non-Linear
Cumulative
Response
or
Risk
Figure 5.4
Typical noncarcinogenic
dose-response curve. Dose
carcinogenic agents. This type of response curve is typically used for evaluating the
risks associated with carcinogens. For carcinogens, it is assumed that a threshold
level does not exist, since there is a cancer risk associated with all doses. Dose-
response curves can be developed for both acute and chronic toxicity; however, we
are generally more interested in the long-term, chronic studies, as they are generally
linked to cancer. There is no absolute scale for toxicity; therefore it is only possible
to state that one compound is more or less toxic than another, due to its effects on
animals and humans.
Noncarcinogenic Effects Figure 5.4 shows a dose-response curve for a noncarcino-
genic agent. The dose-response curves for noncarcinogens indicate there is some expo-
sure threshold to the toxicant that results in an adverse effect on the animal or human.
Below this threshold level, no adverse effect will result. Toxicity tests are performed
to identify and determine the magnitude of these thresholds. The lowest dose
administered during testing that elicits an adverse response is called the lowest-
observed-adverse-effect level (LOAEL), while the highest dose administered that
does not create an adverse effect is termed no-observable-adverse-effect level
(NOAEL).
Figure 5.5 illustrates a dose-response curve for a noncarcinogenic toxicant
along with the NOAEL, LOAEL, and reference dose (RfD). The reference dose is
estimated by dividing the NOAEL by an uncertainty factor, which typically is 10,
Figure 5.5
Non-Carcinogen
Reference dose, NOAEL,
LOAEL for noncarcinogenic
compound.
Cumulative
Response
or
Risk NOAEL
Actual
RfD Threshold
LOAEL
Dose (mg/kg·day)
Table 5.3 Reference Dose (RfD) for Chronic Noncarcinogenic Effects

of Selected Chemicals
Chemical RfD (mg/kg.day)
Acetone 0.900
Arsenic 0.0003
Benzene 0.004
Chlorine 0.100
Chloroform 0.010
Fluorine (soluble fluoride) 0.060
Mercuric chloride 1HgCl22 0.0003
Methyl mercury (MeHg) 0.0001
Nitrate 1.60
Phenol 0.300
Strontium 0.600
Vinyl chloride 0.003
Xylenes 0.200
Source: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, http://www.epa.gov/IRIS.
100, or 1000. These numbers reflect the uncertainty associated with the variability of
response to the toxicant by humans and animals, extrapolation from high compound
doses in animals to a low dose in humans, and lacking or incomplete data sets. An
uncertainty factor of 10 is used if there is minimal uncertainty, and the value
increases to 1000 with less certainty. Table 5.3 lists the oral reference doses for
chronic, noncarcinogenic effects of several chemicals.
Mathematical Modeling of Dose-Response Curves

Dose-response curves are developed from bioassays performed on animals at high
doses. The data obtained must then be extrapolated to the human population at low
doses. Various models have been proposed, including the one-hit model and multi-
stage model (Crump, 1984).
The one-hit model assumes that a single chemical or toxicant will result in the
formation of a tumor in the exposed individual. The multistage model is based on the
multistage formation of tumors that is caused by a sequence of biological events. The
one-hit model is actually a special case of the multistage model and will be presented
below. The model shows the relationship between the dose of a toxicant (d) and the
lifetime risk (probability) of cancer, P(d), and is presented in Equation (5.1).
P1d2 = 1 - e-1q0 + q1 d2 (5.1)
where:
P1d2 = lifetime risk or probability of cancer, dimensionless,
d = dose of toxicant or chemical, and
q0 and q1 = parameters that are picked to fit the data set.
The background rate for the incidence of cancer, P(0), may be estimated by
substituting a value of zero for d into Equation (5.1):
P102 = 1 - e-1q0 + q1 * 02 = 1 - e-q0 (5.2)
Recall that exponentials can be represented as an expansion:
x2 x3 x4 xn
ex = 1 + x + + + + Á (5.3)
2! 3! 4! n!
For small values of x, this expansion can be expressed as:
ex ⬵ 1 + x (5.4)
Substituting this result into Equation (5.2), the background rate for cancer
incidence, P(0), can be expressed as:
P102 = 1 - e-q0 = 1 - 31 + 1- q024 = q0 (5.5)
For small toxicant doses, Equation (5.1) can be approximated as:
P1d2 ⬵ 1 - 31 - 1q0 + q1d24 = q0 + q1d = P102 + q1d (5.6)
At low doses, then, the additional risk of cancer above the background level
can be expressed as follows:
additional risk = A1d2 = P1d2 - P102 (5.7)
Substituting Equation (5.6) into Equation (5.7) results in Equation (5.8),

which may be used to calculate the additional risk incurred by an organism when
exposed to a toxicant at a dosage of d.
additional risk = A1d2 = P1d2 - P102 = P102 + q1 d - P102 ⬵ q1d (5.8)
The multistage model based on tumor formation is shown as Equation (5.9).

+ q3 d3 + Á + qn dn2
P1d2 = 1 - e-1q0 + q1 d + q2 d
2
(5.9)
where the qi are positive constants selected to yield the best fit to the response-dose
data. It is easy to see that Equation (5.1) for the one-hit model is a special case of the
multistage model.
When we perform toxicological tests on carcinogenic compounds in animals,
two major problems arise. First, how do we extrapolate the data collected at high
doses down to low doses? Second, will the response exhibited by the animal popula-
tion be the same, lower, or higher than in humans?
The Environmental Protection Agency uses a modified multistage model
called the linearized multistage model, replacing the linear term in the polynomial
function with its 95% confidence limit to achieve a more stable estimate. This model
assumes a linear relationship between risk and dose at low doses. The slope of the
dose-response curve is called the slope factor (SF) or potency factor (PF). Slope fac-
tors for several chemical compounds are presented in Table 5.4.
The EPA maintains a database with background information on the toxicolog-
ical properties of selected compounds called the Integrated Risk Information Sys-
tem (IRIS). The slope factors for oral and inhalation exposure routes for these
compounds may be found there.
Table 5.4 Slope Factors for Selected Chemicals for Oral Route
Chemical Slope factor (kg.day/mg)
Arsenic 1.5
Benzene 1.5 * 10-2 to 5.5 * 10-2
Carbon tetrachloride 1.3 * 10-1
Chloroform 6.1 * 10-3
DDT 3.4 * 10-1
Dieldrin 1.5 * 101
Heptachlor 4.5
PCB 4 * 10-2 low risk; 2.0 high risk
2,4,6-trinitrotoluene 3 * 10-2
Vinyl chloride 7.2 * 10-1 to 1.5
Source: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, http://www.epa.gov/IRIS.
The slope factor can be defined mathematically as:
incremental lifetime cancer risk

slope factor = (5.10)
CDI
where: slope factor = slope of dose-response curve, kg # d/mg or 1mg/kg # d2-1;

Incremental Lifetime Cancer Risk = incremental risk of cancer in a lifetime above
the background rate, dimensionless; and CDI = Chronic Daily Intake, the average
dose of toxicant absorbed per kilogram of body weight over an entire lifetime
(70 years), mg/(kg # d).
5.2.3 Exposure Assessment

The third step in performing a baseline risk assessment is an exposure assess-
ment, delineating the magnitude of the actual or potential dose that an exposed
individual receives, its frequency and its duration, along with the potential expo-
sure pathways.
A toxicant can enter the body in three pathways: inhalation (air), ingestion
(food and liquids), and absorption (dermal through skin or eyes). Exposure media
include surface water, groundwater, sediment, air, soil and dust, and food.
Conducting an exposure assessment involves evaluating toxicant releases;
identifying exposed populations and potential pathways; estimating exposure-point
toxicant concentrations from actual monitoring data and computer modeling; and
estimating toxicant intakes for specific pathways.
The exposure period over which the dose of the toxicant is or has been
administered in humans is classified as: acute (1 day), subacute (10 days), sub-
chronic (2 weeks to 7 years), and chronic (7 years to lifetime).
The EPA uses the point-estimate method for estimating the reasonable maxi-
mum exposure (RME). Both contaminant concentration and contaminant intake
rate are required for estimating the RME.
Table 5.5 Residential Exposure Equations for Various Pathways

Exposure route Intake equation
CW * IR * EF * ED
Ingestion of drinking water CDI =
BW * AT
CW * CR * EF * ED
Ingestion of surface water while swimming CDI =
BW * AT
CW * SA * PC * EF * ED * CF
Dermal contact with water CDI =
BW * AT
CS * IR * CF * FI * EF * ED
Ingestion of chemicals in soil CDI =
BW * AT
CS * CF * SA * AF * ABS * EF * ED
Dermal contact with soil CDI =
BW * AT
CA * IR * ET * EF * ED
Inhalation of airborne (vapor phase) chemicals CDI =
BW * AT
CF * IR * FI * EF * ED
Ingestion of contaminated fish, shellfish, fruits, and vegetables CDI =
BW * AT
Source: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (1989).

ABS = absorption factor, dimensionless;
AF = soil-to-skin adherence factor, mg/cm2;
AT = averaging time, period over which exposure is averaged, days;
AT = equal to exposure duration for noncarcinogens and 70 years for carcinogens;
BW = body weight, the average body weight over the exposure period, kg;
C = chemical concentration, the average concentration contacted over the exposure period (e.g., mg/L for water);
CA = chemical concentration in air, mg/m3;
CDI = chronic daily intake, mg/kg # day;
CF = conversion factor (e.g.,1L = 1000 cm3, 10-6 mg/kg);
CR = contact rate, L/h;
CS = chemical concentration in soil, mg/kg;
CW = chemical concentration in water, mg/L;
ED = exposure duration, years;
EF = exposure frequency, days/year;
ET = exposure time, h/day;
FI = pathway specific, fraction ingested, dimensionless;
IR = intake or contact rate, the amount of contaminated medium taken in or contacted per unit time or event
(e.g., L/day, mg/day, kg/meal,m3/h);
PC = chemical specific dermal permeability constant, cm/h; and
SA = skin surface area available for contact, cm2.
A generic equation for estimating chronic daily intake (CDI) is given as Equa-
tion (5.11). Table 5.5 lists some of the equations used for calculating CDI for various
exposure routes. Definitions and units for each parameter in Table 5.5 are listed after
Equation (5.11).
C * IR * EF * ED
CDI = (5.11)
BW * AT
where:
AT = averaging time, the period over which exposure is averaged, d,
BW = body weight, the average body weight over the exposure period, kg,
C = chemical concentration, the average concentration contacted over the
exposure period (e.g., mg/L for water),
CDI = chronic daily intake, mg/kg # d,
ED = exposure duration, yr,
EF = exposure frequency, d/yr, and

IR = intake or contact rate, the amount of contaminated medium taken in or
contacted per unit time or event (e.g., L/d, mg/d, kg/meal,m3/h).
The CDI must be determined for each route of exposure and each medium.
Recall that individuals may be exposed to toxicants by ingestion, dermal contact,
and inhalation through various mediums such as air, water, dust, sediment, soil, and
food. Default values used in risk calculations by EPA are presented in Table 5.6.
Table 5.6 Summary of Standard Default Exposure Factors

Exposure Exposure Body
Exposure frequency duration weight
Land Use pathway Daily intake (days/year) (years) (kg)
Residential Ingestion of potable 2L 350 30 70 (adult)
water 15 (child)
Ingestion of soil and 200 mg (child) 350 6 (child) 15 (child)
dust 100 mg (adult) 24 (adult) 70 (adult)
Inhalation of 20 m3 1total2 350 30 70

contaminants 15 m3 1indoor2
Commercial/ Ingestion of potable 1L 250 25 70

industrial water
Ingestion of soil and 50 mg 250 25 70

dust
Inhalation of 20 m3 1workday2 250 25 70

contaminants
Agricultural Ingestion of potable 2L 350 30 70

water
Ingestion of soil 200 mg (child) 350 6 (child) 15 (child)

and dust 100 mg (adult) 24 (adult) 70 (adult)
Inhalation of 20 m3 1total2 350 30 70

contaminants 15 m3 1indoor2
Consumption of 42 g (fruit) 350 30 70

homegrown produce 80 g (vegetable)
Recreational Consumption of 54 g 350 30 70

locally caught fish
Source: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (1991).
EXAMPLE 5.3
Calculating chronic daily intake
Estimate the chronic daily intake (CDI) of arsenic from exposure to a city water
supply that contains an arsenic concentration of 0.010 mg/L, the maximum contam-
inant level (MCL) established by the Environmental Protection Agency. Suppose
that a 70-kg person consumes 2 L of water each day for 70 years. Determine the
chronic daily intake (CDI) of arsenic in mg/kg # d.
Solution
Substitute the above values into Equation (5.11) to calculate the CDI.
mg L 365 d
a0.010 b * a2.0 b * a b * 170 yr2
C * IR * EF * ED L d yr
CDI = =
BW * AT 365 d
170 kg2 * 170 yr2a b
yr
mg
= 2.86 * 10-4
1kg # d2
5.2.4 Risk Characterization

During risk characterization, the data collected from the toxicity assessment and
exposure assessment are used to calculate the risk associated with each medium
(air, water, soil, etc.) and exposure route (ingestion, dermal, and inhalation).
Risk Characterization for Carcinogens

Equation (5.10) may be arranged as Equation (5.12) so that we can estimate the
incremental lifetime risk of cancer by multiplying the CDI by the slope factor
obtained from the IRIS toxicological database. For carcinogenic compounds at low
doses (with risk below 0.01), risk is calculated using Equation (5.12). The slope fac-
tor is obtained from Table 5.4 or by using IRIS on the Environmental Protection
Agency website (http://www.epa.gov/IRIS).
incremental lifetime cancer risk = CDI * slope factor (5.12)
At high doses of carcinogenic compounds (with risk above 0.01), risk is calcu-
lated using a modified form of Equation (5.2):.
P102 = 1 - e-q0 = 1 - e-11CDI21slope factor22 (5.13)
If several carcinogenic compounds are involved, the risks are added together
to calculate the overall risk to the individual.
EXAMPLE 5.4
Risk calculations using CDI and slope factors
Using the chronic daily intake (CDI) value of 2.86 * 10-4 mg # kg-1 # d-1 determined
in Example 5.3 along with the other data provided, determine:
a. The upper-bound cancer risk per person.
b. The number of extra cancers that would be expected per year in a city of
100,000 people if they consumed the same water containing arsenic.
Solution part a
Determine the upper-bound cancer risk for this person by substituting into Equa-
tion (5.12). First, obtain from Table 5.4 the slope factor for arsenic by the oral route,
which is 1.5 kg # d # mg-1.
incremental lifetime cancer risk = CDI * Slope Factor

mg kg # d
= 2.86 * 10-4
kg # d
a1.5 b
mg
incremental lifetime cancer risk = 4.29 * 10-4
Therefore, over a 70-year period, the chance of a person getting cancer from
drinking this water would be approximately 429 in a million.
Solution part b
Finally, the number of extra cancers that would be expected per year in a city of
100,000 is calculated by multiplying the incremental lifetime cancer risk by the pop-
ulation of the city and dividing by the 70-year period.
cancers city population
= incremental lifetime cancer risk *
year exposure duration
100,000 people
= 4.29 * 10-4 a b = 0.61
70 yr
The extra number of cancers expected per year in the city described is 0.61.
Risk Characterization for Noncarcinogens

The EPA uses the hazard index (HI) for noncarcinogenic compounds. The hazard
index is calculated by dividing the chronic daily intake (CDI) by the reference dose
(RfD), as shown in Equation (5.14). Since reference doses are associated with a spe-
cific exposure pathway, they must be used only with exposure data from the same
pathway.
CDI
HI = (5.14)
RfD
Where more than one non-carcinogenic compound is present, the sum of

the HIs is determined. A hazard index value of less than 1.0 is normally consid-
ered acceptable; whereas a value equal to or greater than 1.0 indicates unaccept-
able risk.
EXAMPLE 5.5
Calculating hazard index
Suppose a 70-kg adult drinks 2.0 liters per day of water for a 20-year period. Assume
that the water contains 0.05 mg/L of chloroform and 0.6 mg/L of nitrates.
a. Determine the hazard index and state whether this is acceptable or
unacceptable.
b. Chloroform is a potential carcinogen. Determine the carcinogen risk associ-
ated with drinking water containing 0.05 mg/L of chloroform. Would it meet
the goal of 1 * 10-6 that is usually recommended by EPA?
Solution part a
First, the CDI for chloroform is estimated. From Table 5.5, use the following equa-
tion for ingestion of drinking water.
CW * IR * EF * ED
CDI =
BW * AT
10.05 mg>L2 * 12.0 L>d2 * 1365 d>yr2 * 120 yr2
CDI = = 1.43 * 10-3 mg>kg # d
170 kg2 * 1365 d>yr2 * 120 yr2
Second, locate in Table 5.3 the reference dose (RfD) for chloroform, which is
0.010 mg/kg # day. Third, calculate the HI for chloroform using Equation (5.14).
CDI 1.43 * 10 -3 mg>kg # d

0.010 mg>kg # d
HI = = = 0.14
RfD
Use the same procedure above for nitrate. From Table 5.5 use the equation for
ingestion of drinking water to determine the CDI for nitrate.
10.6 mg>L2 * 12.0 L>d2 * 1365 d>yr2 * 120 yr2
CDI = = 1.71 * 10-2 mg>kg # d
170 kg2 * 1365 d>yr2 * 120 yr2
Next, locate the reference dose for nitrate from Table 5.3 as 1.6 mg/kg # d.
Now, calculate the HI for nitrate using Equation (5.14).
CDI 1.71 * 10-2 mg>kg # d
1.6 mg>kg # d
HI = = = 0.011
RfD
Finally, calculate the total HI by summing the individual HI value for each
toxicant
total HI = ©HI = 0.14 + 0.011 = 0.151 6 1.0
Since the total hazard index is 6 1.0, the water is considered safe to drink.
Solution part b
First, recall that incremental lifetime cancer risk is estimated using Equation (5.12).
Second, the slope factor for chloroform for the oral exposure route is deter-
mined from Table 5.4 as 6.1 * 10-3 kg # d # mg-1.
Third, calculate the incremental cancer risk of drinking this water over a lifetime
using Equation (5.12). Use the CDI value of 1.43 * 10-3 mg # kg-1 # d-1 calculated in
Part a for chloroform
incremental lifetime cancer risk = CDI * slope factor
incremental lifetime cancer risk = 11.43 * 10-3 mg # kg-1 # d-12
* (6.1 * 10-3 kg # d # mg-12
incremental lifetime cancer risk = 8.72 * 10-6
From a cancer-risk perspective, this drinking water would not meet the accept-
able risk goal of 1 * 10-6 normally used by EPA, since 8.72 * 10-6 7 1 * 10-6.
5.3 RISK MANAGEMENT

Risk management follows the four-step risk assessment process previously dis-
cussed. Risk managers make decisions using the results of the risk assessment to
minimize the adverse effects of a toxicant, process, or technology on human health
and the environment. Risk is evaluated in terms of the cost associated with reducing
risk. Factors that are considered include the feasibility of technology to reduce the
Section 5.4 Environmental Impact Analysis 113
risk, the potential to create more risk (e.g., where dredging sediments may result in
the release of contaminants into the water column), statutory requirements, and
public opinion. Ultimately, risk analysis is the basis for decisions on implementing
and enforcing drinking-water and wastewater effluent standards; defining accept-
able exposure doses; locating industries, landfills, and wastewater treatment facili-
ties; and establishing the desired level of cleanup at a hazardous waste site.
5.4 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ANALYSIS

5.4.1 Overview of Environmental Impact Statement
The National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA) was signed into law by President
Richard Nixon on January 1, 1970.As outlined in Section 1502 of the Code of Federal
Regulations (40 CFR 1502), NEPA requires an environmental impact statement
(EIS) when a project is federally controlled and significantly affects the environ-
ment. Federally controlled projects are those that are federally funded, undertaken
by the federal government, or licensed by the federal government. A detailed report
must be submitted to the Environmental Protection Agency for review and com-
ments. NEPA also requires that EISs be made available to the public and local,
state, and federal authorities.
A “Google” search on the internet will provide numerous examples of Envi-
ronmental Impact Statements. These examples are generally several hundred pages
in length; sometimes have more “gloss” than substance; and it may be difficult to “see
the forest for the trees.” The standard format of an EIS recommended by EPA is pre-
sented below, along with a brief discussion of three critical sections of the report.
5.4.2 Environmental Impact Statement

Vesilind and Morgan (2004) suggest three steps in writing an environmental impact
statement: inventory, assessment, and evaluation.
Inventory
The first step is to prepare an inventory of the environmental conditions at the pro-
posed site and alternate sites that exist at the time of the report, along with recent
trends. Collection of hydrological and meteorological data, animal and plant species
at and near the vicinity of the site, along with demographic and socioeconomic data
should be included in the inventory phase.
Assessment
The assessment portion of the EIS involves analysis and number crunching of the
data collected for the environmental inventory. Several assessment methods exist,
each generally involving listing all potential areas of concern that might impact the
environment. First, an importance factor (IF) and a magnitude factor (MF) are
established for each area of concern. A Likert scale from 0 to 5 is normally used for
each of these. On a typical Likert scale, a value of 0 would indicate no importance
for IF and minimal effect for MF. Likewise, a value of 5 indicates high importance
and maximum effect for the IF and MF factors, respectively. Next, the effect of each
area of environmental concern is assigned a value. If the effect (E) is beneficial, a
positive one 1 +12 is assigned or if detrimental, a negative one 1-12. The final envi-
ronmental impact (EI) is estimated by summing the products of the importance fac-
tor (IF), the magnitude factor (MF), and the effect term (E):
n
EI = a 1IFi21MFi21Ei2 (5.15)
i-1
where:
EI = environment impact (dimensionless),
IFi = importance factor for ith environmental concern (ranges from 0 to 5),
MFi = magnitude factor for ith environmental concern (ranges from 0 to 5),
Ei = effect term for the area of environmental concern, +1 for beneficial or
positive effect, and -1 for detrimental or negative effect, and
n = number of areas of environmental concern.
Example 5.6 illustrates the assessment procedure for an overly simplified envi-
ronmental impact analysis using Equation (5.15) and the procedure just discussed.
Evaluation
The final step in writing the environmental impact statement is to analyze the
results obtained from performing the assessment. Final conclusions are developed
and presented in this step. These conclusions will be used by the public, politicians,
and regulatory agencies in making the final decision to proceed, or not, with the pro-
posed project. Often, common sense does not win out.
EXAMPLE 5.6
Simplified environmental assessment problem
A city is considering two alternatives for handling sludge that will be produced at its
new wastewater treatment facility (WWTF). The first alternative involves incinera-
tion of the stabilized sludge, with disposal of the ash to a landfill. The second alter-
native is to truck the stabilized sludge offsite and apply it to agricultural land near
the new proposed WWTF.
Solution
The best way to solve this problem is to use a spreadsheet. First, set up two tables,
listing environmental concerns in Column 1. Second, select Importance Factors
(IF) and Magnitude Factors (MF) ranging from 0 to 5 for each concern. Third, place
the effect term (E) in Column 4. Recall that E has a value of +1 for a beneficial
effect and -1 for a detrimental effect. Fifth, calculate the environmental impact
(EI) for each area of concern by using Equation (5.15), as presented in Column 5.
Finally, calculate the overall EI for each alternative by summing the values in
Column 5. This procedure is repeated for the second alternative, truck sludge off-
site and apply to land.
Alternative 1: Incineration of Sludge with Ash Disposed of in Landfill

Area of concern Importance factor Magnitude factor Effect term Environmental impact
(Column 1) (Column 2) (Column 3) (Column 4) (Column 5)
Air pollution 5 5 -1 -25
Groundwater pollution 4 2 -1 -8
Noise 1 1 -1 -1
Odor 2 2 -1 -4
Traffic congestion 2 1 -1 -2
Sum = - 40
Section 5.4 Environmental Impact Analysis 115
Alternative 2: Truck Sludge Off Site and Apply to Agricultural Land.

Area of concern Importance factor Magnitude factor Effect term Environmental impact
(Column 1) (Column 2) (Column 3) (Column 4) (Column 5)
Air pollution 5 4 -1 -20
Groundwater pollution 4 5 -1 -20
Noise 3 2 -1 -6
Odor 4 5 -1 -20
Traffic congestion 2 1 -1 -2
Sum = - 68
The overall environmental impact (EI) value for Alternative 1 is - 40, versus
-68 for Alternative 2. Based on this simplified assessment procedure, Alternative 1,
incineration of the stabilized sludge with the remaining ash disposed of in a landfill,
would be selected to minimize adverse effects on the environment. Keep in mind that
these types of analyses are subjective and the results will vary significantly, depend-
ing on the individual performing the assessment. A cost-benefit analysis will eventu-
ally be performed for the two alternatives, and it is highly likely that the cost of
implementing Alternative 2 will be significantly less than that for Alternative 1. Ulti-
mately, capital costs along with operating and maintenance (O & M) costs, rather
than environmental impact assessments, often end up driving political decisions.
Format of Environmental Impact Statement

A standard format for an EIS is presented in Table 5.7. Agencies should use this for-
mat or one that covers each category listed. The sections listed below are explained
in more detail, as they are the critical portions of the EIS.
Affected Environment This section of the EIS describes the environment of the
areas(s) that will be affected or created by the proposed project, along with all of
the alternatives being considered. Only data and analyses commensurate with the
importance of their impact on the environment should be presented.
Table 5.7 Recommended Format for Environmental Impact Statement
a) Cover Sheet
b) Summary
c) Table of Contents
d) Purpose of and Need for Action
e) Alternatives Including Proposed Actions
f) Affected Environment
g) Environmental Consequences
h) List of Preparers
i) List of Agencies, Organizations, and Persons to Whom Copies of EIS Sent
j) Index
k) Appendices
Environmental Consequences The scientific and analytical basis for the pro-
posed project and alternatives is presented in this section. Major items to be cov-
ered include: the environmental impact of the proposed project and alternatives;
adverse effects that cannot be avoided if the proposed project is implemented; the
relationship between short-term uses of the environment and the sustainability of
long-term productivity; and any irreversible or irretrievable commitments of
resources that would be involved if the proposed project were implemented.
Alternatives Including the Proposed Action This section is the heart of the envi-
ronmental impact statement. The environmental impacts of the proposed project
and alternatives are compared, so that decision makers and the public have a clear
choice among the options. Specific areas that must be addressed are listed below:
• All reasonable alternatives must be rigorously explored and objectively evalu-

ated in detail. Reasons for eliminating an alternative must be presented and
discussed.
• Detailed documentation and substantial treatment of each alternative and pro-
posed action must be provided, so that reviewers can judge for themselves the
merit of each.
• Reasonable alternatives outside the jurisdiction of the lead agency should be
included.
• The “no action” alternative should be evaluated.
• Unless prohibited by another law, the lead agency should list the preferred alter-
native or alternatives in the draft EIS and final document.
• Appropriate mitigation measures should be included that have not been included
already for the proposed project or alternatives.
S U M M A RY
Risk relates to the probability that an adverse effect or outcome will occur. Risk has
no units; it is expressed as a fraction or a percentage. The Environmental Protection
Agency normally sets contaminant concentration levels in air, water, and soil so that
the risk of developing cancer is one additional cancer per million 110-62 or one hun-
dred additional cancers per million people 110-42. In most scenarios, a risk of one-
in-a-million is normally used.
Risk assessment is the scientific methodology used by engineers, scientists, and
regulators to quantify risk of a contaminant’s adverse effect on human health and the
environment. Four major steps involved in risk assessment include: data collection
and evaluation, toxicity assessment, exposure assessment, and risk characterization.
Two types of chemicals or toxicants evaluated by EPA are carcinogenic and
noncarcinogenic compounds. Dose-response curves are developed from acute- and
chronic-toxicity studies. For noncarcinogens, a threshold level exists such that no
adverse effect is produced at concentrations below this value. Threshold values for
carcinogenic compounds do not exist, since exposure to even small doses might
induce a cancer response.
The EPA uses a linearization of the multistage model for modeling the effect
of a toxicant from animal studies to human populations. A toxicant can enter the
body by three pathways: inhalation (air), ingestion (food and liquids), and absorp-
tion (dermal through skin or eyes). Exposure media include surface water, ground-
water, sediment, soil and dust, air, and food. Various equations were presented for
calculating the chronic daily intake (CDI) value through the various exposure
routes. These values are used in conjunction with a reference dose to calculate the
Exercises 117
hazard index (HI) for noncarcinogenic compounds. If the HI is equal to or greater

than 1.0, the risk of an adverse or toxic effect is significant. An HI value less than 1.0
is acceptable.
Risk managers make decisions based on the four-step risk-assessment process
by translating the risk into the costs associated with reducing it. Environmental
impact statements (EISs) were discussed and an example illustrating how to per-
form a simple environmental impact (EI) analysis was presented.
bioassays exposure risk KEY WORDS

carcinogen hazard safety
chronic daily intake (CDI) hazard index (HI) slope factor
concentration LOAEL teratogen
dose mutagen toxicant
dose-response curve NOAEL
environmental impact probability
analysis (EIS) reference dose (RfD)
REFERENCES
Centers for Disease Control (2007). Death and Death Rates for 2004 and Age-Adjusted Death
Rates and Percent Changes in Age-Adjusted Rates from 2003 to 2004 for the 15 Leading
Causes of Death: United States, Final 2003 and Preliminary 2004. http://webappa.cdc.gov,
accessed June 20, 2007.
Crump, K.S. (1984). An Improved Procedure for Low-Dose Carcinogenic Risk Assessment
from Animal Data, Journal of Environmental Pathology, Toxicology, and Oncology, 5-4(5):
339–348.
Environmental Protection Agency (2007). http://www/epa/gov/IRIS, accessed June 24, 2007.
Environmental Protection Agency (1991). Risk Assessment Guidance for Superfund.Volume 1.
Human Health Evaluation Manual, Supplemental Guidance “Standard Default Exposure
Factors” Interim Final. Office of Emergency and Remedial Response, Toxics Integration
Branch, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
Environmental Protection Agency (1989). Risk Assessment Guidance for Superfund.Volume 1.
Human Health Evaluation Manual (Part A), EPA/540/1-89/002.
Vesilind, P.A., and Morgan, S.M. (2004). Introduction to Environmental Engineering, 2nd ed.,
Brooks/Cole, Belmont, CA.
Wilson, R. (1979). Analyzing the Daily Risks of Life, Technology Review, 81(4): 41–46.
Wilson, R., and Crouch, E.A.C. (2001). Risk Benefit Analysis, Harvard University Press, Digital
Design Group, Newton, MA.
EXERCISES
5.1 Estimate the number of persons who would die annually from smoking a
pack of cigarettes daily in a city of 200,000 people. Assume the risk of smok-
ing a pack of cigarettes each day is 3.6 * 10-3. Calculate the risk of dying per
year from cigarette smoking if a person lives 70 years.
5.2 Consider the lifetime health risk of drinking water containing 0.02 mg/L of
DDT for a 70-kg adult. The slope factor for DDT as estimated by EPA is
3.4 * 10-1 1kg # day/mg2. Estimate the annual number of additional cancers
per year one might expect in a population of 150,000 people.
5.3 A new wastewater treatment plant (WWTP) is to be constructed to service a
part of the Knoxville, Tennessee, metropolitan area. The anticipated design
capacity of the facility is 113,550 m3/day (30 million gallons per day). Two
alternatives have been proposed for disposing of the effluent from the facility.
Alternative 1 recommends discharging the effluent to the Tennessee River;

Alternative 2 suggests spraying the effluent on a pine forest (silvaculture). Use
data in the tables provided below to assess the alternatives.
Alternative 1: Discharge to River

Area of concern IF MF E EI
Air pollution 0 0 -1
Groundwater pollution 0 0 -1
Noise 1 1 -1
Odor 3 2 -1
Surface water pollution 5 5 -1
Tree farming 0 0 +1
Wildlife 5 4 -1
Alternative 2: Silvaculture
Noise 1 2 -1
Odor 2 3 -1
Surface water pollution 4 3 -1
Tree farming 5 4 +1
Wildlife 4 4 +1
5.4 Calculate the chronic daily intake (CDI) for the various exposure routes for a
young adult male who is exposed to drinking water containing toluene at a
concentration equal to the drinking-water standard (MCL) of 1 mg/L. Assume
that he weighs 70 kg, consumes 2 liters of water each day, showers for a total
of 12 minutes each day, and swims for 60 minutes, 5 days a week, for 20 years
while training for the Olympics. During showering, assume that the average
toluene concentration in the air is 2 mg/m3, that the dermal uptake rate from
water (PC) is 10 * 10-6 m/h, and that dermal absorption during showering is
only 10% of the available dose. Assume the surface area of an adult male to
be 1.94 m2, use an inhalation rate of 20 m3/day, and assume that 50 ml of
water are ingested per hour during swimming.
5.5 The U.S. drinking-water standards for the following carcinogens are given
below. For each carcinogen, determine the lifetime individual cancer risk and
the incremental cancer risk per year in a population of 300 million people.
Calculate risk based on residential exposure factors recommended by EPA.
(a) Arsenic, MCL = 0.01 mg/L, and SF = 1.5 kg # day/mg
(b) Benzene, MCL = 0.005 mg/L, and SF = 5.5 * 10-2 kg # day/mg
(c) Carbon tetrachloride, MCL = 0.005 mg/L, and SF = 1.3 * 10-1 kg # day/mg
(d) Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), MCL = 0.0005 mg/L, and SF = 2.0
kg # day/mg, upper-bound, high-risk.
(e) Trichloroethylene, (TCE) MCL = 0.005 mg/L, and SF = 1.1 * 10-2
kg # day/mg
(f) Vinyl chloride, MCL = 0.002 mg/L, and SF = 1.5 kg # day/mg
Exercises 119
5.6 Determine the number of additional deaths per year occurring in a popula-
tion of 300 million people from motor-vehicle accidents. Assume the annual
risk of dying in a motor vehicle accident is 2.4 * 10-4. Calculate the number
of deaths over an average lifetime of 70 years.
5.7 Suppose drinking water contains 5.0 mg/L of phenol, 0.5 mg/L of xylene, and 0.35
mg/L of acetone. If a 70-kg adult drinks 2.0 liters per day of this water for 20 years,
calculate the hazard index and discuss whether this is a safe level of exposure.
5.8 Suppose your campus water supply was contaminated with trichloroethylene
(TCE) at a concentration of 10 mg/L. Determine the total intake over a four-
year academic program. Assume students live on campus and attend classes 9
months each year, and therefore, use 275 days per academic year and a 70-kg
adult male in your calculations.
5.9 Estimate the lifetime incremental cancer risk for a 50-kg woman exposed to an
airborne carcinogen in the work place. Exposure is based on inhaling 1 m3/h of
air containing 0.1 mg/m3 of carcinogen, 8 hours per day, 5 days per week, 50
weeks per year, for 20 years.Assume the carcinogen has an absorption factor of
85% and the inhalation potency or slope factor is 2 * 10-3 1mg/kg # day2-1.
Also estimate the lifetime incremental cancer risk for a 70-kg adult male
exposed to the same contaminant under similar circumstances.
5.10 Georgia Power is considering building a new 1000-megawatt power plant to
provide additional electricity to its customers in the southeast. Two alterna-
tives are being considered for providing the energy necessary to drive the
steam turbines: coal-fired versus nuclear. Use the tables below to perform an
environmental impact assessment (determine the EI value of each alterna-
tive) and select the best alternative to implement. Discuss political factors
that might influence the decision.
Alternative 1: Coal-Fired Alternative
Noise 2 1 -1
Odor 3 3 -1
Residuals disposal 2 3 -1
Radiation 1 1 -1
Surface-water pollution 4 5 -1
Alternative 2: Nuclear Alternative

Air pollution (no greenhouse gases) 5 4 +1

Noise 1 1 -1
Odor 2 1 +1
Residuals disposal 5 5 -1
Radiation 5 4 -1
Surface-water pollution 4 5 -1
CHAPTER
Design and Modeling

6
of Environmental Systems
6.1 INTRODUCTION
Objectives
The design and modeling of environmental systems requires a thorough under-
In this chapter, you will standing of material, energy, and flow balances. Material balances are performed
learn about: on “black boxes” or control volumes that serve as the boundaries of the system
Rates and order of being studied. Usually, the control volume represents a unit process in which a
reactions chemical or biochemical reaction is taking place. It is important to know the
Performing material and order of reaction and whether materials are conserved, produced, or removed
flow balances on control during the process. Batch, completely mixed, and plug flow reactors, each with
volumes or processes and without reactions, are used extensively in environmental and chemical engi-
neering.These reactors are utilized to treat water, wastewater, and contaminated
Completely mixed, plug,
air and soil. Thermodynamic principles that involve changes in free energy (G),
and dispersed plug flow
enthalpy (H), and entropy (S) are used by scientists and engineers to determine
regimes
whether chemical and biochemical reactions will proceed as written. More
The design and modeling importantly, engineers and chemists are concerned about how fast a reaction
of batch, completely takes place. Kinetics is the study of the rate of a process or reaction.
mixed, and plug flow
reactors with and without
reactions occurring within 6.2 CHEMICAL AND BIOCHEMICAL REACTIONS
Performing energy Environmental engineers manipulate chemical and biological reactions. Some
balances around simple of these reactions, like radioactive decay, occur naturally or spontaneously.
environmental engineering Others will not proceed unless energy is added to the system. We will focus on
systems
chemical and biological (biochemical) reactions.
Environmental engineers design water and wastewater treatment processes,
air pollution abatement technologies, and groundwater treatment systems. These
processes, technologies, and systems utilize biochemical and chemical reactions to
oxidize, reduce, precipitate, and/or transform pollutants into harmless forms. In
some applications no reactions are taking place. For example, water flowing into
and out of a water storage tank and water flowing through a pipe exhibit no chem-
ical or biological reaction. In these examples, the water or substance that flows
through the system is conserved or considered as a “nonreactive” substance. In
other systems, a reaction such as oxidation or reduction may occur, involving the
Section 6.2 Chemical and Biochemical Reactions 121
transformation of some of the chemical species. The rate of reaction, or time required
for a reaction to run to completion, is a significant parameter used in the design of reac-
tors and environmental treatment systems.
6.2.1 Rates of Reaction

For the simple, irreversible reaction shown as Equation (6.1), the chemical reaction
rate can be expressed as the change in concentration of a specific component with
respect to time. The stoichiometric coefficients for this reaction are unity and they
provide the quantitative relationship between substances in a chemical reaction.
1A + 1B:1C (6.1)
The rate (r) of the above chemical reaction can be expressed as differentials as
follows:
dA dB dC
r = - = - = (6.2)
dt dt dt
where:
dA mass
volume # time
= change in species A concentration with time, ,
dt
dB mass
volume # time
= change in species B concentration with time, ,
dt
dC mass
volume # time
= change in species C concentration with time, , and
dt
mass
volume # time
r = rate of reaction, .
A negative sign is placed before the differentials for A and B, since they are being
dA dB
removed during the reaction. In other words, and are negative. A positive sign
dt dt
dC
is inferred before differential , since C is being produced during the reaction.
dt
When the stoichiometric coefficients are not all unity, the rate of change in the
concentration of a given species with respect to time must be modified. This is done
by multiplying by the reciprocal of the stoichiometric coefficient. Equation (6.3) is a
chemical reaction where the stoichiometric coefficients have a value other than one.
2A + 4B:3C (6.3)
The rate for this chemical reaction can be expressed in a generalized form as:
1 dA 1 dB 1 dC
r = - = - = (6.4)
2 dt 4 dt 3 dt
6.2.2 Rate Law and Order of Reaction

Determination of the rate law is important to understanding the kinetics of a reac-
tion. The rate law for any reaction must be determined by experiment and cannot be
inferred from the reaction stoichiometry. For Equation (6.1), experimentation may
122 Chapter 6 Design and Modeling of Environmental Systems
show that the rate of the reaction is linear with respect to the concentrations of A
and B. Knowing this, we could write the rate law for Equation (6.1) as follows:
dC
r = = kA B (6.5)
dt
where:
k = reaction rate constant, volume/time # mass,
A = concentration of A, mass/volume, and
B = concentration of B, mass/volume.
A general form of Equation (6.5) is:
dC
r = = kAaBb (6.6)
dt
The superscripts a and b are used to define the reaction order. Since in our example
a and b are both equal to 1, the reaction is said to be first order with respect to A
and first order with respect to B. The sum of all the exponents 1a + b2 is called the
total reaction order. In this case, the total reaction order is 2. Fractional reaction
orders are possible for biological systems, but often an integer value for reaction
order is determined or assumed in order to solve kinetic problems.
Table 6.1 presents the general form of the equation for zero-, first-, and second-
order removal and production reactions. These equations are applicable only to uni-
molecular reactions that can be described as A : P. The reaction-rate constant is
denoted as k and the reaction time is t. The concentration of a given constituent is
denoted as C. A “removal” reaction denotes the removal or reduction in concentra-
tion of a given species during the reaction or process. Similarly, the increase in con-
centration of a given species would signify a “production” reaction.
6.2.3 Zero-Order Reactions

A zero-order reaction is one that proceeds at a rate that is independent of the con-
centration of any reactant. For example, consider the irreversible conversion of a
single reactant (A) to a single product (P) according to Equation (6.7).
A:P (6.7)
If Equation (6.7) is a zero-order removal reaction, the rate-law equation is

written as follows:
dC
r = - = kC 0 = k (6.8)
dt
Table 6.1 General Form of Zero-, First-, and Second-Order Equations

Removal Production
Zero Ct = C0 - kt Ct = C0 + k t
First Ct = C0 e-kt Ct = C0 ek t
1 1 1 1
Second = + kt = - kt
Ct C0 Ct C0
where:
dC mass
volume # time
= rate of change in the concentration of A with time, , and
dt
k = reaction-rate constant, volume/(mass # time).
Equation (6.8) is a differential equation. Using calculus, Equation (6.8) can be
rearranged by integrating over the limits, where C0 = initial concentration of A at time
equal to 0 and Ct = concentration of A at any time, t, as shown in Equation (6.9). The
integrated form of Equation (6.9) is Equation (6.10).
Ct t
dC = - k dt (6.9)
LC0 L0
Ct - C0 = - kt (6.10)
Notice that Equation (6.10) corresponds to a zero-order removal reaction

shown in Table 6.1. A zero-order removal reaction will plot as a straight line with a
negative slope of k on arithmetic paper (Figure 6.1).A zero-order production reaction
will plot as a straight line with a positive slope of k on arithmetic paper (Figure 6.2).
6.2.4 First-Order Reactions

First-order reactions are those that proceed at a rate which is directly proportional to
the concentration of one of the reactants. Since the concentration of the reactant
Figure 6.1
Plot of zero-order removal
Y-intercept C0 reaction.
Ct
Slope k
Time (t)
Figure 6.2
Plot of zero-order production
reaction.
Slope k
Ct
Y-intercept C0
Time (t)
changes with time, an arithmetic plot of product concentration for a first-order produc-
tion reaction will be curvilinear, as shown in Figure 6.3.
Consider the irreversible conversion of a single reactant (A) to a single prod-
uct (P), as shown by Equation (6.11).
A:P (6.11)
Writing the rate law equation for a removal reaction, assuming a first-order
reaction, results in:
dC
r = - = kC 1 (6.12)
dt
Rearranging differential Equation (6.12) and establishing the following integration lim-
its, where C0 = initial concentration of A at time equal to zero and Ct = concentration
of A at any time t, results in:
Ct 1 t
dC = - k dt (6.13)
LC0 C L0
The integrated form of Equation (6.13) is:
ln1Ct2 - ln1C02 = - kt (6.14)
Taking the antilog of both sides of Equation (6.14) results in the familiar form of a first-
order or exponential equation, Equation (6.15).
Ct = C0 e -kt (6.15)
where k = reaction-rate constant, time-1.

By taking the natural log of both sides of Equation (6.15), we see that a first-
order removal reaction will plot as a straight line with negative slope of k on a semi-
log plot of the natural log of the concentration versus time, as shown in Figure 6.4.
Another important equation that involves first-order kinetics is the half-life
equation, which applies to several environmental engineering applications. The
most familiar application is in the nuclear field involving the half-lives of radioactive
Figure 6.3
Arithmetic plot of first-order
production reaction.
Ct
Time (t)
Y-intercept ln[C0]
ln[Ct]
Slope k
Figure 6.4
Semilog plot of first-order
Time (t) removal reaction.
materials. The half-life is the time required for a compound’s concentration to be

reduced to 50% of its initial concentration. A generalized form of the half-life equa-
tion can be derived by substituting into Equation (6.15), t1>2 for t and Ct = 0.5C0 :
0.5 C0 = C0 e -kt1>2 (6.16)
Rearranging Equation (6.16) results in:

-ln10.52 0.693
t1>2 = = (6.17)
k k
Thus, the half-life is easily calculated when k is known.
6.2.5 Second-Order Reactions

A second-order reaction proceeds at a rate that is proportional to the second power
of a single reactant. An irreversible reaction involving the conversion of a single
reactant to a single product is:
A:P (6.18)
Assuming a second-order removal reaction, the rate-law equation can be writ-

ten as Equation (6.19).
dC
r = - = kC 2 (6.19)
dt
where C is the concentration of reactant A, mg/L or g/L.

Rearranging differential Equation (6.19) and establishing the following inte-
gration limits where C0 is the concentration of A at time zero and Ct is the concen-
tration of A at any time t, results in:
Ct 1 t
- 1 dC = k dt (6.20)
LC0 C2 L0
The integrated form of Equation (6.20) is
1 1
= + kt (6.21)
Ct C0
A second-order removal reaction will plot as a straight line with slope of k, as shown
in Figure 6.5.
Slope k
Ct
Y-intercept C0
Figure 6.5
Plot of second-order
removal reaction. Time (t)
EXAMPLE 6.1
Reaction order and k determination
Consider the irreversible conversion of a single reactant (A) to a single product (P)
for the following reaction: A : P. Evaluate the following data to determine
whether the reaction is zero order, first order, or second order. Also determine the
magnitude of the rate constant k and list the appropriate units.
Time (minutes) Concentration of A (g/L)

0 1.00
11 0.50
20 0.25
48 0.10
105 0.05
Solution
First, make an arithmetic plot of the concentration of A (g/L) on the ordinate
scale versus time (minutes) on the abscissa scale. If the plot produces a straight
line, the reaction is zero order and the slope of the line is equal to the value of the
rate constant k.
1.20
1.00
Concentration of A, g/L
0.80
0.60
0.40
0.20
0.00
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Time, minutes
Since a plot of the concentration of A versus time produces a curve, the reac-
tion is probably not best modeled as zero order. Therefore, make a semilog plot of
the natural log (ln) of the concentration of A on the ordinate scale versus time (min-
utes) on the abscissa scale. If the plot produces a straight line, the reaction is first
order. The natural log of the concentration of A must be determined before plotting,
as shown below. The use of Excel or similar spreadsheet software is recommended
for completing such repetitive calculations.
Time (minutes) Concentration of A (g/L) ln [A]

0 1.00 0.00
11 0.50 - 0.69
20 0.25 - 1.39
48 0.10 - 2.30
105 0.05 - 3.00
0.00
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0.50
1.00
ln(Concentration of A)
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
3.50
Time, minutes
A semilog plot of the concentration of A versus time produces a curve, indicat-

ing that the reaction is not first order. Next, plot the reciprocal of the concentration of
A (g/L) on the ordinate scale versus time (minutes) on the abscissa scale. If a straight
line is produced, the reaction is second order.The reciprocal of the concentration of A
must be determined before plotting, as shown below.
Time (minutes) Concentration of A (g/L) 1/A (L/g)

0 1.00 1.0
11 0.50 2.0
20 0.25 4.0
48 0.10 10.0
105 0.05 20.0
A plot of the reciprocal of A versus time yields a straight line, so the reaction
is second order. The slope of the line is equal to the magnitude of the reaction-rate
constant k, which in this case is 0.1865. The units for k are L/1g # min2.
25.0
y 0.1865x 0.5357
R2 0.9963
20.0
(Concentration of A)1
15.0
10.0
5.0
0.0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Time, minutes
If none of the above plots produces a straight line, the reaction order may be
fractional or variable. Other texts, such as Levenspiel (1972) or Metcalf and Eddy
(2003), should be consulted.
6.2.6 Temperature Corrections

The reaction rate for many chemical and biochemical reactions increases rapidly (expo-
nentially) with an increase in temperature, as shown by the Arrhenius relationship:
k = Ae -1Ea/RT2 (6.22)
where:
k = reaction rate constant,
A = a constant that is independent of temperature for a specific reaction,
Ea = activation energy, cal/mol,
R = ideal gas constant, 1.98 cal/(mol # K), and
T = reaction temperature, K.
At a given temperature, if the reaction-rate constant is known, the Arrhenius
relationship can be used to predict the rate constant at another temperature. For
example, consider the Arrhenius equation for temperatures identified as T1 and T2 .
For temperature T1 :
k1 = Ae -1Ea/RT12 (6.23)
For temperature T2 :
k2 = Ae -1Ea/RT22 (6.24)
Dividing Equation (6.24) by Equation (6.23) yields:
k2 Ae -1Ea/RT22
= (6.25)
k1 Ae -1Ea/RT12
By taking the natural log of both sides of Equation (6.25) and rearranging yields:
k2 -Ea Ea
ln ¢ ≤ = + (6.26)
k1 RT2 RT1
Simplifying Equation (6.26) yields:
k2 Ea 1T2 - T12
ln ¢ ≤ = (6.27)
k1 R T2 T1
Ea
For most situations in environmental engineering, the term may be consid-
RT2T1
ered a constant (C) and Equation (6.27) can be rearranged as follows:
k2
ln ¢ ≤ = C1T2 - T12 (6.28)
k1
Taking the antilog of both sides of Equation (6.28) results in:
k2
= eC1T2 - T12 (6.29)
k1
Replacing eC with the temperature correction factor 1u2 results in the following
equation, which is commonly used for correcting biochemical and chemical reac-
tions for temperature variations:
k2
= u1T2 - T12 (6.30)
k1
where:
k2 = reaction-rate constant at temperature T2 , and
k1 = reaction-rate constant at temperature T1 .
Absolute temperature values must be used in other forms of the Arrhenius
equation, but the use of Celsius is acceptable in Equation (6.30), since only a differ-
ence in temperature is involved.
EXAMPLE 6.2
Te m p e r a t u r e e f f e c t s o n r a t e c o n s t a n t s
A u of 1.047 is typically used for making temperature corrections to the biochemical
oxygen demand (BOD) rate constant k. If the BOD rate constant at 25ºC is 0.20 d-1,
determine the value of the BOD rate constant k for a temperature of 20ºC.
Solution
First, solve Equation (6.30) for k2 . Make appropriate substitutions and solve as follows.
k2 = k1u1T2 - T12
0.20 d-1 = k111.0472125°C - 20°C2
k1 = 0.20 d-1/11.04725°C = 0.16 d-1
The value of the BOD rate constant k at a temperature of 20ºC is equal to

0.16 d-1. The rate of reaction for many systems is strongly dependent on temperature.
In this example, lowering the temperature by 5ºC decreased the reaction rate by 20%.
6.3 MATERIAL BALANCES

Material or mass balances are routinely encountered in environmental engineering
problems and generally focus on reactors or specific processes. Material balances
are an important way of analyzing water and wastewater treatment processes, air
pollution control systems, and stream modeling applications to name a few exam-
ples. The quantity of material or mass entering and exiting the system should bal-
ance, along with all flows into and out of the system. Both the law of conservation of
matter and the law of conservation of energy must be obeyed. The law of conserva-
tion of matter states that with the exception of nuclear reactions, matter can neither
be created nor destroyed. Conservation of energy means that energy cannot be cre-
ated or destroyed; however, the form of energy may change. In most environmental
engineering applications mass balances are performed on flows and materials enter-
ing and exiting the control volume. Energy balances are usually performed sepa-
rately and in many instances are not required.
A qualitative or word equation for a materials balance is:
3accumulation4 = 3inputs4 - 3outputs4 + 3reaction4 (6.31)
The accumulation term is similar to the balance in a checkbook. Under steady-state

conditions, when the flow and concentration in each stream remain constant, the
accumulation term is equal to zero. Inputs (deposits) represent all flows and materi-
als entering the system, whereas outputs (withdrawals) represent those exiting the
system. Depending on the type of system or process, a chemical or biochemical reac-
tion may be taking place, resulting in the production or removal of a substance. The
positive sign in front of the reaction term may actually be negative if the reaction
involves the removal or destruction of a constituent. If the reaction results in the
formation of a product, then it remains positive.
In biological treatment systems, microorganisms are grown or produced, and
the reaction term would be positive. Simultaneously, substrate in the form of bio-
chemical oxygen demand (BOD) is being removed from these systems. This results
in a negative sign for the reaction term when material balances are performed on
substrate in biological processes.
Example 6.3 shows a simple mass balance for a manhole in a sewer system.
This is an example of a “conservative” or nonreactive substance, since no biochemi-
cal or chemical reaction occurs in the control volume (manhole).
Section 6.3 Material Balances 131
EXAMPLE 6.3
Mass balance on flows and solids
A manhole receives inflows from two sewer laterals and has one outflow as seen in
the diagram below.The flow rates and suspended solids (SS) concentrations in each of
the flow streams are given on the diagram. Perform a materials balance on flows and
suspended solids concentrations around the manhole to determine the unknown flow
and suspended solids concentration.
Q2 ? L/h Control
volume
SS2 150 mg/L
Q3 56 L/h
Q1 40 L/h
Manhole
SS1 200 mg/L

SS3 ? mg/L
Solution
First, perform a flow balance around the manhole by substituting into Equation (6.31).
3accumulation4 = 3inputs4 - 3outputs4 + 3reaction4
The steady-state assumption will be used; therefore, the accumulation term will be
zero. Since there are no reactions occurring in the manhole, the last term on the
right side of Equation (6.31) is also zero.
0 = Q1 + Q2 - Q3 + 0
Q1 + Q2 = Q3
L L
40 + Q2 = 56
h h
L L L
Q2 = 56 - 40 = 16
h h h
Next, perform a materials balance on suspended solids (SS) concentration
around the manhole as follows. The mass of solids is calculated by multiplying the
flow by the SS concentration:
mass 1M2 = Q * 1SS concentration2
Start the solids balance using Equation (6.31).

The steady-state assumption will be used, so the accumulation term will be

zero. Since no reactions are occurring in the manhole that produce or remove solids;
the reaction term is also zero.
0 = M1 + M2 - M3 + 0
M1 + M2 = M3
L mg L mg L
40 a200 b + 16 a150 b = 56 1SS32
h L h L h
L mg mg mg
56 1SS32 = 8000 + 2400 = 10,400
h h h h
10,400 mg>h mg
SS3 = = 186
56 L>h L
Example 6.4 illustrates the mass-balance procedure for an air-pollution problem

in which a reaction is taking place (e.g., the formation of particles). It is an example of
a completely mixed-flow reactor, which will be discussed in more detail in Section 6.4.
EXAMPLE 6.4
Mass balance on air flow and particulates
Estimate the concentration of particulate matter, a form of air pollution, in the ambi-
ent air above the city of Atlanta, Georgia, assuming the following data. The average
annual wind velocity is 20 miles per hour and the assumed mixing height above the
city is approximately 4000 feet. Also assume that the city of Atlanta is 10 miles long
and 10 miles wide. The annual quantity of particles discharged into the air is approx-
imately one million tons.
Solution
The solution of this problem requires the use of the continuity equation, where
Q = AV. It will also be necessary to perform a materials balance on air flow and
particulate matter entering and exiting the volume of air above the city. The control
volume in this example is assumed to be a rectangular box 4000 feet in height and
10 mi * 10 mi in surface area. The diagrams below help to envision the problem.
10 mi
10 mi Airout
Qout
Cout
4000 ft
Pollutantsin
Airin
Qin
Cin
Section 6.3 Material Balances 133
Airin Airout
Qin Qout
Cin Cout
Pollutantsin
First, estimate the air flow rate entering the side of the control volume using
the continuity equation: Q = AV.
ft mi ft ft3
Q = a4000 ft * 10 mi * 5280 b a20 b a5280 b = 2.230 * 1013
mi h mi h
The air flow rate into and out of the control volume (rectangular box) over the
city is equal to 2.230 * 1013 ft3/h.
Next, estimate the quantity of pollutants or particles that are discharged into
the atmosphere in micrograms per hour as follows:
tons 2000 lb 454 g 1.0 * 106 mg

1.0 * 106 a ba b¢ ≤
yr ton lb g
1 yr 1d mg
* a ba b = 1.037 * 1014
365 d 24 h h
One mg is equal to 1 * 10-6 grams. Next, perform a materials balance on particles,

starting with Equation (6.31):
The steady-state assumption is used in this case, since particles are not accumu-
lating in the control volume; therefore, the accumulation term goes to zero. Particles
are being produced within the control volume, so the third term on the right side of
the above equation is positive and has a magnitude equal to the mass of particles
produced. We will also assume that the concentration of particles in the air entering
the control volume is zero 1Cin = 02. Recall that mass is calculated by multiplying
the flow rate by the concentration.
Maccum = Min - Mout + Mproduced
Maccum = QinCin - QoutCout + Mproduced
0 = Qin 102 - QoutCout + 1.037 * 1014 mg>h
12.23 * 1013 ft3>h2 Cout = 1.037 * 1014 mg>h

1.037 * 1014 mg>h mg
Cout = = 4.65
2.23 * 10 ft >h
13 3
ft3
mg 1 ft3 1 gal 1000 L mg

Cout = 4.65 ¢ ≤¢ ≤¢ ≤ = 164 3
ft3 7.48 gal 3.785 L m3
m
If steady-state and complete-mix conditions are assumed, the particle concen-

tration within and exiting the control volume representing Atlanta is 164 mg/m3.
6.4 FLOW REGIMES AND REACTORS

The detention time and flow rate are significant parameters in most environmental
engineering unit operations and processes. A flow model or regime is used to evalu-
ate the effects of detention time and flow rate on a given system. Reactors are tanks
or vessels in which chemical and biological reactions occur. The type of reactor used
impacts the effectiveness of treatment or the degree of conversion of a given
process.
6.4.1 Flow Regimes

There are three types of flow regimes related to reactor design and degree of mixing
encountered in most environmental engineering applications. In continuous flow
systems, the flow regime will approach either ideal plug flow or ideal completely
mixed flow. For ideal plug flow to occur, all the elements of the fluid that enter the
system (or control volume) at a given time pass through the system at the same
velocity, remain in the system the same amount of time, and exit the system at the
same time. Plug flow occurs in long, narrow basins with length-to-width (L:W) ratios
of 50:1 or greater. Water flowing through a pipe or hose is an example of plug flow.
Ideal completely mixed flow is approached when fluid elements that enter the sys-
tem are instantaneously and uniformly dispersed throughout the system. The con-
centration of the constituents within the reactor is identical to that discharged from
the reactor. In actual reactor systems, the flow regime will be somewhere between
these two extreme idealized cases and is often referred to as dispersed plug flow.
Levenspiel (1972) and Reynolds and Richards (1996) provide more details about
these flow regimes.
6.4.2 Reactors
Environmental engineers design reactor systems for treating water, wastewater, air,
and solid and hazardous wastes. Three types of reactors encountered in environ-
mental engineering include: batch, completely mixed, and plug flow. Batch reactors
do not have a continuous input and output of materials. Both completely mixed and
plug flow reactors generally have continuous inputs and outputs, with chemical
and/or biochemical reactions occurring within. Kinetically, batch and plug flow reac-
tors are evaluated similarly. Completely mixed reactors are less efficient than either
batch or plug flow reactors.
In reality, it is difficult to achieve ideal completely mixed flow or ideal plug
flow. Dispersed plug flow reactors can be designed which result in a flow regime in-
between plug flow and completely mixed. Environmental engineers often use a
series of completely mixed reactors which approximate the efficiency of plug flow
reactors while providing the benefit of resisting shock loadings. Exercise 1 at the end
of this chapter involves using a series of completely mixed reactors to simulate plug
flow. Detailed design of reactor systems is beyond the scope of this text. The reader
should consult the following texts to learn more about reactor design: Levenspiel,
1972; Reynolds and Richards, 1996; and Metcalf and Eddy, 2003. A brief explanation
for each type of reactor will be presented along with derivations of zero-, first-, and
second-order reactions.
Ideal Batch Reactors

Batch reactors are typically used in situations where the flow to the reactor is less
than one million gallons per day 13785 m3/d2 and operation involves a sequence of
events. Batch reactors do not have a constant input and output, but normally their
Section 6.4 Flow Regimes and Reactors 135
contents are completely mixed. First, the reactor is filled with the process stream
containing the constituents to be processed. Next, the flow to the reactor is stopped,
and air or chemicals are added to the reactor so that treatment may begin. The reac-
tor is operated in this mode until the desired degree of treatment or conversion has
been accomplished. Processing time may be several hours to several months,
depending on the application. Once processing or treatment of the flow has been
accomplished, the contents of the reactor are removed and a new batch of influent is
added to the reactor for processing.
The advantage of using a batch reactor is that it allows flexibility of operation,
since the reaction time can be varied. The main disadvantage is that multiple reac-
tors may be required, and they are generally limited to small flows. A simple
schematic diagram of a batch reactor is presented in Figure 6.6.
Batch Reactor: Zero-Order Removal Reaction

This section shows the derivation of a zero-order removal reaction in a completely
mixed, batch reactor (CMBR). As seen in Figure (6.6), the dotted lines for the influ-
ent and effluent flows to and from the reactor indicate that they are not continuous.
Other important parameters used in the derivation are defined below.
Q = volumetric flow rate into and out of the batch reactor, volume/time,
V = liquid volume in the batch reactor, volume,
C0 = concentration of a given constituent in the influent to the reactor,
mass/volume, and
Ct = concentration at some specified time of a given constituent within the
reactor.
Recall from Equation (6.8) that a zero-order removal reaction takes the fol-
lowing form:
dC dC
r = - = kC0 or = -k
dt dt
To derive the detention time equation for a batch reactor, we begin with the materi-
als balance equation, Equation (6.31). A materials balance will be performed on
constituent “C”:
A materials balance involves calculating the mass of a constituent per unit of time as
it enters, exits, accumulates, increases, or decreases within the reactor. Equation (6.31)
Figure 6.6
Schematic of a batch reactor.
Q Q
C0 Ct
V Ct
is rewritten in differential equation form as Equation (6.32). The accumulation term

dC
a b represents the concentration of a specific constituent that accumulates
dt accum
within the reactor. It must be multiplied by the reactor volume to yield the proper
units, mass/time:
dC dC
a b V = QC0 - QCt + a bV (6.32)
dt accum dt
Since batch reactors do not have continuous flows into and out of them, the input
and output terms are zero. Because we are assuming that a zero-order removal reac-
tion occurs in the reactor, the reaction term is replaced with Equation (6.8). Substi-
tuting Equation (6.8) into Equation (6.32) yields:
dC
a b V = 0 - 0 + 1- k2V (6.33)
dt accum
Equation (6.33) can be simplified to obtain:
dC
a b = -k (6.34)
dt accum
Equation (6.34) is rearranged and integration limits established as follows:
Ct t
dC = - k dt (6.35)
LCo L0
Integrating Equation (6.35) between the limits for t from zero to t, and for the con-
centration C which varies from C0 , the concentration of C at time zero, to Ct , the
concentration C at any time t, yields:
Ct - C0 = - kt (6.36)
Rearranging Equation (6.36) and solving for t results in Equation (6.37), the deten-
tion time equation for an ideal batch reactor with a zero-order removal reaction
taking place within.
C0 - Ct
t = (6.37)
k
where:
t = hydraulic detention time, time, and
k = zero-order removal rate constant, mass/volume # time.
Knowing the rate constant, along with the influent and effluent characteristics,
the design engineer can determine the detention time or reaction time necessary for
the desired degree of treatment. Table 6.2 lists the equations for detention times for
zero-, first-, and second-order reactions in a completely mixed batch reactor. The
Greek letter theta (u) is used rather than t to denote detention time in most chemi-
cal and environmental engineering texts.
Table 6.2 Detention Times for Zero-, First-, and Second-Order Removal and Production
Reactions in a Completely Mixed Batch Reactor
Removal Production
Zero C0 - Ct Ct - C0
u = u =
k k
First ln1C02 - ln1Ct2 ln1Ct2 - ln1C02
u = u =
k k
Second 11>Ct - 1>C02 11>C0 - 1>Ct2
u = u =
k k
EXAMPLE 6.5
Completely mixed batch-reactor design
A CMBR is to be designed to treat pharmaceutical wastewater that contains 600 mg/L
of chemical oxygen demand (COD). A treatability study on the pharmaceutical waste-
water determined the kinetics for COD removal to be zero order with a rate constant
of 55 mg/(L # h).
Determine:
a. Detention time necessary to reduce the COD of the wastewater to 50 mg/L
so it can be discharged into the municipal sewerage system.
b. The volume of the reactor to treat 3000 m3 of wastewater daily.
Solution part a
First, use Equation (6.37) to calculate the required detention time, since the batch
reactor uses a zero-order removal reaction. The required detention time is 10 hours.
C0 - Ct 1600 - 502 mg>L

55 mg>(L # h)
t = = = 10 h
k
Solution part b
Next, assume that two batches of wastewater will be processed each day with 1500 m3
of wastewater per batch.This will allow the reactor to be filled in 1 hour and drained in
1 hour, resulting in a total time of 12 hours for each batch of processed wastewater. Use
a reactor volume that is approximately 10% more than the required volume to allow
additional depth for freeboard—in this case, 1650 m3 11.10 * 1500 m32. Freeboard is
extra height added to the depth of the reactor so that the reactor contents do not
overflow.
Ideal Completely Mixed Reactors

An ideal, completely mixed flow reactor (CMFR) changes the influent constituent to
the final effluent constituent concentration as it enters the reactor. The contents of
the reactor are uniformly mixed, so that the constituents within the reactor have the
same concentration as those that exit the reactor. Mechanical means may be used to
mix the contents, but usually air is used. In some situations, mechanical mixing is
combined with aeration. Completely mixed reactors normally operate as continuous

flow units. Often, completely mixed reactors are called continuously stirred tank
reactors (CSTR).
Figure 6.7 is a schematic diagram of a completely mixed, continuous flow reac-
tor. Notice the similarity with the batch reactor; however, the flow into and out of a
CMFR is continuous, not on a batch basis. Completely mixed reactors are advanta-
geous because the influent is diluted to the final concentration on entering the reac-
tor. Therefore they are not affected by shock loadings of organics or other toxic
substances or by dramatic changes in pH. CMFRs, however, are not as efficient as plug
flow reactors.
Completely Mixed Flow Reactor: First-Order Removal Reaction

This section shows the derivation of the detention-time equation for a first-order
removal reaction in a CMFR.
Recall from Equation (6.12) that a first-order removal reaction takes the fol-
lowing form:
dC dC
r = - = kC1 or = - kC
dt dt
To derive the detention-time equation for the CMFR, we must first use Equation
(6.31) to perform a materials balance on constituent C.
Equation (6.31) is written in differential form to show mass flow through the
reactor.
dC dC
a b V = QC0 - QCt + a bV (6.38)
dt accum dt
The steady-state assumption is made, so the accumulation term goes to zero.

Since we are assuming that a first-order removal reaction occurs in the reactor, the
reaction term is replaced with Equation (6.12), dC/dt = - kCt .
0 = QC0 - QCt - kCtV (6.39)
Figure 6.7
Schematic of a continuous
flow, completely mixed
reactor.
Q Q
C0 Ct
V Ct
Rearranging Equation (6.39) results in:
kCtV = Q1C0 - Ct2 (6.40)
The detention time 1u2 is defined as the volume divided by the volumetric flow rate.
When substituted into the equation above, we get:
V 1C0 - Ct2 1C0>Ct - 12

u = = = (6.41)
Q kCt k
Table 6.3 lists the detention equations for continuous-flow, completely mixed reac-
tors for zero-, first-, and second-order removal and production reactions.
Table 6.3 Detention Times for Zero-, First-, and Second-Order Removal and
Production Reactions in a Continuous Flow, Completely Mixed Reactor
Removal Production
C0 - Ct Ct - C0
Zero u = u =
k k
First 1C0>Ct - 12 11 - C0>Ct2
u = u =
k k
1 C0 1 C0
Second u = ¢ - 1≤ u = ¢1 - ≤
k Ct Ct kCt Ct
EXAMPLE 6.6
Completely mixed reactor design
A completely mixed flow reactor is to be designed to treat an influent stream con-
taining 150 mg/L of chemical oxygen demand (COD) at a flow rate of 100 gallons
per minute (gpm). COD represents the total quantity of oxygen required to oxidize
organic matter to carbon dioxide and water. Assume COD removal follows a first-
order removal reaction with a rate constant k of 0.40 h-1.
Determine:
a. The detention time in hours.
b. The volume of the reactor in ft3 if the effluent is to contain 20 mg/L of COD.
Solution part a
First, determine the required detention time by substituting the appropriate values
into Equation (6.41). The detention time is equal to 16.25 hours.
1C0 - Ct2 1150 - 202 mg>L

u = = = 16.25 h
kCt 0.40 hr -1 120 mg>L2
Solution part b
Next, calculate the volume of the reactor by rearranging the equation for detention
time 1u2. Recall that the definition of detention time is volume divided by volumetric
flow rate.
gal 60 min 1 ft3

V = uQ = 16.25 h a100 ba b¢ ≤ = 13,035 ft3
min h 7.48 gal
The reactor volume is approximately 13,000 ft3.
Ideal Plug Flow Reactors

An ideal plug flow reactor (PFR) is one in which the influent constituent concen-
tration decreases or increases along the length of the reactor. Plug flow is also called
“pipe” flow. For a removal reaction, Figure 6.8 shows how the concentration of a
constituent such as biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) would decrease along the
length of the reactor. (BOD is a quantitative measure of the oxygen utilized by bac-
teria for the oxidation of degradable organic matter.)
In ideal plug flow, longitudinal mixing does not occur and the particles that enter
the reactor pass through it in the same sequence in which they enter. Ideal plug flow
reactors are more efficient than completely mixed reactors. From a kinetic analysis
they yield the same results as batch reactors. The major drawback to plug flow reac-
tors is that they are susceptible to shock loadings of organics or other toxic substances
or to dramatic pH shifts that can kill the microorganisms within the reactor.
Plug Flow Reactor: Second-Order Removal Reaction
This section presents the general form of the equation for one-dimensional plug
flow. The detention-time equation for a second-order removal reaction occurring
within a continuous plug flow reactor is developed. Figure (6.9) is a schematic of an
ideal, continuous plug flow reactor.
The general form of the equation for one-dimensional plug flow is presented
as Equation (6.42). Remember that r is equal to the rate of reaction. Either a pro-
duction or a removal reaction may take place. The sign will be positive if a substance
is produced and negative if a reactant is removed. The reaction type may be zero
order, first order, or second order.
Q ¢C
a b = ;r (6.42)
A ¢X
Figure 6.8
Q Q
Schematic of a continuous V Volume
plug flow reactor showing C0 Ct
concentration decreasing
along length of reactor.
C0
CONC.
Ct
Distance X
L Q
Ct
Q
C
X Figure 6.9
CX
X
C0 Schematic of a continuous
plug flow reactor.
Recall from Equation (6.19) that a second-order removal reaction takes the
following form:
dC
r = = - kC 2
dt
Substituting for r into Equation (6.42) and replacing ¢C/¢X in Equation (6.42) with
dC/dX results in:
Q dC
a b = - kC 2 (6.43)
A dX
Rearranging Equation (6.43) and establishing integration limits yields:
A L 1 Ct 1
- dX = dC (6.44)
Q L0 k LC0 C 2
Integrating Equation (6.44) for X between the limits of 0 and L and for C between
C0 , the concentration of C at time zero, and Ct , the concentration of C at time t,
produces:
AL V 1 1 1
- = - = -u = B - ¢ ≤ - ¢ - ≤ R (6.45)
Q Q k Ct C0
Solving Equation (6.45) for detention time 1u2 yields:
1 1 1
u = B¢ ≤ - ¢ ≤R (6.46)
k Ct C0
Table 6.4 lists the detention time equations for continuous plug flow reactors for zero-,
first-, and second-order removal and production reactions. Notice the detention-time
Table 6.4 Detention Times for Zero-, First-, and Second-Order Removal and
Production Reactions in a Continuous Plug Flow Reactor
Removal Production
C0 - Ct Ct - C0
Zero u = u =
k k
ln1C02 - ln1Ct2 ln1Ct2 - ln1C02

First u = u =
k k
11>Ct - 1>C02 11>C0 - 1>Ct2

Second u = u =
k k
equations shown in Table 6.4 for PFRs are identical to those shown in Table 6.2 for
batch reactors.
EXAMPLE 6.7
Plug flow reactor design
A continuous PFR is to be designed to treat an influent stream containing 200 mg/L
of acetic acid at a flow rate of 400 liters per minute (lpm). A second-order removal
reaction is occurring, where the rate constant k is 0.0085 L/1mg # h2.
Determine:
a. The detention time in hours.
b. The volume of the reactor in m3 to achieve 90% removal of acetic acid.
Solution part a
First, it is necessary to calculate the concentration of acetic acid in the effluent. This
may be accomplished using the definition of percent removal (%):
1Cin - Cout2100
percent removal 1%2 = (6.47)
Cin
Cin = Concentration of constituent in the influent, mass/volume

Cout = Concentration of constituent in the effluent, mass/volume
1200 mg>L - Cout2100

90% removal =
200 mg>L
Cout = 20 mg/L
Next, the detention time required to achieve 90% removal of acetic acid for a
second-order removal reaction can be determined using Equation (6.46).
1 1 1 1 1 1
u = B¢ ≤ - ¢ ≤R = # B¢ ≤ - ¢ ≤R
k Ct C0 0.0085 L>(mg h) 20 mg>L 200 mg>L
= 5.29 h
Solution part b
Finally, determine the volume of the plug flow reactor by rearranging the equation
for detention time 1u2. Recall that detention time is equal to volume divided by the
volumetric flow rate. Therefore, the volume of the reactor is equal to u * Q.
400 L 60 min 1 m3
V = u * Q = 5.29 ha b a b¢ ≤ = 127 m3
min h 1000 L
Section 6.5 Energy Balances 143
6.5 ENERGY BALANCES

Analogous to material and flow balances, energy balances must be performed when
dealing with thermal pollution from coal-fired power plants and nuclear reactors,
potential climate changes resulting from the discharge of greenhouse gases, and the
combustion of fossil fuels (coal, natural gas, and gasoline) to produce energy. This
section will present a brief introduction to thermodynamics and give examples illus-
trating how to perform energy balances.
6.5.1 Definition of Energy and Work

Thermodynamics is the study of energy changes resulting from physical and chemi-
cal processes. Changes in energy associated with biological and chemical processes
are very important in environmental engineering.
Energy is defined as the capacity for doing work. There are many forms of
energy, such as chemical, electrical, kinetic, potential, and thermal (heat). Heat and
work are related forms of energy. Thermal energy can be converted into work, and
work can be converted into heat energy. Various units are used for measuring
energy: British thermal unit (BTU), calorie (cal), and joule (J). The BTU is defined
as the energy required to raise the temperature of one pound of water one degree
Fahrenheit (ºF). The basic unit of thermal energy, the calorie, is defined as the quan-
tity of energy required to raise the temperature of one gram of water one degree
Celsius (ºC). The joule is defined as the amount of work done by a force of one new-
ton to raise an object one meter.
Work is defined as transferring energy to an object by applying force and
causing motion. Work is measured as force multiplied by the distance displaced.
The units of work are expressed in foot-pounds 1ft # lb2 or joules. One calorie of
thermal energy is equivalent to 4.184 joules, and one BTU is equivalent to 778 ft # lb
of work.
Another important term is power, which is defined as the rate of doing work.
Power has units of energy per unit of time. Typical units for power include joules per
second (J/s) or watts (W). One watt is equivalent to one J/s or 3.412 BTU/h.
Producing work requires energy, and energy has many forms. Chemical energy
in organic compounds can be released as heat during combustion. This energy can
then be used for heating or producing electrical energy through steam-driven tur-
bines. Chemical energy is a form of internal energy (U). Kinetic energy (KE) can
produce electricity through windmills or water flowing through turbines. Potential
energy (PE) results from a change in elevation above the earth. Equation (6.48)
shows that the total energy (E) a substance possesses is the sum of the internal,
kinetic, and potential energies.
E = U + KE + PE (6.48)
The first law of thermodynamics states that energy cannot be created or

destroyed, excluding nuclear reactions. Only the form of energy will change. Like
material and flow balances, energy balances can be performed when energy flows
through the ecosystem or a particular process. The general form of an energy bal-
ance is similar to Equation (6.31) for material and flow balances:
3energy accumulated4 = 3energy input4 - 3energy outputs4 (6.49)

+ 3energy generated4
Energy generated is actually comprised of two terms such that:
3energy generated4 = 3energy produced4 - 3energy consumed4 (6.50)
Regardless of the process, energy conversion is not 100% efficient, and a loss of useful
energy occurs, normally through waste heat. The second law of thermodynamics states
that there will always be some waste heat released during energy conversions.
Heat is a form of internal energy expressed as the thermodynamic property
enthalpy (H), which is a function of temperature, pressure, and volume. The enthalpy
of a substance is defined by:
H = U + PV (6.51)
where:
U = the internal energy of the substance,
P = pressure of the system, and
V = volume of the system.
When a process occurs without a change in volume, the change in internal
energy can be calculated as follows:
Δ U = mcv ΔT (6.52)
where:
m = mass of substance,
cv = specific heat or heat capacity of the substance at constant volume, and
ΔT = temperature change.
For constant-pressure systems, thermal or heat energy changes can be estimated
using the equation:
Δ H = mcp Δ T (6.53)
where:
ΔH = change in enthalpy or thermal (heat) energy,
m = mass of substance, and
cp = specific heat or heat capacity of the substance at constant pressure.
For incompressible substances, such as solids under normal environmental condi-
tions and most liquids, cv and cp are nearly the same and are replaced with c.Therefore,
ΔU = ΔH, and Equation (6.52) is rewritten as follows, where c replaces cv:
Δ U = mc Δ T (6.54)
where:
c = specific heat or heat capacity of the substance.
For most environmental applications, we are concerned with the rate of energy
change across boundaries of systems. Therefore, Equation (6.54) is modified to
#
account for the mass flow rate 1m2:
#
3rate of change in stored energy4 = mc ΔT (6.55)
For thermal pollution problems in environmental engineering, the heat energy

for a given water body is calculated by multiplying the mass of the water by the
absolute temperature and by the specific heat of water. We assume that the specific
heat of water does not vary significantly with temperature. At 15°C, the specific heat
of water is 4.18 kJ/(kg # °C), 1.0 kcal/(kg # °C), or 1.0 BTU/(lb # °F).
EXAMPLE 6.8
Thermal discharges to river
An Industrial WWTP in Covington, Virginia, discharges approximately 2.0 million
gallons per day (MGD) of treated effluent to the Jackson River at an average tem-
perature of 80°F. If the temperature and flow rate of the Jackson River upstream of
the discharge are 50°F and 100 ft3/s, respectively, determine the temperature in the
river downstream of the industrial discharge.
WWTP Discharge
Q 2 MGD
T 80ºF
Jackson river
Q 64.6 MGD
T 50ºF
Q 66.6 MGD
T ? ºF
Solution
First, we must convert the river flow rate from cubic feet per second to MGD.
ft3 7.48 gal 60 s 60 min 24 h 1 MG

100 ¢ 3
≤a ba ba b¢ 6 ≤ = 64.6 MGD
s ft min h d 10 gal
Next, we calculate the heat energy in the wastewater and then in the river
upstream prior to the discharge, using a modified form of Equation (6.53):
3heat energy4 = mcT
The heat energy in the wastewater stream is estimated as follows:
heat MG 106 gal 8.34 lb 1.0 BTU

B R = 2.0 ¢ ≤¢ ≤¢ ≤ 180°F2
energy ww d MG gal lb # °F
1.334 * 109 BTU
=
d
The heat energy in the Jackson River is estimated as follows:
MG 106 gal 8.34 lb 1.0 BTU
¢ ≤¢ ≤¢ ≤ 150°F2
lb # °F
3heat energy4.river = 64.6
d MG gal
2.694 * 1010 BTU
=
d
Performing an energy balance on the two flows using Equation (6.49) results
in the following equation. Steady-state conditions are assumed, so the accumulation
term goes to zero.
1.334 * 109 BTU 2.694 * 1010 BTU heat

304 = B ¢ ≤ + ¢ ≤R - B R + 304
d d energy ww + river
Therefore, we determine the actual temperature in the Jackson River down-

stream of the industrial discharge by dividing the heat energy calculated above by
the total flow of the wastewater and river, and converting appropriately using the
specific heat of water.
heat 2.827 * 1010 BTU

B R =
energy ww + river d
2.827 * 1010 BTU 66.6 MG 106 gal 8.34 lb 1.0 BTU

¢ ≤a
lb # °F
= ba b1T2
d d MG gal
T = 50.9°F
We can also determine the same answer by calculating the flow weighted aver-
age of the two streams with the following equation:
T1Q1 + T2Q2
T3 =
Q1 + Q2
where T1 , T2 , and T3 represent the temperature of the wastewater, river, and com-
bined streams, respectively.
Q1 and Q2 are the flow rates for the wastewater discharge and the river upstream.
The flow in the river downstream of the discharge is the sum of the two streams:
80°F 12.0 MGD2 + 50°F 164.6 MGD2

T3 = = 50.9°F
2.0 MGD + 64.6 MGD
EXAMPLE 6.9
Coal-Fired power plant mass and energy balances
A 2000-megawatt (MW) coal-fired power plant is only 33.5% efficient at convert-
ing the coal’s energy into electrical energy. Assume that the coal has an energy
content of 25 kJ/g and contains 60% carbon, 2% sulfur, and 9% ash. Perform a
materials and energy balance around the coal-fired power plant. Assume that 65%
of the ash is released as fly ash and 35% of the ash settles outside of the firing
chamber and is collected as bottom ash. Approximately 15% of the waste heat is
assumed to exit in the stack gases, and the cooling water dissipates the remaining
heat. Air emission standards restrict sulfur and particulate quantities to 260 g SO2
per 106 kJ of heat input and 13 g particulates per 106 kJ of heat input into the coal-
fired power plant.
a. Calculate the quantity of heat loss to the cooling water (MW).

b. Calculate the quantity of cooling water (kg/s) and flow 1m3/s2 assuming a 10ºC
increase in the temperature of the cooling water.
c. Calculate the efficiency of the sulfur-dioxide removal system to meet air emis-
sion standards.
d. Calculate the efficiency of the particulate removal system to meet air emission
standards.
Solution part a
Perform the energy balance around the coal-fired power plant using Equation
(6.49). Power is the correct term when expressing energy per unit of time in the
balances. Energy is expressed in units of BTU (joules), whereas power has units of
BTU/h (watts).
energy energy in energy out energy out

B R = B R - B R - B R
accumulated coal stack gases cooling water
energy out useful
- B R
electrical power
At steady state, the energy accumulated is zero and the equation reduces to
the following form.
energy in energy out energy out energy out useful

B R = B R + B R + B R
coal stack gases cooling water electrical power
We estimate the energy in the coal 1MWt2 or thermal power by dividing the
useful energy produced as electrical power 1MWe2 by the efficiency of the coal-fired
power plant as follows:
output power 2000 MWe
input power = = = 5970 MWt
efficiency 0.335
Determine the total energy or power losses in the system as follows:

total losses = energy input - energy output = 5970 - 2000 = 3970 MWt
Estimate the stack losses, assuming 15% of the total energy lost is through stack-gas
emissions:
stack losses = 0.15 13970 MWt2 = 595.5 MWt
Calculate the energy loss in the cooling water.
Energy In Energy Out Energy Out Energy Out Useful

B R = B R + B R + B R
Coal Stack Gases Cooling Water Electrical Power
energy out
5970 MWt = 595.5 MWt + B R + 2000 MWe
cooling water
energy out
B R = 3374.5 MWt
cooling water
Solution part b
Calculate the mass flow of water required to cool the process using Equation (6.55)
and a specific heat (c) equal to 4.18 kJ/kg # °C.
#
3rate of change in stored energy4 = mc ¢T
# kJ 1 MW 1000 J
3374.5 MWt = m a4.18 # b110°C2 ¢ 6 ≤a b
kg °C 10 J>s kJ
#
m = 8.07 * 104 kg>s
Knowing that 1 m3 of water weighs 1000 kg, we determine the cooling-water

flow rate:
1 m3
Q = 8.07 * 104 kg>s ¢ ≤ = 80.7 m3>s
1000 kg
Solution part c
Determine the quantity of sulfur dioxide and particulates that can be emitted per
unit of heat input into the coal-fired power plant. First calculate the heat input into
the plant.
106 W 1 kW 24 h 1 kJ>s 60 s 60 min kJ

5970 MWt ¢ ≤a ba ba ba ba b = 5.16 * 1011
1 MW 1000 W d kW min h d
Next, calculate the quantity of sulfur dioxide that is permitted to be discharged

daily.
260 g kJ 1 kg
6
a5.16 * 1011 ba b = 1.34 * 105 kg SO2>d
10 kJ d 1000 g
Next, calculate the quantity of particulates (fly ash) that is permitted to be dis-
charged daily.
13 g kJ 1 kg kg
6
a5.16 * 1011 ba b = 6708
10 kJ d 1000 g d
Determine the quantity of coal burned daily.
106 W 1 J>s 1 kJ 86,400 s 1 g coal 1 kg

5970 MW ¢ ≤a ba ba b a ba b
1 MW 1W 1000 J d 25 kJ 1000 g
kg
= 2.06 * 107
d
The molecular weight of sulfur dioxide 1SO22 is 32 + 21162 = 64. Therefore,

32 grams of sulfur will produce 64 grams of sulfur dioxide, assuming that the sulfur
is completely oxidized. Now, calculate the quantity of SO2 produced daily.
kg coal kg S 64 kg SO2 kg
SO2 produced = 2.06 * 107 a0.02 ba b = 8.24 * 105
d kg coal 32 kg S d
The removal efficiency for the air pollution control equipment can be calcu-
lated using the following equation:
1Cin - Cout2 * 100 1Min - Mout2 * 100

removl efficiency = =
Cin Min
Estimate the removal efficiency for sulfur dioxide to meet air standards.
18.24 * 105 - 1.34 * 1052kg>d * 100

SO2 removal efficiency = = 83.7 %
8.24 * 105 kg>d
Solution part d
Next, knowing that the coal is 9% ash, calculate the quantity of particulates or fly
ash released:
kg coal kg ash kg
fly ash produced = 2.06 * 107 a 0.09 b10.652 = 1.21 * 106
d kg coal d
Estimate the removal efficiency for particulates to meet air standards.
11.21 * 106 kg>d - 6708 kg>d2 * 100

particulate removal efficiency = = 99.4 %
1.21 * 106 kg>d
A schematic summarizing the mass and energy flow through the plant is given
in Figure 6.10.
Figure 6.10
595.5 MW Mass and energy (power)
Energy loss
flows in a typical coal-fired
Particulates power plant.
6708 kg/d
SO2
2000 MW 1.34 105 kg/d
Electrical
output
Stack
5970 MW
Energy input Fly ash
5.16 1011 kJ/d 33.5 % 1.21 106 kg/d Air
Efficient pollution
power control
2.06 107 kg Coal/d SO2
plant 8.24 105 kg/d system
3374.5 MW 1.86 106 kg/d

Energy loss Bottom ash
to cooling water
S U M M A RY
A brief introduction to chemical and biochemical reactions with specific emphasis on
the rates of reactions and order of reactions was presented. Zero-, first-, and second-
order removal and production reactions were derived for batch, plug, and completely
mixed reactor systems. Material balances were performed around these three reactor
systems with and without reactions occurring within. Examples illustrating how to
perform material and flow balances were presented. The design of batch, plug flow,
and completely mixed reactors was presented. The concepts and definitions neces-
sary to perform simple energy balances were introduced. Designing and modeling
environmental engineering systems requires that the engineer have a good under-
standing of kinetics of reactions in addition to being able to perform material and
energy balances around these systems.
KEY WORDS batch reactor first law of thermo- rate law

completely mixed flow dynamics reaction order
completely mixed reactor half-life second law of thermo-
continuous flow heat dynamics
control volume kinetics thermodynamics
detention time material balance work
dispersed plug flow plug flow
energy power
REFERENCES
Levenspiel, O. (1972). Chemical Reaction Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, New York.
Metcalf and Eddy (2003). Wastewater Engineering: Treatment and Reuse, McGraw-Hill,
New York.
Reynolds, T.D., and Richards, P.A. (1996). Unit Operations and Processes in Environmental
Engineering, PWS Publishing, Boston, MA.
EXERCISES
6.1 Several reactor configurations are to be considered for reducing the influent sub-
strate concentration from 100 mg/L to 20 mg/L at a design flow rate of 1.0 million
gallons per day. Assume that substrate removal follows first-order kinetics, and
the first-order rate constant is 0.8 days-1. The following equation may be used
for estimating the removal efficiency for completely mixed reactors operating in
series, assuming first-order removal reactions.
n
Sn 1
= a b
S0 1 + ku
where:
S0 and Sn = influent substrate concentration and effluent substrate concen-

tration from the nth completely mixed reactor in series, mass/
volume,
n = number of completely mixed reactors in series,
k = first-order removal rate constant, d-1, and
u = detention time in each of the completely mixed reactors in series.
Exercises 151
Determine and compare the volume required for the following reactor con-
figurations.
(a) One continuous flow, ideal completely mixed reactor
(b) One continuous flow, ideal plug flow reactor
(c) Two continuous flow, ideal completely mixed reactors in series
(d) Four continuous flow, ideal completely mixed reactors in series
6.2 During a chemical reaction, the concentration of Species A was measured as a
function of time. The observed concentration at various time intervals is pre-
sented below. Determine the reaction order and rate constant, k. Is Species A
being removed or produced?
Time (min) Concentration of A (mg/L)

0 100
10 80
20 60
30 40
40 20
50 0
6.3 The concentration of Species C was measured as a function of time during a

chemical reaction. Its observed concentration at various time intervals is pre-
sented below. Determine the reaction order and rate constant, k. Is Species C
Time (hr) Concentration of C (mg/L)

0 100
1.0 80
3.5 50
6.5 26
11.0 10
6.4 The concentration of Species D was measured as a function of time during a

chemical reaction. Its observed concentration at various time intervals is pre-
sented below. Determine the reaction order and rate constant, k. Is Species D
Time (hr) Concentration of D (mg/L)

0 200
1.0 142
2.0 111
3.0 90
4.0 77
5.0 67
6.5 During a chemical reaction, the concentration of Species B was measured as

a function of time. The observed concentration of Species B at various time
intervals is presented below. Determine the reaction order and rate constant,
k. Is Species B being removed or produced?
Time (hr) Concentration of B (mg/L)

0 100
5.0 125
10.0 150
15.0 175
20.0 200
6.6 If the half-life of a chemical compound is 30 days under anaerobic conditions,

determine the first-order removal-rate constant, k.
6.7 Three wastewater streams are combined at a food-processing facility to
equalize the pH prior to biological treatment. The flow rate and pH of each
of the wastewater streams is presented in the accompanying table. Perform
a mass balance on flow and the hydrogen-ion concentration [H +] so that the
pH of the three combined streams may be estimated. The pH of a solution is
equal to the negative logarithm of the hydrogen-ion concentration
1pH = - log 3H +42.
Wastewater Stream Flow (liters per minute) pH

1 5 5.5
2 20 6.5
3 25 8.5
6.8 A sanitary landfill receives 600 ft3 of municipal solid waste 5 days per week at
a density of 500 lb/yd3. If the solid waste is compacted to 1000 lb/yd3 and the
average depth of each cell is 10 feet, estimate the expected life of the landfill in
years if 25 acres of space are still available 11 acre = 43,560 ft22. Draw a mate-
rials-balance diagram to solve the problem.
6.9 Perform a materials balance on substrate (S) around a chemostat (completely
mixed reactor without recycle) assuming a first-order removal 1dS/dt = - kS2
for substrate with a rate-constant k value of 0.5 h-1. The influent substrate
concentration is 150 mg/L, and 90% removal is desired. Determine the deten-
tion time in hours for the chemostat, assuming steady-state conditions.
6.10 Calculate the volume of an ideal plug flow reactor for the following scenario.
The volumetric flow rate is 6500 m3/day and Species A is being removed or
converted according to a first-order reaction as follows: dCA/dt = - kCA ,
where CA is the concentration of Species A and k = 9000 d-1. A 95%
removal or conversion of Species A is required.
6.11 A 1000 MW coal-burning power plant is burning West Virginia bituminous
coal with 8% ash content. The power plant is 33% efficient, with 35% of the
ash settling out in the firing chamber as bottom ash. A simplified schematic
diagram is shown below. Assume 3.5 kWh per pound of coal.
(a) Draw an energy diagram for the facility and calculate the rate of heat
emitted to the environment in kJ/s;
(b) Determine the rate of coal input to the furnace in kg/day; and
(c) Assuming that the electrostatic precipitator (ESP) is 99% efficient,
calculate the rate of fly ash emitted to the atmosphere in kg/day.
Exercises 153
Exit gases and

fly ash
Gases and
fly ash
Coal Stack
Furnace ESP
Bottom Fly
ash ash
6.12 A pristine stream flowing at 100 cubic feet per second (cfs) in the Rocky
Mountains contains 5 mg/L of suspended solids (SS). During the spring, ice
melt conveys an additional 250 mg/L of SS at a rate of 20 cfs into the stream.
Determine the concentration of SS in the stream during the spring.
6.13 Calculate the minimum rate at which 15°C make-up water from a river must
be pumped to evaporative cooling towers for a 1000-MW nuclear power
plant. The efficiency of the plant is 32%, and all of the waste heat is assumed
to be dissipated through evaporative cooling with no direct heat lost to the
atmosphere.
CHAPTER
Sustainability and Green

7
Development
7.1 INTRODUCTION
Objectives
Environmental consciousness and safety have surfaced as primary initiatives
In this chapter, you will learn during the last half of the 20th century and into the 21st. The negative effects
about: of modern society on the earth’s natural environment are the result of numer-
The importance of ous anthropogenic environmental calamities and the misuse of earth’s nat-
sustainable development ural resources. Industry as well as individuals have exploited and wasted
Green engineering natural resources for convenience and economics at the expense of future
generations.
Case histories on
Sustainable development and green engineering are two relatively new,
sustainable development
interrelated topics that are being integrated into engineering courses to help
and green engineering
increase awareness and to promote the design of engineering systems that
have minimum impact on the environment. In addition, sustainable develop-
ment is focused on technology, processes, and resources that can be used for
long time spans while conserving earth’s natural resources. The American
Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE, 2004) has recently added sustainability to
the first fundamental canon of its Code of Ethics:
Engineers shall hold paramount the safety, health and welfare of

the public, and shall strive to comply with the principles of sustain-
able development in the performance of their professional duties.
Processes, designs, and systems that minimize or eliminate the generation of

pollutants should be used because it is the ethical or right thing to do; not just
because it’s mandated by law or is good business. Sustainable development
and green engineering go hand in hand, and the sections that follow will pre-
sent definitions for each, followed by case histories that illustrate some of the
dilemmas that environmental engineers, lawyers, planners, and societies must
ameliorate in the future.
Section 7.2 Sustainable Development and Green Engineering 155
7.2 SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT AND GREEN ENGINEERING

7.2.1 Sustainable Development
What is sustainable development? The most popular definition is from the World
Commission on Environment and Development (1987): “development that meets
the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to
meet their own needs.” Hawkins (1993) expresses it best in simple terms, “leave the
world better than you found it, take no more than you need, try not to harm life or
the environment, make amends if you do.” ASCE (2004) adopted the following def-
inition for sustainable development:
Sustainable development is the challenge of meeting human needs for nat-

ural resources, industrial products, energy, food, transportation, shelter, and
effective waste management while conserving and protecting environmen-
tal quality and the natural resource base essential for future development.
For example, natural processes and systems should be selected where appropriate
when treating wastewater or other types of contamination. The use of algae, aquatic
plants, and bacteria in a symbiotic relationship to treat industrial or municipal
wastewater in a stabilization pond is an example of sustainable development. The
algae and aquatic plants produce oxygen using sunlight through photosynthesis. In
turn, heterotrophic bacteria use the oxygen produced by the algae and plants to oxi-
dize the organic compounds in the wastewater to carbon dioxide and water. Period-
ically, some of the algae and aquatic plants are harvested and used for animal feed
or digested to produce “biogas.”
Sustainable designs are those that do not deplete the earth of all its current
natural resources; leaving them available for future generations. Many of our nat-
ural resources, such as fish and forests, are renewable. Other renewable resources
include solar, tidal, wave, hydro, and wind power. Natural resources that have finite
quantities (depletable resources) include coal, natural gas, and oil. Sustainability
also ensures that systems, processes, or developments have minimal impact on the
environment and ecological systems. Not only is it important that engineered sys-
tems have a positive impact on people and their well-being, but they also must pre-
serve wildlife, plants, and animals for our descendants. The biosphere must be
maintained and sustained because, ethically, it is the right choice.
7.2.2 Green Engineering

The United States Environmental Protection Agency (2007) defines green engineer-
ing as “the design, commercialization, and use of processes and products, which are
feasible and economical while minimizing generation of pollution at the source and
risk to human health and the environment.” Nine principles of green engineering
may be stated as follows:
1. Engineer processes and products holistically (functional relationship between
individual parts and the whole or entire system), use systems analysis, and
integrate environmental impact assessment tools.
2. Conserve and improve natural ecosystems while protecting human health and
well-being.
3. Use life-cycle thinking in all engineering activities.
156 Chapter 7 Sustainability and Green Development
4. Ensure that all material and energy inputs and outputs are as inherently safe
and benign as possible.
5. Minimize depletion of natural resources.
6. Strive to prevent waste.
7. Develop and apply engineering solutions, while being cognizant of local geog-
raphy, aspirations, and cultures.
8. Create engineering solutions, beyond current or dominant technologies; improve,
innovate, and invent (technologies) to achieve sustainability.
9. Actively engage communities and stakeholders in development of engineering
solutions.
The key to green engineering is to apply these principles when it will be most effec-
tive and economical to do so—in the early design and developmental phases of a
process or product. Diwekar (2003) recommends introducing green engineering
principles as early as possible into the engineering decision-making process.
Each year, billions of tons of waste are created worldwide that potentially could
adversely affect human health and well-being and the environment. Many of these
wastes are associated with industry and the production of chemical compounds. Pro-
duction costs along with treatment and disposal costs continue to escalate.
The continual rise in production costs occurs as economical sources of raw
materials in the earth’s crust become depleted and more difficult sources must be
used. Treatment and disposal costs rise as larger quantities of wastes are removed at
treatment facilities, due to more stringent regulations requiring higher removal effi-
ciencies. Engineers must use alternative chemicals and processes to minimize the
toxicity of specific chemicals and to reduce the quantity of pollutants discharged to
the ecosystem.
Risk assessment is being applied to pollution prevention to help ameliorate
the effects of harmful chemicals. Risk can be expressed mathematically as a function
of hazard and exposure. Anything that produces an adverse effect on human health
and the environment or ecosystem is defined as a hazard. Exposure as defined by
the EPA is the qualitative or quantitative assessment of contact to the skin or ori-
fices of the body by a chemical. Risk-assessment software tools are available to both
academia and industry that can be used to prioritize, design, and select “green” engi-
neering processes and products.
Figure 7.1 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between sustain-
able development, green engineering, and sustainability. According to Vallero and
Vesilind (2007), sustainability is achieved by applying green engineering principles
to ideal sustainable development.
7.2.3 Material Selection

Engineers decide which material to use when designing equipment, machines, roads,
bridges, airplanes, etc. Traditionally, the designer selects the best material after consid-
ering such factors as the material’s strength, stiffness, density, resistance to corrosion,
cost, and many other material properties (Ashby, 2005). The need to also consider the
Sustainable development Green engineering Sustainability
Figure 7.1
Relationship between sustainable development, green engineering, and sustainability.
Section 7.2 Sustainable Development and Green Engineering 157
severity of the impact on the environment has been recognized for many years, but
doing this accurately is very complex, and a generally accepted methodology has not
been devised. Nevertheless, progress is being made, and a good introductory review of
the topic is available (Ashby, 2005).
First, consider one of the simpler approaches for including the impact on the
environment when performing materials selection. This method compares the energy
expended in making the item of interest from various possible materials. The material
requiring the least energy would be selected, since, presumably, less environmental
impact would result.
It is assumed, not always accurately, that the pollution caused by particulate
and undesired gases emitted during production of the material is proportional to
the energy consumption. Consider, for example, a component made from plain
carbon steel. Mining the ore and converting it to steel requires an expenditure of
energy. It has been estimated that the energy required per kilogram of steel pro-
duced is about 25 MJ/kg. Forming the steel into the desired shape also requires
energy, but the amount is typically insignificant compared to the above value.
Table 7.1 gives the total energy required to produce and manufacture several com-
mon materials (Ashby, 2005). Notice that aluminum requires much more energy
(200 MJ/kg) than steel, primarily because the electrolysis process used to reduce
alumina ore 1Al 2O32 to aluminum metal (Al) requires an extremely large amount
Table 7.1 Approximate Energy Requirements and CO2 Created During Production
of Common Materials
Material Energy (MJ/kg) CO2 (kg/kg)
Metals
Plain carbon steel 25 2.0
Silicon 60 3.1
Stainless steel 80 5.1
Aluminum 200 12.7
Titanium 900 59
Ceramics
Concrete 1.1 0.16
Glass 14 0.8
Aluminum oxide 55 3.0
Aluminum nitride 220 12
Polymers
Polyethylene 85 2.1
Epoxy 100 3.6
Nylon 110 4.4
Foam 120 5.0
Teflon 150 7.5

of electricity. If recycled aluminum were used, rather than aluminum produced

from ore, only about 12% as much energy would be needed. The table also gives
the amount of CO2 emitted per kilogram of material produced. These values were
obtained assuming that fossil fuels were the source of energy. Since CO2 is a
greenhouse gas, it could be used as a measure of the environmental impact.
It is not always the energy required to produce or manufacture a product that
is important. For some products, such as a car or vacuum cleaner, the energy con-
sumed during use of the product is large. In order to minimize the environmental
impact for such products, the appropriate energy to consider when selecting materi-
als of construction is that consumed during use of the product. Actually, the total
energy required for production, manufacture, use, and disposal or recycling should
be minimized.
In summary, when choosing among materials that have appropriate properties
and cost, pick the one that minimizes total energy consumption.
A more comprehensive approach to materials selection recognizes that many
factors in addition to energy consumption or CO2 burden should be considered.
Some of these factors are: undesirable emission of gases such as NOx and SOx and
particulates, toxicity, resource depletion, and potential for recycling. To further com-
plicate the problem, recognize that it is necessary to quantify how each of the above
factors impacts human health, damages the ecosystem, and depletes resources. This
task is clearly very difficult. In an effort to simplify this problem, importance or
weighting factors could be assigned. Unfortunately, while one person or group
might, for example, rate human health and ecosystem quality about equal in impor-
tance and consider resources half as important, another group might have a differ-
ent rating, making the selection of weighting factors very subjective.
Because of the obvious complexity of selecting the best material for a specific
application, an attempt has been made to provide the designer with a simpler
approach. The method assigns a single measure or indicator to each material, so that
the designer can use this numeric ranking when performing materials selection. The
numeric values are called eco-indicators. They are determined by evaluating the var-
ious impacts on the environment, normalizing the impacts to a common scale (0–100
for example), and assigning weighting factors to reflect the perceived extent of the
environmental impact. The end result is a single value for each material, which sim-
plifies the designer’s selection task. A search for eco-indicators on the internet will
reveal additional information on the procedure, including software. While the idea
of such a single-valued approach is appealing, keep in mind that determination of
eco-indicators is very complex and subjective, and thus their accuracy is question-
able and their use controversial.
7.3 NUCLEAR PHYSICS

The brief introduction to nuclear physics given here provides a basic understanding
of radioactivity and the reactions that occur in nuclear reactors.
Nuclear physics deals with transformations in the nucleus of atoms. Sawyer
and McCarty (1978) present a good review of the basic concepts.
One does not generally think of nuclear energy as “green” engineering. It is
likely, however, that nuclear reactors will be used to offset the anticipated reduction
in coal-fired power plants to help mitigate the release of greenhouse gases. Major
advantages of nuclear reactors are that they do not produce particulates and acid-
forming effluents or greenhouse gases such as carbon dioxide and water vapor, and
they are economical to operate in comparison to coal-fired electrical generating
Section 7.3 Nuclear Physics 159
facilities. Two significant disadvantages of using nuclear energy are high capital costs
to build nuclear reactors and their auxiliary systems, and concerns over the disposal
of high-level radioactive wastes.
An atom of a specific element contains neutrons, electrons, and protons. The
atomic number of an element represents the number of protons, which are posi-
tively charged particles in the nucleus. Neutrons are uncharged particles in the
nucleus. The total number of both protons and neutrons represents the mass num-
ber. Elements with the same atomic number but different mass number are called
isotopes. One way of identifying isotopes is to write the chemical symbol with the
mass number written as a superscript to the upper left and the atomic number as a
subscript to the lower left. Three of the numerous isotopes of uranium (U) are ura-
nium-235 (U-235), uranium-238 (U-238) and uranium-239 (U-239). They each con-
tain 92 protons, and their chemical symbols, mass numbers, and atomic numbers are
written as follows:
235 238 239
92U uranium-235 92U uranium-238 92U uranium-239
EXAMPLE 7.1
Identifying radioactive elements
What are the elements 147X and 226
88X (where X represents the element)?
Solution
A periodic table can be used to solve this problem. Recall that the upper left number
represents the mass number and the lower left number the atomic number. The first
element is nitrogen (N), which has an atomic number of 7 and a mass number of 14.
It is the most abundant isotope of nitrogen and is stable—that is, it does not undergo
radioactive decay.
The second element is radium (Ra), which has an atomic number of 88 and a
mass number of 226. As discussed below, it does undergo radioactive decay to
radon.
7.3.1 Radioactivity
We live in a radioactive world with naturally occurring radioactive atoms or radionuclides.
Some atoms are unstable, and those elements that have more than 83 protons are consid-
ered naturally radioactive. Radionuclides emit various forms of radiation as they decay to
more stabilized forms. The three major forms of radiation are alpha particles, beta parti-
cles, and gamma rays.
An alpha particle is essentially a helium nucleus, consisting of two protons and
two neutrons. Alpha particles are relatively massive, slow moving, and easily
stopped. Because of their short penetration range in tissue, the alpha emitter tends
to be harmful only if ingested. When alpha particles are emitted by an unstable
atom, the atomic number decreases by two units and the mass number decreases by
four units. The transformation or decay of plutonium-239 illustrates what happens
when alpha radiation is released.
239
94Pu : 235
92U + 2a + g
4
(7.1)
where:
a = alpha particle or alpha radiation, and
g = gamma radiation or gamma ray.
A beta particle 1b2 is a free electron emitted from an unstable nucleus during the spon-
taneous transformation of a neutron into a proton and an electron. During this transfor-
mation, the atomic number of the element increases by one and the mass number
remains the same.A gamma ray 1g2 may or may not accompany the transformation.An
example of b radiation being emitted from an element is the transformation or decay of
strontium-90 into yttrium-90.
90
38Sr : 90
39Y + b (7.2)
Beta particles are negatively charged, and they travel further and penetrate
deeper than alpha particles. Concrete, steel, lead, or water must be used to protect
individuals from being exposed to beta radiation.
Gamma (G) radiation or gamma rays are electromagnetic waves or photons that
do not have mass or charge and travel at the speed of light. This is a damaging type of
radiation because it is highly penetrating. Several centimeters to several feet of lead,
concrete, or lead-glass must be used to shield individuals from gamma radiation.
The energy associated with the release of radiation from radionuclides can be
estimated from Einstein’s energy-mass-equivalence equation:
E = mc2 (7.3)
where:
E = energy expressed in units of grams # cm/s 1ergs2;
m = mass of particle, grams; and
c = speed of light 12.998 * 1010 cm/sec2.
When radioactive decay occurs, there is a decrease in the mass of the system. The
energy produced, which may be calculated using Equation (7.3), is present as kinetic
energy of any alpha or beta particles emitted plus the energy of the gamma rays.These
particles are slowed and the gamma rays are absorbed as the radiation travels through
matter and the energy is converted into thermal energy—that is, the matter is heated.
EXAMPLE 7.2
Determining mass number and atomic number
Determine the values of a and b, where a is the mass number and b the atomic number
of elements X and Y.
88X : a + bY
226 a
a.
55X : b +
a 132
b. bY
Solution part a
Recall that when an alpha particle is emitted from an unstable nucleus, the atomic
number decreases by two units and the mass number by four. For the reaction in Part a,
the new element “Y” that is formed has an atomic number of 86 188 - 2 = 862 and
the mass number is 222 1226 - 4 = 2222. Therefore, the element Y is radon-222 with
a = 222 and b = 86. X is radium-226.
Radon gas is a naturally occurring radioactive gas that is invisible and odor-
less. It forms from the radioactive decay of small amounts of uranium and thorium
naturally present in rocks and soils. Certain rock types, such as black shale and
selected igneous rocks, can have uranium and thorium in amounts higher than is
typical for the earth’s crust.
Solution part b
Recall that when a beta particle is emitted from an unstable nucleus, the atomic number
of the element increases by one and the mass number remains the same. For the reaction
in Part b, the element “Y” that is formed has an atomic number of 56 155 + 1 = 562 and
a mass number of 132; therefore, a = 132 and b = 56. “X” is cesium-132 and “Y” is
barium-132.
Sources of Radioactivity
Naturally occurring radioactive atoms are found in the earth, air, vegetation, and
our bodies. According to Johansen (2007), naturally occurring radionuclides in the
earth bombard us with approximately 15,000 photons each second. There are two
main classes of natural radioactive elements: primordial and cosmogenic.
Primordial radionuclides have been present since the formation of the earth.
Uranium (U) and thorium (Th) are the best known and have no stable isotope. They
eventually decay to stable lead (Pb) isotopes. Potassium-40 is another example of a
primordial radionuclide; its stable form is nonradioactive potassium.
Cosmogenic radionuclides are those produced by cosmic-ray bombardment of
earth’s atmosphere. There are 22 different cosmogenic radionuclides that eventually
are incorporated into plants and animals. The best known are carbon-14 (C-14),
hydrogen-3 (H-3), and beryllium-7 (Be-7).
Units of Radioactivity
The basic unit of radioactivity is the curie (Ci). One curie corresponds to approximately
3.7 * 1010 disintegrations per second, the decay rate of one gram of radium (Ra). The
curie is used for defining the quantity of radioactive material. One curie of an alpha
emitter is the quantity that releases 3.7 * 1010 alpha particles per second, whereas one
curie of a gamma emitter is the quantity of material that releases 3.7 * 1010 photons
per second.
As mentioned earlier, there are several sources of natural radioactivity. Radioac-
tive materials enter our bodies through the food we eat and the air we breathe.The unit
in which concentration of radioactivity in naturally occurring radioactive material
(NORM) is expressed is the picoCurie (pCi). A picoCurie is one-trillionth of a curie
and is equal to 2.22 disintegrations per minute. The standard 70-kilogram adult con-
tains the following amounts of NORM: 30 pCi of uranium, 3 pCi of thorium, 30 pCi of
radium, 110,000 pCi of K-40, and 400,000 pCi of C-14 (ICRP, 1985; NCRP, 1994).
The energy released by radionuclides can be measured. The amount of energy
deposited in the human body from radioactive decay is called the “dose.” The
internal dose is the amount of radioactivity deposited within our bodies from the
radionuclides we ingest from breathing and eating. The external dose comes primar-
ily from gamma rays emitted by terrestrial sources, such as the ground and buildings,
along with cosmic rays.
The unit of gamma or X-ray radiation intensity—the roentgen (R)—is used in
the study of the biological effects induced by radiation within cells. The roentgen is
defined as the quantity of gamma or X-ray radiation that will produce one electrostatic
unit (esu) of electricity in one cubic centimeter of dry air at 0ºC and 760 mm of pres-
sure. This unit represents an exposure dose in air and must be translated into an
absorbed dose. The term radiation absorbed dose (rad) corresponds to the absorption
of 100 ergs of energy per gram of any substance and can be used for any type of radia-
tion—a, b, g, or X-ray. In the International System of Units (SI), the unit for absorbed
dose is the gray (Gy). One gray is equivalent to the absorption of 1 joule of energy per
kilogram (kg) of substance. One gray is equal to 100 rads and can be used to quantify
any type of ionizing radiation. The effect that different types of radiation have on
human beings is measured in roentgen equivalent man (rem).The SI unit, sievert (Sv),
is a unit of biological dose equal to the radiation dose having the same biological effect
as one gray of gamma radiation. One sievert is equal to 100 rem.
In the United States, the standard absorbed dose unit is the rem, and the average
annual dose is 300 millirem (mrem), (Johansen, 2007).A millirem is one-thousandth of a
rem. Therefore, 300 mrem is equal to 0.003 Sv or 0.3 mSv. All persons who work at
nuclear plants are directed to keep their radiation exposure as low as reasonably achiev-
able (ALARA). Adult workers are restricted to 5 rem per year; minors to 0.5 rem per
year. Women who are pregnant are restricted during the term of the pregnancy to
0.5 rem (Nuclear Tourist, 2007).
Nuclear Fission and Nuclear Reactors

Nuclear reactions may be induced by bombardment with various types of parti-
cles (alpha particles, protons, and neutrons) within either a nuclear reactor or
particle accelerator. In a nuclear reactor, neutrons bombard uranium or pluto-
nium atoms, causing splitting (fission) of their nucleus. Two fission fragments
(elements), gamma rays, and two or three neutrons are produced for each atom
that is fissioned (Masters, 1997). Nuclear reactors obtain their energy primarily
from the conversion of the kinetic energy of the fission fragments into thermal
energy. This energy is used to heat water to produce steam that drives turbines
and generators to produce electricity. The same type of process is used by a coal
fired steam-electric plant except for the source of the thermal energy. Tremen-
dous amounts of energy are released during nuclear fission. The energy released
during the fission of one gram atom of uranium-233, uranium-235, or plutonium-239
is approximately 5.3 * 106 kWh (Sawyer and McCarty, 1978). Since the atomic
weights of these elements are nearly the same, the energy generated per kilo-
gram of fissionable material is approximately 4.1 * 109 kcal. For comparative
purposes, the energy released from the combustion of a kilogram of coal and
a kilogram of vehicle gasoline is approximately 6930 and 12,000 kcal/kg,
respectively.
In nuclear reactors, fuel rods fabricated from fissionable material such as U-233,
U-235, and/or P-239 are arranged so that a sustainable chain reaction is maintained. A
critical mass of fissionable material is required to maintain such a reaction. Fuel rods
generally remain in the reactor for about two years. Moderators or control rods con-
taining boron or cadmium are inserted or removed from the reactor as necessary to
control the nuclear reaction. These control rods capture excess neutrons produced
during nuclear reactions.
An appealing aspect of nuclear power is the fact that certain types of reactors,
called breeder reactors, are capable of producing more fissionable material than they
consume (Ma, 1983). In other words, while electrical power is being produced, more
nuclear fuel is created.This is possible because, when a uranium atom fissions, only one
of the two or three neutrons released is needed to sustain the nuclear reaction. Some of
the extra neutrons are absorbed by the U-238 (a nonfissionable, very abundant iso-
tope) present in the fuel. When U-238 absorbs a neutron, U-239 is formed. The U-239
undergoes b-decay, forming neptunium-239 (Np-239), which also undergoes b-decay

to form Pu-239. Since Pu-239 is fissionable, it is useful for fueling a future reactor. Nat-
ural uranium contains only a small fraction of fissionable U-235, but the remainder is
U-238. Use of a breeder reactor to transform U-238 to Pu-239 offers an exceedingly
large supply of nuclear fuel that can be used to create energy. Similarly, thorium-232
(Th-232) is very abundant in the earth’s crust and, like U-238, is a fertile isotope.
Again, with breeder reactors, addition of a neutron changes it to Th-233, which under-
goes b-decay to form Pu-233, which via b-decay is converted to U-233, a fissionable
isotope. The quantities of naturally occurring U-238 and Th-232 are sufficiently large
to permit fueling of breeder reactors for a very long time.
The fission fragments are radioactive, and they, along with other radioactive
waste components such as Pu-239, present significant handling, transport, and
disposal problems. The half-life represents the time it takes to reduce the final
concentration of a substance to 50% of the original concentration. Equation (7.4)
shows the first-order removal reaction used to model radioactive substances and
decay rates. The half-lives of several common radionuclides are presented in
Table 7.2.
Ct = C0e -kt (7.4)
where:
Ct = concentration or quantity of element at time equal to t, mg/L, g;
C0 = concentration or quantity of element at time equal to 0, mg/L, g;
k = first-order removal or decay rate constant with units of inverse time,
min-1, hr -1; and
t = decay time, min, hr.
The half-life equation (Equation 7.5) is obtained by substituting 0.5 C0 for Ct
and t1/2 for t into Equation (7.4) and rearranging as follows.
0.5C0 = C0e -k t1/2

0.5 C0
= e -k t1/2
C0
Table 7.2 Half-Lives of Common Radionuclides

Radionuclide Half-life (years) Type of radiation
Hydrogen-3 12.3 b
Carbon-14 5730 b
Potassium-14 1.28 * 109 b
Cobalt-60 5.3 b and g
Strontium-90 28.1 b
Cesium-137 30 b
Radium-226 1600 a and g
Plutonium-239 24,000 a
Uranium-238 4.51 * 10 9 a
Source: Sawyer and McCarty (1978)

-kt1/2 = ln10.52
- ln10.52 0.693
t1/2 = = (7.5)
k k
EXAMPLE 7.3
Radioactive decay calculations
24
A waste contains 100 mg/L of Na. The half-life for sodium-24 is approximately
15.0 hours.
Calculate the following:
a. The decay constant k.
b. The time required to reduce the concentration to 10 mg/L.
Solution part a
First, substitute into Equation (7.5) and rearrange to solve for the decay constant (k).
0.693
t1/2 = = 15 h
k
0.693
k = = 0.0462 h-1
15 h
Solution part b
Next, substitute C0 = 100 mg/L, Ct = 10 mg/L, and k = 0.0462 h-1 into Equation
(7.4) and solve for time (t).
Ct = C0e -k t
mg mg -0.0462 h-11t2
10 = 100 e
L L
10 mg>L -1
= e -0.0462 h 1t2
100 mg>L
Taking the natural log (ln) of both sides of the above equation and then solv-
ing for time (t) yields:
10
ln a b = - 0.0462 h-11t2
100
- 2.3026 = - 0.0462 h-11t2
t = 50 h
Nuclear Waste Immobilization and Storage

When a nuclear fuel rod is removed from a reactor, it contains the U-235 that did not
fission, much of the original U-238, fission products, products formed by the radioac-
tive decay of some of the fission products, and transuranics, which are elements with
atomic numbers greater than that of uranium. Chemical processes have been devel-
oped for separating the isotopes that are useful for fueling future nuclear reactors
(U-235, U-238, and Pu-239) from the radioactive waste (the transuranics, fission
Section 7.4 Case Histories 165
products, and decay products) (Ma, 1983). The proposed procedure for disposing of
the radioactive waste is to immobilize it by incorporating it in a specially formulated
glass that has a high resistance to leaching if inadvertently exposed to water. The raw
materials for making the glass and the waste are mixed and melted, and the molten
glass is poured into stainless steel canisters.The canisters are cooled to allow the glass
to solidify and then welded shut. Each canister is 24 inches in diameter and almost 10 feet
long and holds over 3000 pounds of glass. This process has been performed on a large
scale since 1996 at the Department of Energy’s Savannah River facility in South
Carolina. Over 7 million pounds of glass have been processed.
The plan, which remains to be approved, is to transport the immobilized waste to
a geologic repository for long-term storage. Storage times on the order of a thousand
years are required to permit the waste to decay to an acceptable level of radioactivity—
a level similar to that of the original uranium ore. Initially, deep salt mines were chosen
as storage sites, since the presence of salt indicates the absence of water. The aim was
that any future leakage of radioactive material would be retained in the salt deposit
rather than contaminating groundwater. Most recently, Yucca Mountain in Nevada has
been extensively evaluated for future use as a geologic repository.The proposed reposi-
tory would cover 1159 acres, and the waste canisters would be located in tunnels 1000
feet below the surface and 1000 feet above the water table.
7.4 CASE HISTORIES

Five brief case histories are presented to illustrate some of the dilemmas that con-
front the public, companies, and environmental engineers in the 21st century.
7.4.1 New Chairs from Haworth and Steelcase

Ogando (2006) reported on the development and environmentally intelligent design
of two types of office chairs manufactured by Haworth and Steelcase. The design
engineers at each company used sustainable materials and environmentally con-
scious design practices throughout the cradle-to-cradle program. A cradle-to-cradle
approach differs from a cradle-to-grave approach in that the former considers recy-
cle and reuse, whereas the latter does not. Every aspect of these products was scruti-
nized for its environmental impact, considering not only what went into the product
but also the potential to recover and recycle components of the product at the end of
its useful life.
Both chairs are made from 50% recycled materials. Although engineers at each
company will consider using recycled plastics in the future; both companies chose to
use virgin plastic along with recycled aluminum and steel. A significant selling point is
that 98% of these chairs’ components can be recycled at the end of their intended life.
Another important issue that drove design focused on disassembly. Each chair can
be disassembled in approximately 5 minutes. Furthermore, the impact of these products
on the environment was reduced by lowering transportation and shipping costs, since
the chairs weigh less than 50 pounds and occupy less space than conventional chairs.
7.4.2 Paper or Plastic Bags?

When you step up to the cash register, you hear the inevitable question, “Paper or
plastic?” Which is the greener choice? Ultimately, there is no clear winner between
paper and plastic. Each material has advantages and disadvantages, as discussed
below. Performing a “Google search” on the internet will provide more than enough
reading material for several hours. Both types of bags can be used. Regardless of
which type is selected, it is important to reuse and recycle them.
The manufacturing of paper and plastic bags consumes valuable natural

resources. Paper comes from trees, and plastic is derived from a petroleum product.
Although trees are a renewable resource, a significant amount of energy is spent in
growing, harvesting, and transporting the trees, and in making paper. The energy
estimates to produce original bags are 594 British thermal units (BTUs) for plastic
and 2511 for paper (reusablebags.com, 2007).
From a pollution viewpoint, paper production seems to have a more detrimen-
tal impact on the environment. Harvesting of trees requires machinery that uses fos-
sil fuels, releasing greenhouse gases to the environment as well as destroying animal
habitat. Pulp and paper mills use toxic chemicals in the pulping process, releasing air
pollutants and liquid-waste discharges that negatively affect our ecosystem. Plastic
production and processing also requires the use of toxic chemicals. Five of the top
six chemicals (propylene, phenol, ethylene, polystyrene, and benzene) whose pro-
duction generates hazardous wastes are used by the plastic industry (Eberle, 2007).
A life-cycle energy analysis conducted by Franklin and Associates found that at cur-
rent recycling rates, two plastic bags use less energy and produce less solid, atmos-
pheric, and waterborne waste than a single paper bag (ILEA, 2007).
Two other important factors to be considered in choosing between paper and
plastic bags are recyclability and degradability. Paper bags are easier to recycle, but
they weigh ten times as much as plastic bags and occupy more space in a landfill
(Kushner, 2007). It takes 91% less energy to recycle a pound of plastic than it takes
to recycle a pound of paper (reuseablebags.com, 2007). Paper degrades faster than
plastic, but in current landfills, because of a lack of moisture, both degrade at
approximately the same rate (Eberle, 2007).
Legislation will affect the use of paper, plastics, and other products in the
future. Seven countries have plans to tax plastic bags (Kushner, 2007). The Board of
Supervisors for the City of San Francisco passed an ordinance banning the use of
plastic shopping bags (Goodyear, 2007).
As you can see, it’s difficult to discern which type of material is the preferred
choice. Both types can and should be used and recycled.
7.4.3 Selection of Materials for Beverage Containers

We are all familiar with beverage containers. For soft drinks they are made of alu-
minum, polyethylene terephthalate (PETE), or glass. Milk jugs are typically made of
polyethylene. Steel could be used as a beverage container. It is used extensively for
canned goods. Each of these materials can be recycled. Which of these five materi-
als, though, makes the most environmentally friendly container?
One way to answer this question is to determine which material requires the
least energy to produce and form into the desired shape (Ashby, 2005). The five pos-
sible materials are compared in Table 7.3. The last column lists the energies to pro-
duce a 1-liter container and was obtained by multiplying the first two columns. Using
this as our ranking criterion, steel is the preferred material. The energy required to
produce a steel container is less than one-third that required for aluminum.
Of the materials considered, steel is the only one not commonly used for con-
taining beverages. Obviously, non-environmental factors are also being considered.
These include: retention of beverage flavor and freshness, ease of opening the con-
tainer, packaging and transportation issues, product appearance, and customer pref-
erence. Certainly there is no simple procedure for considering all of these when
selecting the “best” beverage container material. From an environmental viewpoint,
though, steel is probably preferred.
Section 7.4 Case Histories 167
Table 7.3 Beverage Container Materials

Mass per Production plus Energy per
container forming energy container
Material (kg) (MJ/kg) (MJ)
Aluminum 0.045 200 9.0
PETE 0.062 87 5.4
Glass 0.433 19 8.2
Polyethylene 0.038 85 3.2
Steel 0.102 25 2.6
7.4.4 Coal versus Nuclear Energy

The nuclear power industry is now at a crossroads. There is great potential for
increased nuclear capacity as electrical demand continues to grow; especially if
nuclear’s environmental benefits are recognized by the public (Ux Weekly, 2000).
Nuclear power has received a lot of bad press because of the incident at Pennsylvania’s
Three Mile Island facility and the meltdown at Chernobyl. Other factors that create
a negative image are concerns related to nuclear weapons ambitions in certain
countries and the uncertainty surrounding nuclear waste management (Deutch and
Moniz, 2006). Nuclear power is cost competitive with other forms of electricity gen-
eration, except where low-cost fossil fuels are available. If the social, health, and
environmental costs of fossil fuels are also taken into account, nuclear power is out-
standing (Uranium Information Centre, 2007). Miller et al. (2006) reported that
nuclear power must dominate as the source of carbon-dioxide-free energy, since it is
proven, dependable, available on a large scale, and economically viable. They also
suggest that social objection to nuclear energy in some countries is well-meaning
but constitutes a misguided distraction from solving the environmental and energy
crisis that now faces world sustainability.
The combustion of coal to generate electricity results in the discharge of gases
and particulate matter into the atmosphere. The gases are greenhouse gases (carbon
dioxide and water vapor) and sulfur and nitrogen oxides (SOx and NOx) that cause
acid rain. Particles with diameters less than 10 micrometers 1PM 102 may contribute
to sudden infant death syndrome (SIDS) and are known to cause numerous human
cancers per year (Vallero and Vesilind, 2007). Nuclear power emits less than 1% of the
greenhouse gases of fossil-fuel power sources (Sevior, 2006). Li and Wang’s (2006)
study indicated that nuclear power was higher in technological efficiency, pure tech-
nology efficiency, and scale efficiency than coal power.
A cost comparison of using nuclear energy compared to coal indicated that they
are essentially equal (Nuclear Tourist, 2006). Evaluating fuel, capital, operation-
and-maintenance, waste-related, and decommissioning costs, nuclear energy costs $30
per megawatt hour 1MWh2 versus $29.1 per MWh for coal.
7.4.5 Advanced Integrated Wastewater Pond System (AIWPS)

The Advanced Integrated Wastewater Pond System (AIWPS) was developed by
Dr. William Oswald, late Professor of Public Health and Sanitary Engineering at the
University of California, Berkeley. The system offers a sustainable means of treating
wastewater by reducing the generation of biosolids and the associated risk to human
health and the environment. The AIWPS uses a series of ponds to treat either
domestic or industrial wastewater to produce a high-quality effluent. The major
components of a type 2 AIWPS system are described briefly below. Additional
information on AIWPS may be found in the following references: Downing et al.,
2002; Green et al., 2003; Green et al., 1995; and Green et al., 1995. Another advan-
tage of these pond systems is the ability to harvest algal cells that may be used for
animal feed or the production of biogas (Oswald, 1994; Oswald, 1991).
Type 2 AIWPS
A schematic of a type 2 Advanced Integrated Wastewater Pond System is presented
in Figure 7.2. The system consists of four ponds in series including a facultative
pond, a high rate pond (HRP), a settling pond, and a maturation pond. Domestic or
industrial wastewater must be pretreated before entering the system. Typically it
passes through bar racks and coarse screens to remove large objects such as tree
limbs, tires, debris, paper, and plastic.
Facultative Pond The upper layer of the facultative pond is aerobic, the lower
layer anaerobic. Typically, four deep anaerobic pits are constructed in the bottom
of the facultative pond. All incoming wastewater must pass through these pits.
where anaerobic digestion of the incoming solids occurs. Under anaerobic condi-
tions, complex solids are hydrolyzed by extracellular enzymes produced by the
microorganisms indigenous to the process. The soluble organic matter produced
during hydrolysis, as well as with the soluble organics in the influent wastewater,
are metabolized by the facultative and anaerobic microorganisms into volatile
fatty acids (VFAs) and alcohols. Methanogenic (strict anaerobes) bacteria con-
vert the VFAs and alcohols to carbon dioxide gas and methane, which are
released to the atmosphere. In the upper aerobic layer of the facultative pond,
aerobic bacteria oxidize organics to carbon dioxide, and hydrogen sulfide gas is
oxidized to sulfate.
High-Rate Pond In the high-rate pond algae and bacteria grow in a symbiotic
relationship. Algae utilize the sunlight in this shallow pond for producing carbohy-
drates and oxygen. Bacteria use the soluble and particulate organic material
remaining in the wastewater exiting from the facultative pond for synthesizing new
biomass (growing new bacteria) and for oxidizing some organic material to provide
for their energy needs. Aerobic bacteria use the oxygen produced by the algae,
because it serves as an electron acceptor during the oxidation of the organic matter.
The dissolved oxygen (DO) level may be supersaturated during the day and may
become anaerobic during the early morning hours as the oxygen produced by alga
respiration is depleted.
Settling Pond Agglomeration of the algae and bacterial flocs occurs in the set-
tling pond. The settling pond provides additional time for disinfection of the waste-
water to occur by ultraviolet radiation from the sun.
Maturation Pond The major function of the maturation pond is to allow addi-
tional time for bacteria to die as a result of exposure to ultraviolet light. Protozoa
and rotifers will be present for polishing off the final effluent in efficient systems.
Facultative High rate Settling Maturation

Figure 7.2 pond pond pond pond
Schematic of type 2
advanced integrated waste- Aeration
water pond system. Influent Effluent
References 169
Process Performance
St. Helena, California The St. Helena AIWPS is a four-pond system. It consists of
facultative ponds with deep fermentation pits, high-rate ponds without paddlewheel
mixers, settling ponds, and maturation ponds.
Based on the annual average values, the percent removal for biochemical oxy-
gen demand (BOD), total nitrogen (TN), and total phosphorus (TP) are 97%, 90%,
and 64%, respectively. Most of the organics and nitrogen are removed in the facul-
tative ponds.
Hollister, California The AIWPS at Hollister, California, is a four-pond system
that treats wastewater from a paper reclamation facility. It has facultative ponds,
high rate ponds, settling ponds, and maturation ponds. The HRP does not have a
paddlewheel mixer. Based on the annual average values, the percent removals for
BOD and total volatile solids (TVS) are 96% and 42%, respectively. A five-log
(99.999%) removal of Escherichia coli occurs through the pond system.
S U M M A RY
Sustainable development was introduced as meeting the needs of the present with-
out compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs. Green
engineering involves designs of processes, systems, and technologies that minimize
the generation of pollutants at the source while reducing risk to human health and
the environment. Applying green engineering principles leads to sustainability. A
brief introduction to nuclear physics was presented, because the production of elec-
trical energy by nuclear reactors is anticipated to increase significantly, since it does
not produce greenhouse gases. Radioactive atoms or radionuclides were defined as
unstable atoms that release alpha, beta, or gamma radiation so they can assume sta-
ble forms. An example of nuclear fission indicated that the bombardment of ura-
nium-235 with a neutron produces two fission fragments and energy, which may be
used for steam production and the generation of electricity. Five case histories were
discussed to show some of the challenges and dilemmas that citizens, politicians, and
environmental engineers face in the 21st century as we strive to provide sustainable
development using green engineering principles.
alpha particle gamma radiation radioactivity KEY WORDS

beta particle gray roentgen
curie green engineering roentgen equivalent
environmentally half-life man (REM)
intelligent design radiation absorbed dose sievert
fission (RAD) sustainable development
fission fragments radionuclides
REFERENCES
Ashby, M. F. (2005). Materials Selection in Mechanical Design, 3rd ed., chap. 16, pp. 417–437,
Elsevier, New York.
ASCE (2004). The Committee on Sustainability of Technical Activities Committee,
Sustainable Engineering Practice: An Introduction, Reston, Virginia.
Diwekar, U.M. (2003). Greener by Design, Environmental Science and Technology, 37,
5432–5444.
Deutch. J.M., and Moniz, E.J. (2006). The Nuclear Option, Scientific American, 295(3), 76–83.
Downing, J.B., Bracco, E., Green, F.B., Ku, A.Y., Lundquist, T.J., Zubieta, I.X., and Oswald, W.J.
(2002). Low Cost Reclamation Using the Advanced Integrated Wastewater Pond Systems®
Technology and Reverse Osmosis, Water Science and Technology, 45(1), 117–125.
Eberle, W.M. (2007). Paper or Plastic Bags? http://www.healthgoods.com/education/
environment_information/solid_waste/paper_or_plastic.htm, accessed September 22, 2008.
Gabbard, A. (2007). Coal Combustion: Nuclear Resource or Danger, http://www.ornl.gov.info/
ornlreview/rev26-34/text/colmain.html, accessed June 14, 2007.
Goodyear, C. (2007). S.F. First City to Ban Plastic Shopping Bags, http://www.sfgate.com/
cgi-bin/article.cgi?file=/c/a/2007/03/28/MNGDROT5QN1.DTL, accessed June 14, 2007.
Green, F.B., Lundquist, T.J., Quinn, N.W.T., Zarate, M.A., Zubieta, I.X., and Oswald, W.J.
(2003). Selenium and Nitrate Removal from Agricultural Drainage using AIWPS® Tech-
nology, Water Science and Technology, 48(2), 299-305.
Green, F.B., Bernstone, L., Lundquist, T.J., Muir, J., Tresan, R.B., and Oswald, W.J. (1995).
Methane Fermentation, Submerged Gas Collection, and the Fate of Carbon in Advanced
Integrated Wastewater Pond Systems, Water Science and Technology, 31(12), 55–65.
Green, F.B., Lundquist, T.J., and Oswald, W.J. (1995). Energetics of Advanced Integrated
Wastewater Pond Systems, Water Science and Technology, 31(12), 9–20.
Hawkins, P. (1993). The Ecology of Life. Harper Business, New York.
International Commission on Radiological Protection (ICRP) (1985). Determination of
Dose Equivalents Resulting from External Radiation Sources, ICRP Publication 39,
Oxford, England, Pergamon Press.
Institute for Lifecycle Environmental Assessment (ILEA) (2007). Paper vs. Plastic Bags, Franklin
Associates, Ltd., 1990, http://www.ilea.org.lcas/franklin1990.html, accessed June 14, 2007.
Johansen, K. (2007). Radioactivity in Coal and Fly Ash, We Energies Coal Combustion Prod-
ucts Utilization Handbook, Appendix B.
Kushner, A. (2007). Paper or Plastic? What’s the Environmentally Correct Choice? http://www
.bankrate.com/brm/news/cheap/20041215a1.asp, accessed June 14, 2007.
Li, Y., and Wang, D. (2006). Technology Efficiency Study on Nuclear Power and Coal Power in
Guangdong Province Based on DEA, Proceedings International Conference on Nuclear
Engineering, July 17–20, 2006, Miami, FL.
Ma, B.M. (1983). Nuclear Reactor Materials and Applications, Van Nostrand Reinhold Com-
pany Inc., New York.
Masters, G. M. (1997). Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science, Prentice Hall,
Miller,A.I., Suppiah, S., and Duffey, R.B. (2006). Climate Change Gains More from Nuclear Sub-
stitution than from Conservation, Nuclear Engineering and Design, 236(14–16), 1657–1667.
NCRP (1994). Exposure of the Population in the United States and Canada from Natural
Background Radiation. NCRP Report No. 94. National Council on Radiation Protection
and Measurements, Bethesda, Maryland.
Nuclear Tourist (2007). Radiation Safety, The Virtual Nuclear Tourist, January, 18, 2006, http://www
.nucleartourist.com/systems/rad.htm, accessed August 8, 2007.
Nuclear Tourist (2006). Cost Comparison for Nuclear vs. Coal, The Virtual Nuclear Tourist,
October 22, 2006, http://www.nucleartourist.com/basics/costs.htm, accessed June 14, 2007.
Ogando, Joseph (2006). Green Engineering, Design News, 01.09.06, 65–70.
Oswald, W.J. (1994). Advanced Integrated Wastewater Pond Systems, NSF Undergraduate Fac-
ulty Enhancement Program, Colorado State University, Fort Collins, CO, July 18–23, 1994.
Oswald, W.J. (1991). Introduction to Advanced Integrated Wastewater Ponding Systems,
Water Science and Technology, 24(5), 1–7.
Paper Bags Are Better Than Plastic, Right?, http://www.reusablebags.com/facts.php?id=7,
accessed June 14, 2007.
Sawyer, C.N., and McCarty, P.L. (1978). Chemistry for Environmental Engineering, McGraw-
Hill, New York.
Sevior, M. (2006). Considerations for Nuclear Power in Australia, International Journal of
Environmental Studies, 63(6), 859–872.
United States Environmental Protection Agency (2007). Green Engineering, http://www.epa
.gov/oppt/greenengineering/pubs/whats_ge.html, accessed June 4, 2007.
Exercises 171
Uranium Information Center (2007) The Economics of Nuclear Power, http://www.uic.com.

au/nip08.htm, accessed June 14, 2007.
Ux Weekly (2000). UXC The Ux Consulting Company, LLC, Coal vs. Nuclear in an Uncertain
Future, January , 2000, http://www.uxc.com/cover-stories/uxw_14-04-cover.html, accessed
September 22, 2008.
Vallero, Daniel A., and Vesilind, P. Aarne (2007). Socially Responsible Engineering, Justice in
Risk Management, John Wiley & Sons, Hoboken, NJ.
World Commission on Environment and Development (1987). United Nations, Our Common
Future, Oxford Paperbacks, Oxford.
EXERCISES
7.1 Gabbard (2007) presented a startling account of the detrimental impact that
electrical utilities have on the environment. Disturbing findings presented in
his paper include the following:
Americans living near coal-fired power plants are exposed to higher radiation
doses than those living near nuclear power plants that meet government regula-
tions.
The population effective dose equivalent from coal plants is 100 times that from
nuclear plants.
The energy content of nuclear fuel released in coal combustion is greater than
that of the coal consumed.
How can one validate or repudiate the claims made by Gabbard? Should the
Environmental Protection Agency ban coal-fired electrical generating power
facilities?
7.2 The half-life of iodine-131 is approximately 8 days. Determine the decay con-
stant k for iodine-131. Calculate the amount of iodine-131 that will remain
after a year if the initial quantity of iodine-131 is 64 grams.
7.3 If “X” represents an element, determine the elements for 168X and 20782X.
7.4 What “Y” is formed from the following disintegration reactions where a is the
mass number and b is the atomic number?
90Th : a + bY
a
(a) 230
(b) 19K : b + bY
40 a
7.5 Several fast-food restaurants use paper containers for their food products
while others use Styrofoam (polystyrene). Perform a Google search on the
internet to find articles that present the advantages and disadvantages of using
each.
7.6 As a concerned citizen who believes in sustainable development, list some
things that can be done in our lives to reduce waste, recycle, conserve, etc. to
help minimize adverse affects on the environment and our natural resources.
For example, take shorter showers to decrease the volume of gray water gener-
ated and save energy costs associated with heating the water. Recycle glass,
aluminum, paper, plastics, newspapers, etc. to decrease the quantity of materi-
als that are disposed of in landfills and to allow recovery and reuse of these
materials, thereby saving our natural resources.
CHAPTER
8
Water Quality and Pollution
8.1 IMPORTANCE OF WATER

Objectives
The quality and quantity of water have long been a major concern of every
In this chapter, you will learn civilization. Water is an essential component of life. Humans are composed of
about: 65% water and on the average require 2.3 liters of water daily to survive
The importance and (Swanson, 2001). People can survive only 5 to 7 days without water (AWWA, 2005).
beneficial uses of water Humans did not always recognize the connection between disease and
The hydrologic cycle and impure water. It was assumed that if water tasted good, it was “safe” to drink.
the water-wastewater Civilizations not only used rivers as their water supply, but depended on them
cycle for food, navigation, hydropower, irrigation, and disposal of wastes. Early
treatment systems focused on removing taste and odor contaminants, thereby,
The major sources of
making the water “safe.” As technology developed, people were able to see
water pollution
microorganisms in water, measure their concentration, and link them to disease.
The physical, chemical, Approximately 97% of the earth’s waters are brackish or saline and are
biological, and found in the oceans. The remaining 3% comprise fresh waters; however, 2% of
radiological parameters these are inaccessible in the form of snow, ice, or glaciers (Van der Leeden et al.,
used for assessing water 1990). Accessible sources of fresh water from surface and groundwater sources
quality make up only 0.62% of the total volume of water on earth. This translates into
Drinking water standards, approximately 8.54 * 1018 liters 12.25 * 1018 gallons2 of fresh water available
wastewater effluent for various beneficial uses, as described in detail below. Table 8.1 shows world-
standards, and surface wide water distribution.
water quality standards Finding high-quality, abundant fresh-water sources is increasingly diffi-
cult. In the United States, the most recent survey of assessed water bodies indi-
cates that between 40% and 50% of those waters surveyed are impaired or
threatened (EPA, 2005). As water passes through the hydrologic cycle, it
becomes contaminated.
8.2 BENEFICIAL USES OF WATER

Water has a number of beneficial uses, and its quality helps to determine how it is
used. In the United States, the U.S. Geological Survey publishes a water-use report
every five years (USGS, 2006).This report lists eight primary water-use categories:
public supply, domestic, irrigation, livestock, aquaculture, industrial, mining, and
Section 8.2 Beneficial Uses of Water 173
Table 8.1 Estimated World Water Supply and Budget

Volume in Volume in cubic Percent of
cubic miles kilometers total
Water item (thousands) (thousands) water
Water in land areas:

Freshwater lakes 30 125 0.009
Saline lake and inland seas 25 104 0.008
Rivers (average instantaneous volume) 0.3 1.25 0.0001
Soil moisture and vadose water 16 67 0.005

Groundwater to depth of 4,000 meters 2,000 8,350 0.61
Ice caps and glaciers 7,000 29,200 2.14

Total in land areas (rounded) 9,100 37,800 2.8
Atmosphere 3.1 13 0.001
World oceans 317,000 1,320,000 97.3
Total water in all items (rounded) 326,000 1,360,000 100
Annual evaporation1
From world oceans 85 350 0.025
From land areas 17 70 0.005
Total evaporation 102 420 0.031
Annual precipitation
On world oceans 78 320 0.024
On land areas 24 100 0.007
Total precipitation 102 420 0.031
Annual runoff to oceans from rivers 9 38 0.003

and icecaps
Groundwater outflow to oceans2 0.4 1.6 0.001
Total runoff and outflow 9.4 39.6 0.0031
Source: Van Der Leeden et al., 1990.

1
Evaporation is a measure of total water participating annually in the hydrologic cycle.
2
Groundwater outflow to oceans arbitrarily set equal to about 5% of surface runoff.
thermoelectric power. Figure 8.1 is a pie chart showing the percent by category of
water used in the United States during 2000. Each of these categories will be dis-
cussed briefly, and the quantities of water used will be summarized.
8.2.1 Public Supply

Public water supply is defined as water withdrawn by public and private
water suppliers that is distributed to at least 25 people or to water systems
that have a minimum of 15 connections. Public supply water may also be fur-
nished to commercial, domestic, industrial, and thermoelectric power suppliers.
174 Chapter 8 Water Quality and Pollution
Public supply (10.6%)

Domestic (0.9%)
Irrigation (33.6%)
Livestock (0.4%)
Aquaculture (0.9%)
Industrial (4.8%)
Mining (0.9%)
Thermoelectric power (47.9%)
Figure 8.1
Percent by category of
water used in the United
States for 2000.
164,000 megaliters per day (ML/d), or 43,300 million gallons per day (MGD) of
water withdrawals went to public supply.
8.2.2 Domestic
Water used both for indoor and outdoor household purposes is called domestic.
Within the home, water is used for bathing, cooking, drinking, flushing toilets, and
washing clothes. Outdoor water use primarily involves watering gardens and lawns.
Water withdrawals in 2000 for domestic usage in the United States were 13,600
ML/d (3,590 MGD).
8.2.3 Irrigation
Irrigation water use includes providing water for all agricultural and horticultural
activities, for golf courses, cemeteries, and turf farms, and for preplant irrigation,
frost protection, and dust suppression. This is the second highest category of water
withdrawal. In 2000, approximately 519,000 ML/d (137,000 MGD) were withdrawn
for irrigation use in the United States.
8.2.4 Livestock
Livestock water use is associated with dairy operations, feedlots, livestock watering
operations, and other on-farm usages. In 2000, approximately 6,660 ML/d (1,760
MGD) of water went for these purposes.
8.2.5 Aquaculture
Water used for raising finfish and shellfish for food, conservation, restoration, or sport
is classified as aquaculture use. In the United States, about 14,000 ML/d (3,700 MGD)
of water were used in 2000 for aquaculture activities.
8.2.6 Industrial
Industrial water use includes water used to cool, dilute, fabricate, transport, and
wash. Examples of industries that consume large quantities of water include: chem-
ical, food, paper, petroleum, and primary metal processing. In 2000, 74,900 ML/d
(19,800 MGD) of water were used by industry.
Section 8.4 Water Pollution 175
Atmosphere
Condensation
Precipitation Evaporation
Evapotranspiration
Surface runo
ff
Soil mantle
Ocean
Aquifers Figure 8.2
Groundwater
flow Hydrologic cycle.
8.2.7 Mining
Mining water is used to extract minerals such as coal, iron, sand, and gravel, crude
petroleum, and natural gas. During 2000, an estimated 13,200 ML/d (3,500 MGD) of
water were used for mining activities.
8.2.8 Thermoelectric Power

Water for thermoelectric power is used to generate electricity by steam turbines,
primarily in coal-fired steam plants. The thermoelectric power industry in the
United States for 2000 was the category with the highest water withdraws at approx-
imately 740,000 ML/d (196,000 MGD).
8.3 HYDROLOGIC CYCLE

Water is a renewable resource. Figure 8.2 shows a diagram of the hydrologic cycle.
Ultimately, all surface and groundwater comes from precipitation, in the form of
either rain or snow. Precipitation that percolates into the ground becomes groundwa-
ter and the remainder becomes surface waters, making rivers, lakes, and oceans. Water
returns to the atmosphere by evaporation and transpiration from plants and trees. As
water passes through the hydrologic cycle, it picks up both natural and anthropogenic
(man-made) contaminants. Water percolating through the soil and geologic forma-
tions dissolves minerals, increasing the concentration of dissolved species such as
calcium, magnesium, iron, and manganese. Surface waters tend to have higher concen-
trations of suspended materials, such as clay, soil, sand, silt, leaves, and color-producing
substances associated with humic and fulvic acids resulting from decaying vegetation.
Humans use water for a variety of reasons, as previously discussed, often causing the
degradation of water quality.
8.4 WATER POLLUTION

Pollution of earth’s water occurs both naturally and by anthropogenic means. One
simple definition of water pollution is the discharge or release of contaminants into
water at concentrations that have an adverse effect on human health, well-being,
and the environment. Figure 8.3 is a block diagram showing four major types of
water pollution.
Agricultural runoff Urban runoff

-Soil erosion -Oil, Gasoline
-Nitrogen -Nitrogen
-Phosphorus -Phosphorus
-Animal wastes -Leaves
-Pesticides Nonpoint sources -Pesticides
River
Point sources
Domestic wastewater discharge Industrial wastewater discharge
-Suspended solids -Suspended solids
-Organics -Organics
Figure 8.3 -Phosphorus -Phosphorus
-Oil & Grease -Nitrogen
Four major types of water -Pathogens -Metals
pollution.
Point sources of pollution are those that emanate from a single point. Exam-
ples include domestic and industrial wastewater treatment facilities that discharge
treated wastewater into surface waters. Nonpoint or diffuse sources of pollution are
land areas such as fields, parking lots, and roads that generate surface runoff con-
taining various types of contaminants.
In the past, control of water pollution focused mainly on point sources of
pollution from publicly owned treatment works (POTWs). These are domestic
wastewater treatment facilities that treat sewage that may contain some indus-
trial wastewater. More recently, regulatory agencies are targeting nonpoint
sources of pollution, both agricultural and urban runoff, since the pollutional
strength of these types of wastewaters may be two to three times that of domestic
wastewater.
Management of both water and wastewater flows in entire watersheds is now
being practiced to encourage a holistic approach to pollution control. This allows
regulatory agencies to better manage these resources and to develop total maxi-
mum daily loads (TMDLs) for receiving streams, thus being able to maintain high
water quality. Understanding the importance and interrelationship between drink-
ing water and wastewater treatment is an integral part of managing a particular
watershed. Figure 8.4 shows a schematic of this relationship.
A city uses a river and wells to provide water to its citizens. Water with-
drawn from these sources must be transported to a water treatment plant (WTP),
where various chemicals are added and several types of treatment processes are
used to produce safe and palatable water. The water is pumped from the treat-
ment plant throughout the city’s water distribution system. Consumers, busi-
nesses, and industries use the water and return it to the city’s wastewater
collection system or sewerage system in the form of gray water and wastewater.
Raw sewage or domestic wastewater is then conveyed through gravity sewers
and pressurized force mains to the wastewater treatment plant (WWTP). At the
WWTP, physical, chemical, and biological processes transform the sewage into
reclaimed water that can be used for irrigation, drinking, or aquifer recharge, or
discharged back into a river. Upstream and downstream of a city, other munici-
palities and stakeholders use the water in the stream the same way, and some use
it for other purposes.
Section 8.5 Water Quality Parameters 177
Wells Water distribution

system
Water treatment plant
Wastewater
collection
system
Raw
sewage
Wastewater
Deep treatment
well plant
injection
Wastewater
effluent
River Figure 8.4

Integrated watershed
management.
8.5 WATER QUALITY PARAMETERS

Water quality is normally classified by physical, chemical, biological or microbiolog-
ical, and radiological parameters. There are hundreds of other parameters that may
be used. Some analyses measure specific constituents or parameters in the water,
such as sodium, chloride, pH, and temperature. The results of other types of analysis,
such as biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) and chemical oxygen demand (COD),
are nonspecific, since these tests only differentiate between biodegradable organics
and chemically oxidizable organics. The specific types of organic matter found in the
sample must be determined through other means. For instance, if the sample came
from a sugar-processing facility, specific testing for glucose could be conducted to
quantify the actual concentration found in the sample. A book published by the
American Public Health Association (APHA), Standard Methods for the Examina-
tion of Water and Wastewater (1998), presents over 500 parameters and the proce-
dures for performing their analysis in water, wastewater, and sludge.
Table 8.2 lists some of the most familiar physical, chemical, biological, and radio-
logical analyses performed on water samples. Physical characteristics of water are
those that affect the senses: sight, taste, smell, and touch. Chemical parameters are
those that relate to the actual composition of the water and are subdivided into inor-
ganic and organic categories. Many chemical species are toxic to humans and therefore
their concentrations in water are regulated. Primary drinking water standards exist for
16 inorganic chemicals and 53 organic chemicals. Biological and microbiological para-
meters are those associated with disease-causing organisms or pathogens that directly
relate to public health. Radiological parameters focus on radionuclides that may be
found in certain waters that have been exposed to radioactivity.These, too, have severe
health implications and are regulated by the federal drinking water standards.
8.5.1 Conventional Water Quality Assessment Parameters

Several parameters have traditionally been used to assess water quality, especially as
it pertains to water and wastewater treatment. This section discusses briefly the phys-
ical, chemical, and biological parameters that environmental engineers and scientists
Table 8.2 Physical, Chemical, Biological, and Radiological Characteristics of Water

Physical Chemical–inorganic Chemical-organic Microbiological Radiological
Absorbance Aluminum Alachlor Bacteria Alpha-particle emitters
Color Arsenic Aldicarb Helminths or worms Beta-particle emitters
Solids Barium Atrazine Protozoa Radium-226 and -228
Taste and odor Beryllium Benzene Viruses Uranium
Temperature Cadmium Carbon tetrachloride
Turbidity Calcium Ethlybenzene
Cesium Heptachlor
Chloride Lindane
Chromium Polychlorinated biphenyls

(PCBs)
Cobalt Toluene
Copper Trichloroethylene
Fluoride Toxaphene
Iron Vinyl chloride
Lead Xylenes
Magnesium 2,4-D
Manganese
Mercury
Nickel
Nitrate
Nitrite
Phosphorus
Potassium
Strontium
Zinc
use to assess water quality and the effectiveness of treatment at water and waste-
water treatment plants.
Turbidity
Turbidity is a measure of water clarity.Turbidimeters measure the intensity of light that
is scattered by suspended matter, primarily colloidal and fine dispersions. Clay, silt,
finely divided organic and inorganic matter, plankton, and microorganisms are exam-
ples of matter causing turbidity. Turbidity is expressed in nephelometric turbidity units
(NTUs). The procedure for measuring turbidity is found in Section 2130 of Standard
Methods (1998). As of January 14, 2005, drinking water systems cannot exceed 1 NTU
and must not exceed 0.3 NTU in 95% of the daily samples in any given month.
Solids
Total solids (TS) in a water or wastewater sample consist of suspended and dissolved
solids. The procedures for measuring the various types of solids are found in Section
2540 of Standard Methods (1998). To determine total solids, a known volume of sam-
ple is placed in a preweighed crucible or aluminum tare and then evaporated and
dried to a constant weight in an oven at 103–105°C. The crucible or aluminum tare is
cooled in a desiccator and reweighed.The difference in the weight divided by the vol-
ume of sample yields the total solids concentration, expressed mathematically as:
mg WTS WDS - WTare
TSa b = = (8.1)
L V V
where:
TS = total solids concentration, mg/L,
WTS = mass of total solids, mg,
WDS = mass of dried solids and tare, mg,
WTare = mass of tare, mg, and
V = volume of sample, L.
Total suspended solids (TSS) are the portion of total solids that can physically
be removed by passing through a filter with a specific pore size opening. Settleable
solids relate to the fraction of suspended solids that will settle out of solution by the
force of gravity. Suspended solids are determined by passing a specified volume of
sample through a preweighed 0.45-mm fiberglass filter pad and then drying the pad at
103–105°C. The concentration of suspended solids is then determined by dividing the
weight of the dry solids accumulated on the filter pad by the volume of the sample:
mg WTSS WDSFP - WFP
TSS a b = = (8.2)
L V V
where:
TSS = concentration of total suspended solids, mg/L,
WTSS = mass of total suspended solids, mg,
WDSFP = mass of dried solids, filter pad, and tare, mg,
WFP = mass of filter pad and tare, mg, and
The total dissolved solids (TDS) concentration, which relates more to the
chemical quality of water, is determined as:
TDS = TS - TSS (8.3)
where:
TDS = concentration of total dissolved solids, mg/L,
TS = concentration of total solids, mg/l, and
TSS = concentration of total suspended solids, mg/L.
Each of the above solids species has a volatile fraction (related to organic content)
and a fixed fraction (related to mineral content). The volatile fraction is determined
by igniting the dry solids in a muffle furnace at 550°C. The total volatile solids (TVS)
concentration can be calculated from:
mg WTVS WDS - WFS

TVS a b = = (8.4)
L V V
where:
TVS = concentration of total volatile solids, mg/L,
WTVS = mass of total volatile solids, mg,
WDS = mass of dried solids and tare, mg,
WFS = mass of fixed solids and tare after ignition at 550°C, mg, and
Equation (8.5) is used to calculate the total volatile suspended solids (TVSS)
concentration.
mg WTVSS WDSFP - WFSFP

TVSS a b = = (8.5)
L V V
where:
TVSS =
concentration of total volatile suspended solids, mg/L,
WTVSS =
mass of total volatile suspended solids, mg,
WDSFP =
mass of dried solids, filter pad, and tare, mg,
WFSFP =
mass of fixed solids, filter pad, and tare after ignition at 550°C, mg,
and
Equation (8.6) is used to calculate the total fixed solids (TFS) concentration (mg/L):
TFS = TS - TVS (8.6)
Example 8.1 illustrates the determination of total solids, total volatile solids, total
fixed solids, total suspended solids, and total dissolved solids.
EXAMPLE 8.1
Solids analyses
The following test results were obtained for a sample of river water. All solids analy-
ses were performed using a sample volume of 100 ml.
Tare mass of evaporating dish = 25.6039 g

Mass of evaporating dish plus residue after evaporation @ 105°C = 25.6289 g
Mass of evaporating dish plus residue after ignition @ 550°C = 25.6119 g
Tare mass of Whatman glass fiber filter = 1.6469 g
Residue on Whatman glass fiber filter after drying @ 105°C = 1.6544 g
Determine:
a. The total solids concentration.
b. The total suspended solids concentration.
c. The total dissolved solids concentration.
d. The total volatile solids concentration.
e. The total fixed solids concentration.
Solution part a
First, calculate the total solids concentration using Equation (8.1).
mg WTS WTS WDS - WTare

TS a b = =
L V V V
125.6289 g - 25.6039 g2 1000 mg 1000 ml mg
= a ba b = 250
100 ml g L L
Solution part b
Next, calculate the total suspended solids concentration using Equation (8.2).
mg WTSS WDSFP - WFP

TSS a b = =
L V V
11.6544 g - 1.6469 g2 1000 mg 1000 ml mg
= a ba b = 75
100 ml g L L
Solution part c
Now, using Equation (8.3), calculate the total dissolved solids (TDS) concentration.
mg
TDS = TS - TSS = 250 - 75 = 175
L
Solution part d
Next, calculate the total volatile solids (TVS) concentration using Equation (8.4).
mg WTVS WDS - WFS

TVS a b = =
L V V
125.6289 g - 25.6119 g2 1000 mg 1000 ml mg
= a ba b = 170
100 ml g L L
Solution part e
Finally, using Equation (8.6), calculate the total fixed solids (TFS) concentration.
mg
TFS = TS - TVS = 250 - 170 = 80
L
Color
True color is due to colloidal and dissolved substances. The decomposition of leaves,
conifer needles, and wood produces tannins, humic acid, fulvic acid, and humates,
which are the organic compounds causing color in water. Inorganic compounds that
cause color include iron and manganese. The procedure for measuring the color
concentration is found in Section 2120 of Standard Methods (1998).
Apparent color is due to suspended materials in the water, such as suspended
solids. When color is measured on unfiltered samples, it is called “apparent color,”
whereas color measured on filtered water samples 10.45-mm filter2 is termed “true
color.”
Color in water is measured by visual comparison with standards consisting

of established platinum-cobalt solutions. Solutions of potassium chloroplatinate
1K 2PtCl 62 tinted with small amounts of cobalt chloride yield colors that are very
much like natural colors. The pH of the water should be reported along with the
color measurement, since color “intensity” generally increases as pH increases. The
standard color unit (c.u.) is the color produced by 1 mg/L K 2PtCl 6 .
Taste and Odor
Taste and odor compounds in surface waters are mainly attributed to algae. Bacter-
ial degradation of algae, algal waste products, and the algae themselves may cause
taste and odor problems. In addition, ferrous ions (Fe2), manganous ions (Mn2),
and sulfide ions (S2) often cause taste and odor problems. The taste and smell of
chlorine in water is also a common complaint among customers.
Taste and odor compounds generally found in groundwater include hydrogen
sulfide 1H 2S2, reduced iron and manganese, and high total dissolved solids (TDS),
which is frequently caused by a high salt content. Chemicals that often contaminate
groundwater and that may cause taste and odor problems include trichloroethylene
(TCE), other synthetic organic compounds, and leachate from landfills.
Taste and odors are measured by dilution of the sample with distilled water
until no taste or odor is detected. The procedure for measuring taste in water is
found in Section 2160 of Standard Methods (1998), and Section 2150 lists the proce-
dure for determining odor.
The greatest dilution of sample at which tastes can be detected determines the
flavor threshold number (FTN) as follows:
A + B
FTN = (8.7)
A
and the greatest dilution of sample at which odors can be detected determines the
threshold odor number (TON) as follows:
A + B
TON = (8.8)
A
where:
FTN = flavor threshold number, dimensionless,
TON = threshold odor number, dimensionless,
A = volume of sample tested, and
B = volume of taste and odor dilution water used.
EXAMPLE 8.2
Calculating threshold odor number
A 100-ml sample of water is diluted with 200 ml of dilution water so that there is no
detection of the odor. Calculate the threshold odor number (TON).
Solution
Substitute the appropriate values into Equation (8.8) to solve for TON.
100 ml + 200 ml
TON = = 3
100 ml
Temperature
Temperature is an important physical parameter that affects the density, viscosity,
vapor pressure, and surface tension of water. Biological and chemical reactions
increase with an increase in temperature. A 10ºC increase often doubles the rate of
biological and chemical reactions. Gas solubility is affected by temperature, and oxy-
gen’s solubility increases with a decrease in temperature. The solubility of certain
chemical compounds, such as sodium chloride, increases with an increase in water
temperature. Temperature is normally measured with a thermometer. The procedure
for measuring temperature is found in Section 2550 of Standard Methods (1998).
Nitrogen (N)
Nitrogen is a nutrient required by all living organisms. In excess amounts in surface
waters it contributes to excessive algal growth, which results in eutrophication.
Nitrogen enters the water supply in agricultural and urban runoff as fertilizers, and
in industrial and domestic wastewater treatment discharges.
The most common and important forms of nitrogen are listed in Table 8.3.
Oxidized nitrogen 1NOx2 is the sum of NO2- + NO3- , whereas total Kjeldahl nitro-
gen (TKN) is the sum of the ammonia and organic nitrogen. Organic nitrogen is
nitrogen found in protein, amino acids, and urea 1NH 2CONH 22. The primary drink-
ing water standard for nitrate is 10 mg/L as N, because it is linked to infant methe-
moglobinemia (blue baby syndrome).
Most organisms use ammonium nitrogen as their nitrogen source, but algae
normally assimilate nitrate. Some bacteria are capable of fixing nitrogen gas from
the atmosphere to form ammonium nitrogen. Nitrogen found in most organic com-
pounds exists with a negative-3 valence 1N 3-2.
The total nitrogen concentration in a sample consists of the total Kjeldahl
nitrogen and oxidized nitrogen:
total nitrogen 1TN2 = TKN + NOx (8.9)
The ammonium ion exists in equilibrium with ammonia according to the following
equilibrium equation. At pH values normally encountered in environmental engi-
neering, the ammonium ion is the predominant species, whereas ammonia occurs at
pH values greater than 10.
NH 4+ 4 NH 3 + H + K a = 5.6 * 10-10 @ 25°C (8.10)
3NH 3 - N4 = 3NH 4+4 + 3NH 34 (8.11)
where 3NH 3 - N4 = concentration of ammonium and ammonia obtained from an

ammonia nitrogen analysis according to Standard Methods.
Table 8.3 Important Forms of Nitrogen

Nitrogen species Chemical formula Valence of N
Ammonia NH3 -3
Ammonium NH4+ -3
Nitrogen gas N2 0
Nitrite NO2- +3
Nitrate NO3- +5
3NH 3 - N4 is measured by colorimetry using Nessler’s reagent (potassium

mercuric iodine, K 2HgI 4). Nessler’s reagent combines with NH 3 to form a yellowish-
brown colloid. The procedures for performing the various types of nitrogen analyses
are found in Section 4500-N of Standard Methods (1998).
Phosphorus (P)
Phosphorus is an essential nutrient required by all living organisms. It, like nitro-
gen, is linked to eutrophication of surface waters if present in excessive amounts.
Phosphorus enters the water supply from phosphorus-based detergents, corrosion
inhibitors added to drinking water systems, and domestic and industrial wastewater
discharges:
total phosphorus 1TP2 = inorganic-P + organic-P (8.12)
Organic-P is found in proteins and amino acids and is normally only a minor considera-
tion. Inorganic-P species include orthophosphates, polyphosphates, and metaphos-
phates. Polyphosphates and metaphosphates are also known as condensed phosphates.
Condensed phosphates and organic phosphorus must be converted to orthophosphate
before they can be measured.
Orthophosphate Major orthophosphates include: trisodium phosphate 1Na 3PO42;

disodium phosphate 1Na2HPO42; monosodium phosphate 1NaH 2PO42; and diammo-
nium phosphate 1NH 422HPO4 . Orthophosphates are used by microorganisms and can
be precipitated out of solution by adding chemicals such as lime or alum.
Orthophosphate is typically measured by one of three colorimetric methods.
The phosphate ion 1PO4-32 combines with ammonium molybdate under acidic con-
ditions to form molybdophosphate complex according to Equation (8.13).
PO4-3 + 121NH422 MoO4 + 24 H+ : 1NH423 PO4 # 12 MoO3 (8.13)

+ 21 NH4+ + 12 H2O
The blue-colored sol produced by the addition of stannous chloride is propor-

tional to the amount of phosphate present as shown by Equation (8.14).
1NH 423 PO4 # 12 MoO3 + Sn+2 : 1molybdenum blue2 + Sn+4 (8.14)
Condensed Phosphate Major polyphosphates include: sodium hexametaphos-

phate, Na31PO426 ; sodium tripolyphosphate, Na 5P3O10 ; and tetrasodium pyrophos-
phate, Na4P2O7 . Condensed phosphates are converted to orthophosphates by boiling
samples that have been acidified with H 2SO4 for 90 minutes. The orthophosphate
formed from the condensed phosphates is measured in the presence of the original
orthophosphate concentration present in the sample by one of the colorimetric pro-
cedures, yielding the total inorganic phosphate concentration. The concentration of
condensed phosphate is then determined by difference:
condensed phosphate = total inorganic phosphate - orthophosphate (8.15)
Organic Phosphate Prior to quantification, organic phosphate must be destroyed

by wet oxidation or digestion using one of the following chemicals: perchloric acid,
nitric-sulfuric acid, or persulfate. All forms of phosphorus are measured in an
organic determination (total phosphorus). First the sample is digested, followed by
colorimetric measurement of orthophosphate. The organic-P concentration is then

determined by difference:
organic phosphorus = total phosphorus - total inorganic phosphorus (8.16)
The procedures for performing the various types of phosphorus analyses are found
in Section 4500-P of Standard Methods (1998).
Dissolved Oxygen (DO)

The dissolved-oxygen (DO) concentration is a critical parameter in assessing water
quality. DO is the amount of molecular oxygen 1O22 dissolved in water and is a func-
tion of temperature, salinity, and pressure. The concentration of DO increases as the
temperature of the water decreases. For example, the concentration of DO is 9.09
and 7.56 mg/L at 20°C and 30°C, respectively.
Lakes and rivers should contain more than 5 to 6 mg/L of DO to ensure aerobic
conditions. Fish and other aquatic organisms require oxygen to survive. If insufficient
oxygen is available, anaerobic conditions may result, leading to fish kills and obnoxious
odors from the production of hydrogen sulfide and methane. Typically, wastewater dis-
charged into receiving waters must contain a minimum DO concentration of 5 mg/L to
ensure that aerobic conditions prevail. During wastewater treatment, a DO concentra-
tion of 2.0 mg/L is usually maintained in aeration basins to sustain the microorganisms
involved in treating wastewater. The dissolved-oxygen content in water affects its cor-
rosiveness and taste. Water containing DO is more palatable than water without DO.
Historically, DO was measured by titration using the azide modification of the
Winkler method (Standard Methods, 1998). An oxygen meter and probe are now
most commonly used to measure DO in the laboratory and in the field. They must
be properly calibrated before measurements are taken.
Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD)

BOD is a biological assay in which aerobic bacteria oxidize the biodegradable
organic compounds in a water or wastewater sample to carbon dioxide and water.
BOD actually measures the quantity of oxygen necessary to oxidize the organic mat-
ter and therefore gives an indirect measurement of the quantity of organic matter.
The greater the oxygen demand, the higher the concentration of biodegradable
organics in the sample. The theoretical basis for BOD is based on stoichiometry and
first-order removal kinetics. Knowing the chemical formula of an organic compound,
we can write the stoichiometric equation showing the compound being oxidized to
carbon dioxide and water. The example that follows illustrates the procedure for cal-
culating the theoretical oxygen demand for a chemical compound such as C 5H 7O2N
(C 5H 7O2N is commonly used to represent the organic fraction of microorganisms).
Since nitrogen is present in the compound, ammonia will be released as a by-product.
For compounds consisting of only carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen, the end products
are carbon dioxide and water.
EXAMPLE 8.3
Calculating theoretical oxygen demand
Calculate the theoretical oxygen demand of a water sample containing 1000 mg/L of
C 5H 7O2N.
Solution
Start by writing the stoichiometric equation showing the oxidation of the chemical
compound to carbon dioxide, water, and ammonia. Make sure that the equation is
properly balanced.
C 5H 7O2N + 5 O2 : 5 CO2 + 2 H 2O + 1 NH 3
Next, calculate the gram-molecular and atomic weights of C 5H 7O2N and O2,
respectively.
MW C 5H 7O2N = 51122 + 7112 + 21162 + 11142 = 113 g

AW O2 = 11322 = 32 g
From the stoichiometric equation, 5 * 32 = 160 grams of oxygen are required

to react with 113 grams of C 5H 7O2N. As shown below, 1416 mg/L of oxygen are
required to oxidize 1,000 mg/L of C 5H 7O2N.
mg C 5H 7O2 N 160 g O2 mg O2
1000 ¢ ≤ = 1416
L 113 g C 5H 7O2N L
If the total oxygen demand is to be determined, another stoichiometric equa-

tion is written for the oxidation of NH 3 to nitrate. This process, known as nitrifica-
tion, consumes approximately 4.57 g O2 per g of NH 3-N oxidized.
Derivation of BOD Equation Bacteria oxidize organic material to produce energy

that will be used for synthesizing new bacterial cells and for maintenance functions.
Figure 8.5 shows a generalized graph of the amount of oxygen consumed (Y) and the
amount of organic material remaining (L) as a function of time.
The rate at which organic matter, depicted in Figure 8.5, is being oxidized can
be described mathematically as a first-order removal reaction:
dL
= - kL (8.17)
dt
where:
L = concentration of organic matter, mg/L,
k = BOD rate constant, d-1, and
t = oxidation period, days.
Figure 8.5 Lu
Oxygen consumed and
Oxygen consumed (Y ) or
BOD exerted versus time.

BOD exerted (BODt)
BOD remaining (L)
Lt
Time
Rearranging Equation (8.17) gives
1
dL = - k dt (8.18)
L
Integration limits for Equation (8.18) are shown as follows, where L goes from
the ultimate BOD 1Lu2 to the BOD at any time t, and t goes from zero to t:
Lt 1 t
dL = - k dt (8.19)
LLU L L0
Integrating Equation (8.19) results in:
ln1Lt2 - ln1Lu2 = - kt (8.20)
Rearranging Equation (8.20) and taking the antilog of both sides of the equa-
tion yields:
Lt = Lue -k t (8.21)
From Figure 8.5, the ultimate BOD 1Lu2 is equal to Y plus the BOD at any
time t, Lt , or:
Lu = Y + Lt (8.22)
Rearranging Equation (8.22) and solving for Lt yields:
Lt = Lu - Y (8.23)
Substituting Equation (8.23) into Equation (8.21) results in Equation (8.24).
Lt = Lu - Y = Lue -kt (8.24)
Rearranging Equation (8.24) and solving for Y (BOD exerted) results in:
Y = Lu A 1 - e -kt B (8.25)
Equation (8.25) is expressed in a more useful form as:
BODt = BODu A 1 - e -kt B (8.26)
where:
Y = BODt = amount of oxygen consumed or BOD exerted at some time,
t, mg/L, and
Lu = BODu = ultimate BOD of the sample, mg/L.
EXAMPLE 8.4
C a l c u l a t i n g B O D g i v e n BODu a n d r a t e c o n s t a n t
Calculate the 5-day and 17-day BOD of a domestic wastewater, given the BOD rate
constant of 0.22 d-1 and an ultimate BOD of 300 mg/L.
Solution
First, substitute a time of 5 days and an ultimate BOD of 300 mg/L into Eq. (8.26),
which yields a 5-day BOD of 200 mg/L:
BODt = BODu A 1 - e -kt B
mg -1 mg
BOD5 = 300 A 1 - e -0.22 d 15 d2 B = 200
L L
Next, substitute a time of 17 days and an ultimate BOD of 300 mg/L into Eq. (8.26)
which yields a 17-day BOD of 293 mg/L:
mg -1 mg
BOD17 = 300 A 1 - e -0.22 d 117 d2 B = 293
L L
BOD Laboratory Procedure The procedure for performing the biochemical oxy-
gen demand analysis is found in Section 5210 of Standard Methods (1998). The
BOD test involves mixing a milliliters of sample (water or wastewater) with b mil-
liliters of dilution water, which is distilled water to which nutrients and oxygen
have been added. If the sample contains bacteria, then it is unnecessary to add
“seed” or inoculum to the dilution water. The mixture is placed in a minimum of
four 300-ml BOD bottles. Figures 8.6 and 8.7 are schematics illustrating the proce-
dure for performing a “seeded” BOD analysis. The dissolved-oxygen (DO) concen-
tration of the mixture in two of the bottles is determined using a DO meter and
oxygen probe or by titration using the azide modification of the Winkler method.
Two of the bottles are incubated in the dark at 20°C for five days, or some other
desired time period, and then the DO is measured. For the results of the BOD test
to be valid, at least 1 mg/L of DO should remain after incubation and at least 2 mg/L
Figure 8.6
BOD laboratory apparatus.
“a” ml
Water or “b”ml
wastewater Dilution water
sample
Nutrients
Dilution
Bacteria water
or seed Air
BOD BOD
bottle bottle
B1 D1
Measure DO on day 1
Mixture of sample BOD BOD

and dilution water bottle bottle
B2 D2
Measure DO on day 5 Figure 8.7

BOD bottle arrangement.
of DO should be used during the incubation period. The BOD for a “seeded” test is
calculated according to Equation (8.27). Average values are used for D1 , D2 , B1 ,
and B2 .
1D1 - D22 - 1B1 - B22 f

BODt 1mg>L2 = (8.27)
P
where:
BODt = biochemical oxygen demand exerted for an incubation period of
t days, mg/L,
t = incubation period at 20°C, days,
D1 and D2 = initial and final DO concentrations in the diluted sample, mg/L,
B1 and B2 = initial and final DO concentrations in the blanks, mg/L,
Blanks are BOD bottles containing dilution water and seed,
P = decimal fraction of sample used, and
f = ratio of the seed in sample to seed in blank or control.
ml of sample
P = (8.28)
volume of BOD bottle
% seed in D1
f = (8.29)
% seed in B1
When the sample already contains bacteria, Equation (8.27) is modified as fol-
lows for calculating the BOD for an “unseeded” test:
mg 1D1 - D22
BODt a b = (8.30)
L P
EXAMPLE 8.5
Calculating BOD for a “seeded” sample
A 5-day BOD test is performed on a sample of chlorinated wastewater effluent. Sixty
milliliters of wastewater sample and 2 ml of “seed” are added to 300-ml BOD bottles
and mixed with enough dilution water to fill the bottles. “Seed” must be added, since
wastewater effluent is chlorinated, which kills pathogens and bacteria. For the blanks
or controls, 2 ml of “seed” are added to 300-ml BOD bottles and mixed with enough
dilution water to fill the bottles. The average dissolved-oxygen concentrations of the
diluted wastewater samples and blanks on day 1 of the test were 6.8 and 7.4 mg/L,
respectively. After incubation at 20°C for 5 days, the average DO concentrations of
the diluted wastewater samples and blanks were 2.5 and 7.1 mg/L, respectively. Using
Equation (8.27), calculate the 5-day BOD of the chlorinated effluent.
Solution
First, calculate the decimal fraction (P) of sample used according to Equation (8.28).
ml of sample 60 ml wastewater sample

P = = = 0.20
volume of BOD bottle 300 ml
Next, calculate the ratio of seed in the sample to seed in the blanks according to
Equation (8.29). The “seed” inoculates the dilution water, resulting in 240 ml being
seeded for D1 and 300 ml for B1 .
% seed in D1 240 ml>300 ml

f = = = 0.80
% seed in B1 300 ml>300 ml
Finally, determine the 5-day BOD using Equation (8.27).
mg 1D1 - D22 - 1B1 - B22 f 16.8 - 2.52 - 17.4 - 7.1210.802

BOD5 a b = =
L P 60 ml>300 ml
mg
= 20.3
L
EXAMPLE 8.6
Calculating BOD for an “unseeded” sample
A 5-day BOD test is performed on a sample of raw wastewater. Six milliliters of
wastewater sample are added to 300-ml BOD bottles and mixed with dilution
water. The average dissolved-oxygen concentration of the diluted wastewater sam-
ples on day 1 of the test was 7.6 mg/L and after incubation at 20°C for 5 days was
2.6 mg/L. Calculate the 5-day BOD of the raw wastewater. Since raw wastewater
already contains bacteria, it is not necessary to add “seed” to the sample or to the
dilution water. Therefore, Equation (8.30) must be used for determining the 5-day
BOD concentration.
Solution
First, determine the decimal fraction of sample (P) used according to Equation (8.28).
ml of sample 6 ml wastewater sample
P = = = 0.02
volume of BOD bottle 300 ml
Next, determine the 5-day BOD using Equation (8.30).
mg 1D1 - D22 17.6 - 2.62 mg

BOD5 a b = = = 250
L P 16 ml>300 ml2 L
Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD)

The COD test measures the oxygen equivalent of the organic matter using a strong
oxidizing agent (potassium dichromate) in an acidic environment (sulfuric acid) to
which silver sulfate has been added to serve as a catalyst. Excess dichromate is
added according to the following reaction (Sawyer et al., 1994):
CnHaObNc + d Cr2O2- + " 2d Cr3+ + n CO (8.31)

Heat & Catalyst
7 + 18d + c2 H 2
a + 8d - 3c
+ a b H2 O + c NH4+
2
2n a b c
where d = + - - .
3 6 3 2
The difference in the amount of dichromate present at the beginning and that
remaining at the end is reported in terms of oxygen equivalents or organic matter
oxidized after appropriate conversions. A titration with standard ferrous ammonium
sulfate (FAS) is used for determining the quantity of dichromate used.
mg as O2 1A - B2 * M * 8000
COD ¢ ≤ = (8.32)
L ml sample
where:
COD = chemical oxygen demand, mg O2/L,
8000 = conversion factor,
A = ml FAS used for blank,
B = ml FAS used for sample, and
M = molarity of FAS.
The COD of a sample of water or wastewater will always be less than the theo-
retical oxygen demand, since certain compounds may be refractory or difficult to
treat. On the other hand, the BOD value will always be less than the COD value, since
BOD measures only the biodegradable organic content. For domestic wastewater,
environmental engineers often assume that the ultimate BOD 1Lu2 is equivalent to
the actual COD of the wastewater and that the 5-day BOD value is approximately
two-thirds of the COD value. The procedure for performing the chemical oxygen
demand analysis is found in Section 5220 of Standard Methods (1998).
Pathogens and Indicator Organisms

Numerous pathogenic organisms that cause disease may be found in water and waste-
water. The four primary groups include bacteria, protozoa, viruses, and helminths or
worms. Bacteria are single-cell microorganisms, and certain strains are pathogenic.
They may be spheroid, rod, or spiral in shape and consist of prokaryotic cells with a
single strand of DNA. Escherichia coli is an example of a bacterium. Protozoa are
motile, microscopic eukaryotes that are usually single cell. Two examples of protozoa
are Cryptosporidium parvum and Giardia lamblia. Viruses are obligate intracellular
parasites that can replicate only in a living host cell. Examples of viruses encountered
in water and wastewater are the Hepatitis A virus and the Enteroviruses (polio, echo,
coxsackie). Helminths or worms are parasites that are usually found in wastewater
and contaminated water. Examples are tapeworm, stomach worm, and whip worm.
Isolating and identifying pathogens in water samples is difficult and expensive.
Large volumes must be processed in order to find certain pathogens, and special
analytical equipment is needed to grow and identify them. Working with pathogenic
organisms is dangerous, so indicator organisms that are nonpathogenic are used to
determine the presence of potential pathogens in water and wastewater.
Indicator organisms such as total coliform bacteria and fecal coliform bacteria
are used to indicate the presence of pathogenic or harmful microorganisms. Coliform
bacteria are found in the digestive tract of warm-blooded animals, and most are non-
pathogenic. They are numerous in water and wastewater and easily detected. Their
survival times are similar to those of pathogenic organisms.
Enumeration and identification of these indicator organisms is accomplished
by direct microscopic counts, pour and spread plates, the membrane-filter technique,
and the multiple-tube fermentation method. The latter two are the traditional pro-
cedures used by engineers to enumerate indicator organisms.
Membrane-Filter Technique The membrane-filter technique involves filtering samples
of water or wastewater through sterilized filter pads (0.45-mm openings) for collecting
indicator organisms.The filter pads are then placed in specified media (M-Endo) in petri
dishes. These are incubated (35°C) for approximately 24 hours, the number of colonies
formed are counted, and the results are reported in colony-forming units (CFUs) per
100 ml of sample. Typical coliform bacteria colonies appear pink to dark red in color
with a green metallic sheen. Absence of bacteria growth is considered a negative test.
Figure 8.8 shows a photograph of a membrane-filtration apparatus and associated filter
Figure 8.8
Photograph of membrane
filtration apparatus and
filter pad.
10 ml Sample 1 ml Sample
0.1 ml Sample
Positive results
4-3-2
Figure 8.9
Multiple-tube fermentation
test.
pad. The procedure for performing the membrane-filter technique for members of the
coliform group is found in Section 9222 of Standard Methods (1998).
Multiple-Tube Fermentation Technique Another method for detecting coliform
bacteria is the multiple-tube fermentation technique. This procedure involves inoc-
ulating a series of test tubes filled with lactose broth with varying amounts of sam-
ple. Figure 8.9 shows a typical multiple-tube fermentation setup. Normally, 15 test
tubes are used, with sample volumes of 10 ml, 1.0 ml, and 0.1 ml being added. Col-
iform bacteria ferment lactose broth under anaerobic conditions, resulting in gas
production 1CO22 and bacterial growth, as indicated by a cloudy broth. Equation (8.33)
or statistical tables in Standard Methods (1998) can be used for calculating the most
probable number (MPN) per 100 ml of sample. The MPN is a statistical estimate of
the number of coliforms that are potentially present, since a number of other micro-
bial species can also ferment lactose. The procedure for performing the multiple-
tube fermentation filter technique for members of the coliform group is found in
Section 9221 of Standard Methods (1998).
MPN number of positive tubes * 100

= (8.33)
100 ml 31ml sample neg. tubes2 * 1ml sample all tubes240.5
EXAMPLE 8.7
Calculating the most probable number
Calculate the MPN in a set of 15 test tubes with the following number of positive
tubes: 4, 3, and 2 for sample sizes of 10.0, 1.0, and 0.1 ml, respectively.
Solution
First, determine the volume of sample used in all the test tubes.
ml of sample in all tubes = 5110.02 + 511.02 + 510.12 = 55.5
Next, determine the volume of sample used in the test tubes that were negative.
ml of sample in neg. tubes = 1110.02 + 211.02 + 310.12 = 12.3
Finally, estimate the most probable number (MPN) per 100 ml of sample by
substituting into Equation (8.33).
MPN number of positive tubes * 100

=
100 ml 31ml sample neg. tubes2 * 1ml sample all tubes240.5
MPN 19 * 1002
= = 34.4
100 ml 3112.3 ml2 * 155.5 ml240.5
The Total Coliform Rule in the Safe Drinking Water Act specifies a maximum
contaminant level goal (MCLG) of zero for total coliforms, fecal coliforms, and
Escherichia coli.
pH
The pH of water is a function of the hydrogen ion 1H +2 concentration. Mathemati-
cally, pH is defined as the negative logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration:
pH = - Log3H +4. The pH scale goes from 0 to 14 with 7 being neutral. A pH value
above 7 indicates alkaline or basic conditions, and a value below 7 indicates acidic
conditions. Both water and wastewater are treated to produce a pH between 6 and
8.5. Besides determining the solubility of various chemical species, pH affects bio-
logical and chemical reactions. A calibrated pH meter with a glass electrode is rou-
tinely used for measuring pH.
8.6 WATER QUALITY STANDARDS

Three types of water quality standards have been developed to maintain the required
quality of various water bodies. They include: drinking water standards, wastewater
effluent standards, and surface water standards.
8.6.1 Drinking Water Standards

Federal drinking water standards were promulgated by the U.S. Environmental Pro-
tection Agency under the Safe Drinking Water Act. State supremacy allows each
state either to adopt the federal standards or develop its own standards, which must
be equivalent or more stringent. There are primary and secondary standards for var-
ious types of contaminants. Maximum contaminant levels (MCLs) are the maximum
concentrations of a specific contaminant allowed in treated drinking water. Maxi-
mum contaminant level goals (MCLGs) are concentrations that have been estab-
lished for specific contaminants, such that no known or anticipated health effects
will result. MCLGs are not enforceable, but municipalities are encouraged to try to
meet them.
Primary Drinking Water Standards

Primary drinking water standards are enforceable, approved standards based on
health. They are specified for inorganic chemicals, organic chemicals, radionu-
clides, and turbidity. Table 8.4 lists some of the more important primary drinking
water standards. A complete up-to-date list of primary standards may be found at
www.epa.gov.
Section 8.6 Water Quality Standards 195
Table 8.4 Primary Drinking Water Standards

MCL or TT Potential health effects Sources of contaminants in
Contaminant (mg/L) from ingestion of water drinking water
Cryptosporidium TT1 Gastrointestinal illness (e.g., Human and fecal animal waste
diarrhea, vomiting, cramps)
Giardia lamblia TT1 Gastrointestinal illness (e.g., Human and fecal animal waste
diarrhea, vomiting, cramps)
Total trihalomethanes 0.08 Liver, kidney, or central By-product of drinking water

(TTHMs) nervous system problems; disinfection
increased risk of cancer
Arsenic 0.010 as of Skin damage or problems Erosion of natural deposits; runoff

01/23/06 with circulatory systems, and from orchards, runoff from glass
possible increased risk of and electronics production wastes
cancer
Cadmium 0.005 Kidney damage Corrosion of galvanized pipes;

erosion of natural deposits;
discharge from metal refineries;
runoff from waste batteries and
paints
Alachlor 0.002 Eye, liver, kidney, or spleen Runoff from herbicide used on
problems; anemia; increased row crops
risk of cancer
Benzene 0.005 Anemia; decrease in blood Discharge of factories; leaching

platelets; increased risk of from gas storage tanks and
cancer landfills
Radium-226 and 5 pCi/L Increased risk of cancer Erosion of natural deposits

radium-228
(combined)
1
Treatment technique: a required process intended to reduce the level of contaminant in drinking water.
Source: www.epa.gov.
Secondary Drinking Water Standards

Secondary drinking water standards are non-enforceable standards based primarily
on aesthetics. They are specified for inorganic chemicals, dissolved salts, corrosivity,
color, and odor. Table 8.5 lists these standards. This may be found at www.epa.gov.
8.6.2 Wastewater Effluent Standards

Under the Clean Water Act, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency established
the national pollution discharge elimination system (NPDES) permit, requiring all
industrial and municipal wastewater treatment facilities (point sources of pollu-
tion) to have a permit to discharge into receiving waters. Cities with populations
over 100,000 people are now required to also have an NPDES permit for stormwa-
ter discharges. NPDES permits regulate the flow, concentration, and mass of pollu-
tant that can be discharged from a facility. Typical effluent standards that would be
found in an NPDES permit for a secondary wastewater treatment facility are listed
in Table 8.6.
Table 8.5 Secondary Drinking Water Standards

Contaminant Secondary standard
Aluminum 0.05 to 0.2 mg/L
Chloride 250 mg/L
Color 15 c.u.
Copper 1.0 mg/L
Corrosivity Noncorrosive
Fluoride 2.0 mg/L
Foaming agents 0.5 mg/L
Iron 0.3 mg/L
Manganese 0.05 mg/L
Odor 3 threshold odor number (TON)
pH 6.5 to 8.5
Silver 0.10 mg/L
Sulfate 250 mg/L
Total dissolved solids (TDS) 500 mg/L
Zinc 5 mg/L
8.6.3 Surface Water Quality Standards

Surface water quality standards or stream standards must be maintained for
lakes, rivers, or streams. Water quality standards are established by each state.
Most surface water quality standards contain beneficial-use categories, numerical
levels, and narrative statements about the specific use designations. The highest
classification or category is normally associated with the highest water quality
and reserved for sources of drinking water. Water quality standards are used to
determine whether the designated uses of a water body are being protected.
Stream standards are established to maintain the highest beneficial use for a
given water body. Table 8.7 shows a listing of the various categories used by the
State of Florida.
Table 8.6 Typical NPDES Permit Limits for Secondary Wastewater Treatment
Annual average Monthly average Weekly average
BOD (mg/L) 20 30 45
TSS (mg/L) 20 30 45
pH 6–8.5 N.A. N.A.
N.A.- Not applicable.

Summary 197
Table 8.7 Water Classification Based on Best Beneficial Use for the State of Florida
Class or
category Description
Class I Potable water supplies
Class II Shellfish propagation or harvesting
Class III Recreation, propagation, and maintenance of a healthy, well-balanced

population of fish and wildlife
Class IV Agricultural water supplies
Class V Navigation, utility, and industrial use
8.7 KEPONE CONTAMINATION OF THE JAMES RIVER

The toxic organochlorine insecticide kepone (decachlorooctahydro-1, 3, 4-metheno-
2H-cyclobuta [cd]-pentalen-2-one) was manufactured by Allied Chemical and Life
Science Products (LSP) in Hopewell, Virginia, from 1966 until 1975. Approximately
1532 metric tons of kepone were produced. In late July 1975, the Commonwealth of
Virginia issued an order to LSP to cease production of kepone after learning from
the Center for Disease Control in Atlanta that a plant worker at LSP showed symp-
toms of neurological illness and kepone concentration in his blood in the parts per
million range (Huggett and Bender, 1980). Its use has since been banned, because it
is a suspected endocrine disruptor.
A preliminary survey conducted by the Environmental Protection Agency
revealed high concentrations of kepone in the soil and dust in Hopewell and in biota of
the James River to which industrial effluent from the kepone manufacturers had been
discharged. Governor Mills Godwin ordered the entire tidal James River and its tribu-
taries closed to commercial and sport fishing. Numerous studies have been conducted
on the toxic effects of kepone on biota and are referenced in the article by Huggett
and Bender (1980). The U.S. Food and Drug Administration adopted action levels for
kepone on a wet-weight basis of 0.1 mg/g in the edible portion of finfish, 0.3 mg/g in
mollusks, and 0.4 mg/g in the edible portion of blue crabs. Kepone is a very stable and
persistent contaminant that accumulated in the bottom sediments of the James River.
From there it cycles into the water column to be taken up by plants and animals, even-
tually being returned to the sediments upon death of these organisms. It entered all lev-
els of the food chain (Huggett et al., 1980) and contaminated 37 * 106 metric tons of
sediment extending 120 km seaward from its source (Nichols, 2003).
In 1988, 13 years after the closure of LSP, the fishing ban was lifted. The conta-
minated sediments have been diluted and covered by uncontaminated sediment that
diminishes the kepone flux back into the water column. Remedial actions to remove
kepone would be expensive and environmentally unwise (Huggett, 1989). Natural
sedimentation provided the best way of decontaminating the estuary.
S U M M A RY
This chapter introduced the importance and beneficial uses of water. Ninety-seven
percent of the earth’s waters are saline and are found in the oceans; the remaining
3% comprises fresh water. Only 0.62% of the earth’s water is both fresh and acces-
sible, since 2% is in the form of snow, ice, or glaciers. The eight major beneficial
uses of water in the United States are public supply, domestic, irrigation, livestock,
aquaculture, industrial, mining, and thermoelectric power. During the year 2000,
the thermoelectric category withdrew the most water in the United States, followed
by irrigation.
As water passes through the hydrologic cycle, it becomes contaminated. Four
major sources of water pollution include domestic wastewater discharges, indus-
trial wastewater discharges, agricultural stormwater runoff, and urban stormwater
runoff. Water quality parameters are divided into four major categories: physical,
chemical, microbiological, and radiological. The procedures for conducting analyses
on water, wastewater, and sludge are found in Standard Methods for the Examination
of Water and Wastewater (1998). Parameters that traditionally have been used for
assessing water quality include: turbidity, solids, color, taste and odor, temperature,
nitrogen, phosphorus, biochemical oxygen demand (BOD), chemical oxygen demand
(COD), and indicator-organisms testing, using either the membrane-filter technique
or multiple-tube fermentation technique.
A brief introduction to primary drinking water standards (health related) and sec-
ondary drinking water standards (aesthetics) was presented along with typical maxi-
mum contaminant levels (MCLs).Wastewater effluent standards were briefly addressed
by describing the National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit in
addition to typical wastewater effluent standards for a secondary wastewater treatment
facility. Surface water quality standards or stream standards were discussed and a water
classification system based on the best beneficial use for the State of Florida was pre-
sented. In conclusion, a brief case history of the kepone contamination of the James
River in Virginia was presented.
KEY WORDS agricultural runoff maximum contaminant stream standards

beneficial use level (MCL) suspended solids
biochemical oxygen most probable number taste and odor
demand (BOD) (MPN) total Kjeldahl nitrogen
chemical oxygen national pollution (TKN)
demand (COD) discharge elimination total maximum daily
color system (NPDES) loads (TMDL)
domestic wastewater phosphorus turbidity
hydrologic cycle primary standard ultimate BOD
industrial wastewater secondary standard urban runoff
kepone standard methods
REFERENCES
APHA, AWWA, WEF (1998). Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste-
water, American Public Health Association, 1015 Fifteenth Street, NW, Washington, DC.
American Water Works Association (2005). http://www.awwa.org/Advocacy/learn/info/
HistoryofDrinkingWater.cfm.
Environmental Protection Agency (2005). EPA 841—B-05-005, Handbook for Developing
Watershed Plans to Restore and Protect Our Waters, October 2005.
Huggett, R. J. (1989). Kepone and the James River, Contaminated Marine Sediments: Assessment
and Remediation, The National Academy of Sciences.
Huggett, R.J., and Bender, M.E. (1980). Kepone in the James River, Environmental Science &
Technology, 14 (8), 918–920.
Huggett, R. J., Nichols, M., and Bender, M.E. (1980). Kepone Contamination of the James
River, American Chemical Society, Division of Environmental Chemistry, 19:1, 341–342.
Nichols, M.M. (2003) Sedimentologic Fate and Cycling of Kepone in an Estuarine System: Exam-
ple from the James River Estuary, The Science of the Total Environment, 97–98, 407–440.
Exercises 199
Sawyer, Clair N., McCarty, Perry L, and Parkin, Gene F. (1994). Chemistry for Environmental
Engineers, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Swanson, P. (2001). Water: The Drop of Life, Minnetonka, Minnesota, Northword Press.
U.S. Geological Survey (2006). Estimated Water Use in the United States, 2000, http://water.
usgs.gov/watuse/, accessed October 11, 2006.
Van Der Leeden, F., Troise, F.L., and Todd, D.K. (1990). The Water Encyclopedia, 2nd ed.,
Lewis Publishers, Chelsea, Michigan.
EXERCISES
8.1 There are eight categories of beneficial uses of water. List four of them and
briefly describe the types of water uses in each.
8.2 As water passes through the hydrologic cycle, it becomes contaminated with
natural and anthropogenic contaminants. List the four major types of water
pollution. Give a brief qualitative description of the water quality of each.
Explain the difference between a point source and nonpoint source of pollu-
tion and give an example of each type of source.
8.3 Water quality is classified by physical, chemical, biological or microbiological,
and radiological parameters. Go to the United States Environmental Protec-
tion Agency’s website at www.epa.gov under the Office of Drinking Water.
List three water quality parameters in each of the four categories (physical,
chemical, microbiological, and radiological) along with the current maximum
contaminant level (MCL) concentration or the required treatment technique
(TT). Select from both primary and secondary standards.
8.4 Solids analysis is one of the most widely used parameters for assessing water
quality. Use the following data for calculating total solids (TS), volatile solids
(VS), dissolved solids (DS), total suspended solids (TSS), and total volatile
suspended solids (TVSS). A sample volume of 150 ml was used in performing
all solids analyses.
Tare mass of evaporating dish = 24.3520 g

Mass of evaporating dish plus residue after evaporation @ 105ºC = 24.3970 g
Mass of evaporating dish plus residue after ignition @ 550ºC = 24.3850 g
Mass of Whatman filter and tare = 1.5103 g
Mass of Whatman filter and tare after drying @ 105ºC = 1.5439 g
Residue on Whatman filter and tare after ignition @ 550ºC = 1.5199 g
8.5 An ammonia nitrogen analysis performed on a wastewater sample yielded

30 mg/L as nitrogen. If the pH of the sample was 8.5, determine the ammo-
nium nitrogen concentration (mg/L) in the sample, assuming a tempera-
ture of 25ºC.
8.6 Calculate the theoretical oxygen demand (mg/L) of a solution containing
450 mg of glucose 1C 6H 12O62 in 2 liters of distilled water.
8.7 A result of a 7-day BOD test performed on a sample from an oligotrophic
lake was 10 mg/L. The base e BOD rate constant determined from previous
studies was estimated to be 0.10 d-1. Determine the ultimate BOD and 5-day
BOD of the sample taken from the lake.
8.8 A 5-day BOD test is performed on an industrial wastewater sample that con-
tains no bacteria; therefore, a “seeded” BOD test is run. Ten ml of “seed” are
added to 20 liters of dilution water. Thirty milliliters of industrial wastewater
are added to a 300-ml BOD bottle, and the remaining volume consists of
“seeded” dilution water. The average dissolved-oxygen concentrations of the

diluted wastewater samples and blanks (seeded dilution water) on the first
day of the test were 7.5 mg/L and 9.0 mg/L, respectively. After incubation of
separate BOD bottles at 20ºC for 5 days, the average DO concentrations of
the diluted wastewater BOD bottles and seeded dilution water BOD bottles
were 3.1 and 8.5 mg/L, respectively. Calculate the 5-day BOD of the industrial
wastewater.
8.9 A multiple-tube fermentation test was performed on a highly eutrophic reser-
voir water sample. A set of 15 test tubes with sample sizes of 10, 1.0, and 0.1 ml
were used in the analysis, resulting in the following number of positive tubes:
5–2–1. Estimate the most probable number (MPN) per 100 ml of sample, and
compare your answer to the value presented in Standard Methods (1998).
8.10 Discuss in your own words what is meant by an indicator organism. Which
group of organisms is used as an indicator organism and why? List three groups
of pathogenic organisms that may be found in water and wastewater.
CHAPTER
9
Water Treatment
9.1 INTRODUCTION
Objectives
The removal of substances from water is accomplished by using biological,
In this chapter, you will chemical, and physical methods. For treatment of potable water sources,
learn about: chemical and physical techniques are more widely used than biological ones.
The selection of A water treatment plant uses a combination of several methods, normally
appropriate unit operated in series. If the treatment method involves physical forces, it is called
operations and unit a unit operation. Treatment technologies that are biological or chemical are
processes that are used called unit processes.
for treating drinking water Each sequence of unit operations and/or unit processes represents a
Primary and secondary “liquid” treatment train. Multiple “liquid” treatment trains are normally
drinking water standards operated in parallel so that high-quality water can be produced in the event a
unit operation or process fails. Parallel treatment trains are also necessary so
Typical water treatment
that equipment maintenance and basin drainage can be accomplished without
flow diagrams for treating
shutting down the entire plant. The residuals, or sludge, produced during water
surface and groundwater
treatment must be collected, thickened, dewatered, and ultimately disposed.
How to design mixing The unit operations and processes involved with sludge handling are called the
systems, flocculation “sludge” trains. Reliability and redundancy issues for sludge handling, treat-
basins, settling basins, ment, and disposal are not quite as critical as those for the liquid treatment
and granular media filters train. It is not uncommon, however, to provide dual units and pumps so that
Water softening and the the sludge can be processed with the largest unit out of service.
lime-soda ash method for Typical unit operations commonly encountered in water treatment include
removing hardness from screening, mixing, aeration, sedimentation, filtration, and ultraviolet-light dis-
water infection. Chemical unit processes in which chemicals are added for removing
The importance of contaminants include coagulation, chemical oxidation, chemical disinfection,
disinfection and selection and chemical precipitation. Biological unit processes in water treatment are less
of the appropriate prevalent than those encountered in wastewater treatment. Biological nitrifica-
disinfectant tion (conversion of ammonia to nitrate under aerobic conditions) and biological
denitrification (reduction of oxidized nitrogen under anoxic conditions) are the
two primary biological processes practiced in water treatment.
202 Chapter 9 Water Treatment
9.2 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR SELECTING TECHNOLOGY

There are three primary considerations for selecting the appropriate treatment tech-
nology: (1) the water quality of the source, (2) the required and/or desired quality of
the treated water, (3) the emerging contaminants and the types of technologies that
will be required for removing them from water.
9.2.1 Water Source and Quality

The appropriate unit operations and processes for treating the water cannot be
determined until a sustainable source is identified. In the past, surface water sup-
plies such as rivers, lakes, and reservoirs or underground aquifers were the primary
sources of water. During recent decades, alternative sources such as brackish waters
and sea water, along with reclaimed wastewater, have become viable sources. With
the increased popularity of living along the Florida and Gulf coasts and in the south-
western desert (Texas, New Mexico, Arizona, and California), membrane processes
are being utilized more frequently for treating lower-quality water sources. As
high-quality water sources become limited, municipalities will be encouraged to
blend reclaimed wastewater effluent with low-quality sources. A potential treatment
scheme for this blended type of water resource might consist of conventional coagu-
lation, flocculation, sedimentation, and filtration, followed by membrane filtration.
Water quality in the United States varies from region to region. Both the climate
and geological formations in each region impact water quality. Sulfur is a predominant
constituent found in groundwaters of the southeast. High chloride concentrations are
found in the water of coastal communities due to saltwater intrusion. Water hardness
also varies by region in the United States.The softest waters are found in New England,
the south Atlantic, and Pacific Northwest. States with some of the hardest waters include
Iowa, Illinois, Indiana, Arizona, New Mexico, and the Great Plains. If water is soft, soap
will tend to lather in it rather easily, whereas in hard water it will not.
Normally, the quality of groundwater is higher than that of surface water,
unless the aquifer has been contaminated due to direct influence of surface waters
or leaking underground storage tanks. Another advantage of using groundwater is
that its characteristics are more consistent and the volume of water available does
not change appreciably with time, unless the aquifer is overpumped. Overpump-
ing may lead to intrusion of saltwater or transport of other contaminants into the
aquifer. Surface water quality and volume are highly variable, changing with time. A
lake or reservoir provides a water source with more consistent characteristics than a
stream; however, seasonal changes and lake turnovers can result in variable quality.
A main concern in using brackish and salt water is not the quality of the source,
but the cost of treating the water with membranes. The permitting and disposal of the
brine reject from membrane-treatment facilities may pose additional economic and
political concerns. Using reclaimed wastewater as the source has the advantage that
it can be pumped directly from the wastewater treatment plant to a water treatment
facility. The concentration of various constituents in the wastewater effluent are
well documented, but additional research is necessary to study the long term health
effects of drinking reclaimed wastewater effluent. Public sentiment will undoubt-
edly favor using alternative water sources other than reclaimed wastewater.
9.2.2 Drinking Water Standards

The required and/or desired quality of the treated water will place specific constraints
on which technologies can be used in the process train. The treated water must meet
primary drinking water standards (health related) in addition to those adopted by the
Section 9.3 Overview of Surface Water Treatment Systems 203
municipality, which relate to secondary standards. Primary standards are enforceable

regulations promulgated by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Maximum
contaminant levels (MCLs) have been established for chemical, biological, and radio-
logical constituents in water. Secondary standards with established MCLs for various
parameters related to aesthetics have been adopted by most state regulatory agencies;
however, they are not enforceable.
It is certain that new standards will be promulgated as emerging contaminants
are identified and maximum contaminant levels established. Standards for existing
contaminants will likely be tightened, requiring higher levels of removal and the
implementation of new and improved technologies. Primary and secondary drinking
water standards may be found at the following website (Office of Drinking Water):
www.epa.gov/safewater/contaminants/index.html#mcls.
9.2.3 Microconstituents
A number of microconstituents are likely to be regulated by the EPA in the future.
The list includes the following: perchlorate, N-nitrosodimethylamine (NDMA),
endocrine disrupters, pharmaceuticals, personal care products, methyl tertiary butyl
ether (MTBE), and nanoparticles. Additional information on these contaminants
can be found on the EPA and American Water Works Association (AWWA) home
websites (www.epa.gov and www.awwa.org). Endocrine disruptors, pharmaceuti-
cals, and personal care products found in sewage and eventually in our water sup-
plies are of major concern. Those that may cause serious health effects include
antibiotics, hormones, blood lipid regulants, and antidepressants. The effects of these
substances, even at low concentrations, are still unknown, but they are believed to
cause problems with human reproduction systems, the thyroid, and the hypothala-
mus and pituitary systems (MWH, 2005). Nanoparticles may also pose significant
health threats, since these particles range in size from 1nm 110-9 m2 to 100 nm and
are capable of crossing the blood-brain barrier.
9.3 OVERVIEW OF SURFACE WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS

The quality of surface water is highly variable and the characteristics are not as
consistent as those associated with groundwater. This section discusses surface
water treatment facilities using conventional methods and membrane filters.
9.3.1 Conventional Surface Water Treatment

Figure 9.1 is a flow diagram of a conventional water treatment plant (WTP) used for
treating surface water.The depicted process train (MWH, 2005) is normally employed
for surface waters with high turbidity ( 720 nephelometric turbidity units, NTU),
high color ( 720 color units, c.u.), and high total organic carbon, 1TOC 7 4 mg/L2.
Treatment begins with bar racks, or coarse screens, followed by fine screens (travel-
ing screens), to remove tree limbs, rags, and finer debris from the water at the intake
structure. For pH adjustment an acid or base may be added to the influent, along with
an oxidant or disinfectant if high coliform bacteria concentrations are observed.
The main unit operations and processes that follow in sequential order include
rapid or flash mixing with coagulant addition, flocculation, sedimentation, and gran-
ular media filtration. This sequence allows turbidity and colloidal particles to be
destabilized and removed from the water. Sometimes polymer and disinfectant are
added to the filter influent. The addition of polymer will enhance turbidity removal
through the filter and adding disinfectant will control biological growth on the filter.
An oxidant and/or disinfectant will be added to the filtered effluent to oxidize any
remaining substances and ensure that any remaining pathogens are killed. The
water is then sent to a clear well (storage tank) to allow the oxidant and/or disin-
fectant sufficient detention time to react with the constituents in the water. From
the clear well, the water will be pumped throughout the distribution system by
high-service pumps (high capacity, high head). Supplemental disinfectant, normally
in the form of chloramines, is added to the water pumped into the distribution sys-
tem to ensure a chlorine residual of 0.1–0.2 mg/L is provided at the furthest water
tap in the system.
A similar process train known as direct filtration consists of the same unit
operations and processes presented in Figure 9.1, except that sedimentation is not
used. Another variation of the conventional process train is known as in-line or con-
tact filtration, where both the flocculation and sedimentation processes are omitted.
Both direct and in-line filtration processes are used for higher-quality surface
waters having low turbidity 1615 NTU2, moderate to low color 1620 c.u.2, and low
TOC 164 mg/L2.
Figure 9.1 Raw water

Flow diagram of conventional
surface water treatment plant.
Bar rack
Screens
Flow measurement
pH adjustment
Oxidant/disinfectant
Coagulant
Mixing
Flocculation
Sedimentation Sludge
Filtration Backwash to washwater recovery pond
Oxidant/disinfectant and fluoride
Clear well
High-service pumps
To distribution system
Section 9.4 Overview of Groundwater Treatment Systems 205
Raw water
Bar racks
Screens
Flow measurement
pH adjustment
Catridge filters or
microscreens
Membrane filtration
Washwater recovery or disposal
modules
pH adjustment
Oxidant/disinfectant/fluoride
Clear well
High-service pumps Figure 9.2

Flow diagram of membrane
filtration water treatment
To distribution system plant.
9.3.2 Membrane Treatment

Figure 9.2 is a flow diagram of a membrane filtration water treatment plant for treat-
ing surface water. The first unit operation in the treatment train consists of bar racks
and fine traveling screens followed by self backwashing cartridge filters or micro-
screens. The cartridge filters or microscreens are necessary for removing turbidity,
which otherwise would foul the membranes. Next, microorganisms, hardness, and
colloidal particles are removed as they pass through the membrane filters. An acid
or base, in addition to an oxidant or disinfectant, is added to the filtered water. The
acid or base maintains proper pH, whereas the oxidant/disinfectant kills pathogens
and oxidizes any remaining substances. Disinfectant in the form of chloramines
is normally added prior to pumping throughout the distribution system to ensure
that proper chlorine residual is maintained. Membrane filtration plants require
the highest-quality surface water with low turbidity 1610 NTU2, moderate to low
color 1610 c.u.2 and low TOC 1 64 mg/L2.
9.4 OVERVIEW OF GROUNDWATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS

Frequently, groundwater is of such high quality that very little treatment is required.
This section briefly discusses both conventional water softening, using the lime-soda
ash process, and reverse osmosis (RO) membrane treatment.
9.4.1 Conventional Lime-Soda Ash Treatment

Numerous WTPs in Florida have process treatment trains like that presented in
Figure 9.3. Treatment consists of air-stripping to remove carbon dioxide 1CO22 and
hydrogen sulfide 1H 2S2, and to add oxygen to the water. If volatile organic com-
pounds (VOCs) are present in the groundwater, the off-gas from the air-stripping
process must be collected and treated. Air stripping is generally followed by lime-
soda ash treatment in a solids-contact unit and granular media filtration. The lime-
soda ash process is used for removing hardness (Ca2+ and Mg2+) from the water in
the form of CaCO3 and Mg1OH22 precipitates. Adding lime and soda ash raises the
pH of the water to above 11. Recarbonation involves adding CO2 to lower the pH to
a range of 9.5 to 8.5. This converts the excess lime to CaCO3 . Additional settling is
required to remove the CaCO3 solids that form during recarbonation. Recarbona-
tion and sedimentation generally follow the solids-contact unit.
Granular media filtration is required to remove solids that remain after settling in
the solids-contact unit.An oxidant/disinfectant is added to the filtered water as it enters
the clear well. High-service pumps then pump the water throughout the distribution
system. Supplemental disinfectant (normally chloramines) is added on the discharge
side of the high-service pumps to provide chlorine residual throughout the distribution
system. Conventional lime-soda ash treatment can yield a product water with a total
hardness of approximately 40 mg/L as CaCO3 (Viessman and Hammer, 2005).
9.4.2 Reverse Osmosis Treatment

Membrane softening is being used more frequently as a viable means of treating
water. In addition to providing softened water, membranes offer the advantage of
Figure 9.3 Wells

Flow diagram for lime-soda
ash treatment plant.
Flow measurement
CO2, H2S, VOCs

Aeration
O2
Lime and/or soda ash
Solids contact unit Sludge
CO2
Recarbonation &
Sludge
sedimentation
Filtration Backwash to washwater recovery pond
Clear well
High-service pumps
Section 9.5 Surface Water Treatment Processes 207
Wells
Flow measurement
pH adjustment
Antiscalant
Catridge filters or
microscreens
Reverse osmosis
Concentrate to disposal
modules
Base and corrosion inhibitor

Aeration
Clear well
High-service pumps Figure 9.4

Flow diagram of reverse
osmosis water treatment
To distribution system plant.
removing color and natural organic matter (NOM), which are precursors for disin-
fection and disinfection by-products (DDBPs). Figure 9.4 presents a flow diagram
of a typical reverse-osmosis (RO) WTP equipped for hardness removal. One major
drawback to using any type of membrane process is the disposal of concentrate gen-
erated during treatment. Regulatory agencies are sometimes unwilling to permit
deep-well injection of these waste streams.
9.5 SURFACE WATER TREATMENT PROCESSES

This section describes major unit operations and processes used for treating surface
water for drinking. The coagulation process is discussed first. Then, examples are
given to illustrate the design procedure for the following systems: mixing, floccula-
tion, water softening, sedimentation, filtration, backwashing, and filter sizing. Disin-
fection and treatment of water treatment plant residuals are briefly introduced.
9.5.1 Coagulation and Flocculation

Coagulation is a unit process consisting of the addition and mixing of a chemical
reagent (coagulant or flocculant) to destabilize colloidal and fine solids suspended
in water. Figure 9.5 is a schematic of the coagulation process. Flocculation involves
slow stirring or gentle agitation to promote agglomeration of the destabilized par-
ticles formed during coagulation, so that heavy, rapid-settling flocs are formed.
The destabilized particles are subsequently removed through sedimentation and
filtration.
Coagulation process Solids/Liquid separation
Coagulant Direct Filtration
Rapid Flocculation
mixing Agglomeration Settling Filtration
Figure 9.5 Destabilization
Schematic of coagulation
process. Sludge
Colloidal Particles
A large portion of the solids in surface water and groundwater cannot be removed by
sedimentation because they are colloidal particles. Colloidal particles are extremely
small and have negligible mass and large surface area per unit volume. Colloidal parti-
cles are defined by their size, generally ranging from 1 nm 110-9 m2 to 1 mm 110-6 m2.
Because of their large surface area, colloidal particles tend to acquire a negative sur-
face charge.
Turbidity in water is caused primarily by colloidal and suspended matter such
as clay, silt, nonliving organic particles, plankton, and microbes. Clays are a major
portion of natural turbidity. Kaolinite, montmorillonite, and other clay suspensions
can be removed by adding alum.
Color in water is usually attributed to colloidal forms of iron and manganese
or to organic compounds (humic and fulvic acids) resulting from the decay of veg-
etation. Coagulation is effective in removing color and many organic macromole-
cules and particles from water. Iron (III) and aluminum (III) salts are effective at
removing humic acids, but not as effective with fulvic acids.
Coagulation and filtration readily remove algae and amoebic cysts and can
achieve bacterial removals of 99%. Toxic organic compounds such as polychlori-
nated biphenyls (PCB) and dichloro-diphenyl-trichloro-ethane (DDT) and many
inorganic toxic materials are adsorbed, and thus removed, on naturally occurring
inorganic and organic particulates. Removal of the particulates removes the toxic
substances.
Electrical Double Layer

According to the double-layer electrical theory, a negative colloidal particle will be
surrounded by a layer of counter positive ions known as the fixed or Stern layer.
Surrounding this is another layer consisting primarily of counter-ions and co-ions
called the Diffuse layer. Figure 9.6 is a schematic diagram of the double layer. The
electrical potential decreases as the distance from the colloidal particle increases.
The electrical potential at the colloid surface is called the Nerst potential and at the
surface of shear it is called the zeta potential. The electrical potential drops linearly
across the Stern layer and exponentially from the Stern layer through the Diffuse
layer on into the bulk solution. The greater the magnitude of the zeta potential, the
greater the stability of the colloidal particles.
Colloidal Destabilization
Stability of the colloidal particles depends both on the repulsive forces associ-
ated with the electrical charge of the double layer and on the attractive forces
associated with van der Waals forces. If the electrostatic charge on the particles
Fixed or stern
layer __ Diffuse layer

__
- __
- -
- -
- - -

__ __
__
Colloid
Plane of shear
Electrical
potential
Zeta potential
Figure 9.6
Schematic of the electrical
Distance from surface double layer.
can be reduced or neutralized, the attractive van der Waals forces cause the desta-
bilized colloids to agglomerate or coalesce when particles get close enough
together.
Chemicals called coagulants or flocculants are added to water for destabilizing
colloidal particles. Destabilization can be accomplished by one of four methods:
1. lowering the surface potential by compressing the double layer;

2. lowering the surface potential by adsorption and charge neutralization;
3. enmeshment in precipitate; and
4. adsorption and interparticle bridging.
Coagulants decrease the magnitude of the zeta potential by compressing

the double layer or by adsorption and charge neutralization. At certain coagu-
lant dosages, precipitates will form, and the colloidal particles will either serve
as condensation nuclei for the precipitates or become enmeshed in the precipi-
tate. The addition of polymers results in floc formation due to interparticle
bridging. Overdosing of coagulants and polymer can lead to restabilization of
the colloidal suspensions.
Coagulants
Aluminum and iron salts are the major types of coagulants used in water treatment,
primarily aluminum sulfate, ferrous sulfate, ferric chloride, ferric sulfate, and sodium
aluminate. Alkalinity is consumed with the addition of inorganic metallic coagulants.
Stoichiometric equations showing the formation of hydroxide precipitates and the
consumption of alkalinity for the various coagulants may be found elsewhere (MWH,
2005; Viessman and Hammer, 2005). Only aluminum sulfate will be discussed in this
section, since its low cost makes it the coagulant of choice in the United States
(MWH, 2005).
Aluminum sulfate or filter alum 3Al2 1SO423 # 14 H2O4 is the major coagulant
used for coagulating turbidity in surface waters. Alum readily dissolves in water, with
sulfate ions (SO 2
4 ) being dispersed throughout the liquid. Aluminum ions exist in
water as hydrated ions. There are no free aluminum ions in the form of Al3+. The sim-
plest hydrated form of aluminum is Al(H 2O)3 6 . Other forms of aluminum include:
Al1OH22+, Al 21OH24+ 4 5 1
2 , Al7(OH)17 , Al13(OH) 34 , and Al(OH) 4 . Al(OH)
2
and
-
Al1OH24 are called monomers, since they have only one Al atom. Al1OH231S2 is a
solid, amorphous, gelatinous precipitate that forms. Each mg/L of alum decreases
water alkalinity by 0.50 mg/L as CaCO3 and produces 0.44 mg/L of CO2 (Viessman
and Hammer, 2005).
Alum causes coagulation in two ways: adsorption and charge neutralization
or “sweep coagulation.” Adsorption and charge neutralization results when posi-
tively charged aluminum monomers and polymers are adsorbed onto negatively
charged colloids, neutralizing the charge. The alum dose required is less than the
solubility limit of the metal hydroxide. For “sweep coagulation,” a sufficient alum
dose is added such that the solubility limit of the metal hydroxide is exceeded,
allowing the precipitation of Al1OH23 . Colloidal matter and suspended matter
become covered with a gelatinous, sticky sheath, causing them to settle out of
solution.
Coagulant Aids
Coagulant aids include acids and bases that may be added to the water to maintain a
specific pH. Alkalinity is often added in the form of lime (CaO), soda ash 1Na2CO32,
or sodium hydroxide (NaOH) to increase the buffering capacity of the water. Recall
that alkalinity is consumed when inorganic metallic coagulants are used. Therefore,
during water treatment, engineers must design chemical feed and storage facilities
to provide for alkalinity addition during treatment. Other coagulant aids include
anionic, cationic, or nonionic polymers, powdered activated carbon (PAC), and clays.
PAC is added for removing color and the sorption of specific organic compounds.
Clays may be added to provide turbidity or targets for coagulants. Clays should be
added before alum addition. Polymers are normally added after alum or coagulant,
if they are used together.
Polymers are long chains of small subunits or monomers. Polymers may be
cationic or positively charged 1+2, anionic or negatively charged 1-2, or non-ionic
(neutral). The charge is related to functional groups and pH. Major functional groups
associated with polymers include carboxyl (COOH); amines 1NH3+2, and hydroxyl
1OH-2. Polymers must be adsorbed onto the turbidity particles. Charge neutraliza-
tion normally occurs with low-molecular-weight polymers. High-molecular-weight
polymers are used to “bridge” between particles that would otherwise repel each
other. Polymer dosages are normally 61 mg/L. Polymers are ineffective at very low
turbidities; therefore, alum or clay is often added to the water to provide targets or
nuclei for precipitation reactions to occur. If used, the targets should be added prior
to adding the polymer.
The quantity of coagulant that must be added to a particular type of water
must be determined through experimentation. This may be accomplished by per-
forming jar tests in the laboratory using a 6-gang stirring mechanism. Optimum dose
is dependent on pH, temperature, turbidity, and alkalinity. Figure 9.7 is a photo of a
typical jar test apparatus.
9.5.2 Mixing
Mixing is the process whereby chemicals are added and instantaneously dispersed
into the water. Mixing of coagulants has primarily been accomplished by mechani-
cal units. Mechanical mixing is often called rapid or “flash” mixing, since the deten-
tion times used are generally less than 2 minutes and more frequently on the order
of 20 to 30 seconds. Actual chemical reaction times are usually less than 1 second.
Rapid-mix tanks are either square or circular. Stator blades and/or baffles along the
sides of the walls should be used to prevent vortexes from forming. The design of
rapid-mix units is based on detention time and the velocity gradient, G. Detention
Figure 9.7
Photograph of jar test
apparatus.
time (U) is mathematically defined as the volume of the basin divided by the volu-
metric flow rate:
V
u = (9.1)
Q
where:
u = detention time, min,
V = volume of the mix tank, ft3 1m32, and
Q = volumetric flow rate into mix tank, ft3/min 1m3/min2.
The velocity gradient, G, is a measure of the relative velocity between two fluid
particles divided by the distance between them. For example, if two fluid particles are
traveling at 3 feet per second relative to each other and the distance between the two
is 1.5 feet; the velocity gradient would be calculated as follows:
3 fps 2 fps
G = = = 2 s-1
1.5 ft ft
In the design of rapid-mix and flocculation basins, the velocity gradient is defined by
Equation (9.2).
W 0.5 P 0.5
G = a b = a b (9.2)
m mV
where:
G = velocity gradient, s-1 or fps/ft (mps/m),
W = power input per unit volume, ft # lb/s # ft3 1N # m/s # m32,
V = volume, ft3 1m32,
m = viscosity of water, lb # s/ft2 1Pa # s or N # s/m22, and
P = power input, ft # lb/s 1W or N # m/s2.
Chemical Chemical
feed feed
a) Back-mix impeller b) Flat-blade mixer
Chemical
feed
Figure 9.8
Schematic for three methods
of injecting coagulant. c) In-line blender
The rate of particle collisions is proportional to the velocity gradient. A G value

must be sufficient to produce the desired rate of particle collisions but not so large as
to produce shear forces that prevent proper floc formation. In rapid-mix tanks, deten-
tion times vary from 20–50 seconds and velocity gradients vary from 700–1000 s-1
(Reynolds and Richards, 1996).
Other ways to mix coagulants include in-line mixers or blenders, Parshall flumes,
hydraulic jumps, over and under baffles, and mixing with air. Figure 9.8 is a schematic
of three methods for coagulant injection.
EXAMPLE 9.1
Design of a rapid-mix basin
A water treatment plant processes 30,000 cubic meters of water each day. A square
rapid-mix tank with vertical baffles and flat impeller blades will be used. The design
detention time and velocity gradient are 30 seconds and 900 s-1, respectively.
Determine:
a. The dimensions of the rapid-mix tank.
b. Power input, if the temperature of the water is 20°C.
Solution part a
Solve for the volume of the basin by rearranging Equation (9.1).
m3 min h d
V = u * Q = 30 s * 30000 * * * = 10.4 m3
d 60 s 60 min 24 h
Assuming the depth of the rapid-mix basin is 6 meters, determine the length
and width of the unit. Solve for the area by dividing the volume by the depth.
V 10.4 m3
A = = = 1.74 m2
D 6m
For a square rapid-mix basin, length (L) is equal to width (W), so A = W2.
A = 1.74 m2 = W2 that is, W = L = 1.32 m

Solution part b
The power input to the rapid-mix basin is determined by rearranging Equation (9.2).
The absolute viscosity of water at 20°C is 1.002 * 10-3 N # s/m2 11.002 * 10-3 kg/m # s2.
The volume of the rapid-mix basin is: 11.32 m2 * 11.32 m2 * 16 m2 = 10.45 m3.
N#s N#m
P = G2 mV = 1900 s-122 ¢ 1.002 * 10-3 b110.45 m3
2 = 8481
m2 s
N#m 1W
1 N # m/s
P = 8481 a b = 8481 W = 8.5 kW
s
To meet reliability/redundancy criteria, a spare 8.5-kW motor should be pro-

vided, or multiple tanks could be used.
9.5.3 Flocculation Tanks

Tapered flocculation tanks employing three separate compartments, each operating
with a different velocity gradient, normally are used in order to produce a dense floc
that settles well. Typical G values in the first, second, and third compartments, respec-
tively, are 50, 20, and 10 s-1. The detention time recommended by the Great Lakes
Upper Mississippi River Board of State Sanitary Engineers (1992) is 30 minutes at a
flow-through velocity not less than 0.5 fpm or greater than 1.5 fpm. The velocity gra-
dient varies from 10 to 100 s-1. The Gt value is an important design parameter,
because the total number of particle collisions is proportional to the product of G
and the detention time. Gt varies from 104 to 105.
The power dissipated in the water by a paddle flocculator is calculated using
the following equation:
CDArvr 3
P = (9.3)
2
where:
P = power dissipated in the water, ft # lb/sec 1N # m/sec2,
CD = coefficient of drag, equal to 1.8 for flat blades, dimensionless,
A = area of paddles, ft 2 (m2),
r = mass density of water, lb # s2/ft4 1kg/m32, and
vr = velocity of the paddles relative to water, fps (mps).
Normally vr is 0.50 to 0.75 of the paddle velocity 1vp2. The velocity of the pad-
dle blade is calculated from the following equation:
vp = 2prN (9.4)
where:
vp = velocity of the paddle blade, fps (mps),
r = distance from the center of the shaft to the center of the blade, ft (m),
N = rotational speed, revolutions/second.
EXAMPLE 9.2
Design of a flocculation basin
A four-arm paddlewheel with the following configuration will be used in a floccula-
tion basin. Each arm has two paddles 3.0 meters long by 0.1 meter wide.The distance from
the shaft to the center of the blade is 1.0 meter for the inner paddle and 1.5 meters for the outer
paddle.The minimum anticipated temperature of the water is 20°C with an absolute viscosity,
m = 1.002 * 10-3 N # s/m2 and density, r = 998.2 kg/m3. The angular or rotational
speed is 4 revolutions per minute (rpm). The flocculation basin treats 6.0 * 106 liters
per day. Assume: vr = 0.75vp and CD = 1.8.
a. Determine how much power (P) is dissipated into the water.
b. Determine the Gt value for the flocculation basin if the dimensions of the
flocculation basin are 4 meters long by 4 meters wide by 4 meters deep.
R2 1.5 m
R1 1 m
Solution part a
vr = 0.75vp = 0.75 * 2prN
Area of paddle blades = 0.1 m * 3 m * 4 blades = 1.2 m2
For the inner paddle:

4 rpm
vr1 = 0.75 * 2p11 m2a b = 0.314 m/s
60 s/min
CDArvr 3 1.811.2 m221998.2 kg/m3210.314 m/s23

P1 = = = 33.4 W
2 2
For the outer paddle:
4 rpm
vr2 = 0.75 * 2p11.5 m2a b = 0.471 m/s
60 s/min
CDArvr 3 1.811.2 m221998.2 kg/m3210.471 m/s23

P2 = = = 112.6 W
2 2
Total power dissipated to water is P1 + P2 = 146 W.
Solution part b
Calculate the velocity gradient G using Equation (9.2) so that the Gt value can be
estimated.
V = 4 m * 4 m * 4 m = 64 m3
N#m 0.5
0.5 0.5 1
W P 146 W s
N#s
G = a b = a b = § * § ¥¥
m mV 1W
1.002 * 10-3 2 * 164 m32
m
G = 47.7 s-1
V 64 m3 1000 L 24 h 60 min 60 s
u = = * ¢ ≤¢ ≤¢ ≤¢ ≤ = 922 s
Q 6 * 10 lpd
6
1m 3 1d 1h 1 min
Gt = 47.7 s-1 * 922 s = 4.4 * 104 OK because between 104 and 105
9.5.4 Water Softening

Water softening is a unit process involving the addition of chemicals to water for the
removal of ions that cause hardness. Although water softening is primarily used for
treating groundwater, it is discussed here because the process is similar to adding
coagulants to surface water for the removal of color and turbidity. Water hardness is
caused by polyvalent metallic cations, principally calcium 1Ca2+2 and magnesium
1Mg2+2. Other divalent metallic cations that contribute to hardness include iron
1Fe2+2, manganese 1Mn2+2, and strontium 1Sr2+2. Hardness is not related to
any health issue. It is undesirable because it produces scale in water heaters and
pipes and increases consumption of soap and detergent.
Hardness is expressed in units of mg/L of CaCO3 . Total hardness is generally
calculated by adding the milliequivalents (meq) of the calcium and magnesium ions
together and then multiplying by the equivalent weight of calcium carbonate, 50.
There are 50 milligrams of CaCO3 per milliequivalent or 50 grams of CaCO3 per
equivalent. Classification of water hardness is as follows (Sawyer et al., 1994): soft,
0–17 mg/L as CaCO3 ; moderately hard, 75–150 mg/L as CaCO3 ; hard, 150–300 mg/L
as CaCO3 ; and very hard, 7300 mg/L as CaCO3 .
Chemical Precipitation
Chemical precipitation through the addition of lime (CaO) and soda ash 1Na2CO32
is the primary means of removing hardness from water. The extent of chemical pre-
cipitation of hardness is based on the solubilities of calcium carbonate 1CaCO32 and
magnesium hydroxide 1Mg1OH222. The solubility products of CaCO3 and Mg1OH22
are presented in Equations (9.5) and (9.6) below (Sawyer et al., 1994).
3Ca2+43CO32-4 = Ksp = 5 * 10-9 (9.5)
3Mg2+43OH-42 = Ksp = 9 * 10-12 (9.6)
The solubility, and therefore the precipitation of CaCO3 and Mg1OH22 , is pH

dependent. The optimum pH for CaCO3 precipitation is from 9 to 9.5, whereas for
CO2
Lime
Flocculator/ Recarb Filtration

clarifier
CO2
CaCO3
Mg(OH)2
Soda Flocculator/
ash clarifier Recarb
Figure 9.9
Schematic of two-stage
lime-soda ash softening CaCO3
WTP.
Mg(OH)2 precipitation, the pH must be greater than 11.0. Typically, 1.25 meq/L of
lime are added above the stoichiometric quantity to raise the pH above 11. Adding
lime increases the Ca2+ concentration in the water, thus forcing the concentration of
CO2-3 to be lowered according to Equation (9.5), which is accomplished by the pre-
cipitation of CaCO3 . Also, lime addition raises the pH of the water, causing a shift in
the solubility of Mg1OH22 according to Equation (9.6), resulting in the precipitation
of Mg1OH22 . The addition of soda ash also raises the pH causing the precipitation of
Mg1OH22 as well. When excess lime treatment is used, the residual total hardness is
about 40 mg/L as CaCO3 . Approximately, 30 mg/L as CaCO3 is associated with
CaCO3 solubility, and 10 mg/L as CaCO3 is associated with Mg1OH22 solubility.
Figure 9.9 is a schematic of a two-stage softening process using chemical pre-
cipitation. Solids contact units are shown in lieu of the conventional coagulation,
flocculation, sedimentation process that uses rapid mixers and flocculation followed
by settling basins. Solids contact units provide all three functions in one compact unit.
Lime-Soda Ash Softening Equations

The stoichiometric equations involved in the lime-soda ash water-softening process
are presented below. Although the reactions are presented sequentially, in reality,
they proceed simultaneously. The arrow 1T2 denotes the removal of a solid precipi-
tated either as CaCO3 or Mg1OH22 . When quicklime (CaO) is added to water, it
forms hydrated or slaked lime 1Ca1OH222 according to Equation (9.7). This is an
exothermic reaction (it generates heat).
CaO + H2O : Ca1OH22 (9.7)
For groundwaters, carbon dioxide is often present, and it will be in equilibrium

with carbonic acid 1H2CO32:
CO2 + H2O : H2CO3 (9.8)
Before any hardness removal can occur, any lime that is added will first neutralize
any carbonic acid present according to Equation (9.9). The carbonic acid is precipi-
tated as CaCO3 .
H 2CO3 + Ca1OH22 : CaCO3 T + 2 H 2O (9.9)
Lime is added for the precipitation of calcium and magnesium carbonate hard-
ness. Equations (9.10) through (9.12) show reactions associated with the removal of
carbonate hardness. Equation (9.10) indicates that carbonate hardness, Ca1HCO322 ,

is precipitated as CaCO3 by adding lime, Ca1OH22 .
Ca1HCO322 + Ca1OH22 : 2 CaCO3 T + 2 H2O (9.10)
Equation (9.11) shows that carbonate hardness due to magnesium bicarbon-

ate, Mg1HCO322 , is converted to magnesium carbonate 1MgCO32, which is soluble,
so the hardness of the water does not change.
Mg1HCO322 + Ca1OH22 : CaCO3 T + MgCO3 + 2 H2O (9.11)
The magnesium associated with MgCO3 can then be precipitated as Mg1OH22

and the calcium associated with lime is precipitated as CaCO3 according to Equa-
tion (9.12).
MgCO3 + Ca1OH22 : CaCO3 T + Mg1OH22 T (9.12)
Equations (9.13) through (9.16) show how noncarbonate hardness is precipi-

tated and therefore removed. Noncarbonate hardness due to MgSO4 can be
removed only by adding both lime and soda ash. Equation (9.13) indicates that mag-
nesium associated with MgSO4 is converted to Mg1OH22 and that the calcium asso-
ciated with lime is converted to CaSO4 with the net result of no hardness being
removed.
MgSO4 + Ca1OH22 : CaSO4 + Mg1OH22 T (9.13)
Noncarbonate hardness in the form of MgCl2 is removed by adding both lime

and soda ash according to Equations (9.14) and (9.16). Equation (9.14) indicates
that the magnesium associated with MgCl2 is converted to Mg1OH22 and that the
calcium associated with lime remains in solution as CaCl2 . Therefore, the hardness
of the water remains unchanged. Soda ash then must be added according to Equa-
tion (9.16) so that the calcium associated with CaCl2 is precipitated as CaCO3 .
MgCl 2 + Ca1OH22 : Mg1OH22 T + CaCl 2 (9.14)
Noncarbonate hardness in the form of CaSO4 can be removed only by adding

soda ash 1Na2CO32, which results in the precipitation of CaCO3 :
CaSO4 + Na21CO23 : CaCO3 T + Na2 SO4 (9.15)
CaCl 2 + Na21CO23 : CaCO3 T + 2 NaCl (9.16)
Excess lime treatment is often practiced, wherein 1.25 milliequivalents per liter
(meq/L) of lime are added above the amount predicted by the stoichiometric
equations to ensure that the pH of the water is raised above 11. Recarbonation is
the process of adding carbon dioxide to lower the pH and stabilize the water.
Equation (9.17) shows that excess lime, Ca1OH22 , is converted to CaCO3 by
adding carbon dioxide. This reaction lowers the pH from around 11 to about 10.2
(Viessman and Hammer, 2005):
Ca1OH22 + CO2 : CaCO3 T + H2O (9.17)

Further recarbonation of the water according to Equation (9.18) converts any

remaining CaCO3 that did not precipitate to Ca1HCO322 . This reaction results in a
final pH in the range of 9.5 to 8.5 (Viessman and Hammer, 2005).
CaCO3 + CO2 + H 2O : Ca1HCO322 (9.18)
EXAMPLE 9.3
Excess-lime soda-ash softening problem
Calculate the lime and soda-ash requirements to achieve the practical limits of hard-
ness removal given the following water analysis. Develop a bar graph showing the
original theoretical species in the water.
CO2 = 8.8 mg/L alkalinity 1HCO3-2 = 135 mg/L as CaCO3 Mg2+ = 14.7 mg/L
Na+ = 13.7 mg/L Ca2+ = 40 mg/L 4 = 29 mg/L

SO2- Cl- = 17.8 mg/L
The following table presents concentrations, equivalent weights, and milliequiv-

alents of all species analyzed.
Component Concentration (mg/L) Equivalent weight Calculation Concentration (meq/L)

CO2/H2CO3 8.8 22 8.8/22 = 0.40
Ca 2+
40 20 40/20 = 2.00
Mg 2+
14.7 12.2 14.7/12.2 = 1.20
+
Na 13.7 23 13.7/23 = 0.60
Alkalinity 1HCO3-2 135 50 135/50 = 2.70
SO2-
4 29 48 29/48 = 0.60
-
Cl 17.8 35.5 17.8/35.5 = 0.50
Solution
Figure 9.10 is a bar graph showing the theoretical combination of species in the
raw water. If CO2 is present, it is placed on the left side of the bar graph. Cations
are always placed at the top of the bar graph; calcium, magnesium, and sodium
are shown in this order. Anions are shown at the bottom of the bar graph and
should be sequenced as follows: hydroxide, carbonate, bicarbonate, sulfate, and
chloride. The water should be electrically neutral, so the concentration of cations
Figure 9.10 0.4 0.0 2.0 3.2 3.8

Bar graph of raw water
for Example 9.3. Ca2 Mg2 Na
CO2
HCO3 SO42 Cl
0.4 0.0 2.7 3.3 3.8

must balance the anions. If not, the water analysis is suspect. Viessman and Hammer
(2005) present the details of developing bar graphs.
The accompanying table presents the theoretical species, along with the
dosages of lime as calcium oxide (CaO) and soda ash as sodium carbonate
1Na2CO32 that must be added to achieve a residual hardness of approximately
40 mg/L as CaCO3 . Excess-lime treatment is assumed, which involves adding
1.25 meq/L of lime as CaO (equivalent to 35 mg/L as CaO) beyond the stoichio-
metric dosage. Equations (9.11) and (9.12) must both be used to determine the
quantity of lime required for precipitating magnesium bicarbonate. For each
mole of Mg1HCO322 , 2 moles of lime are required. Similarly, Equations (9.13
and 9.15) must be used to determine the quantity of lime and soda ash required
for removing magnesium sulfate.
Component (1) Equation (2) Concentration (3) (meq/L) CaO (4) (meq/L) Na2CO3 (5) (meq/L)
CO2 (9.9) 0.40 0.40 0

Ca1HCO322 (9.10) 2.00 2.00 0
Mg1HCO322 (9.11) 0.70 0.7 0
(9.12) 0.7
MgSO4 (9.13) 0.50 0.5 0
(9.15) 0 0.5
Excess lime CaO 1.25 0
Total 5.55 0.5
The total lime dosage as CaO, assuming 100% purity, is the sum of all species in
Column 4:
meq mg CaO lb>MG lb

5.55 * 28 * 8.34 = 1296
L meq mg>L MG
where MG denotes million gallons.

The total soda-ash dosage as Na2CO3 , assuming 100% purity, is the sum of all
species in Column 5:
meq mg Na2CO3 lb>MG lb

0.5 * 53 * 8.34 = 221
L meq mg>L MG
If the purities of CaO and Na2CO3 are both 90%, the total dosages for each are
as follows:
1296 lb>MG lb 221 lb>MG lb

Lime: = 1440 Soda ash: = 246
0.90 MG 0.90 MG
Other Softening Methods

Ion exchange is another technique used for removing hardness from water. It is
extensively used in households for removing hardness. Calcium (Ca2) and magne-
sium 1Mg2+2 ions are replaced by sodium ions 1Na+2 by passing water through a
kaolinite or montmorillonite bed, or through a synthetic material such as a polymeric
resin. Softening can also be accomplished when water is passed through a semiper-
meable membrane, such as those used in reverse osmosis, ultrafiltration, or other
membrane processes. Information on these methods may be found in MWH, 2005,
and Reynolds and Richard, 1996.
9.5.5 Sedimentation
Sedimentation is a unit operation involving solids-liquid separation by gravita-
tional settling to remove suspended solids. In water treatment, two types of settling
are encountered: Type I—free or discrete settling, and Type II—flocculent settling.
Each will be discussed, and examples will be presented illustrating the procedure
for designing settling basins.
Type I—Free or Discrete Settling
Free or discrete settling is the settling of discrete, nonflocculent particles whose size,
shape, and density do not change with time as they settle. Particles settle as individ-
ual entities, and there is no interaction between particles. Examples of discrete set-
tling include grit and sand particles in grit-removal systems and plain sedimentation
(no coagulation) of surface waters.
The settling velocity of a spherical particle (Newton’s law) is calculated as follows:
4 g rp - rw 0.5
Vs = B ¢ ≤dR (9.19)
3 CD rw
where:
Vs = settling velocity, fps (m/s),
g = acceleration of gravity, ft/s2 1m/s22,
CD = coefficient of drag (dimensionless),
m = mass of particle, lb (kg),
rp = density of particle, lb # s2/ft4 1kg/m32,
rw = density of liquid, lb # s2/ft4 1kg/m32, and
d = diameter of particle, ft (m).
The coefficient of drag 1CD2 is a function of the flow regime, which is estimated by
calculating the Reynolds number 1NR2.
rwVsd Vsd
NR = = (9.20)
m v
where:
m = absolute or dynamic viscosity of water, lb # s/ft2 1kg/m # s2, and
v = kinematic viscosity of water, ft2/s 1m2/s2.
When the Reynolds number is 61, laminar flow conditions exist, and CD is
calculated using Equation (9.21).
24
CD = (9.21)
NR
During transitional flow between laminar and turbulent, NR = 1 to 104,

Equation (9.22) is used to determine CD .
24 3
CD = + + 0.34 (9.22)
NR 1NR20.5
The coefficient of drag is assumed to be equal to 0.4 for turbulent flow when
NR 7 104.
For laminar flow conditions, Newton’s law simplifies to Stokes’ law by substi-
tution of 24/NR for the coefficient of drag, resulting in Equations (9.23) and (9.24).
g1rp - rw2d2
Vs = (9.23)
18m
g1SGp - 12d2
Vs = (9.24)
18v
Type II—Flocculent Settling

Flocculent settling occurs in primary clarifiers and during settling of coagulated water
and wastewater. As flocculent particles settle, their size, shape, density, and settling
velocity will change over time. Newton’s law or Stokes’ law cannot be used for model-
ing flocculent settling. Normally, a settling-column analysis is performed at a specific
suspended solids concentration. Samples are withdrawn at various depths along the
column, and the percent removal of suspended solids is plotted as a function of depth
and time. Suspended solids (SS) removal is calculated using Equation (9.25).
1SSinitial - SSfinal2 * 11002

SS removal 1%) = (9.25)
SSinitial
Figure 9.11 shows a settling column with sampling ports. The curves in the plot
represent isoremoval lines (SS removal %). Equation (9.26) is used for calculating
the overall percent removal of solids that may be achieved at a given detention time.
RT 1%2 = R0 + 1©¢R * Zi2/Z0 (9.26)
where:
RT = total fraction of suspended solids removed at a given detention time, %,
R0 = isopercent removal line intersecting the time axis at specified settling
column depth, %,
¢R = difference between adjacent isopercent removal lines, %,
Zi = distance from top of settling column or water level in column to the
midpoint between two adjacent isopercent removal lines, ft (m), and
Z0 = total depth of settling column, ft (m).
Ideal Settling Basin

Figure 9.12 shows an ideal settling basin without the inlet, outlet, and sludge settling
zones. The derivation of the overflow rate for settling basins is presented in this sec-
tion. Overflow rate is both a design and operational parameter. It is used by engineers
0.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0.5
Depth, m
70%
1.0
1.5
60%
2.0
20% 30% 40% 50%
2.5
0.0 10 20 30 40 50
Time, min
Figure 9.11
Settling column and plot.
Q Q
Vh Effluent
Influent
H
Vs
Figure 9.12
Ideal settling basin. L
to determine the size of settling basins. Water treatment plant operators regulate the
overflow rate of settling basins to ensure optimal removal of suspended solids. The
overflow rate 1Vo2 is just another way of expressing the settling velocity 1Vs2 associ-
ated with a particle having a specific diameter. Recall that the settling velocity of a
particle is primarily a function of the particle diameter, as expressed in Equations
(9.23) and (9.24). Engineers select an overflow rate (which actually relates to a parti-
cle having specific size or diameter) and assume that particles equal or larger in diam-
eter will theoretically be 100% removed. The derivation of the overflow rate follows.
Recall that distance traveled is equal to the rate or velocity times time
1D = R * t2. The time that a particle remains in a settling basin is expressed by
Equations (9.27) and (9.28).
t = H>Vs (9.27)
t = L>Vh (9.28)
The continuity equation states that the volumetric flow rate (Q) is equal to the
cross-sectional area multiplied by the velocity of flow:
Q = AV (9.29)
The horizontal flow-through basin velocity is expressed as:
Q Q
Vh = = (9.30)
A WH
where:
t = settling time, min, hours,
H = depth of settling basin, ft (m),
L = length of settling basin, ft (m),
W = width of settling basin, ft (m),
Q = flow rate through basin, ft3/s 1m3/s2,
V = average flow velocity, fps (mps),
Vh = horizontal flow-through basin velocity, fps (mps),
Vs = settling velocity, fps (mps), and
A = cross-sectional area = W * H, ft2 1m22.
To derive the overflow rate equation, Vo is substituted into Equation (9.27) for
Vs as follows:
H H
t = = (9.31)
Vs Vo
Next, substitute Vh from Equation (9.30) into Equation (9.28), yielding:
L L
t = = (9.32)
Vh Q>1WH2
Equating Equations (9.31) and (9.32) yields:
H L
t = = (9.33)
Vo Q>1WH2
Rearranging Equation (9.33) results in the following:
HQ Q Q
Vo = = = (9.34)
LWH LW As
The overflow rate equation is presented as Equation (9.35).
Q
Vo = (9.35)
As
where: As = surface area of settling basin = L * W, ft2 1m22.

The detention time is defined as the time that the water remains in the settling
basin. Normally the Greek letter theta 1u2, rather than t, is used for denoting deten-
tion time. Substituting Vh from Equation (9.30) into Equation (9.28) results in the
detention-time equation as presented below:
L LHW V
u = t = = = (9.36)
Vh Q Q
where V = volume of the tank or basin, ft3 1m32.
Weir Loading Rate

The weir loading rate is defined as the volumetric flow rate divided by the length of
the effluent weir. Regulatory agencies sometimes specify weir loading rates that
must be maintained in settling basins. Mathematically, weir loading rate is given by:
Q
weir loading rate = (9.37)
weir length
Settling-Basin Design Criteria

Typically, in water treatment, long rectangular or square settling basins are used, but circu-
lar basins also may be used. Solids contact basins in which mixing, coagulation, floccula-
tion, and settling occur all in the same unit are now being used extensively in water
treatment facilities.The actual design of a settling basin includes not only the ideal settling
zone, but an inlet zone to equally distribute the incoming water and dissipate flow velocity;
a sludge zone in which particles that settle out of solution accumulate and are subse-
quently removed for further processing; and an outlet zone in which baffles and weirs are
used to ensure that no short circuiting occurs and quiescent conditions are maintained.
Figure 9.13 shows a schematic of a long rectangular basin with the four zones.The dashed
line represents the trajectory of a particle settling at the design overflow rate 1Vo2.
In designing settling or sedimentation basins, environmental engineers use
three main parameters. In order of importance, these are overflow rate, detention
time, and weir loading rate.
The overflow rate is the critical parameter that must be selected in order to
properly design a settling basin. Overflow rates vary depending on the type of
chemicals used during treatment. Precipitates or flocs from softening (lime and
soda ash) are denser than those from coagulation (alum) and thus have a higher
settling velocity. Knowing the design flow rate (the maximum daily flow for the
plant) and selecting an overflow rate, the engineer can determine the surface area.
Figure 9.13
Q Q
Schematic of settling basin Settling zone
with inlet, settling, outlet, Influent Effluent
and sludge zones. Vh
Outlet zone
Inlet zone
Vs
Sludge zone
L
Table 9.1 Design Criteria for Settling Basins

Parameter Alum flocs Iron flocs Lime-soda flocs
Overflow rate 1Vo2, m3/1d # m22 20 to 33 29 to 41 29 to 61
Overflow rate 1Vo2, gpd/ft2 500 to 800 700 to 1000 700 to 1500
Detention time, h 4 to 6 4 to 6 4 to 8
Weir loading rate, m3/1d # m2 150 to 220 200 to 270 270 to 320
Weir loading rate, gpd/ft 12,000 to 18,000 16,000 to 22,000 22,000 to 26,000
Source: Reynolds and Richards (1996)
Next, the detention time is chosen and the depth determined by dividing the vol-
ume by the surface area. The weir loading rate is calculated after the planning of
the weir configuration.
Table 9.1 lists typical design criteria for settling basins. Rectangular basins nor-
mally have a length-to-width (L:W) ratio of 2:1 to 4:1 and a length-to-depth (L:D)
ratio of 10:1 to 20:1. Bottom slopes are 1/100. Settling-basin depths range from 8 to 10
feet (2.5 to 3 m) for discrete particles and from 10 to 13 feet (3 to 4 m) for flocculent
particles. Square tanks have dimensions ranging from 35 to 200 feet (11 to 91 m) and
depths ranging from 6 to 19 feet (2 to 6 m). Where circular tanks are used, tank
diameters of 15 to 300 feet (4.5 to 91 m) may be used. Normally, however,
diameters … 200 feet 1… 61 m2 are used, and depths are usually 6 to 16 feet (2 to 5 m).
All depths reported are in terms of side water depth (SWD), which is the depth of
water at the side of the tank from the top of the effluent weir to the bottom of the
tank. An additional 1 to 2.5 feet (0.3 to 0.8 m) must be added to the SWD to account
for flow variations, which are relatively insignificant in water treatment plant design
but are appreciable in wastewater applications. Figure 9.14 is a photo of a long rectan-
gular settling basin.
Figure 9.14
Photo of long rectangular
settling basin.
EXAMPLE 9.4
Rectangular settling basin example
Two rectangular settling basins, each 90 ft long, 16 ft wide, and 12 ft deep, are operated
in parallel to settle 1.5 MGD of water (0.75 MGD to each basin). The effluent weir
length in each basin is equal to 3 tank widths.
Determine:
a. Detention time.
b. Horizontal flow velocity.
c. Surface overflow rate.
d. Weir length.
e. Weir loading rate.
Solution part a
The detention time is determined using Equation (9.1).
V 90 ft * 16 ft * 12 ft 7.48 gal 24 h
u = = ¢ ≤a b = 4.14 h
Q 0.75 * 106 gal>d ft3 d
Solution part b
The horizontal flow-through velocity is calculated using Equation (9.30).
Q 0.75 * 106 gal>d ft3 1d 1h

Vh = = ¢ ≤¢ ≤¢ ≤ = 0.36 fpm
A 16 ft * 12 ft 7.48 gal 24 h 60 min
Solution part c
The overflow rate 1Vo2 is determined from Equation (9.34).
Q 0.75 * 106 gal>d gpd

Vo = = = 521 2
As 90 ft * 16 ft ft
Solution part d
Next, the weir length is estimated so that the weir loading rate may be determined:
weir length per basin = W * L = 3 * 16 ft = 48 ft
Solution part e
Finally, the weir loading rate is calculated.
Q 0.75 * 106 gpd gpd

weir loading rate = = = 15,625
WL 48 ft ft
9.5.6 Filtration
Filtration is a unit operation that involves the separation of nonsettleable solids
from water or wastewater by passing the water through a porous medium. In
conventional filtration, water must be coagulated, flocculated, and settled
before passing through the filter. Direct filtration of water is sometimes prac-
ticed in which coagulated water is applied directly to filters without having
undergone sedimentation. Flocculation may or may not be included in the treat-
ment train.
Filters are generally classified according to the types of media used. Single, or
monomedia filters, have only one type of media, which is usually sand or crushed
anthracite coal. Dual-media filters typically consist of a layer of coarse anthracite
coal above a layer of sand. Multimedia filters, such as trimedia filters, typically con-
sist of a layer of coarse anthracite coal above a layer of sand and a layer of garnet
below the sand.
Gravity-Type Granular Media Filtration

Gravity filters consisting of dual or multiple layers of coarse granular media are the
type most widely used in water treatment. Rapid sand filters consisting of 24 to
30 inches (61 to 76 cm) of sand supported by 15 to 24 inches (38 to 61 cm) of lay-
ered gravel are commonly used in the United States. As the water passes through
under gravity flow, coagulated colloidal and fine solids are removed by intercep-
tion, straining, flocculation, or sedimentation. The primary goal is to achieve in-
depth filtration, wherein the coagulated particles penetrate and use the entire filter
bed for solids removal rather than being strained at the surface.
Eventually the head loss through the bed will build up to 8 to 10 feet (2.4 to 3
m) of water column, at which time the filter must be backwashed to remove the par-
ticles and turbidity that have accumulated. Backwashing involves reversing the flow
of water back up through the bed, causing it to expand and thereby release the
trapped particles. Auxiliary air and water jets may be used during backwashing to
help scour the filter media, releasing more particles.
Figure 9.15 is a cross-sectional view of a rapid sand filter. Coagulated water
flows down through the filter (sand, gravel, and underdrains) and into the clear well.
Chlorine is added to the water as it enters the clear well, so that sufficient contact
time is available for the chlorine to inactivate any pathogens that may remain in
the water. The flow-control valve regulates the flow rate through the filter. Typi-
cally, filters are operated to maintain a constant flow or production of water. This is
V-1 Figure 9.15

Cross-sectional view of a
Water depth rapid sand filter during
Coagulated Wash-water troughs filtration.
3 to 4 ft
water
Sand
24-30 in
V-2
Gravel V-3
To 15-20 in
washwater
recovery FC
ponds V-4
Underdrains
Clear well
accomplished by partially opening the flow-control valve (FCV) and, as the filter
run progresses, opening the valve wider to allow the same amount of flow as the
head loss increases.
Although not shown, water from the clear well is pumped throughout the water
distribution system using high-service pumps. Other valves shown in Figure 9.15 are
either open or closed during the filtration and backwashing cycles. The underdrain
system is approximately 1 foot (0.3 m) in depth. The static water head on the sand
media generally varies from 3 to 4 feet (0.9 to 1.2 m).
Head Loss Through a Clean Filter

The Carman-Kozeny equation (Carman, 1937; Kozeny, 1927) gives the head loss for
a bed of porous media of different particle sizes as follows:
L 11 - e2 V2a X
œ ij
hL = ©f (9.38)
w e3 g di j
Equation (9.39) is used to calculate the friction factor, fœ :
1 - e
fœ = 150 ¢ ≤ + 1.75 (9.39)
NR
where:
hL = frictional head loss, ft (m),
L = depth of filter bed, ft (m),
e = porosity of bed, dimensionless,
w = dimensionless shape factor for different types of media,
Va = filtration velocity or velocity of approach, total flow applied to the
filter divided by the filter area, fps (mps),
g = gravitational acceleration, ft/s2 1m/s22,
di j = particle size = geometric mean of adjacent sieve sizes, ft (m),
Xi j = weight fraction of media retained on adjacent sieve sizes,
NR = dimensionless Reynolds number, and
fœ = Carman-Kozeny dimensionless friction factor.
Shape factors for several types of media are as follows: pulverized coal = 0.73,
angular sand = 0.73, rounded sand = 0.82, and Ottawa sand = 0.95.
EXAMPLE 9.5
Head loss across a filter of nonuniform particles
Determine the head loss for a clean filter bed using the Carman-Kozeny equation
for a stratified bed with uniform porosity of 0.45. The rapid sand filter is made up
of a 24-inch-deep bed of sand, specific gravity 2.65, shape factor () 0.82, tem-
perature of 50°F, and filtration rate of 2.5 gpm/ft2. A sieve analysis is presented
below.
% Sand retained di j f¿ X
f¿
ij ij
Sieve (2) (3) NR ij di j
(1) 1Xi j2 1ft * 10-32 (4) (5) (6)
14–20 0.87 3.2883 1.07E +00 7.92E +01 210
20–28 8.63 2.333 7.56E -02 1.11E +02 4103
28–32 26.30 1.779 5.76E -01 1.45E +02 21422
32–35 30.10 1.500 4.86E -01 1.72E +02 34420
35–42 20.64 1.258 4.08E -01 2.04E +02 33501
42–48 7.09 1.058 3.43E -01 2.42E +02 16248
48–60 3.19 0.888 2.88E -01 2.89E +02 10365
60–65 2.16 0.746 2.42E -01 3.43E +02 9935
65–100 1.02 0.583 1.89E -01 4.39E +02 7673
100 © = 137,876
Solution
At a temperature of 50°F, v = 1.410 * 10-5 ft2/sec. First, calculate the approach
velocity as follows:
gpm 1 ft3 1 min
Va = 2.5 2
¢ ≤¢ ≤ = 5.57 * 10-3 fps
ft 7.48 gal 60 s
For sieves 14–20, the Reynold’s number is calculated as follows, using Equation (9.20).
The shape factor 1w2 must be included in Equation (9.20) to account for particles that
are not completely spherical.
fVd 0.8215.57 * 10-3 fps213.2883 * 10-3 ft2
NR = = = 1.065
v 1.410*10-5 ft2>s
The new friction factor, fœ, is calculated using Equation (9.39) as follows:
1 - e 1 - 0.45
fœ = 150 ¢ ≤ + 1.75 = 150a b + 1.75 = 79.2
NR 1.065
Calculate the following quantity:
fiœ jXi j fiœ jXi j 79.210.87>1002
a = = = 210
di j di j 3.2883*10-3 ft
The values in the table were calculated using a spreadsheet; hand calculations may
differ slightly, because of round-off error.
Next calculate the head loss in the clean filter using Equation (9.38) as follows.
L11 - e2V2a fiœ jXi j
hL = a
fe3 g di j
2 ft11 - 0.45215.57 * 10-3 fps22
hL = 1137,8762 = 1.96 ft
10.822 0.453 132.2 ft>s22
The head loss of a clean filter typically ranges from 0.5 to 1.5 feet (0.15 to 0.46 m),
depending on filtration rate and depth of media.
Backwashing of Filters
Granular media filters must be backwashed to remove particulates and turbidity that
build up during filter operation.Typically, operators backwash a filter when: a) the head
loss through the filter reaches 8 to 10 feet (2.4 to 3 m), or b) the turbidity in the effluent
reaches a specific level, such as 0.25 NTU, or c) the filter has been in operation for a
specified amount of time (such as 24 to 48 hours). The water used for the backwashing
process is filtered, disinfected, and stored in a tank that is either elevated, at ground
level, or underground. Figure 9.16 is a cross-sectional view of a rapid sand filter during
the backwashing process. High-pressure backwash pumps are necessary if an elevated
backwash storage tank is not used. Backwash water at a rate of around 15 to 20 gpm/ft2
(611 to 815 lpm/m2) for 15 to 20 minutes is required to properly expand and clean a
dirty filter. Approximately 1% to 5% of the filtered water is used during the back-
washing process. The dirty washwater is collected in the backwash water troughs and
transported to the washwater recovery pond, where the solids are settled out of solu-
tion and the supernatant is returned to the head of the water treatment plant.
Filter Media
Filter media is characterized by its effective size and uniformity coefficient. The
effective size 1de2 is defined as the 10-percentile diameter, or the sieve size in mm that
will pass 10% (by weight) of the filter media. The uniformity coefficient is the ratio of
the 60-percentile to 10-percentile diameters. Table 9.2 lists the effective size, unifor-
mity coefficient, depth of media (D), and media or bed depth to effective size 1D/de2
ratios for various types of filter media. The specific gravities of sand, anthracite, and
garnet are 2.65, 1.4 to 1.6, and 4 to 4.1, respectively. Silica sand and anthracite coal are
the most widely used media types. The D/de ratio is used to estimate the depth of each
layer of media, once the effective size has been selected. Figure 9.17 is a schematic
showing the media configurations of sand, dual-media, and mixed-media filters.
Number of Filters
For water treatment plants processing 62.0 MGD 188 L/s2, a minimum of two filters
should be used. If the capacity of the WTP exceeds 2.0 MGD, the minimum should be
four filters. Equation (9.40) is used for estimating the number of filters (N) required
as a function of flow.
Figure 9.16 V-1

Cross-sectional view of a
sand filter during backwash.
Backwash troughs Backwash
water
V-2
V-3
Washwater
FC
to recovery
pond V-4
Clear well
Table 9.2 Filter Media Specifications

Effective
size (de), Depth, Uniformity
Filter type Material mm inches coefficient D/de
Small dual-media Anthracite, 1.0 20 1.45 1016
sand 0.5 10 1.30
Intermediate Anthracite, 1.48 30 1.50 1023

dual-media sand 0.5 15 1.20
Large dual-media Anthracite, 2.0 40 1.50 1016

sand 1.0 20 1.25
Mixed-media Anthracite, 1.0 18 1.45 1306

sand, 0.42 9 1.50
garnet 0.25 3 1.25
Monomedia Anthracite 1.0 40 1.4 1016
Source: Kawamura (1991) Page 200.
Influent Influent Influent
Fine Coarse Coarse
Coal
Coal
24-36 in
30-40 in
28-48 in
Sand Sand
Finer
Sand
Garnet
Coarse Fine Finest
Conventional Dual Triple Figure 9.17

sand media media Filter media configurations.
N = 1.2Q0.5 (9.40)
where:
N = total number of filters, and
Q = maximum daily flow rate, MGD.
For large WTPs processing over 20 MGD 175,700 m3/day2, filters have 2 cells
each with a gullet running down the center. Figure 9.18 shows a layout of a single fil-
ter for a large WTP.
Size of Filters
According to Kawamura (1991), conventional gravity filters use length-to-width
(L:W) ratios of 2:1 to 4:1. Surface areas of gravity filters typically range from 250 to
1000 ft2 (25 to 100 m2), and filter depths range from 12 to 20 feet (3.2 to 6 m).
Cell 1 Cell 1 Cell 1
Cells 1 and 2
comprise Settled
Gullet
one filter water
Figure 9.18 Cell 2 Cell 2 Cell 2

Filter layout for large water
treatment plant.
Filtration Rates
Filtration rates depend on the type of media used in design. Kawamura (1991)
recommends the following filtration rates:
• Medium sand filters: 2 to 3 gpm/ft2 (5 to 7.5 m/h)
• Coarse sand filters: 4 to 12 gpm/ft2 (10 to 30 m/h)
• Dual and multimedia filters: 4 to 10 gpm/ft2 (10 to 25 m/h)
• Granular activated-carbon (GAC) filters: 3 to 6 gpm/ft2 (7.5 to 15 m/h)
EXAMPLE 9.6
Filter dimensions and backwash quantity
A water treatment plant has four rapid sand filters. Each filter is designed for a
capacity of 1 MGD. Backwashing is accomplished for 9 minutes at a rate of
15 gpm/ft2 once every 24 hours. The terminal head loss prior to backwashing aver-
ages 4 to 10 feet.
Determine:
a. The filter dimensions if an application or filtration rate of 3.5 gpm/ft2 is
used.
b. The quantity of water required for backwashing and percentage of filtered
water used in backwashing.
Solution part a
Determine the surface area 1As2 of the filters by dividing the design flow rate by the
filtration rate 13.5 gpm/ft22 and making appropriate conversions.
1 * 106 gal/d
As = = 198 ft2
13.5 gal/min # ft2211440 min/d2
For a square filter, L = W, so:

W2 = 198 ft2
W = 2198 = 14.1 ft Use W = L = 14 ft
Solution part b
The backwash flow rate 1Qb2 is estimated by multiplying the backwash velocity or
rate by the filter surface area 1As2 times the backwash duration (9 min/day).
15 gal>min 9 min
Qb = ¢ 2
≤ 114 ft * 14 ft2a b = 2.65 * 104 gpd
ft d
The percentage of water used in the backwashing process is estimated by

dividing the backwash flow 1Qb2 by the product flow of 1.0 MGD:
2.65 * 104 gpd

percentage = 1100%2 = 2.7%
1 * 106 gpd
The amount of water used for backwashing varies from 2% to 4% of the filtered
water.
9.5.7 Disinfection
Disinfection is a unit process in which a chemical is added to the treated water to
oxidize residual organics and pathogens. The objective of disinfection is to kill path-
ogenic (disease-causing) microorganisms, whereas the objective of sterilization is to
destroy all microorganisms. Conventional water treatment, which includes coagula-
tion, flocculation, sedimentation, and filtration, removes over 90% of the pathogens
found in water. Pathogens are also killed at high pH levels, therefore, the excess
lime-soda ash process is effective. The conventional water treatment scheme
described above along with disinfection as the last process will produce safe, potable
water that will meet regulatory requirements.
Selection of the appropriate disinfectant is essential, because some types are
more effective at killing viruses versus bacteria or vice versa. The type of disinfec-
tant used also affects the production of potential or suspected carcinogens, such as
trihalomethanes (THMs) and haloacetic acids. The disinfectant selected should act
as a powerful oxidizing agent in addition to providing a residual in the water distri-
bution system to eliminate regrowth of pathogens.
There are four major categories of human enteric pathogens: bacteria, viruses,
protozoa, and helminths. Some of the diseases and associated organisms for each
group are presented below.
1. Bacteria: typhoid fever is caused by Salmonella typhi; paratyphoid by
Salmonella paratyphi; and cholera by Vibrio cholerae.
2. Protozoan parasites: amoebic dysentery is caused by Entamoeba histolytica;
diarrhea and gastrointestinal problems by Cryptosporidium parvum and
Giardia lamblia.
3. Helminth parasites: hookworm is caused by Necator americanus; roundworm
by Ascaris lumbricoides; and whipworm by Trichurus trichiura.
4. Viruses: poliomyelitis is caused by the Poliovirus species; and hepatitis or
inflammation of the liver by the Hepatitis A or Hepatitis E strain.
Additional information on these pathogens may be found in MWH, 2005;
Masters, 1997; and Viessman and Hammer, 2005.
Regulatory Requirements
The Surface Water Treatment Rule (SWTR) and Disinfection and Disinfection By-
Products Rule (D-DBP) are two important regulations promulgated by the EPA
that have a significant impact on the disinfection process. These regulations specify
certain removal levels for Giardia lamblia and viruses and therefore must be con-
sidered when selecting the appropriate disinfectant.
Surface Water Treatment Rule Primary drinking water regulations have
been established for surface waters and ground waters under the direct influence of
surface water. Under these regulations, filtration and disinfection are required for
all surface water sources and those groundwaters that are directly influenced by sur-
face water. A 3-log reduction or 99.9% removal in Giardia lamblia and a 4-log
reduction or 99.99% in viruses must be achieved.
Disinfectants and Disinfection By-Products Rule: D-DBP Under the Disinfection
and Disinfection By-Products Rule there are limits required for haloacetic acids and
trihalomethanes. The five haloacetic acids regulated (HAA5) include: mono-
chloroacetic acid, dichloroacetic acid, trichloroacetic acid, monobromoacetic acid, and
dibromoacetic acid. The maximum contaminant level (MCL) for HAA5 is 0.06 mg/L.
Total trihalomethanes (TTHMs) consist of chloroform, dibromochloromethane, and
bromoform. The MCL for TTHMs is 0.08 mg/L.
Chick’s Law
An effective disinfectant should act quickly (fast rate of kill) and provide a residual.
The rate of kill is modeled as a first-order removal equation known as Chick’s law:
Nt = N0e-kt (9.41)
where:
Nt = number of microorganisms at time t,
N0 = number of microorganisms at time zero,
k = rate constant, time-1, and
t = contact time, time.
The rate constant (k) and contact time (t) necessary to achieve a specified
kill are a function of the type of pathogen and the type of disinfectant used. The
Ct parameter is useful for selecting the proper disinfectant and for designing
tanks and reactors to accomplish a specified level of kill. Ct values are calcu-
lated by multiplying the concentration of disinfectant (mg/L) by the contact
time (minutes). Research results on various types of disinfectants at different
contact times have been published for a variety of pathogens (Reynolds and
Richards, 1996).
Figure 9.19 shows a plot of chlorine concentration as hypochlorous acid
(HOCl) versus contact time (minutes) for various types of pathogens (three viruses
and one bacterium). These types of figures allow environmental engineers several
options when designing disinfection systems. For instance, to achieve a 99% kill of
Escherichia coli, the design engineer could use a chlorine dosage of 0.3 mg/L at a
contact time of 1 minute or use a chlorine dosage of 0.02 mg/L at a contact time of
10 minutes. Engineers must provide a flexible design, since a tank or reactor’s size is
fixed upon construction. The only variable that can change is the disinfectant
dosage. Therefore, the disinfectant feed system must be capable of achieving a wide
range of dosages.
10.0
Chlorine concentration, mg/L

1.0
O
C
N
l
H2
Cl
0.1 H
O
Cl
Figure 9.19
Chlorine concentration ver-
0.01 sus contact time for 99% kill
1 10 100 1000 of E. coli by various forms
Contact time, minutes of chlorine.
Mechanisms of Disinfectants
The effectiveness of the disinfection process, as previously discussed, is determined
by both the concentration and contact time. Other parameters that influence
pathogen kill include: pH, temperature, type of disinfectant, type of microorganism,
and turbidity.
Several mechanisms are proposed for killing pathogenic microorganisms. They
include:
1. Destroying the cell walls
2. Altering cell permeability
3. Penetrating the cell, causing reactions with enzymes and protoplasm
4. Damaging the cell’s DNA and RNA
Details on these mechanisms can be found in Crites and Tchobanoglous, 1998;
Peavy, Rowe, and Tchobanoglous, 1985; and MWH, 2005.
Chemistry of Chlorination
At most water and wastewater treatment plants, chlorine gas is injected into water
under pressure to ensure dissolution of the gas and the formation of hypochlorous
acid (HOCl). The hypochlorous acid dissociates into the hydrogen ion and the
hypochlorite ion 1OCl-2. Both hypochlorous acid and the hypochlorite ion are
strong disinfectants, producing free chlorine residual. However, they do not provide
a long chlorine residual. The following two reactions illustrate the formation of
HOCl and OCl-. HOCl is a more powerful oxidant than OCl-. The proportion of
HOCl and OCl- is a function of pH. At 20ºC and a pH of 7.5, both HOCl and OCl-
represent 50% of the chlorine concentration.
Cl2 + H2O 4 HOCl + H+ + Cl- (9.42)
HOCl 4 H+ + OCl- (9.43)
Adding chlorine to water causes the pH to drop due to the production of

hydrogen ions 1H+2.
Calcium Hypochlorite and Sodium Hypochlorite

Calcium hypochlorite 3Ca1OCl224 and sodium hypochlorite [NaOCl] are two other
forms of chlorine that can be added to water. When added to water according to the
dissociation reactions listed below, they both produce the hypochlorite ion.
Ca1OCl22 : Ca2+ + 2 OCl- (9.44)
Na OCl : Na+ + OCl- (9.45)
Chloramines
Frequently, ammonia is added to finished drinking water so that a long-lasting chlo-
rine residual can be maintained through the formation of chloramines. Chloramines
are not as strong of a disinfectant as hypochlorous acid and hypochlorite ion, but
they maintain much longer residuals in the water distribution network. Analytical
measurement of ammonia nitrogen measures both the ammonium nitrogen 1NH4+2
and ammonia gas 1NH32 dissolved in the sample. Ammonium dissociates according
to the following reaction.
NH 4+ Δ H + + NH 3 (9.46)
The dissociation constant Ka for Equation (9.46) is 5.6 * 10-10 at 25°C.

When chlorine is added to water containing ammonia, the following reactions
occur and produce chloramines. The type of chloramine produced is pH dependent
and is affected by the quantity of chlorine that is added. Trichloramine 1NCl32 is pri-
marily produced below a pH of 4.4. Mono-chloramine 1NH2Cl2 and di-chloramine
1NHCl22 are produced between pH values of 4.5 and 8.5. At room temperature and
a pH greater than 8.5, di-chloramine is the major form of chloramine produced.
Chloramines are less powerful oxidants compared to HOCl and OCl-, however,
they provide longer-lasting chlorine residual (combined chlorine residual).
HOCl + NHCl2 : H2O + NCl3 (9.47)
HOCl + NH2Cl : H2O + NHCl2 (9.48)
HOCl + NH 3 : H 2O + NH 2Cl (9.49)
The use of chloramines may result in the formation of N-nitrosodimethyl-

amine (NDMA), a probable human carcinogen (MWH, 2005). Nitrification may
cause problems in water distribution systems when chloramines are used rather
than free chlorine residual.
Breakpoint Chlorination
Some facilities practice breakpoint chlorination, which involves adding high
dosages of chlorine to achieve a free chlorine residual, rather than a combined
chlorine residual, as associated with chloramines production. Figure 9.20 shows
the chlorine residual curve as a function of the chlorine dose applied. In Figure
9.20, moving from point A to B indicates that the chlorine added to the water
reacts with reducing compounds such as nitrite 1NO2-2, ferrous iron 1Fe2+2, and
hydrogen sulfide 1H2S2, resulting in a negligible chlorine residual. From point B
to C, addition of more chlorine results in chloramine production and formation
of combined residual. From point C to D, further chlorine addition results in
the oxidation of chloramines, thereby reducing chlorine residual. Point D is
known as the breakpoint, and addition of more chlorine results in free chlorine
residual.
Applied Chlorine
Chlorine residual
Combined Cl2
C residual
Free Cl2
D
residual
Figure 9.20
B
Breakpoint chlorination
A Chlorine dosage curve.
Types of Chlorine Residual

There are two types of chlorine residual: free available chlorine residual and com-
bined chlorine residual. A description of each type follows:
a. Free available chlorine residual: Sum of the HOCl plus OCl- plus chlo-
rine gas that may be dissolved in the water as aqueous chlorine 1Cl22aq .
Aqueous chlorine is usually negligible.
b. Combined chlorine residual: Chlorine that reacts with organic nitrogen
and ammonia.
Free available chlorine forms have greater oxidation potentials than combined
chlorine forms. Rankings of chlorine species by disinfecting power and long-lasting
residual are presented in Table 9.3.
Problems in Using Chlorine
Chlorine is a toxic gas, poisonous to humans and animals, and there are safety con-
cerns in handling and transporting it. Chlorine reacts with organic species in water
to produce trihalomethanes and haloacetic acids, which are suspected carcinogens.
Consumers also dislike the taste and odor associated with chlorine.
Alternative Disinfectants
Four alternative means of disinfecting water are described below, together with
advantages and disadvantages of each.
Ozone Ozone 1O32 is an allotropic form of oxygen. It is a powerful oxidant that
reacts with reduced inorganics and organic materials. Ozone is produced in a high-
strength electrical field from oxygen in pure form or from the ionization of clean,
dry air. Typical dosages range from 1 to 5 mg/L. No residual is produced, so follow-
ing ozonation chlorine is added to provide one. A major advantage of using ozone is
that trihalomethanes (THMs) are not formed.
Table 9.3 Ranking of Chlorine Species

Disinfecting power Long-lasting residual
1. HOCl 1. Chloramines
2. OCl- 2. OCl-
3. Chloramines 3. HOCl
Chlorine Dioxide Chlorine dioxide 1ClO22 is a powerful oxidizing agent that does
not form chloroform or chloramines. It provides a stable chlorine residual, and typi-
cal dosages are 0.10 to 3.0 mg/L for terminal disinfection and up to 10 mg/L for con-
trolling taste and odor problems. It is easily removed from water by aeration and
readily decomposes by being exposed to UV radiation. A potential disadvantage is
that it may reduce to chlorate, a potential carcinogen.
UV Radiation UV radiation with wavelengths in the range 245 to 285 nm can be
produced by mercury-vapor arc lamps. UV mercury-vapor lamps are placed in
quartz sleeves, which are then placed into the water. UV radiation is effective
against bacteria and viruses, but turbidity and suspended solids inhibit it and should
be removed prior to UV exposure. A typical dosage is 24,400 mwatts # sec/cm2. Two
disadvantages are that (1) there is no residual, so chlorine or alternative disinfec-
tants must be added; (2) the quartz sleeves must be cleaned periodically.
High-pH Treatment Lime addition to raise the pH of water to a range of 11.2 to
11.3 with a contact time of 1.56 to 2.4 hours has proven effective in killing pathogens.
9.6 TREATMENT OF WATER TREATMENT PLANT RESIDUALS

Residuals or sludge that is produced during water treatment is normally thickened
in a gravity thickener and then dewatered by use of lagoons, drying beds, cen-
trifuges, and/or plate and frame presses. Figure 9.21 shows a generalized schematic
Figure 9.21 Raw water

Schematic of water treat-
ment residuals. Recycled
Mixing
Supernatant or
decant
Flocculation
Recycle
Sedimentation Gravity thickening
Filtration Washwater Thickened

recovery pond sludge
Clear well
High-service pumps
Drying P&F
Lagoons Centrifuges
beds presses
Dewatered sludge
To ultimate disposal or reuse

References 239
of sludge handling, dewatering, and disposal of water treatment residuals. The types
of chemicals used during water treatment have a significant impact on the treatment
and ultimate disposal of water treatment sludges. Water-softening residuals may
have beneficial impacts on soil and crop yields, whereas there are concerns about
the application of aluminum and iron sludges to crops (MWH, 2005). An excellent
resource on water-residuals management is Water Treatment Principles and Design,
Chapter 20 (MWH, 2005). Dewatered sludge has primarily been disposed of in san-
itary landfills. Some municipalities such as the Macon Water Authority blend it with
stabilized wastewater biosolids, compost it, and then sell it for soil amendment for
application on agricultural lands.
S U M M A RY
Providing safe, potable water to the public is one of the major responsibilities of
environmental engineers. If primary and secondary drinking water standards are to
be achieved, the selection of appropriate unit operations and unit processes for
treating water is critical. This chapter presented and discussed typical water treat-
ment flow diagrams that have been successfully used for treating surface water and
groundwater. Examples were given of how to design rapid-mix basins, flocculation
basins, settling basins, and filters. Although not a health concern, hardness removal
using the lime-soda ash softening process was discussed, and an example was pre-
sented of how to calculate the quantity of lime and soda ash required to achieve a
residual hardness of 40 mg/L as CaCO3 . Also discussed were the importance and
selection of the appropriate disinfectant, as well as the technologies used for han-
dling and treating water treatment plant residuals.
backwashing flocculation mixing KEY WORDS

coagulation granular media Reynolds number
Ct value head loss sedimentation
destabilization maximum contaminant settling velocity
disinfection level velocity gradient
filtration rate membrane treatment
REFERENCES
Carman, P.C. (1937) Fluid Flow Through Granular Beds. Transactions of Institute of Chemical
Engineers (London) Vol. 15, p. 150.
Crites, R. and Tchobanoglous, G. (1998) Small and Decentralized Wastewater Management
Systems, WCB/McGraw-Hill, Boston, MA.
Great Lakes – Upper Mississippi Board of State Public Health and Environmental Managers.
(1992) Recommended Standards for Water Works. Ten State Standards. Albany, NY.
Kozeny, G. (1927) Sitzber. Akad. Wiss. Wein. Math. – Naturw. Kl,. Abt. Ila 136.
Kawamura, S. (1991) Integrated Design of Water Treatment Facilities, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
New York, NY.
Masters, G.M. (1997) Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science, Prentice-Hall,
MWH (2005) Water Treatment Principles and Design, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, NJ.
Peavy, H.S., Rowe, D. R., and Tchobanoglous, G. (1985) Environmental Engineering, McGraw-
Hill, New York, NY.
Reynolds, T. D. and Richards, P. A. (1996) Unit Operations and Processes in Environmental

Engineering. PWS Publishing Company, 20 Park Plaza, Boston, MA., pp. 284–318.
Sawyer, C. L., McCarty, P. L., and Parkin, G. F. (1994) Chemistry for Environmental Engineers,
McGraw-Hill, New York, NY.
Viessman, W. and Hammer, M. J. (2005) Water Supply and Pollution Control, Pearson/Prentice
Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ, pp. 384–407.
EXERCISES
9.1 Draw a schematic diagram of a water treatment plant that uses a river as the
source. Briefly discuss the purpose of each unit operation or unit process
shown on the schematic.
9.2 Draw a schematic diagram of a water treatment plant that uses a ground-
water as the source. Briefly discuss the purpose of each unit operation or
unit process shown on the schematic.
9.3 A circular rapid-mix basin with stator blades is to be designed to treat 2.0 mil-
lion gallons of water per day. The detention time should be 60 seconds with a
velocity gradient of 900 s-1. The minimum temperature anticipated is 60°F
and the absolute viscosity 1m2 is 2.359 * 10-5 lb # s/ft2. Determine the diame-
ter (ft) if two rapid-mix basins are operating in parallel with a depth of 10
feet. Also calculate the power input to the basin (HP). 1 HP = 550 ft # lb/sec.
9.4 A flocculation basin is to be designed with a 30-minute detention time and a mean
velocity gradient of 40 s-1. Determine the power (W) required if the average
design flow to the flocculation basin is 30,000 m3/d. m = 1.002 * 10-3 N # s/m2..
9.5 A flocculation basin 60 feet long, 45 feet wide, and 14 feet deep treats a coag-
ulated water flow of 10 million gallons per day (MGD) at a temperature of
50°F (absolute viscosity, m = 2.735 * 10-5 lb # s/ft2). The power (P) input to
the paddlewheel is 930 ft # lb/sec, resulting in a paddle blade-tip velocity of 1.4
and 1.0 feet per second (fps) for the outer and inner blades, respectively.
Determine the following:
(a) The detention time in hours.
(b) The horizontal flow-through velocity (Vh) in feet per minute.
(c) The mean velocity gradient (G) in s1.
(d) The Gt value (dimensionless).
9.6 A groundwater was analyzed and found to have the following constituents:
CO2 = 17 mg/L Bicarbonate = 180 mg/L as CaCO3
Ca2+ = 80 mg/L Na+ = 25.3 mg/L
Mg2+ = 29 mg/L Cl- = 138.5 mg/L
(a) Draw a bar graph in milliequivalents per liter (meq/L) for determining
lime and soda-ash requirements to soften the water to the practical limits
of hardness removal (40 mg/L as CaCO3 and 10 mg/L magnesium
hardness as CaCO3).
(b) Calculate the quantity of lime in kilograms per day as calcium oxide
(CaO) with a 95% purity to treat 18,000 m3/day of flow using excess-lime
treatment (1.25 meq/L).
(c) Calculate the quantity of soda ash 1Na2CO32 needed in kilograms per
day with a 90% purity to treat 18,000 m3/day of flow.
Exercises 241
9.7 A water analysis yielded the following results:

CO2 = 8.8 mg/L HCO3- = 115 mg/L as CaCO3
Ca2+ = 70 mg/L 4 = 96 mg/L
SO2-
Mg2+ = 9.7 mg/L Cl- = 10.6 mg/L
Na+ = 6.9 mg/L
(a) Draw a bar graph in milliequivalents per liter (meq/L) for determining
lime and soda-ash requirements to soften the water to the practical
limits of hardness removal (40 mg/L as CaCO3 and 10 mg/L magnesium
hardness as CaCO3).
(b) Calculate the quantity of lime in pounds per day as calcium oxide (CaO)
with a 98% purity needed to treat 5.0 MGD of flow using excess-lime
treatment (1.25 meq/L).
(c) Calculate the quantity of soda ash 1Na2CO32 in pounds per day with a
95% purity needed to treat 5.0 MGD of flow.
9.8 Use Stokes’ law [Equation (9.23) or (9.24)] to calculate the settling velocity
(meters per second) of a spherical particle with a diameter of 1.0 mm and a
specific gravity (S.G.) of 3.0 in water at a temperature of 30°C. The absolute
and kinematic viscosities of water at 30°C are 0.798 * 10-3 N # s/m2 and
0.8 * 10-6 m2/s, respectively. The water density 1r2 is 995.7 kg/m3.
9.9 A spherical particle with a diameter of 0.02 mm and a specific gravity (S.G.)
of 2.8 settles in water having a temperature of 20°C. Use Stokes’ law [Equa-
tion (9.23) or (9.24)] for calculating the settling velocity in meters per second.
The absolute and kinematic viscosities of water at 20°C are 1.002 *
10 -3 N # s/m2 and 1.003 * 10-6 m2/s, respectively. The water density 1r2 at
20°C is 998.2 kg/m3. Convert the settling velocity from meters per second to
gallons per day per square foot 1gpd/ft22, which represent the units com-
monly used for expressing the overflow rate.
9.10 Two long rectangular settling basins operate in parallel to treat 5 MGD of
coagulated water. A length-to-width (L:W) ratio of 4:1 and length-to-depth
(L:D) ratio of 10:1 will be used in design. Overflow rate = 1000 gpd/ft2
(a) Determine the dimensions of the settling basin in feet, assuming a depth
of 10 feet.
(b) Calculate the detention time of each basin in hours.
(c) Determine the length of the effluent weir in each basin if the weir loading
rate is not to exceed 12,000 gpd/ft.
9.11 Two circular settling basins operating in parallel are to be designed for treat-
ing 40,000 m3/d of coagulated water. Each basin is 2.3 meters deep and has a
single peripheral weir attached to its outside wall. Vo = 0.6 m/h
(a) Determine the diameter of each basin in meters.
(b) Calculate the detention time of each basin in hours.
(c) Calculate the weir loading rate 1m3/d # m2.
9.12 A rapid sand filter has a sand-bed depth of 762 mm. Other pertinent data include:
sand specific gravity 2.65, porosity () 0.41, filtration rate 1.53 lps/m2
shape factor () 0.80, and temperature 15ºC. A sieve analysis is presented
below. Determine the head loss for a clean filter using the Carman-Kozeny
equation [Equation (9.38)] for a stratified bed. m = 1.139 * 10-3 kg/m # s;
r = 999.1 kg/m3.
Sieve % Sand retained di j1m * 10-42
14–20 0.87 10.006

20–28 8.63 7.111
28–32 26.30 5.422
32–35 30.10 4.572
35–42 20.64 3.834
42–48 7.09 3.225
48–60 3.19 2.707
60–65 2.16 2.274
65–100 1.02 1.777
9.13 A new water treatment plant is to be constructed for treating 30 MGD. Esti-
mate the number of filters required and calculate the area of each filter 1ft22,
assuming that a length-to-width ratio (L:W) of 4:1 is employed in construct-
ing the rapid sand filters and using a filtration rate of 6 gpm/ft2.
9.14 Chlorine gas, 70% granular calcium hypochlorite 3Ca1OCl224, and 12%
sodium hypochlorite solution are being considered as the primary disinfec-
tants for a 6000-m3/d water treatment plant. The anticipated chlorine dose is
2.5 mg/L. Calculate the quantity of each disinfectant required in kilograms
per month (30 days) to supply the dosage of 2.5 mg/L. Which disinfectant is
the most cost effective if chlorine gas, Ca1OCl22 , and NaOCl cost $0.50/kg,
$1.50/kg, and $0.95/kg, respectively?
CHAPTER
Domestic Wastewater
10
Treatment
10.1 INTRODUCTION
Objectives
Wastewater is water that has been contaminated to the degree that it is no
In this chapter, you will longer beneficial, and therefore must be treated before it can be used or
learn about: released back into the environment. The four major types of wastewater are
The objectives of domestic domestic or municipal, industrial, urban runoff, and agricultural runoff. Domes-
wastewater treatment and tic and industrial wastewaters are considered point sources of pollution, since
the major ways of they emanate from a single point of discharge. Urban and agriculture runoff
classifying wastewater are associated with stormwater that does not percolate into the ground. They
treatment plants are nonpoint sources of pollution, since they emanate from an area. Domestic
How to design major unit or municipal wastewater consists of sewage generated from residential, com-
operations and processes mercial, and public facilities.
for treating wastewater Table 10.1 presents typical characteristics of domestic wastewater. Indus-
trial wastewaters are those generated from companies such as pulp and paper
Microbial growth in
mills, steel mills, pharmaceutical facilities, and food-processing plants. In some
heterogeneous cultures
cities, domestic wastewater may contain a significant proportion of industrial
Sludge volume and weight wastes. Stormwater runoff in urban areas is a major source of pollution that
relationships generates wastewater containing nitrogen, phosphorus, heavy metals, organics,
How to design sludge and pathogens. Stormwater runoff from agricultural areas contains high concen-
thickening systems trations of suspended solids, nitrogen, phosphorus, sediment, and pathogens.
How to design anaerobic This chapter deals only with the treatment of domestic wastewater.
and aerobic sludge- Treatment and disposal of human excrement has been handled in numer-
digestion systems ous ways throughout history. In rural areas, on-site wastewater treatment sys-
tems have varied from low-tech facilities such as “outhouses” to cesspools and
septic tanks. Outhouses, privies, or Johnny houses consist of a wooden structure
built over a pit. A wooden seat with a hole is used by the patron. Sometimes
lime is dumped into the pit to reduce odors. A cesspool system is similar to a
septic system, but instead of a concrete or fiberglass septic tank for holding
sewage generated in a home, a pit is dug and logs or pieces of lumber are placed
over it. Human wastes are then flushed down the toilet and drained into the
cesspool.
244 Chapter 10 Domestic Wastewater Treatment
Table 10.1 Typical Characteristics of Influent Domestic Wastewater

Weak Medium Strong
Contaminant Units concentration concentration concentration
Total solids (TS) mg/L 350 720 1200
Total dissolved solids (TDS) mg/L 250 500 850
Fixed dissolved solids (FDS) mg/L 145 300 525
Volatile dissolved solids (VDS) mg/L 105 200 325
Total suspended solids (TSS) mg/L 100 220 350
Fixed suspended solids (FSS) mg/L 20 55 75
Volatile suspended solids (VSS) mg/L 80 165 275
5-d biochemical oxygen demand mg/L 110 220 400

(BOD) @ 20°C
Total organic carbon (TOC) mg/L 80 160 290
Chemical oxygen demand (COD) mg/L 250 500 1000
Total nitrogen (as N) mg/L 20 40 85
Organic nitrogen (as N) mg/L 8 15 35
Free ammonia (as N) mg/L 12 25 50
Total phosphorus (as P) mg/L 4 8 15
Organic phosphorus mg/L 1 3 5
Inorganic phosphorus mg/L 3 5 10
Chlorides mg/L 30 50 100
Sulfate mg/L 20 30 50
Alkalinity (as CaCO3) mg/L 50 100 200
Grease mg/L 50 100 150
Total coliform #/100 ml 106 –107 107 –108 108 –109

Volatile organic compounds mg/L 6 100 100–400 7 400
(VOCs)
Source: Metcalf and Eddy (2003).
In the septic tank, anaerobic processes occur to reduce the solids and oxidize the
organics. The effluent (the liquid that exits the septic tank) receives further treatment
in the drain field, where aerobic facultative microorganisms decompose remaining
organics as the water percolates through the soil.
Septic tanks and cesspools do not perform well where the groundwater table is
high or the soil permeability is very low. Septic tanks and cesspools must be pumped
periodically to remove inert solids.Typically, rather than being maintained by removal
of excrement, outhouses are abandoned and new ones constructed to replace them.
Today, cesspools are no longer permitted. Instead, septic-tank systems should be used.
Section 10.2 Wastewater Treatment Categorization 245
In towns and communities that have sewerage systems, wastewater treatment

plants (WWTPs) are constructed to treat wastewater before it is reused or discharged
into surface waters. Wastewater is collected throughout the community by a pipe net-
work called the sewerage system or wastewater collection system. This network con-
sists of gravity sewers, pumping stations, and force mains. Gravity sewers make up
most sewerage systems and contain various sizes of pipes that collect the wastewater
from homes, businesses, and public areas. The wastewater flows through these sys-
tems under the influence of gravity. Pumping stations are necessary for moving the
wastewater from various portions of the sewerage system. Pipes hooked up to the
pumping stations are known as force mains, since the water flows under pressure and
not by gravity.
10.2 WASTEWATER TREATMENT CATEGORIZATION

Wastewater treatment plants have traditionally been classified as primary, secondary,
or advanced. Each WWTP is made up of a series of unit operations and processes. A
unit operation involves physical treatment of the wastewater, whereas unit processes
involve biological or chemical treatment. A primary WWTP consists of primary clar-
ification and chlorination. Secondary wastewater treatment facilities use biological
processes, such as activated sludge, trickling filters, or rotating biological contac-
tors (RBCs) as the major means of treating wastewater. Advanced wastewater
treatment (AWT) facilities include unit operations and unit processes for remov-
ing nitrogen, phosphorus, suspended solids, recalcitrant organics, and other poten-
tial toxic compounds that cannot be removed by secondary WWTPs. Primary
WWTPs are no longer being constructed in the United States, so they will not be
discussed further here.
All wastewater treatment plants must have a National Pollutant Discharge Elim-
ination System (NPDES) permit in order to discharge to surface waters. Table 10.2 lists
typical effluent parameters and concentrations that must be achieved for compliance
with NPDES permits issued to secondary WWTPs. Permit requirements for AWT
facilities are much more stringent, with effluent limits set at levels such as 5 mg/L for
biochemical oxygen demand (BOD), 5 mg/L for total suspended solids (TSS), 3 mg/L
for total nitrogen (TN), and 1 mg/L for total phosphorus (TP). Many of the advanced
wastewater treatment facilities operating in Florida must achieve effluent limits of 5, 5,
3, and 1 mg/L or less for BOD, TSS, TN, and TP, respectively (Thabaraj, 1993).
10.2.1 Secondary Wastewater Treatment

The objectives of conventional wastewater treatment systems are to remove sus-
pended solids and organic matter (as measured by BOD) and to kill pathogens. Sec-
ondary WWTPs were developed so that higher levels of removal of TSS and BOD
Table 10.2 Typical Secondary Effluent NPDES Permit Requirements

Annual average Monthly average Weekly average
Parameter (mg/L) (mg/L) (mg/L)
BOD 20 30 45
TSS 20 30 45
pH 6.5–8.5 6.5–8.5 6.5–8.5

could be realized beyond those accomplished by primary treatment. In secondary

WWTPs, biological systems convert soluble and colloidal organic matter into bio-
mass. Biomass is a term for the heterogeneous culture of microorganisms (primarily
bacteria) that are grown in the system and is represented by the chemical formula
1C 60H 87O23N12P2. Some particulate organic matter is hydrolyzed and oxidized dur-
ing biological treatment as well.
10.2.2 Advanced Wastewater Treatment (AWT)

Advanced wastewater treatment systems are used for removing nitrogen and phos-
phorus from the wastewater along with additional BOD and TSS that secondary
treatment systems cannot remove. AWT systems may utilize both chemical and
biological processes in conjunction with physical unit operations such as dual-media
filters. Advanced biological wastewater systems that use nitrification followed by
denitrification are widely used for removing nitrogen from the wastewater. Nitrifi-
cation is an aerobic process that transforms ammonium nitrogen (reduced state)
into an oxidized form 1NO3-2. This process is carried out by autotrophic bacteria of
the genera Nitrosomonas and Nitrobacter. Equation (10.1) shows the overall nitrifi-
cation reaction, neglecting the synthesis of autotrophic biomass.
NH 4+ + 2 O2
Nitrifiers " NO - + 2 H + + H O (10.1)
3 2
To remove the nitrate that is formed during nitrification, a second biological

process known as denitrification must be used in an anoxic environment (void of dis-
solved oxygen). Denitrifying, heterotrophic microorganisms reduce nitrate into nitro-
gen gas, which is released into the atmosphere. The following stoichiometric equation
shows what happens during denitrification when methanol 1CH 3OH2 serves as the
energy source.
6 NO 3- + 5 CH 3OH
Denitrifiers " 3 N c + 6 OH - + 5 CO + 7 H O (10.2)
2 2 2
Biological phosphorus removal may be accomplished by providing alternating

anaerobic/aerobic treatment of the wastewater. Such systems promote the growth
of phosphorus-accumulating organisms (PAOs) such as Acinetobacter. PAOs take
up excess amounts of phosphorus from wastewater during the aerobic phase of bio-
logical treatment. These processes are known as enhanced biological phosphorus
removal (EBPR) systems.
AWT systems may also use chemical systems for removing nitrogen and phos-
phorus. Ammonium nitrogen can be converted to ammonia gas 1NH 32 by adding
lime or sodium hydroxide to raise the pH above 11 and then passing the wastewater
through a stripper to remove the ammonia. Phosphorus, in the form of orthophos-
phate 1PO3- 4 2, is easily removed from wastewater by adding alum or lime for pre-
cipitation as aluminum phosphate or calcium phosphate. Advanced biological and
chemical processes for removing nutrients from wastewater can be found in Metcalf
and Eddy (2003), WEF (1998), and EPA (1993).
10.3 OVERVIEW OF WASTEWATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS

Figure 10.1 shows a schematic diagram of a typical secondary WWTP that uses the acti-
vated sludge process. Bar racks are used at the beginning of the plant to remove tree limbs
and other large objects from the influent. Screens (having smaller openings) are used
Section 10.4 Preliminary Treatment 247
Bar racks
and
screens
Influent Chlorine Effluent

Grit Flow- Aeration Secondary
contact
removal meter basin clarifier
basin
Return activated sludge Waste

activated
sludge
Figure 10.1
Secondary WWTP schematic.
for removing paper, plastics, and debris that may inhibit subsequent processes. The
next unit operation, grit removal, removes inorganic particles such as sand, silt, grit,
coffee grinds, and eggshells that can accumulate in clarifiers and digesters if not
removed from the wastewater. It is necessary to measure the flow rate of the waste-
water so that proper dosing of chemicals can be accomplished. Then the wastewater
enters the aeration basin, a biological process, where air is injected into the wastewater
to provide microorganisms with the correct amount of oxygen necessary for oxidizing
the organic matter as measured by BOD or chemical oxygen demand (COD) and
to keep the microorganisms in suspension. The TSS in the influent, along with the
microorganisms that are grown in the aeration basin, are separated from the liquid
portion of the wastewater in the secondary clarifier. The treated liquid wastewater
flows over the effluent weir of the secondary clarifier.Thickened suspended solids and
microorganisms (biomass) that accumulate at the bottom of the clarifier are returned
to the aeration basin (return activated sludge). Chlorine is added to the secondary clar-
ifier effluent, and the chlorine contact basin provides sufficient time for the chlorine to
kill potential pathogens in the wastewater. Although not shown in the diagram, the
waste activated sludge must be thickened and stabilized before ultimate disposal.
The design capacity of most WWTPs is based on either the annual average daily
flow (AADF) or maximum monthly flow (MMF).This means that all unit processes are
designed for either the AADF or MMF.All unit operations, especially pumps, pipes, and
conveyance structures, are typically designed to handle the peak hourly flow (PHF).
The annual average daily flow can be estimated by multiplying 120 gallons of
wastewater generated per person per day by the design population (Viessman and
Hammer, 2005). This value includes nominal infiltration into the sewerage system.
Maximum monthly, peak hourly, and minimum design flows can then be determined
by assuming appropriate peaking factors. Detailed information regarding design
flows is provided by Reynolds and Richards, 1996; Viessman and Hammer, 2005;
and Metcalf and Eddy, 2003.
10.4 PRELIMINARY TREATMENT

Raw sewage or influent to a WWTP normally passes through a number of prelimi-
nary treatment steps before being processed by the major unit operations and unit
processes. Preliminary treatment systems that may be encountered include: bar racks
and screens, grit removal, pumping, flow measurement, equalization, pre-aeration,
pre-disinfection, shredding, and flotation. Detailed design procedures for most of

these systems can be found in Metcalf and Eddy (2003) and WEF MOP #8 (1998).
Rags, tree limbs, hair, paper, and plastics are some of the more important items that
must be removed during preliminary treatment, because they can clog pumps, flow-
meters, and valves. Screening and grit removal will be the only preliminary treatment
unit operations discussed in this chapter.
10.4.1 Screening
Mechanically cleaned bar racks are used first, followed by bar screens with smaller
openings. Bar racks have clear openings ranging from 1.5 to 6 inches (38 to 150 mm).
Bar racks are used for removing large objects such as logs or other debris. Mechanically
cleaned coarse screens with openings from 1 to 2 inches (30 to 50 mm) are used for
removing rags, paper, and other debris that may clog pipes, pumps, and valves. Bar racks
and bar screens are made up of parallel bars or rods, while fine screens consist of wires,
grating, wire mesh, or perforated plates. Figure 10.2 is a photo of a coarse bar screen.
10.4.2 Grit Removal

Another unit operation normally performed during preliminary treatment is grit
removal, which follows screening. Grit consists of sand, silt, small gravel, cinders, cof-
fee grounds, eggshells, and other inert materials, which typically have a specific grav-
ity around 2.65. These materials are abrasive and will cause pump impellers to wear
excessively, and they will accumulate in tanks, digesters, and pipes. The three major
types of grit removal systems in use today are aerated chambers, horizontal flow
through basins, and vortex removal systems (Metcalf and Eddy, 2003). Horizontal
flow-through and aerated grit chambers are generally designed to remove all parti-
cles that are retained on a 65 mesh screen ( 7 0.21-mm-diameter particle), whereas
vortex type systems use centrifugal and gravitational forces to separate the grit from
the wastewater using proprietary equipment.
Vortex grit removal systems are frequently installed at newly constructed
WWTPs. There are two primary manufacturers of such systems. Smith & Loveless
Figure 10.2
Photograph of a bar screen.
Section 10.5 Primary Treatment 249
Figure 10.3
PISTA® Grit Removal System
(manufactured by Smith &
Loveless, Inc.).
Figure 10.4
High-performance SLUR-
RYCUP™ grit washing and
classification unit mounted on
a GRIT SNAIL™ Quiescent
Dewatering Escalator
(manufactured by EUTEK®
Systems™, Inc.).
makes the PISTA® system and EUTEK® makes the Teacup. Figures 10.3 and 10.4
show typical vortex removal systems.
Once grit has been separated from the wastewater, it must be washed to
remove organic matter that may be attached to the grit particles. For this purpose,
both inclined-rake and inclined-screw conveyor washer systems are used. In some
cases, hydrocyclones are used prior to the grit washer to enhance separation of the
grit and organics. Detailed design information for these systems can be found in
Metcalf and Eddy (2003), WEF MOP #8 (1998), and Reynolds and Richards (1996).
10.5 PRIMARY TREATMENT

Clarification, or separation of suspended solids from the liquid portion of the waste-
water, is accomplished during primary treatment. Primary treatment, which follows
preliminary treatment, is a unit operation that involves the settling of suspended
solids and the removal of oil, grease, and scum that float on the surface of the waste-
water. Since these species contain organic matter, BOD removal is accomplished.
Primary treatment does not remove soluble or colloidal organic materials. Light-
weight organics that float to the surface are skimmed off and pumped to the digesters
for treatment. The sludge that accumulates at the bottom of a primary clarifier is
normally stabilized by anaerobic digestion before disposal. Primary sludge is called
“raw” sludge and is objectionable, since it contains pathogens and organics and
produces odors, especially if it becomes anaerobic. Typical removal efficiencies
observed during primary treatment for BOD and TSS range from 30% to 40% and
50% to 70%, respectively (Metcalf and Eddy, 2003).
Primary clarifiers are normally circular by design. Where land space is limited,
however, long, rectangular basins are often used. Typical dimensions and design criteria
for primary clarifiers are presented by Metcalf and Eddy, 2003. Depths of primaries range
from 10–16 ft (3–4.9 m). Rectangular primary clarifiers have lengths ranging from 50–300
ft (15–90 m) and widths varying from 10–80 ft (3–24 m). The diameters of circular clari-
fiers range from 10–200 ft (3–60 m). Detention times in primaries range from 1.5–2.5
hours.Average overflow rates vary from 800–1200 gpd/ft2 [30–50 m3/(d # m224. Weir load-
ing rates vary from 10,000–40,000 gpd/ft2 [125–500 m3/(d # m224.
The design of primary clarifiers is based on the overflow rate, detention time,
and weir loading rate. The overflow rate 1Vo2 is defined as the flow rate divided by
the surface area of the clarifier:
Q
Vo = (10.3)
AS
where:
Vo = overflow rate gpd/ft2 1m3/d # m22,
Q = design flow rate, MGD 1m3/d2, and
A S = surface area of the clarifier, ft2 1m22.
The surface area of the clarifier is determined by dividing the design flow rate by the
overflow rate. This area calculated is then converted into either a circular or a rectan-
gular area. Once the detention time is selected and the total volume of the clarifier is
calculated, clarifier depth may be determined. It is calculated by dividing the clarifier
volume by the surface area of the clarifier. Detention time 1u2 is the average unit of
time that the wastewater remains in the clarifier and is determined as follows:
V
u = (10.4)
Q
where:
V = volume of the primary clarifier in ft3 1m32, and
Q = design flow rate, MGD 1m3/h2.
Weir loading rate (q) is the third parameter that must be determined when design-
ing primary clarifiers. Mathematically, q is defined as the design flow rate divided by
the length of the weir:
Q
q = (10.5)
weir length
where:
q = weir loading rate, gpd/ft 1m3/d # m2,
Q = design flow rate, gpd 1m3/d2, and
weir length = length of primary clarifier effluent weir, ft (m).
Section 10.5 Primary Treatment 251
The weir loading rate is the last parameter to be checked. For circular clarifiers, a
peripheral weir which extends around the entire circumference of the clarifier is
used. For rectangular clarifiers, the design engineer uses inboard box weirs to provide
the necessary weir length to meet the weir loading rate. Example 10.1 illustrates the
procedure for designing primary clarifiers.
EXAMPLE 10.1
Primary clarifier design
A municipal WWTP receives 20,000 m3/day of flow. Two primary clarifiers operating
in parallel will handle the flow. The state’s regulatory agency’s criteria are as follows:
average overflow rate = 20 m3/(d # m2 ), and the average detention time = 3.0 hours.
Determine:
a. Clarifier diameter.
b. Side water depth.
c. Weir loading rate if an inboard peripheral weir is used that is 0.25 m from
the edge of the clarifier.
Solution part a
10,000 m3/day
10,000 m3/day
Q 10,000 m3>d
AS = = = 500 m2
Vo 20 m3>d # m2
pD2
AS = = 500 m2
4
D = 32000>p40.5 = 25.2 m
Go with a diameter of 25 meters. Circular primary clarifier diameters typically range

from 3 to 60 meters.
Solution part b
Next, calculate the volume of the clarifier so the side water depth may be determined
by dividing the volume by the surface area:
d m3
V = u Q = 3.0 h ¢ ≤ ¢ 10,000 ≤ = 1250 m3
24 h d
Since we have selected a diameter of 25 rather than 25.2 meters, calculate a new
surface area:
p125 m22
AS = = 491 m2
4
V 1250 m3
depth = = = 2.55 m
AS 491 m2
Go with a depth of 3 meters; depths of circular primary clarifiers range from 3 to

4.9 meters. An additional 0.45 m is added to the depth to account for freeboard.
Freeboard is additional length added to the depth to provide for variations in flow.
Solution part c
Peripheral weirs are usually placed around the circumference of the clarifier. In this
case, the weir is placed 0.25 m from the edge of the clarifier. Therefore, the diameter
of the peripheral weir is 24.5 meters.
Peripheral weir diameter is equal to 25 meters - 210.25 m2 = 24.5 meters.
10,000 m3>d
= 130 m3/(d # m)
Q
q = =
weir length p124.5 m2
Peak weir loading rates generally should not exceed 248 m3/(d # m) (Reynolds
and Richards, 1996).
10.6 SECONDARY TREATMENT

Secondary wastewater treatment implies that a biological process is being used for
treating the wastewater. Microorganisms indigenous to the wastewater use organic
carbon, along with nitrogen and phosphorus, to grow more microorganisms, primar-
ily bacteria. Bacteria use the organic matter as measured by BOD or COD for their
energy and carbon source. Oxidation of the organic matter produces energy that is
captured in the microbe’s biochemical pathways, while a portion of the organic mat-
ter is used in the synthesis of biomass. Equation (10.6) indicates that the organic
material is being oxidized for energy, whereas Equation (10.7) shows organic matter
being synthesized into new microbial cells 1C 60H 87O23N12P12:
organics + O2 : CO2 + H 2O + energy (10.6)
organics + O2 + N + P
Microorganisms " C H O N P (10.7)
60 87 23 12
The overall growth rate in continuous flow systems with a heterogeneous culture of
microorganisms is expressed as follows (Heukelekian et al., 1951):
dX dS
a b = Ya b - kdX (10.8)
dt NG dt U
where:
= net microorganism growth rate, mass/1volume # time2,

dX
a b
dt NG
Section 10.6 Secondary Treatment 253
b = substrate utilization rate, mass/1volume # time2,

dS
a
dt U
X = microorganism concentration, mass/volume,
Y = growth yield coefficient, mass of biomass produced per unit of
substrate oxidized, and
kd = endogenous decay coefficient, time-1.
10.6.1 Activated Sludge

Ardern and Lockett (1914) developed the activated-sludge process in England
in 1914. It is an aerobic, suspended-growth, biological process, characterized by two
major steps: (1) substrate adsorption and utilization in the aeration basin, (2) solids/
liquid separation in the secondary clarifier.A schematic of the process is presented in
Figure 10.5. Wastewater flows into the aeration basin, where it is brought into contact
with a heterogeneous culture of microbes, consisting primarily of heterotrophic
bacteria. The liquid inside the aeration basin is called “mixed liquor” or “activated
sludge.” The concentration of microorganisms in the aeration basin is generally
measured as mixed liquor suspended solids (MLSS).
Microorganisms growing in the aeration basin are indigenous to the wastewater.
Given proper environmental conditions, they grow and proliferate by binary fission
approximately every 20 to 25 minutes. Microorganisms use organic matter (substrate)
for synthesis and energy. Synthesis involves the production of carbohydrates, lipids,
proteins, etc. for cell maintenance and for reproduction. Substrate is also oxidized
through respiration for the production of energy to drive the biochemical reactions
required for synthesizing biomass and for motility. Given the generic formula of a
microorganism as C 60H 87O23N12P1 with a molecular weight of 1374, it is easy to see
that the major constituents required for growth are carbon 1312 * 604/1374 = 52%2,
nitrogen 1312 * 144/1374 = 12%2, and phosphorus 13314/1374 = 2.3%2.
On entering the secondary clarifier, the microorganisms or biomass are sep-
arated from the liquid portion of the wastewater by gravity. The supernatant or
clarified wastewater that flows over the effluent weir is called secondary effluent.
The biomass that settles to the bottom of the secondary clarifier forms a layer of
sludge called the “sludge blanket.” Thickened biomass pumped or returned back
to the head of the aeration basin is called the recycle flow 1Qr2 or return activated
sludge (RAS) flow. RAS pumps are typically designed to pump up to 100 to 120%
of the design flow.
System boundary Figure 10.5

Air Alternative sludge Schematic of activated
wasting sludge process.
Q Qr
Influent
Q S0 Aeration Effluent
Secondary
Xi basin X, V, Se
(Q Qr) clarifier
Si (Q Qw)
X, Se Xe, Se
RAS/WAS WAS
Return activated Qr, Xr, Se Pumping
sludge, RAS station Qw, Xr
The quantity of biomass wasted from the system determines the mean cell res-
idence time (MCRT), which sets the concentration of MLSS that can be maintained
in the aeration basin. To maintain steady-state operating conditions, the quantity of
biomass grown within the system is equal to the quantity of biomass that must be
wasted from the system. The sludge wasted 1Qw2 from the system is called waste acti-
vated sludge (WAS). Sludge wasting is normally accomplished by pumping the thick-
ened sludge from the RAS/WAS pumping station to the sludge thickening or sludge
stabilization processes.
The concentration of suspended solids in the thickened sludge generally ranges
from 0.5% to 1.5% solids, where, 1% = 10,000 mg/L, assuming that the specific
gravity of the sludge is approximately 1. The sludge settling rate depends on the
MLSS concentration entering the clarifier, the characteristics of the wastewater,
MCRT, and the sludge return rate.
Design and Operational Parameters

The main design and operational parameter for the activated-sludge process is
the mean cell residence time (MCRT). MCRT represents the average time that
the microorganisms or biomass remain in the system. Mean cell residence time is
also called sludge age, solids retention time (SRT), or uc . Mathematically, MCRT is
expressed as follows, using the nomenclature presented in Figure 10.5.
XV
MCRT1d2 = (10.9)
1Q - Qw2 Xe + QwXr
where:
X = biomass or microorganism concentration in aeration basin expressed
as TSS or VSS, mg/L,
Xe = secondary effluent TSS or VSS concentration, mg/L,
Xr = TSS or VSS concentration in return activated sludge, mg/L,
V = volume of the aeration basin, MG 1m32,
Q = influent wastewater flow rate, MGD 1m3/d2,
Qr = return activated sludge flow rate, MGD 1m3/d2,
Qw = sludge wastage flow rate, MGD 1m3/day2, and
Qe = 1Q - Qw2 = effluent wastewater flow rate, MGD 1m3/d2.
MCRT typically varies from 5 to 30 days and determines the overall removal
efficiency of the process. Generally, the longer the MCRT, the lower the effluent
substrate concentration as measured by BOD or COD. MCRT is much longer than
the hydraulic detention time 1u2. Typically, uc is 10 to 40 times u. Recall that deten-
tion time is defined as the volume of the reactor or basin divided by the volumetric
flow rate with units of time. Equations (10.10) and (10.11) present the equations
used for calculating detention time (Lawrence and McCarty, 1970).
V
u = (10.10)
Q
V
uœ = (10.11)
1Q + Qr2
where:
u = detention time based on influent wastewater flow rate, d or h, and
uœ = actual detention time for recycle systems, d or h.
In most environmental engineering texts, u is based only on the influent flow

rate and is often called the “nominal” detention time.
Another design and operational parameter is the food-to-microorganism ratio
(F:M) which is defined as:
QS0
F:M = (10.12)
XV
where:
F:M = food-to-microorganism or food-to-mass ratio, mg/1mg # d2, and
S0 = influent substrate concentration to aeration basin expressed as
BOD, COD, or TOC, mg/L.
Biochemical Kinetics of Activated Sludge in Completely Mixed Systems

Kinetic equations based on the growth rate of microbes in pure cultures have been
used to model heterogeneous microbial cultures such as activated-sludge systems.
This section presents the kinetic equations used for designing completely mixed
flow reactors (CMFRs). Derivation of these equations is beyond the scope of this
book. If further information is needed, consult Metcalf and Eddy, 2003; Reynolds
and Richards, 1996; Benefield and Randall, 1980, Sherrard and Schroeder, 1973; and
Lawrence and McCarty, 1970.
The relationship between MCRT and net microbial growth rate is:
1Q - Qw2 Xe + QwXr 1 1dS>dt2U

= = Y - kd (10.13)
XV uc X
Substrate utilization can be modeled by a Michaelis-Minton type equation as pro-

posed by Lawrence and McCarty (1970):
dS kXSe
a b = (10.14)
dt U KS + Se
where k = maximum specific substrate utilization rate, d-1.
Substituting Equation (10.14) into Equation (10.13) results in Equation (10.15),
which is used for calculating the effluent soluble substrate concentration 1Se2 from
the activated sludge process.
Ks11 + kd uc2
Se = (10.15)
uc1Yk - kd2 - 1
The microorganism concentration (X) inside the aeration basin is calculated

as follows:
Y1S0 - Se2 uc
X = (10.16)
1 + kd uc u
where S0 and Se = influent and effluent soluble organic concentration, mass/volume.

Normally the influent total organic concentration, expressed as total BOD or
total COD, is substituted for the influent soluble organic concentration. The total
BOD or total COD includes the soluble (dissolved) and particulate organic matter.
Soluble BOD or COD only includes the soluble organic matter.
Equation (10.16) may be rearranged to calculate the volume of the aeration

basin.
YQ1S0 - Se2 uc
V = (10.17)
1 + kd uc X
The total quantity of biomass produced daily 1Px2 is calculated as follows:
YQ1S0 - Se2
Px = (10.18)
1 + kd uc
Oxygen Requirements
Oxygen serves as an electron acceptor in the activated sludge process, so suffi-
cient quantities of oxygen must be provided to ensure that microbial growth is not
negatively affected. Under most operating conditions, a dissolved oxygen concen-
tration of 2.0 mg/L should be maintained in the aeration basin to meet process
requirements for both the carbonaceous oxygen demand and nitrogenous demand
(total oxygen demand). Equation (10.19) is used for estimating the quantity of oxy-
gen required to meet the total oxygen demand. The nitrogenous demand (NOD)
is the amount of oxygen required for the nitrifying bacteria, Nitrosomonas and
Nitrobacter.
O2 = Q1S0 - Se211 - 1.42Y2 + 1.42kdXV + NOD (10.19)
NOD = Q1TKNo24.57 (10.20)
where O2 = total oxygen required to meet the carbonaceous and nitrogenous oxy-
gen demand, pounds per day, ppd (kg/d).
EXAMPLE 10.2
Activated sludge design
A completely mixed activated sludge process is designed to treat 20,000 m3/day of
domestic wastewater having a BOD5 concentration of 250 mg/L following primary
treatment. The NPDES permit requires that the effluent BOD5 and TSS concentra-
tions not exceed 20 mg/L on an annual basis. The following biokinetic coefficients
are to be used in the design of the process: Y = 0.6 mg VSS/mg BOD5 , k = 5 d-1,
KS = 60 mg/L BOD5 , and kd = 0.06 d-1. Assume that the MLVSS concentration in
the aeration basin will be maintained at 3000 mg/L and the ratio of VSS:TSS is 0.75.
a. Effluent soluble BOD5 (SBOD5) concentration necessary to meet the

total BOD5 (TBOD5) requirement of 20 mg/L.
b. Mean cell residence time necessary to meet the NPDES permit.
c. Volume of the aeration basin in cubic meters.
d. The quantity of waste sludge produced at the mean cell residence time
determined in part b.
Solution part a
First, it is necessary to estimate the BOD5 of the effluent suspended solids (particu-
late BOD5-PBOD5) so that the soluble effluent BOD5 concentration may be deter-
mined. The particulate BOD5 can be estimated using the following equation:
2 2 mg mg VSS
particulate BOD5 = a b11.42 VSS2eff = a b a1.42 * 20 * 0.75 b
3 3 L mg TSS
mg
= 14.2
L
The (SBOD5) or Se in the effluent is estimated by rearranging the following

equation:
TBOD5 = SBOD5 1Se2 + PBOD5
SBOD5 1Se2 = TBOD5 - PBOD5
SBOD5 1Se2 = 20 mg/L - 14.2 mg/L = 5.8 mg/L
Solution part b
Calculate the mean cell residence time using Equations (10.13) and (10.14).
1Q - Qw2 Xe + QwXr 1 1dS>dt2U

= = Y - kd
XV uc X
dS kXSe
a b =
dt U KS + Se
1 1dS>dt2U 1kXSe2>1KS + Se2 kSe

= Y - kd = Y - kd = Y - kd
uc X X KS + Se
1 mg VSS 15d-1 * 5.8 mg>L2

= ¢ 0.6 ≤ - 0.06 d-1 = 0.204 d-1
uc mg BOD5 160 mg>L + 5.8 mg>L2
uc = 4.89 days
Typically, MCRTs for completely mixed activated sludge processes range from
3 to 15 days.
Solution part c
Next, the volume of the aeration basin may be determined using Equation (10.17).
0.6 mg VSS
120,000 m3>d21250 - 5.8 mg>L214.89 d2
YQ1So - Se2 uc mg BOD5
V = =
1 + kd uc X 11 + 0.06 d-1 * 4.89 d2 13000 mg VSS>L2
= 3690 m3
Solution part d
The quantity of waste sludge produced at a MCRT of 4.89 days is determined using
Equation (10.18). First, change the units on the growth yield coefficient as follows:
0.6 mg VSS 1 mg TSS 0.8 mg TSS
Y = ¢ ≤¢ ≤ =
mg BOD5 0.75 mg VSS mg BOD5
YQ1So - Se2
Px =
1 + kd uc
mg TSS m3 mg
0.8 120,000 21250 - 5.8 2
mg BOD5 d L 1 kg 1000 L
Px = -1
¢ ≤¢ ≤
11 + 0.06 d * 4.89 d2 6
10 mg m3
kg
Px = 3020
d
The largest quantity of sludge produced occurs at short MCRTs. At long MCRTs,
less sludge is produced.
10.6.2 Aerator Systems

There are two major types of aeration systems: mechanical aerators and diffusers.
Mechanical or surface aerators consist of mixers or brush rotors that transfer oxygen
into the wastewater by spraying the wastewater into the atmosphere. Figure 10.6 is a
photo of a mechanical aerator. Diffused aeration systems are similar to fish aquarium
tanks in which oxygen diffuses through a diffuser stone or membrane, thereby transfer-
ring oxygen into the wastewater. Diffused aeration systems are categorized by the size
of bubble they produce, ranging from coarse-bubble (large) to medium- to fine-bubble
diffusers. Coarse-bubble diffusers are usually made of stainless steel pipes with orifices.
Fine-bubble diffusers may consist of ceramic materials or membranes with small pore
Figure 10.6
Mechanical aerator in
operation.
Figure 10.7
Diffused aeration system in
operation.
sizes. In general, diffused aeration systems are more efficient in transferring oxygen
into the wastewater and are more widely used than mechanical aeration systems.
Figure 10.7 is a photo showing a diffused aeration system in operation.
Aeration manufacturers test aeration equipment using standard conditions,
which include using clean tap water at 20°C containing zero mg/L of dissolved oxy-
gen (initially) and at 1 atmosphere of pressure. Aeration equipment must transfer
the desired quantity of oxygen to the microorganisms in the wastewater. Alpha 1a2
and beta 1b2 coefficients are used to translate the oxygen transfer rate under stan-
dard conditions to those under process conditions (i.e., in the wastewater). Each
coefficient is defined by the following equations:
1KLa2ww
a = (10.21)
1KLa2tap water
1DOsat2ww
b = (10.22)
1DOsat2tap water
where:
1KLa2ww = overall oxygen transfer coefficient under process conditions in
wastewater, time1,
(KLa)tap water overall oxygen transfer coefficient under standard conditions
in water, time-1,
1DOsat2ww = dissolved oxygen (DO) saturation concentration at specified
temperature and pressure in wastewater, mass/volume,
1DOsat2tap water = DO saturation concentration at standard conditions in
water, mass/volume, and
T = actual temperature of wastewater under process conditions,°C.
The actual oxygen transfer rate equation under process conditions (transferring
oxygen into wastewater) is:
a1bCs - Ct211.02421T°C - 20°C2

AOTR = 1SOTR2 (10.23)
9.17
where:
AOTR = actual oxygen transfer rate under process conditions, ppd (kg/d),
SOTR = standard oxygen transfer rate at standard conditions, ppd (kg/d),
Cs = DO saturation concentration in water at a specific temperature
and pressure, mg/L, and
Ct = desired DO concentration in aeration basin, mg/L.
Sufficient oxygen must be supplied to the microorganisms so that biological processes
are not limited.Also, mixing requirements must be maintained so that the microorgan-
isms remain suspended in the aeration basin. If diffused aeration systems are used, then
a specified amount of air is required for mixing.The mixing requirement for a mechan-
ical aerator is based on the amount of energy supplied to the water in terms of power
per unit volume. Aeration systems must be designed to meet the following conditions.
Process air requirements: O2 = Q1S0 - Se211 - 1.42Y2 + 1.42kdXV + NOD
Mixing requirements: diffused aeration: 20 to 30 scfm/1000 ft3 (20 to 30 m3/min #

1000 m3); mechanical aerators: 0.75 to 1.5 HP/1000 ft3 (20 to 40 kW/1000 m3)
10.6.3 Trickling Filters

An alternative secondary wastewater treatment process uses trickling filters. A
trickling filter is an attached growth biological process. With trickling filters, waste-
water is applied to some type of filter medium on which a heterogeneous culture of
microorganisms is growing. Rock or slag were the media of choice in the past, but
they have been replaced with plastic media. Trickling filters do not filter the waste-
water like a traditional sand filter; however, the biomass growing on the media uses
the organic matter along with a portion of the nitrogen and phosphorus to grow new
microorganisms. Trickling filters must be preceded by primary clarifiers to ensure
that suspended solids do not clog the openings (orifices) on the distribution arms of
the trickling filters. The pressure of the wastewater discharging from the distributor
arms provides the driving force causing the arms to rotate. Figure 10.8 is a schematic
Figure 10.8 Recirculation Pump

Schematic of a trickling filter
wastewater treatment plant. Primary Secondary
Trickling filter humus sludge
Primary & Secondary Sludge

Figure 10.9
Photo of conventional
trickling filter with rock
media.
Figure 10.10
Trickling filter with plastic
media and biological
growth.
diagram of a trickling filter system. Figure 10.9 shows a conventional trickling

system with rock media. The media has no biological growth on it, since it has
been taken out of service. Figure 10.10 shows a trickling filter consisting of plas-
tic media with biological growth. The design of trickling filter processes has pri-
marily been based on organic and hydraulic loading rates. Kinetic equations
proposed by Eckenfelder have been used successfully when plastic media are
used (Eckenfelder, 1989).
10.7 SECONDARY CLARIFICATION

The effectiveness of the activated sludge process is only as good as the design of the
secondary clarifiers. It is essential for the secondary clarifiers to efficiently separate
the suspended and biological solids from the liquid wastewater. Figure 10.11 is a
photo of a circular secondary clarifier. Zone settling occurs during the settling of
activated sludge. Secondary clarifier design protocol requires calculating the area of
the clarifier based on clarification in addition to estimating the area necessary to
achieve solids thickening. The largest area controls the design of the clarifier. The
area of the clarifier based on clarification is determined by dividing the design flow
rate by the overflow rate according to the following equation:
Q
AC = (10.24)
Vo
where:
A C = the area of clarifier based on clarification, ft2 1m22,
Q = design flow rate, excluding sludge return flow applied to the secondary
clarifier, MGD 1m3/d2, and
Vo = overflow rate or surface loading rate, gpd/ft2 3m3/1d # m224
When considering thickening of the solids, the area of the secondary clarifier is esti-
mated by dividing the total suspended solids loading to the secondary clarifier by the
design solids loading rate (SLR). Routinely, a solids loading rate is assumed and the
area of the clarifier based on thickening considerations is estimated. Equation (10.25)
is used for determining the secondary clarifier area based on thickening considerations.
1Q + QR2MLSS
AT = (10.25)
SLR
where:
A T = secondary clarifier surface area based on thickening considera-
tions, ft2 1m22,
Q = wastewater design flow rate applied to the secondary clarifier, excluding
the return activated sludge flow rate, MGD 1m3/d2,
QR = return activated sludge flow rate, MGD 1m3/d2,
MLSS = suspended solids concentration in the aeration basin, and
SLR = solids loading rate design criteria, typically 25 ppd/ft2 3122 kg/1d # m224
at average daily flow.
Figure 10.11
Photo of circular secondary
clarifier.
Section 10.7 Secondary Clarification 263
Typical design criteria for secondary clarifiers (EPA, 1975) are presented as fol-
lows: average overflow rates ranging from 400–800 gpd/ft2 [16.3–32.6 m3/(d # m2)],
solids loading rates of 20–30 ppd/ft2 [98–147 kg/(d # m224, and depths of 12–15 ft
(3.7–4.6 m). Secondary settling basins are normally rectangular or circular in plan
view. Standard sizes come in 5 ft (1.6 m) intervals. The design of a secondary clarifier
is presented in Example 10.3.
EXAMPLE 10.3
Secondary clarifier design
Design a secondary clarifier system for an activated sludge WWTP that treats 10.0
MGD of wastewater. The MLSS concentration is 3000 mg/L, return activated sludge
(RAS) flow = 4.0 MGD, overflow rate is 600 gpd/ft2, and a solids loading rate of
30 ppd/ft2 will be used. Assume a minimum of two circular units. Determine the
diameter of the clarifiers.
Solution
First, determine the surface area of the secondary clarifiers based on clarification
considerations using Equation (10.24):
Q 10 * 106 gpd
AC = = = 16,700 ft2
Vo 600 gpd>ft2
Next, determine the surface area of the secondary clarifiers based on thicken-
ing considerations using Equation (10.25).
8.34 lb>MG
110 + 4 MGD213000 mg>L2a b
1Q + QR2MLSS mg>L
AT = =
SLR 30 ppd>ft2
= 11,700 ft2
The surface area of the secondary clarifiers must equal to 16,700 ft2, since it is
the larger of the two areas calculated. Since there are two circular clarifiers, the sur-
face area must be divided by 2. The radius and diameter of the clarifiers can then be
determined.
A 16,700 ft2
= = pr2
clarifier 2
r = 28350 ft2>p = 51.5 ft diameter = 103 ft
Therefore, use two 105-ft-diameter secondary clarifiers. Clarifier scraper

mechanisms are designed in 5-foot increments. Circular secondary clarifier diameters
range from 10 to 200 feet (3 to 60 meters).
10.8 DISINFECTION OF WASTEWATER

Before treated wastewater can be discharged to surface waters or reused for irriga-
tion, it must be properly disinfected. Historically, chlorine has been the disinfectant
of choice, because it effectively kills pathogens and is economical compared with
other disinfection methods. If chlorine is used for disinfection, it must be neutral-
ized or removed from the wastewater prior to discharge to surface waters, since it is
toxic to fish and other aquatic life. Sodium thiosulfate, sodium bisulfite, and sulfur
dioxide are some of the chemicals most widely used for removing chlorine from
wastewater (Reynolds and Richards, 1996).
10.8.1 Disinfectants Used in Wastewater Treatment

Chlorine 1Cl 22, ozone 1O32, and ultraviolet (UV) radiation are three major disin-
fectants that have been used successfully for treating wastewater prior to discharge.
Although more costly from both a capital and an O & M viewpoint, the use of ozone
and UV radiation is increasing. Both of these disinfectants offer the advantage of elim-
inating the production of trihalomethanes (THMs), which are chlorinated organic
species and suspected carcinogens that result when chlorine is added to water contain-
ing organic compounds. Ozone is a powerful oxidizing agent and effectively kills
bacteria, viruses, and cysts. The problem with ozone is that no residual is formed, and
chlorine or other disinfectants must be added following ozonation to provide a dis-
infectant residual if the treated wastewater is to be distributed in a reuse system.
Using UV radiation as the major disinfectant requires a low turbidity or suspended
solids concentration in the wastewater, since these species absorb the UV light and
shield microorganisms from exposure. UV radiation systems are expensive, and the
light bulbs are housed in quartz glass sleeves that must be periodically cleaned to
prevent the build-up of scale and biological growth that may occur. As with ozona-
tion, an auxiliary disinfectant must be added if the wastewater is to be reused. An
advantage of both ozonation and UV radiation is elimination of the need to remove
chlorine if the effluent is discharged to surface waters.
10.8.2 Chlorination of Wastewater

Chlorine is delivered to wastewater treatment facilities in pressurized containers,
which range in size from 150-lb (68-kg) to 1-ton (908-kg) cylinders all the way up to
55-ton (49.9-Mg) railroad tank cars (Metcalf and Eddy, 1991). The chlorine is lique-
fied under high pressure and may be withdrawn as a gas or a liquid, depending on the
withdrawal rate. At large WWTPs, chlorine is usually withdrawn as a liquid and must
pass through an evaporator to be converted to a gas. Evaporators are recommended
where the quantity of chlorine supplied approaches 2000 lb/d (908 kg/d). The chlo-
rine gas is then dissolved into a side stream of water using a vacuum pressure system
and regulator. Because of safety concerns about potential gas leaks (chlorine is toxic
and corrosive), the dissolving of chlorine gas directly into the wastewater is seldom
practiced. Chlorine dosage rates are dependent upon the type of treatment process
used. Typical chlorine dosages range from 2–8 mg/L for activated sludge effluent and
from 1–5 mg/L for filtered activated sludge effluent (Metcalf and Eddy, 2003).
10.8.3 Chlorine Contact Basin

Once chlorine is added to the secondary effluent, it must have sufficient contact with
the wastewater to kill potential pathogens. Long, rectangular serpentine channels
simulating the plug flow regime are used in the design of chlorine contact basins
Section 10.8 Disinfection of Wastewater 265
(CCB). Length-to-width (L:W) ratios of 10:1 to 40:1 are used in design to prevent
short circuiting (Metcalf and Eddy, 1991). The design of a CCB is based on deten-
tion time, which is calculated by dividing the volume of the basin by the design
flow rate.
EXAMPLE 10.4
Chlorine contact basin design
A chlorine contact basin is to be designed for maintaining a detention time of 15 min-
utes at peak hourly flow (PHF) and/or 30 minutes at the average daily flow (ADF).
The activated sludge wastewater treatment plant treats an average daily flow of
60,000 m3/d, and the ratio of the estimated peak hour flow to average daily flow is
3:1. Design a three-pass, serpentine chlorine contact basin using a length-to-width
ratio of 10:1.
Solution
Calculate the volumes for the chlorine contact basin for the two flow scenarios.
First, rearrange the detention time equation so that the volume may be calculated.
Volume of CCB at ADF:
1h 1d 60,000 m3
V = uQ = 30 min ¢ ≤¢ ≤¢ ≤ = 1250 m3
60 min 24 h d
Once the peak hourly flow is estimated, the volume of CCB at PHF can be
determined.
The PHF is calculated as:
m3 m3
PHF = 3 ¢ 60,000 ≤ = 180,000
d d
1h 1d 180,000 m3
V = uQ = 15 min ¢ ≤¢ ≤¢ ≤ = 1875 m3
60 min 24 h d
The volume of the CCB is controlled by the PHF and should be 1875 m3.
Assume that we have two chlorine contact basins of equal size, 3 m deep. The
volume per basin and the surface area are calculated below.
volume 1875 m3
= = 938 m3 ⬵ 940 m3
basin 2
area 940 m3
= = 313 m2
basin 3m
Assuming three passes per basin and a L:W ratio of 10:1 1L = 10W2, the area
of the basin per pass is calculated as:
A = L * W = 10W2 = 313 m2 W = 2313/10 = 5.6 m

Use a width of 5.6 m and length of 313/5.6 = 56 m. Each CCB basin will have
a plan view as shown below.
Q
5.6 m
5.6 m
Q
5.6 m
56 m
10.9 SLUDGE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL

Sludge or biosolids and other residuals are generated at wastewater treatment facil-
ities. Screenings and grit from preliminary treatment unit operations are normally
collected in dumpsters and then hauled off to sanitary landfills for ultimate disposal.
The residuals produced from primary and secondary treatment produce large quan-
tities of sludge that must be properly stabilized. The sludge volume must be reduced
before it may be land applied or disposed of in a sanitary landfill. Primary sludge
contains organic solids and pathogens that must be properly treated. Traditionally,
anaerobic digestion has been used to stabilize primary sludge and to kill potential
pathogens. Secondary sludge consists primarily of biological organisms, i.e., biomass,
and typically is stabilized using aerobic digestion or anaerobic digestion. Lime stabi-
lization is another widely used method for killing pathogens in sludge by raising the
pH of the sludge above 10 for several hours. Unfortunately, the addition of lime to
the sludge creates more solids to dispose of. Both anaerobic and aerobic digestion
decreases the volume and quantity of sludge.
Sludge treatment and disposal generally consists of four distinct steps. The
first step involves reducing the sludge volume through some sort of thickening
operation. The second step involves stabilization with anaerobic or aerobic diges-
tion. Stabilization reduces the volatile solids content, kills pathogens, and reduces
the volume of the sludge. The third step involves sludge dewatering operations to
increase the concentration of solids. The final step is ultimate disposal.
10.9.1 Sludge Weight and Volume Relationships

The designer of solids handling and treatment systems must be familiar with sludge
weight and volume relationships. In addition to a discussion of the equations pre-
sented in this section, sources, characteristics, and quantities of waste sludges can be
found in Viessman and Hammer (2005).
The specific gravity of wet sludge is estimated using the following equation:
WW + WS
S = (10.26)
1WW>1.02 + 1WS>SS2
where:
S = specific gravity of wet sludge,
WW = weight of water, lb (kg),
Section 10.9 Sludge Treatment and Disposal 267
WS = weight of dry solids, lb (kg), and

SS = specific gravity of dry solids.
The volume (V) occupied by wet sludge 1ft3 or m32 is determined using the following
equation:
WS
V = (10.27)
1s>1002g S
where:
s = solids content, %, and
g = specific weight of water, 62.4 lb/ft3 (1000 kg/m32.
10.9.2 Thickening Operations

Thickening of sludge is very important, since it reduces the volume of the sludge to be
handled, thereby reducing the size of subsequent solids handling processes such as
sludge stabilization. Increasing the solids content of sludge from 1% to 2% results in a
50% reduction in the sludge volume. Typical sludge thickening operations and the
approximate solids concentration associated with each include gravity thickening (2%
to 10% solids), gravity belt thickeners (3% to 6% solids), dissolved air flotation (3%
to 6% solids), and thickening centrifuges (4% to 8% solids). Recall that a 1% solids
concentration is approximately equal to 10,000 mg/L, assuming that the specific grav-
ity of the sludge is 1.0. Designing sludge thickening unit operations involves perform-
ing mass balances on the sludge flows and sludge quantities into and out of the unit
operation. Example 10.5 illustrates the design of a gravity belt thickener.
EXAMPLE 10.5
Gravity belt thickener design
Design a gravity belt thickener (GBT) to be used for thickening waste activated
sludge (WAS) from 1% solids to 5% solids. Ten thousand pounds of WAS are pro-
duced daily. The WAS is pumped from the RAS/WAS pumping station to a sludge
holding tank. Positive displacement pumps are used to pump the WAS from the hold-
ing tank to the GBT. The GBT will operate 8 hours a day, 5 days a week. The TSS
concentration in the filtrate is 1000 mg/L. Use the following design criteria in design-
ing the GBT: hydraulic loading rate = 140 to 450 gpm/m, solids loading rate = 370
to 1200 lb/(m # hr), and washwater rate = 25 gpm/meter of belt width.
Solution
First, calculate the daily solids loading rate to the GBT.
7 d 1 wk 1 d lb lb
10,000 ppda ba ba b = 1750 or 14,000
wk 5d 8h hr d
Next, determine the sludge volume entering the GBT using Equation (10.27)
and assuming the specific gravity of the wet sludge (S) is equal to 1.0.
WS 14,000 ppd
V = = = 168,000 gpd or 350 gpm
1s>1002g S 11%>100218.34 lb>gal211.02
350 gpm is the volume of sludge treated in an 8 hour operating period

Next, draw a schematic diagram so that a flow and materials balance can be
performed.
Washwater
0% solids
Sludge
Sludge
cake
feed
GBT
1% Solids 5% Solids
14,000 ppd
1,000 mg/L
Filtrate
Determine the belt width of the GBT. Belt widths range from 0.5 to 3 meters in
increments of 0.5 meter. Typical GBTs in service use 2.0-meter belts. Pick a hydraulic
loading rate of 175 gpm/m from the design criteria given:
350 gpm
belt width = = 2.00 m
175 gpm>m
Check the actual solids loading rate (SLR) to see if it meets the design criteria:
= 875 lb>1m # h2
1750 pph of solids
solids loading rate =
2m
This is acceptable, since the SLR design criteria specify 370 to 1200 lb/1m # h2.
Next, determine the sludge cake and filtrate flows by performing a flow and
materials balance around the GBT. Cake and filtrate flows are denoted as QC and
QF , respectively.
Qsludge + Qwashwater = QF + QC
350 gpm + 12 * 25 gpm2 = QF + QC
400 gpm = QF + QC
gal 60 min 8 h 1 MG
400 a ba b¢ 6 ≤ = 0.192 MGD
min h d 10 gal
0.192 MGD = QF + QC
QC = 0.192 MGD - QF
Perform a materials balance on solids. Recall that 1% solids is equal to

10,000 mg/L.
Msludge = MC + MF
lb lb
MG mg MG mg
14,000 ppd = QC a8.34 b15 * 10,000 2 + QF a8.34 b 11000 2
mg L mg L
L L
14,000 ppd = 417,000QC + 8,340QF
14,000 ppd = 417,00010.192 - QF2 + 8,340QF
408,660QF = 66,064 QF = 0.162 MGD
QC = 0.192 MGD - QF = 0.192 - 0.162 = 0.030 MGD
Now, calculate the quantity of solids in the filtrate.
lb>MG
10.162 MGD2a8.34 b11000 mg>L2 = 1351 ppd
mg>L
The percent capture through the GBT can be calculated using the following
equation:
3solids in feed - solids in filtrate4 100

% capture =
solids in feed
314,000 ppd - 1351 ppd4 100

% capture = = 90.4%
14,000 ppd
The accompanying schematic diagram shows the complete materials balance:
0% Solids
Washwater 50 gpm
Sludge Sludge
feed cake
GBT
1% Solids 5% Solids
14,000 ppd 12,649 ppd
350 gpm 63 gpm
1,000 mg/L
1351 ppd
337 gpm
Filtrate
10.9.3 Stabilization
The objectives of sludge stabilization are to reduce the liquid volume and quantity of
sludge solids, prevent nuisance odors, and reduce the pathogen content. Two primary
means of stabilizing wastewater sludge or biosolids include anaerobic and aerobic
digestion. Presented next is a brief description of anaerobic digestion, followed by a
discussion of aerobic digestion.
Anaerobic Digestion
Anaerobic digestion is a biological process that takes place in an enclosed reactor
with no oxygen present. It is modeled as a three-step process: hydrolysis, acidogene-
sis, and methanogenesis. During hydrolysis complex organic solids are hydrolyzed
by bacteria through secretion of extracellular enzymes. Carbohydrates, proteins, and

fats are converted to simple carbohydrates, amino acids, and fatty acids. Acidogenesis
involves the conversion of soluble carbon formed during hydrolysis into organic
acids and H 2 by facultative and anaerobic bacteria. The pH drops, and other fer-
menting bacteria partially oxidize organic acids to acetic acid and hydrogen gas.
Methanogenesis is the bacterial conversion of fatty acids and hydrogen into CH 4
and CO2 by strict anaerobes. This gasification of organics is accomplished by acid-
splitting, methane-forming bacteria known as methanogens.
Anaerobic digestion produces a stable sludge and a valuable by-product,
methane gas, which can be combusted to provide heat for the digesters or used for
generating electricity. Only small quantities of organic matter and cellular proto-
plasm remain in the digested sludge. Anaerobic digesters are used extensively at
WWTPs that have primary clarifiers. A disadvantage of using anaerobic digestion is
the required use of large reactors due to long detention times. Anaerobic digestion
is sensitive to operate and prone to biological upsets. Anaerobically digested sludge
is usually difficult to dewater by mechanical means.
Normally, two-stage anaerobic digestion is practiced. Undigested sludge is fed
first to a mixed, heated, anaerobic digester, then to an unmixed and unheated second
digester. Figure 10.12 is a schematic of a two-stage anaerobic digester system. Design
criteria for conventional or standard-rate anaerobic digesters prescribe (Viessman
and Hammer, 2005) volatile solids loading rates of 0.02–0.05 lb VSS/1d # ft 32
[0.32–0.80 kg/1d # m324 and detention times of 30–90 days. High-rate anaerobic
digesters are designed for volatile solids loading rates of 0.1–0.2 lb VSS/d # ft3 [1.6–3.2
kg/(d # m3)] and detention times of 10-20 days.
Low- or standard-rate anaerobic digester volume can be estimated as follows:
Q1 + Q2
V = * T1 + Q2 T2 (10.28)
2
where:
V = total digester capacity, ft3 1m32,
Q1 = volume of raw sludge fed daily, cfd 1m3/d2,
T1 = period required for digestion, approximately 25 d,
Q2 = volume of daily digested sludge accumulation in tank, cfd 1m3/d2, and
T2 = period of digested storage, 20 to 120 d.
Figure 10.12 Gas removal

Gas transfer
Schematic of two-stage
anaerobic digestion.
Gas storage
Gas storage
Scum layer Supernatant
withdrawal
Sludge in Mixer Supernatant layer
Actively digesting
sludge
Sludge
heater
Digested
sludge
Stabilized sludge thickened

Equation (10.29) is used for determining the volume of a high-rate anaerobic digester.
VI = Q1 * T (10.29)
where:
VI = digester capacity required for first-stage or high-rate digestion, ft3 1m32, and
T = period required for digestion, d.
The volume of a second-stage, low-rate anaerobic digester is determined as:
Q1 + Q2
VII = * T1 + Q2 T2 (10.30)
2
where:
VII = digester capacity required for second stage, ft3 1m32,
Q1 = volume of digested sludge feed = volume of average daily raw sludge
feed cfd 1m3/d2,
Q2 = volume of daily digested sludge accumulation in tank, cfd 1m3/d2,
T1 = period required for thickening, days, and
T2 = period required for digested sludge storage, days.
Example 10.6 shows how to design a single-stage conventional anaerobic digester.
EXAMPLE 10.6
Conventional anaerobic digester design
Calculate the anaerobic digester capacity 1m32 required for conventional single-stage
anaerobic digestion, given the following data: raw sludge production = 630 kg/d; VS
in raw sludge = 70%; moisture content of raw sludge = 95%; percent solids content
of raw sludge = 5% solids; digestion period = 30 days; VS reduction = 50%; mois-
ture content of digested sludge = 93%; storage time required = 90 days; and per-
cent solids in thickened digested sludge = 7%.
Solution
First, calculate the volume of raw sludge fed to the digester using Equation (10.27)
assuming S is 1.0.
Ws 630 kg/d
V = = = 12.6 m3>d
1s>1002g S 15%>100211000 kg>m3211.02
Perform a materials balance on the mass of solids or sludge entering and exiting
the digester. First, determine the volatile and fixed solids in the raw sludge fed to the
digester. By definition, total solids (TS) ⴝ volatile solids (VS) ⴙ fixed solids (FS).
Mass of VS in raw sludge = 0.70 1630 kg/d2 = 441 kg/d
Mass of FS in raw sludge = TS - VS = 630 - 441 = 189 kg/d

Next, calculate the volatile and total solids quantities remaining after digestion.
Digestion of the solids causes a 50% reduction in the volatile solids, and the fixed
solids are assumed to remain unchanged.
Mass of volatile solids remaining after digestion = 0.50 * 441 kg/d = 220.5 kg/d
Mass of total solids remaining after digestion = VS + FS = 220.5 + 189

= 409.5 kg/d
Now, calculate the volume of digested sludge that accumulates daily in the
tank, assuming that the sludge thickens to 7% solids, using Equation (10.27) and
taking the specific gravity of the digested sludge to be 1.0.
WS 409.5 kg/d
V = = = 5.85 m3>d
1s>1002g S 17%>100211000 kg>m3211.02
Finally, the volume of the conventional, single-stage anaerobic digester is deter-

mined from Equation (10.28).
Q1 + Q2 112.6 m3>d + 5.85 m3>d2 5.85 m3

V = * T1 + Q2 T2 = * 30 d + 190 d2
2 2 d
= 803 m 3
Aerobic Digestion
Aerobic digestion is similar to the activated sludge process and is actually a continu-
ation of the process operating in the endogenous phase. Organic sludge is aerated
for extended periods so that the organic material is oxidized biologically and the
microorganisms oxidize their own protoplasm, once the exogenous (external) carbon
has been exhausted. Equation (10.31) is a qualitative biochemical reaction, showing
what happens during aerobic digestion:
organic matter + O2
aerobic microbes " new cells + energy + CO + H O (10.31)
2 2
+ end products
The next equation is a quantitative biochemical reaction for aerobic digestion,

where the microbial solids are represented as C 5H 7O2N:
C 5H 7O2N + 7 O2 : 5 CO2 + 3 H 2O + H + + NO3- (10.32)
Equation (10.32) indicates that the pH will drop due to the production of hydrogen
ions 1H +2 and that digestion requires approximately 1.98 lb of oxygen per lb of cells
17 * 32/1132 or 1.98 kg of oxygen per kg of cells.
The process may utilize continuous flow or batch operation. Aerobic digestion
works best on waste activated sludge, since exogenous carbon has been depleted, and
therefore synthesis of new biomass does not occur. Aerobic digestion is called a
process for significant reduction of pathogens (PSRP). Equation (10.33) is used for
calculating the required detention time for completely mixed aerobic digesters:
V 31X02 - 1Xe24
u = td = = (10.33)
Q Kd 31Xe2 - 1Xn24
where:
u = td = detention time or digestion time, d,
Kd = degradation constant or aerobic digestion rate constant, d-1,
X0 = total VSS concentration in influent sludge to digester, mg/L,
Xe = total VSS concentration in effluent digested sludge, mg/L, and
Xn = nondegradable VSS in effluent digested sludge, mg/L.
The detention time 20°C in an aerobic digester ranges from 12 to 22 days (Reynolds
and Richards, 1996).
The detention time may be corrected for temperatures other than 20°C as follows:
tT°C = t20°C11.0652120 - T°C2 (10.34)
Sufficient oxygen must be supplied to the aerobic digester so that oxygen does
not limit the biological reactions that are occurring. For design purposes, 2.0 lb of
oxygen per lb of solids destroyed (2.0 kg/kg) must be supplied to meet process oxy-
gen requirements. This value is used for both waste activated sludge and trickling fil-
ter humus. Approximately 1.9 lb of oxygen per lb of BOD (1.9 kg/kg) is used for
computing the oxygen required for stabilizing primary sludge (Reynolds and
Richards, 1996). Also, air or mechanical energy must be input to the digester to keep
the microorganisms in suspension. Mechanical mixers need 0.5 to 1.25 HP/1000 ft3
(13 to 40 kW/1000 m3) to meet the mixing requirement. Diffused aeration systems
must supply 20 to 35 cfm/1000 ft3 [25 to 35 m3/(min # 1000 m3)] for digesters treating
WAS and 60 cfm/1000 ft3 360 m3/(min # 1000 m324 for aerobic digesters treating a
combination of primary sludge and WAS. The design of aerobic digesters is usually based
on hydraulic detention time or solids loading rate.The hydraulic detention time at 20°C varies
from 12–22 days depending on the type of sludge being treated (Reynolds and Richards,
1996). Reynolds and Richards (1996) indicate that the volatile-solids loading rate
will vary from 0.04–0.20 lb VS/1d # ft 32 30.64–3.20 kg VS/1d # m324. The operating
temperature should be greater than 15°C.
The design of an aerobic digestion system is presented in Example 10.7.
EXAMPLE 10.7
Aerobic digester design
An aerobic digester is to be designed to stabilize 3266 lb of combined primary and waste-
activated sludge. The volume of the combined sludge that will be fed to the digester is
1036 cfd. The volatile solids concentration of the combined sludge is 70%, and the mini-
mum design operating temperature is 16°C.The primary sludge contains 940 lb of BOD
with an oxygen demand of 1.9 lb of oxygen per lb of BOD, whereas the WAS consists of
865 lb of VSS with an oxygen demand of 2.0 lb of oxygen per lb of VSS destroyed.
a. Design hydraulic detention time or digestion time in days.
b. The aerobic digester volume.
c. The volatile solids loading rate to the aerobic digester.
d. The quantity of oxygen required to stabilize the primary sludge.
e. The quantity of oxygen required to stabilize the secondary sludge (WAS).
f. The total quantity of oxygen required to stabilize the combined sludge.

g. The total air required in cfm if air contains 0.0175 lb of oxygen per cubic
foot of air and the diffusers have a transfer efficiency of 5.0%.
Solution part a
Use a hydraulic detention time of 20 days and correct it for the minimum design
operating temperature of 16°C, using Equation (10.34).
tT°C = t20°C 11.0652120 - T°C2 = 20 d11.0652120 - 16°2 = 25.7 days
Solution part b
The aerobic digester volume is calculated by multiplying the hydraulic detention
time by the volume of sludge fed to the digester:
ft3
V = tQsludge = 25.7 days ¢ 1036 ≤ = 26,600 ft3
d
Solution part c
Next, calculate the volatile solids loading to the digester.
VS loading = 3266 ppd10.702 = 2286 ppd
The volatile solids loading rate to the digester is determined as:
2286 ppd VS lb VS
VS loading to digester = = 0.086
26,600 ft3 ft3 # d
Solution part d
Oxygen required to stabilize the BOD in the primary sludge is estimated as:
lb BOD lb O2 lb O2
O2 to stabilize primary BOD = a940 b ¢ 1.9 ≤ = 1786
d lb BOD d
Solution part e
Oxygen required to stabilize the VS in the secondary sludge (WAS) is estimated as:
lb VS lb O2 lb O2
O2 to stabilize VS in WAS = a2286 b ¢ 2.0 ≤ = 4572
d lb BOD d
Solution part f
The total oxygen required to stabilize the combined primary and secondary sludge
is determined below:
lb O2
total O2 required = 1786 + 4572 = 6358
d
Solution part g
Finally, the total air required (cfm) to stabilize the combined sludge is estimated
as follows, assuming that air contains 0.0175 lb O2/ft3 and the diffuser transfer
efficiency is 5%:
6358 lb O2>d 1d 1h
air required = a ba b = 5050 cfm
310.0175 lb O2>ft 210.0524 24 h 60 min
3
Summary 275
Check to see if the mixing requirements have been met
air required 5050 cfm 190 cfm 60 cfm

3
= 3
11000 ft32 = 3
7
1000 ft 26,600 ft 1000 ft 1000 ft3
This exceeds mixing requirements, but the process oxygen requirements
dictate that this amount of air must be supplied so that aerobic digestion can be
accomplished.
10.9.4 Dewatering
Dewatering operations consist of reducing the sludge volume and increasing the
solids content, primarily using mechanical means. Typical dewatering operations and
their anticipated solids concentration include: centrifuges (5% to 40% solids), belt
filter presses (12% to 50% solids), vacuum filtration (20% to 30% solids), plate and
frame presses (34% to 60% solids), and sand drying beds (up to 50% solids). In most
instances the sludge must be conditioned by adding a polymer or coagulant aid such
as lime or ferric chloride to increase the effectiveness of the dewatering operations.
Material balances on flow and solids must be performed when designing any type of
solids-handling equipment and process.
10.9.5 Sludge Disposal

Once sludge has been properly treated, several options are available for disposal.The
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency encourages the beneficial reuse of biosolids
through land application. The type of sludge category, whether or not it is Class A or
B, will determine if the biosolids can be land applied without any site restrictions.
A discussion of the various options, along with explanations of the Standards for
the Use or Disposal of Sewage Sludge, can be found in “A Plain English Guide to
the EPA Part 503 Biosolids Rule” (EPA, 1994). Biosolids may also be placed in
“sludge only” landfills or monofills, but this really is not a beneficial reuse option.
Marketing and distribution of biosolids that have been stabilized, composted, or heat
treated have been successful for many municipalities. The city of Tampa, Florida, pel-
letizes its biosolids and then sells them to fertilizer manufacturers as an amendment
to increase the organic content of the fertilizer. The city of Milwaukee, Wisconsin, is
successful in selling its biosolids product, Milorganite. Another beneficial reuse of
biosolids is called dedicated disposal. This involves the application of biosolids to
strip mines to grow vegetation and try to recover these types of areas for other uses.
Incineration of sludge is an option that is becoming less attractive because of the
high cost of building and operating incinerators, plus the creation of air pollution
and need to landfill the ash. Ocean dumping has been banned in the United States,
so that is no longer an option.
S U M M A RY
This chapter presented the objectives of treating wastewater along with a classification
system for identifying the types of wastewater treatment plants (WWTPs).Various unit
operations and unit processes used for treating wastewater were discussed, and exam-
ples were presented showing how to design primary clarifiers, activated sludge systems,
secondary clarifiers, and chlorine contact chambers.You learned that unit operations involve
physical treatment of the wastewater,whereas unit processes involve a biological or chemical
reaction. Biokinetic equations were presented that are used for designing activated
sludge processes.
Unit operations and unit processes used in handling, treating, and disposing
of wastewater sludge or biosolids were introduced. Design of these systems requires
that material balances on flow and solids be performed around the specific
system. Example problems were presented to illustrate the design of thickening,
and destabilzation systems.
KEY WORDS activated sludge endogenous decay overflow rate

actual oxygen transfer force main plug flow
rate gravity belt thickener primary clarifier
aeration basin gravity sewer secondary clarifier
aerobic digestion grit removal solids loading rate
anaerobic digestion industrial wastewater standard oxygen transfer
AWT land application rate
bar screens mass balances substrate utilization
biokinetic equations mean cell residence time weir loading rate
biomass microbial growth yield coefficient
centrifuge microorganisms
completely mixed nitrogenous oxygen
detention time demand
domestic wastewater nonpoint source
REFERENCES
Ardern, E., and Lockett, W.T. (1914). Experiments on the Oxidation of Sewage Without the
Aid of Filters, Journal Society Chemical Industry, 22, 523–539, 1122–1124.
Benefield, Larry D., and Randall, C.W. (1980). Biological Process Design for Wastewater
Treatment, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ.
Eckenfelder, W.W. (1989). Industrial Water Pollution Control, McGraw Hill, New York.
EPA (1994). A Plain English Guide to the EPA, Part 503 Biosolids Rule, EPA/832/R-93/003.
EPA (1993). Manual Nitrogen Control, EPA/625/R-93/010, Office of Research and Develop-
ment, Office of Water, Washington, DC.
EPA (1975). Suspended Solids Removal, Process Design Manual, Office of Research and
Development, Office of Water, Washington, DC.
Heukelekian, H., Oxford, H.E., and Manganelli, R. (1951). Factors Affecting the Quantity of
Sludge Production in the Activated Sludge Process, Sewage and Industrial Wastes, 23, 945.
Lawrence, A.W., and McCarty, P.L. (1970). Unified Basis for Biological Treatment and Design
and Operation, Journal of Sanitary Engineering Division, ASCE, 96, 757–778.
Metcalf and Eddy, Inc. (2003). Wastewater Engineering: Treatment and Reuse, McGraw Hill,
New York.
Metcalf and Eddy, Inc. (1991). Wastewater Engineering: Treatment, Disposal, and Reuse,
McGraw Hill, New York
Reynolds, T.D., and Richards, P.A. (1996). Unit Operations and Unit Processes in Environmental
Engineering, PWS Publishing Company, Boston.
Sherrard, J.H., and Schroeder, E.W. (1973). Cell Yield and Growth Rate in Activated Sludge,
Journal Water Pollution Control Federation, 5, 1189.
Thabaraj, G.J. (1993). AWT Processes in Florida, Florida Department of Environmental Regu-
lation, Tampa, FL, 1–19.
Viessman, Warren, and Hammer, Mark J. (2005). Water Supply and Pollution Control, Pearson/
Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ.
Water Environment Federation (1998). Biological and Chemical Systems for Nutrient Removal,
601 Wythe Street, Alexandria, VA.
Water Environment Federation (1998). MOP #8, Design of Wastewater Treatment Facilities, 601
Wythe Street, Alexandria, VA.
Exercises 277
EXERCISES
10.1 Two circular primary clarifiers are to be designed to treat domestic waste-
water following preliminary treatment. State regulatory requirements stipu-
late that the overflow rate must be 600 gpd/ft2 at the average daily flow and
1000 gpd/ft2 at the peak hourly flow. The detention time should be between
1 and 2 hours for all flows. The minimum weir loading rate at peak hourly
flow cannot exceed 30,000 gpd/ft. The average daily flow to the primary
clarifiers is 9 MGD. The peaking factor for the PHF:ADF is 2.5:1. Deter-
mine the minimum-diameter clarifier to the nearest 5-ft interval for two
clarifiers operating in parallel to meet the criteria. Determine the side water
depth (SWD) to meet the detention time requirements. Calculate the weir
length necessary to meet the weir loading condition established by the reg-
ulatory agency.
10.2 Two rectangular primary settling basins operating in parallel are to be designed
to treat domestic wastewater following preliminary treatment. The average
daily flow coming into the treatment plant is 10,000 m3/d and the PHF:ADF
ratio is 3:1. Each basin is expected to treat 75% of the peak hourly flow
with one unit out of service. State regulatory requirements stipulate that
the maximum overflow rate must not exceed 100 m3/1d # m22. The detention
time should be between 1 and 2 hours at the average daily flow. The maxi-
mum weir loading rate at peak flow cannot exceed 350 m3/1d # m2. Determine
the dimensions (L, W, D) of the settling basins using a L:W ratio of 4:1 to
meet the design criteria. Determine the side water depth (SWD) to meet the
detention time requirements. Calculate the weir length necessary to meet the
weir loading condition established by the regulatory agency.
10.3 Design a completely-mixed activated sludge process using three different
design approaches (i.e., calculate the volume of the aeration basin). Base
your design for the first approach on detention time, for the second one on
BOD loading, and for the third one on kinetics. The influent design flow rate
to the activated sludge process is 10,000 m3/day with a BOD5 concentra-
tion of 200 mg/L. Completely-mixed activated sludge processes typically
have a detention time ranging from 3 to 6 hours and BOD5 loadings rang-
ing from 50 to 120 lb BOD5/1d # 1000 ft32. Typical biokinetic coefficients
(Reynolds and Richards, 1996) used in design are: Y = 0.6 mg VSS/mg
BOD5 , k = 3 d-1, KS = 60 mg/L, and kd = 0.06 d-1. Use a MCRT = 10 days
and X = 2500 mg/L VSS.
10.4 A completely-mixed activated sludge process is to be designed to treat 10
MGD of domestic wastewater containing 200 mg/L of COD. Use the follow-
ing design parameters in the design process: X = 2500 mg/L MLVSS, influent
TKN = 20 mg/L. The following biokinetic coefficients should be used: Y =
0.40 mg VSS/mg COD, k = 7 d-1, KS = 75 mg/L, and kd = 0.06 d-1 . Deter-
mine the volume and the oxygen required at a MCRT = 15 days.
10.5 A circular secondary is to be designed for a pure oxygen activated sludge
process. The state’s regulatory agency design criteria are as follows: peak
overflow rate = 50 m3/1d # m22, average overflow rate = 20 m3/1d # m22, peak
solids loading rate = 245 kg/1d # m22, peak weir loading rate = 375 m3/1d # m2,
and depth = 3.5 to 4.5 meters. The average daily flow to the aeration basin
prior to the junction with the recycle flow is 6800 m3/day. The maximum recy-
cled sludge flow is 100% of the average daily flow. The design mixed liquor
suspended solids concentration is 5000 mg/L, and the ratio of the peak hourly
to the average daily flow is 2.8. Determine the diameter, detention time at
peak hourly flow, and peak weir loading, assuming a peripheral weir is used.
10.6 A rectangular settling basin is to be designed for a conventional, plug flow acti-
vated sludge process. The flow is 10 MGD, the overflow rate 1Vo2 is 700 gpd/ft2,
the detention time 1u2 is 5 hours, and the weir loading rate is 22,000 gpd/ft. The
settling basin sludge rake mechanism that will be used is for square basins;
therefore, two will be used in tandem to provide a length-to-width ratio of 2:1.
Determine the dimensions of the settling basin (L, W, and D) and the total
length of the effluent weir.
10.7 Compute the volume 1m32 of 1000 kg of waste activated sludge if the moisture
content is 96%. What volume will it occupy if the solids content is increased to
8% by gravity thickening?
10.8 A gravity belt thickener (GBT) is proposed for thickening 7000 kg/day of waste
activated sludge containing 1% solids. The hydraulic loading rate to the GBT
will be 200 gpm/meter and the solids loading rate will be between 200 to
600 kg/1m # h2. The anticipated concentration of solids in the thickened sludge is
6%. Assume that 5 kg of dry polymer are required per Mg (1 Mg = 106 g) of dry
solids fed to the GBT. Determine the effective width of the belt, assuming that
25 gpm of wash water is required per meter of belt and determine the suspended
solids concentration in the centrate. Assume that the solids capture rate is 95%.
10.9 Design a conventional, single-stage anaerobic digester based on the following
parameters: daily raw sludge production = 650 kg; volatile solids in undigested
sludge = 70%; solids content in raw sludge = 5%; digestion period = 30 days;
storage volume for digested sludge = 90 days; volatile solids destruction during
digestion = 50%; and solids content of thickened, digested sludge = 7%.
10.10 An aerobic digester is to be designed to treat the waste activated sludge (WAS)
from a completely-mixed activated sludge process that does not have primary
clarifiers. Approximately 1300 kg of dry solids (WAS) are produced daily con-
taining 0.6% solids and 70% volatile solids and having a wet specific gravity of
1.10. The minimum design temperature is 60°F and a temperature correction
factor of 1.065 will be used in design. The detention time in the digester should
be between 18 and 22 days at a temperature of 20°C. Determine the following:
(a) design detention time (days) at 60°F,
(b) volume of the aerobic digester 1m32 if the sludge is thickened to 2.5%
solids prior to digestion,
(c) the quantity of oxygen (kg) required daily if 2.0 kg of O2 are required per
kg of volatile solids destroyed (assume that 60% of the volatile solids are
destroyed during aerobic digestion),
(d) the air flow rate 1m3/min2 if air contains 0.281 kg of oxygen per m3 and the
efficiency of the diffused aeration system is 5%,
(e) the volatile solids loading rate on the digester 31.6–3.2 kg/1d # m324, and
(f) the volume of air required for mixing 3m3/1min # 1000 m324.
10.11 A belt filter press (BFP) with an effective belt width of 2.0 meters is used for
dewatering 100 gpm of anaerobically digested sludge with a solids content of
7.0%. The polymer dosage is 6.5 gpm, containing 0.20% powdered polymer
by weight. The wash water consumption is 30 gpm per meter of effective belt
width. The cake solids content is 30%, and the suspended solids concentration
in the filtrate is 1800 mg/L. Calculate the hydraulic loading rate, solids loading
rate, and polymer dosage, and estimate the solids recovery.
CHAPTER
11
Air Pollution
11.1 INTRODUCTION
Objectives
Air pollution can be categorized into segments including personal, occupa-
In this chapter, you will tional, indoor, and ambient pollution. Personal air pollution is usually asso-
learn about: ciated with the contamination of respired air from cigarette, pipe, or cigar
Sources and effects of air smoking. Other activities that result in personal air pollution include glue
pollutants sniffing and other volatile-substance abuse practices. Occupational air pol-
Air pollution regulations lution from the contamination of ambient breathing air in industrial settings
where gases, vapors, and respirable particles are generated can result in poten-
Global environmental
tially high levels of exposure to workers. The Occupational Safety and Health
issues
Administration (OSHA) is tasked to ensure that the work environment is safe
Applications and design such that workers are protected from exposure to air toxics and irritants. Dur-
of air pollution control ing the late 1980s, the United States Congress empowered the Environmental
equipment Protection Agency (EPA) to assess the extent of the indoor radon problem
and to educate the public on hazards associated with radon exposure. Regula-
tions associated with indoor air pollution and secondary, or passive, cigarette
smoke were promulgated in the 1990s. This chapter focuses on ambient or
community air pollution, which can be defined as the introduction of pollu-
tants into the ambient air for durations which adversely affect human health,
the public welfare, and the ecological balance. It introduces ambient-air pol-
lution sources, associated environmental and health effects, and current regu-
latory practices. End-of-pipe unit operations and processes for treating air
streams laden with gases and particulates are explored.
Humans are totally dependent upon air for survival. Each day the aver-
age male ingests approximately 1.4 lb (0.64 kg) of food on a dry-weight basis
(NASA, 1991), drinks 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) of water (U.S. EPA, 2000), and inhales
40 lb (18.1 kg) of air (U.S. EPA, 1997). Principal factors causing air pollution to
increase include: (1) overdependence on the burning of fossil fuels for trans-
portation and energy needs, (2) population growth—according to U.S. Census
Bureau (2004 data), the world’s population will exceed 9 billion by the year
2050, (3) technological changes that result in new products, (4) a rising stan-
dard of living, and (5) societal changes such as urbanization, which is charac-
terized by the population shift from rural areas to the urban environment.
280 Chapter 11 Air Pollution
Table 11.1 Most Common Chemical Species Found in Air

Volume or
Substance mole %
N2 78% 79% N2
O2 20.9% 21% O2
Argon ' 1% Typically used in Engineering Calculations
CO2 0.033%
The major constituents of air are nitrogen, oxygen, argon, and carbon dioxide.
Table 11.1 provides the volumetric percent concentration of each gas. For most engi-
neering calculations, nitrogen and oxygen concentrations are assumed to be 79%
and 21% by volume, respectively.
11.2 HISTORY
Air pollution is not a new phenomenon. Historical evidence indicates that ambient
air pollution from copper smelting occurred in Turkey as early as the sixth millen-
nium B.C.E. Similarly, pollution from iron smelting is believed to have occurred dur-
ing the late third millennium B.C.E., and pollution from lead smelting during the rule
of the Roman Empire has been traced all over Europe. One could argue that air
pollution has been an issue since human species have controlled fire. Although
somewhat controversial, evidence found in Kenya indicates that the Homo erectus
species was intentionally using fire up to 1.5 million years ago. Tending of continu-
ous fire has been dated back 460,000 years in China. In 61 C.E. the Roman Philosopher
Seneca wrote: “As soon as I had gotten out of the heavy air of Rome, and from the
stink of the smoky chimneys thereof, which, being stirred, poured forth whatever
pestilential vapours and soot they had enclosed in them, I felt an alteration of my
disposition.”
Modern-era air pollution issues date to the early 13th century, when England’s
King Edward I recognized that nuisance fumes were produced from the burning of
sea coal. This awareness prompted the introduction of a law prohibiting the burning
of sea coal while Parliament was in session, a violation punishable by the torturing
and hanging of those who sold or burned the coal.
The air pollution generated as a result of the Industrial Revolution, the inven-
tion of Watt’s steam engine, and the burning of fossil fuels for power generation
motivated many smoke-control ordinances enacted in England and the United
States during the late 1800s and early 1900s. An era of air pollution episodes also
began in the early 1900s.
An air pollution episode is defined as a major air pollution disaster ensuing
from high levels of pollution that results in a large number of people dying. The first
reported modern-day air pollution episode was recorded in the Meuse Valley,
Belgium, where stable atmospheric conditions caused by a temperature inversion
and a high-pressure system caused a buildup of sulfur-containing compounds, metal-
lic oxides, and inorganic acids in the air of the densely populated, highly industri-
alized town. Reportedly, 63 people died, as well as a number of cattle. Many
people became ill, with symptoms including sore throats, shortness of breath,
cough, phlegm, nausea, and vomiting. Other notorious air pollution episodes
occurred in Donora, Pennsylvania (1948), London, England (1952), Bhopal, India
(1984), and New York City (September 11, 2001). Each incident deserves to be
recognized and remembered. Most of the disasters occurred in densely populated
Section 11.3 Regulatory Overview 281
or heavily industrialized areas under winter weather conditions characterized by

stagnant air and temperature inversion.
11.3 REGULATORY OVERVIEW

The Clean Air Act (CAA) promulgated in 1970 and the associated 1990 Amendments
empower the EPA to establish guidelines for controlling air pollution. Table 11.2 out-
lines the nine titles associated with the CAA, and an electronic version of the CAA
can be found at the EPA’s Office of Air and Radiation website (www.epa.gov/oar/
caa/), which also provides a useful overview of the CAA.
As a result of Title I, criteria pollutants were identified and National Ambient Air
Quality Standards (NAAQS) were set.The EPA identified six common air pollutants—
carbon monoxide (CO), nitrogen dioxide 1NO22, sulfur dioxide 1SO22, lead (Pb), par-
ticulate matter (PM), and ozone 1O32—as criteria pollutants. Primary and secondary
time-dependent concentration standards were set and are summarized in Table 11.3.
Primary standards are set to protect the general population, including chil-
dren, asthmatics, and the elderly, from health risks associated with exposure to crite-
ria pollutants in ambient air. The secondary standard is public welfare based and is
intended to prevent unacceptable effects on buildings and property, crops, and the
ecosystem. Primary and secondary standards are the same for all criteria pollutants
with exception to CO, for which no secondary standard exists, and SO2 , where the
secondary standard is 0.50 parts per million volume (ppmv) for a 3-hr time average.
Title III of the CAA defines National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air
Pollutants (NESHAPS). Standards are set both to protect public health and to pre-
vent undesirable effects on the environment, including aquatic life and wildlife. Cur-
rently the list includes 188 compounds, with the majority being classified as volatile
organic compounds (VOCs). VOCs listed include those commonly associated with
gasoline, such as benzene and toluene, and with the dry cleaning industry, such as
tetrachloroethylene. Metals containing lead, cadmium, and mercury are also listed.
The current listing of EPA-regulated hazardous air pollutants (HAPs) can be found
online at http://www.epa.gov/ttn/atw/188polls.html. HAP emission regulations are
determined differently for new and existing sources and are controlled by standards
dictated by maximum achievable control technologies (MACT) or generally available
control technologies (GACTs). If, after attainment of the MACT or GACT standards,
Table 11.2 Principal Initiatives of the 1990 Clean Air Act
Title I Focused on attaining national air quality standards for criteria pollutants
Title II Establish more stringent fuel standards for and control of tailpipe emissions from vehicles
Title III Aspires to reduce emissions of hazardous air pollutants from major sources
Title IV Control emissions of pollutants responsible for acid rain
Title V Outlines a comprehensive permitting program for stationary sources
Title VI Focused on global climate issues, such as protecting the stratospheric ozone layer by regulating the production
of substances with an ozone-depleting potential (CFCs, HCFCs) and monitoring greenhouse gases
Title VII Provisions regarding enforcement
Title VIII Miscellaneous provisions
Title IX Clean air research

Source: Available on the EPA Office of Air and Radiation website at http://www.epa.gov/oar/caa/.
Table 11.3 Summary of Primary National Ambient Air Quality Standards for Criteria Pollutants
Primary standard
Criteria
pollutant Time average Concentration
CO 8-hr (not to be exceeded more than once/year) 9 ppmv
1-hr (not to be exceeded more than once/year) 35 ppmv
NO2 Annual arithmetic mean 0.053 ppmv
SO2 Annual arithmetic mean 0.03 ppmv
24-hr average 0.14 ppmv
Pb Maximum quarterly average 1.5 mg>m3
PM2.5 Special and annual 15 mg>m3
98th percentile of the 24-hr average 35 mg>m3
PM10 24-hr average (not to be exceeded more than once/yr on average over 3 years) 150 mg>m3
O3 Maximum daily 1-hr average (to be exceeded no more than once/yr averaged over 0.12 ppmv
3 consecutive years)
3-year average of the annual fourth highest daily 8-hr average 0.08 ppmv
Source: Table adapted from www.epa.gov/air/criteria.html.
the EPA considers there is still health or environmental risk associated with contami-
nants emitted, more stringent emissions standards may be imposed.
11.4 SOURCES AND EFFECTS

Sources of air pollution can be categorized as either natural or anthropogenic (man-
made). Natural sources include particulates from erosion and emissions from fires,
volcanoes, and decaying vegetation. During the onset of each spring flowering sea-
son, many allergy sufferers would agree that pollen is a pollutant of major concern.
Major anthropogenic emission sources include motor vehicles, domestic heating
from stoves burning wood, oil, and coal, and agricultural processes including tilling
and applications of pesticide and herbicide. Major industrial pollutant contributors
include power plants, the pulp and paper industry, and coking and metal-processing
facilities including steel mills.
Air pollutants are defined as either primary or secondary, depending on their
origin. Primary pollutants are emitted directly into the atmosphere from a specific
source, while secondary pollutants are produced from chemical reactions between
both naturally occurring and anthropogenic gases and particles found in the atmos-
phere. Examples of primary pollutants include SO2 and CO. Examples of secondary
pollutants include O3 and acidic aerosols such as sulfuric and nitric acids.
11.4.1 Particulates
Particulate matter (PM) is classified as any dispersed airborne solid or liquid particle
that is larger than a single molecule and has an aerodynamic size of 2 * 10-10 m up to
5 * 10-4 m. (Refer to Section 11.5 for a definition of aerodynamic size.) Particu-
lates are generated by both anthropogenic and natural processes. Anthropogenic
particulate generation can occur from burning wood, gasoline, and diesel fuel. Many
Section 11.4 Sources and Effects 283
industrial sites produce particles through crushing and grinding operations. A variety
of agricultural practices, including plowing and burning off fields, produce particu-
lates. Both biotic and abiotic sources contribute to natural PM production. For exam-
ple, the decomposition of plants, radiological decomposition, dust storms, sea spray,
forest fires, and volcanic eruptions produce significant quantities of respirable PM.
Routinely, particles having an aerodynamic size less than 2.5 mm 11 mm = 10-6 m2
are classified as the fines fraction, while those with diameters greater than 2.5 mm and less
than 10 mm are considered coarse.The term PM 2.5 refers to particles that are … 2.5 mm in
diameter. PM 10 particles are defined as having a diameter … 10 mm. Fumes are particles
formed by either a chemical reaction or condensation having an aerodynamic diameter
between 0.001 μm and 1 mm. Mists, large compared to fumes, have an aerodynamic size
between 0.1 μm and 10 mm and are formed through condensation. The term aerosol
embodies a variety of particulates, including fumes, mist, smoke, and fog.
Reduced visibility is a common effect of PM. Particulate emissions also have
an effect on materials, vegetation, and animals. For example, particulates cause soil-
ing of painted surfaces, clothing, and curtains. Acidic aerosols are corrosive to
metal and cement surfaces and are potentially harmful to buildings, monuments,
and statues. Particulates containing fluorides, which are emitted naturally from
rock weathering and volcanoes as well as generated anthropogenically through
mining processes and coal combustion, can cause damage to plants. Animals that
graze on these plants may exhibit dental fluorosis. Particulates from mining, smelt-
ing, and coal-fired power plants may also contain arsenic, which has been shown to
cause arsenic poisoning in cattle and sheep.
Human health concerns associated with particulates are focused primarily on
particles of respirable size. It has been shown that particles ranging in size from 2.5
to 10 mm are most likely to be inhaled and trapped within the respiratory system.
Serendipitously, these particles are inherently difficult to remove with end-of-pipe
air pollution-control technology.
In humans, atmospheric particulates can interfere with the mechanisms which
normally clear the respiratory tract. Particles may also be intrinsically toxic because
of their chemical or physical properties, or they may serve as carriers of sorbed toxic
substances. Factors that determine the degree of damage include the exposure time,
concentration of particulates, synergistic effects, and particle size. Common medical
problems resulting from exposure to particles include respiratory infections, cardiac
diseases, bronchitis, asthma, pneumonia, lung cancer, cough, and pulmonary emphy-
sema. Additional effects include a decreased respiratory efficiency, diminished pul-
monary circulation, and the enlargement of the heart and blood vessels. Allergic skin
and eye irritation may also occur. Health and environmental concerns associated
with particulate emissions and other criteria pollutants are summarized in Table 11.4.
11.4.2 Nitrogen Oxides (NOx )

Nitrogen oxides, including nitric oxide (NO) and nitrogen dioxide 1NO22, are
formed during any high-temperature combustion process, as exemplified by the
burning of gasoline within automotive internal-combustion engines, and during
the combustion of fossil fuels, natural gas, coal, and oil for generating electricity.
NOx compounds are important precursors to ozone and acid rain formation. NO2
is a reddish-brown, highly reactive gas that has been shown to suppress growth of
some crops and affect the lung function of children with preexisting respiratory ill-
ness, such as asthma. In the atmosphere, NO2 reacts with water vapor to form nitric
acid 1HNO32, a form of acid rain. The reaction is as follows: 3 NO21g2 + H2O :
2 HNO31aq2 + NO1g2 . Since NO2 also absorbs visible light, it contributes to a reduc-
tion in visibility.
Table 11.4 Health and Environmental Effects from Exposure to Criteria Pollutants
Criteria Environmental/property
pollutant Affected body system Health effects effects
Carbon Circulatory—pollutant interferes • CO poisoning • None
monoxide with oxygen transfer to the body • Angina pectoris
• Brain damage
• Asphyxiation
Lead Organs and soft tissue (blood, • Anemia • Harmful to wildlife

nervous and renal systems)— • Hypertension
pollutant accumulates in bones • Cancer
and soft tissue • Neurological disorder
(cerebral palsy, seizure
disorders)
• Digestive problems
Nitrogen Respiratory—toxic at high levels • Asthma • Acid rain precursor
dioxide • Compromised immunity • Reduced visibility
to infectious disease • Acidic aerosols can damage
buildings and monuments
Particulate Lower respiratory system • Asthma • Reduced visibility

matter • Bronchitis • Soil surfaces
• Cancer
• Nose and throat irritant
Ozone Respiratory • Lung and throat irritant • Damages plants and trees
• Eye irritant • Reduce visibility
• Reduced resistance to • Damages rubber
infection
Sulfur Respiratory • Asthma • Precursor to acid rain

dioxide • Bronchitis • Reduced visibility
• Heart attack • Damages trees and lakes
• Damages statues and
buildings
Source: Adapted from Franek and DeRose, 2003, Chapter 2, Human Health and Environmental Effects of Air Pollution, Figure 2.1.
11.4.3 Carbon Monoxide (CO)

Carbon monoxide is a colorless, odorless gas that is commonly emitted as a product of
incomplete combustion of gasoline, natural gas, coal, oil, and other hydrocarbons.There
is no known detrimental effect of CO on material surfaces and no harmful effect on
higher plant life when the concentration is below 100 ppmv. The toxic effect of CO on
humans is well understood.When inhaled, CO is absorbed by the lungs and reacts with
hemoglobin to form carboxyhemoglobin (COHb), thus reducing the carrying capacity
of oxygen to the body. Hemoglobin has an affinity for CO approximately 240 times its
affinity for O2 . The concentration of COHb in the body is directly proportional to the
concentration of CO inhaled. At a CO concentration of 100 ppmv, most people experi-
ence dizziness and headaches. Concentrations above 750 ppmv will cause death.
11.4.4 Sulfur Oxides (SOx )

Sulfur oxides are formed during the burning of coal and oil to generate power and
are also emitted from industrial processes, such as paper and metal production. The
dominant SOx species formed are sulfur dioxide 1SO22 and sulfur trioxide 1SO32,
such that the ratio of SO2 :SO3 typically observed during the combustion of fossil
fuels ranges from 40:1 to 80:1 (Wark, et al. 1998). Acidic aerosols, such as sulfuric
acid 1H 2SO42, are formed when SO2 reacts with water. The reaction series can be
generalized as follows:
1
SO21g2 + O : SO31g2
2 21g2
SO31g2 + H 2O : H 2SO4 (11.1)
Sulfuric acid aerosols significantly contribute to a decrease in visibility and, along

with NOx , are a major contributor to the acid rain phenomenon. With the passage
of the 1990 CAA Amendments (Title IV) and the expectation of reductions in NOx
and SOx emissions as a consequence, the EPA predicted that the average annual vis-
ibility would increase by 6 miles (9.7 km) in the southeastern United States by the
year 2010.
Metal corrosion is increased in the presence of sulfuric acid. Sulfur dioxide
gas has also been shown to increase the drying time of paint and reduce the dura-
bility of the painted surface. While active outdoors, the inhalation of SO2 can cause
respiratory distress for asthmatic children and adults. Epidemiological studies have
shown that the presence of SO2 in an environment containing particulate matter
and water vapor is conducive to the formation of sulfuric acid and increases the
irritant response associated with the pollutant.
11.4.5 Lead
Historically, the burning of leaded gasoline was the primary source for lead emission
into the atmosphere.As a result of the 1970 CAA, lead was phased out of gas, and now
stationary sources associated with lead storage battery manufacturing, iron and steel
production, lead smelting, and the painting of cars and houses are the primary emit-
ters of lead. Lead compounds tend both to persist and to bioaccumulate in the envi-
ronment. In humans, low-level lead poisoning results in kidney and neurological cell
damage. Lead may also contribute to hypertension and resulting heart disease.
Children are particularly sensitive to the effects of lead exposure, and in animal stud-
ies, lead has been shown to reduce fertility and cause birth defects.
11.4.6 Ozone 1O32

Ozone, a photochemical oxidant, is a secondary pollutant formed by a series of reac-
tions involving volatile organic hydrocarbons (VOCs) and NOx . Photochemical smog
formation is initiated by the production of nitric oxide (NO) through the photolytic
decomposition of NO2 into NO and O. In general NO2 , O2 , and VOCs, combined
with energy from the sun, produce photochemical smog; a mixture of O3 , HNO3 ,
organics, and free radicals.
Ozone exposure has been linked to increased hospital visits resulting from res-
piratory distress. Ozone exposure aggravates preexisting conditions, such as asthma,
and has been shown to increase coughing, chest pain, and susceptibility to respiratory
infection. Ozone also affects the growth and yield of vegetation and may increase a
plant’s susceptibility to disease. Visible injury to leaves may also be apparent. Both
natural and synthetic rubber polymers are susceptible to cracking and hardening
from contact with ozone. Ozone has been shown to reduce the life of tires and out-
door electrical conduit covering. Ozone exposure damages nylon and acrylic fibers
and causes dye colors to fade in fabrics.
11.4.7 Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs)

VOCs contribute to the formation of ozone and other smog-related photochemical
oxidants. VOCs are emitted from the combustion of fuels and from a variety of indus-
trial settings. For example, styrene, methyl ethyl ketone, and acetone are emitted
during the manufacture of fiberglass boats or bathtubs. Chlorofluorocarbons and
chlorotoluene are emitted during the manufacture of electronics and computers. Dur-
ing the painting of a car or an airplane, a variety of VOCs are emitted, including xylene,
butanol, and acetone. The realization that VOCs and NOx are emitted simultaneously
from internal-combustion engines (passenger vehicles) helps us understand the diur-
nal ozone concentrations observed in the troposphere during summer months.
Some VOCs, including benzene and ethylbenzene (gasoline constituents),
trichloroethylene, formaldehyde, methylene chloride, vinyl chloride, and chloroform
(all on the EPA priority hazardous air pollutant list - 40 CFR Part 63), are well
established or suspected as human carcinogens, and there is evidence that formalde-
hyde and ethylene are harmful to plant life.
Title VI of the CAA is focused on global atmospheric issues, including deple-
tion of stratospheric ozone and global warming. Ratification of the Montreal Pro-
tocol by 27 countries in 1987 created an international consortium committed to
limiting and eliminating the production of ozone-depleting chemicals, primarily
chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs). In the United States, the 1990 CAA amendments
required that CFC production be limited and by 1996 production of many ozone-
depleting substances ended. The EPA reports (U.S. EPA, 2007) that since 1998, the
ozone layer has not grown thinner over most of the world and appears to be recov-
ering because of the reductions in emissions of ozone-depleting substances.
Although controversial, results from atmospheric modeling efforts suggest that the
stratospheric ozone layer over the Antarctic should return to pre-1980 levels by
about 2075.
11.4.8 The Greenhouse Effect and Global Climate Change

Global warming theory refers to an average increase in temperature near the earth’s
surface that potentially contributes to changes in global climate patterns. Although
climate fluctuations are well documented throughout earth’s history, many scientists
believe that recent additions of anthropogenic greenhouse gases are increasing the
average troposphere temperature by altering the steady-state conditions achieved
through the greenhouse effect. Key greenhouse gases include carbon dioxide 1CO22,
water vapor 1H 2O2, methane 1CH 42, nitrous oxides 1N2O2, and several anthro-
pogenic gases (i.e., gases that do not occur naturally), such as chlorofluorocarbons
(CFCs), hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFC), hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs), sulfur
hexafluoride 1SF62, bromo- and chlorocarbons, and perfluorocarbons (PFCs). These
greenhouse-gas emissions are thought to be altering the natural carbon cycle in our
atmosphere, causing a net increase of carbon from solid to the gas phase and conse-
quently a net increase in greenhouse gas concentration in our atmosphere.
The greenhouse effect is a naturally occurring process. It causes the average
global temperature to be approximately 60°F and thereby makes the earth’s surface
inhabitable. To understand the greenhouse effect, consider the macro scale energy
balance shown in Figure 11.1. Energy from solar radiation has a mean wavelength of
0.5 mm and includes ultraviolet radiation 1UV, 0.001–0.4 mm2, visible radiation
(light, 0.4–0.7 mm), and infrared radiation 1IR, 0.7–100 mm2. A significant portion
of incoming solar radiation, approximately 31 percent, is backscattered by air mole-
cules, reflected by clouds and the earth’s surface (reflective surfaces such as ice,
Space
SUN
Incoming short wave
solar radiation
⬃343W/m2 Outgoing
longwave
radiation
Atmosphere
(Location of greenhouse gases
that absorb IR energy)
Back-scatter
by air Absorption by
clouds, water
Reflected by clouds vapor and gases
and earth’s surface
Energy emissions by
clouds, water vapor
and gases
Absorbed by water vapor,
clouds, dust, ozone
Longwave
radiation Surface gains more heat
(and IR is emitted again)
from IR reemitted by
⬃49% absorbed by Earth’s greenhouse gases
land and water (⬃168 W/m2)
Earth
Figure 11.1
Summary of the greenhouse gas effect and potential for global warming.
snow, sand, and water). This reflective property, known as the albedo, can change as
earth’s surface becomes more or less reflective. Plausible destinations for the 69%
that does not get reflected include absorption by the stratospheric ozone layer
1 ' 19%2, tropospheric clouds 1 ' 4%2, or the earth’s surface 1 ' 47%2.
The average energy that reaches a specified area of the earth’s surface per
unit time is defined as insolation. Because the majority of the sun’s UV energy
is absorbed by the stratospheric ozone layer, the majority of the insolation that
reaches the earth is in the visible region. For equilibrium to occur, the incoming
solar radiation must be balanced by the outgoing radiation (terrestrial radiation)
from the earth. The average temperature of the earth is about 300 K, and thus it pri-
marily emits infrared radiation having an average wavelength of 10 mm. The tem-
perature of the earth’s surface predicted from this steady-state radiative equilibrium
is considerably lower than the actual average temperature on earth by about 30ºC
(Kellogg, 1996; Peixoto and Oort, 1992; Henderson-Seller and Robinson, 1986). This
difference is caused by the presence of IR energy-absorbing compounds in our
atmosphere. Trace atmospheric compounds (as compared to N2 and O2), such as
water vapor, nitrous oxide, methane, and carbon dioxide, are almost transparent to
solar UV energy but effectively absorb IR radiation and then reradiate in many
wavelengths in all directions. Some of this energy is redirected downward, allowing
heating of the earth’s atmosphere and surface. This is the greenhouse effect. The
upward shift in earth’s temperature caused by the greenhouse effect is analogous
to covering one’s body with a blanket on a cold winter night. The blanketing
greenhouse gases do not completely prevent heat emission into space, but they
make it more difficult, causing the covered layer’s surface equilibrium tempera-
ture to rise.
To understand the potential problem of global warming, consider both natural
and anthropogenic sources as well as sinks for CO2 and other greenhouse gases.
CO2 is released into the environment by a variety of natural events, including
(1) volcanic eruptions, (2) forest fires, (3) decomposition of vegetative matter, and
(4) mammalian respiration. Removal of atmospheric CO2 also occurs naturally
through the photosynthesis process and by absorption of CO2 by water bodies. Such
natural processes help keep atmospheric CO2 concentrations reasonably balanced.
Some scientists argue that, since the invention of Watt’s steam engine and the
resulting Industrial Revolution that began in the late 1700s, the CO2 balance has
been disturbed and atmospheric greenhouse gas concentrations have increased as
a result of human interference. In fact, a variety of researchers have documented
an increase in the equilibrium atmospheric CO2 concentration from approximately
228 ppmv in the preindustrial era to about 364 ppmv in 1997 (Hansen et al., 1998;
Keeling and Whorf, 1998). Similar increases have been observed for atmospheric
concentrations of both CH 4 and nitrous oxide 1N2O2. Methane concentrations in
the preindustrial era averaged around 700 parts per billion volume (ppbv), and in
1994 they were about 1721 ppbv. During the same period, nitrous oxide increased
from about 275 to 312 ppbv (Houghton et al., 1996). In effect, this would allow
earth’s atmosphere to behave as a “thicker blanket,” causing the earth’s mean tem-
perature to rise.
Figure 11.2. provides a historical perspective of the previous 420,000 years
of global CO2 and CH 4 concentrations, as well as the temperature difference as
compared to the mean recent time average. These palaeoclimate data, derived
from ice cores drilled at the Russian Vostok station in East Antarctica, provide
documentation of the climate variability on Earth, punctuated by a series of
glacial–interglacial climate changes with cycles that last about 100,000 years.
These data confirm a strong correlation between greenhouse gases, such as CO2
and CH 4 , and temperatures in the Antarctic (Petit et al., 1999).
Figure 11.2 800

CH4 - ppbv
CH4 - ppbv
Climate records from the 700

600
Vostok ice core spanning
500
the previous 420,000 years
400
(Source: Petit et al., 1999). 300
300
CO2 - ppmv
CO2 - ppmv
(WRT mean recent value)
250
200
Temp diff ºC
150
5 Temp diff ºC (WRT mean recent time value)
0
5
10
400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0
Thousands of years before present (Kyr BP)
Section 11.5 Control of Particulate Matter from Stationary Sources 289
11.5 CONTROL OF PARTICULATE MATTER FROM STATIONARY SOURCES

Stationary sources for particulate emissions can be categorized as either point or
fugitive (nonpoint). Sources that are unconfined in a duct or stack prior to their
release are considered fugitive. Examples of fugitive sources include pressure-relief
valves, flanges, open-ended lines, pump seals, and valves. Point sources include those
typically found in industrial processes, such as combustion stacks and distillation
systems. Additional point-source emissions are derived from wastewater treatment
facilities, landfills, and the handling and loading of materials. Stationary-source emis-
sions can be controlled through pollution-prevention activities or application of
appropriate “end-of-pipe” control technology. Pollution-prevention law was included
in the 1996 RCRA legislation and the Toxic Substance Control Act of 1976 and high-
lighted in the 1990 Pollution Prevention Act. The EPA encourages industries to
implement pollution-prevention activities by promoting the EPA 33/50 program
(reduction of toxic chemicals), the Green Lights Program (use of efficient lighting),
and the National Industrial Competitiveness through Energy, Environment and
Economics 1NICE32 program (conducting large-scale demonstration projects).
Shen (1995), defined five categories of pollution-prevention activities: (1) improve-
ment of plant operations, characterized by regular preventive maintenance and
employee training programs; (2) in-process recycling, focused on the direct reuse of accu-
mulated wastes and the reclamation and reuse of solvents; (3) process modifications,
including improved control over critical process variables such as temperature and pres-
sure; (4) materials and products substitutions, exemplified by the use of less toxic solvents
and the production of recyclable products; and (5) use of materials separation processes,
such as supercritical fluid extraction, ultrafiltration, and reverse osmosis, during the pro-
duction of chemicals and the recovery of waste products for recycling.
Anthropogenic generation of aerosols includes industrial and motor-vehicle
emissions, electric power generation, and municipal solid waste generation. Natural
emissions include ocean salt, volcanic ash, erosion, and forest fires. Particle size, shape,
and density influence their aerodynamic properties, effect on human health, and visi-
bility. Particulate control technology is focused on removing particles having a diame-
ter of 10 μm or less. Regulation and thus removal are focused on this size range because
these particles are considered respirable, as they can avoid entrapment by the body’s
respiratory filters and penetrate deeply into the lungs. Commonly used particulate con-
trol devices include settling chambers, venturi scrubbers, cyclones, fabric filters, and
electrostatic precipitators (ESPs). Key exhaust-gas characteristics that influence both
the type of control process implemented and its design include exhaust-gas tempera-
ture, volumetric flow rate, corrosivity, composition, moisture content, particle-size dis-
tribution, and the regulation-driven required efficiency of removal.
For particulate removal devices, the size of the particle affects the efficiency of
removal. As most particles are not spherical, their diameters are often described by
their aerodynamic behavior or size.The aerodynamic size of a particle is defined as the
diameter of a spherical particle with settling velocity equal to that of the particle in
question, but having a density of 1 g/cm3. Therefore particles that have similar size and
shape, yet differ in densities, will be characterized by differing aerodynamic diameters.
Collection efficiency increases with particle size. For one device it is given as:
Cin - Cout
h1%2 = * 100 (11.2)
Cin
where h is the collection efficiency and Cin and Cout represent the inlet and effluent
contaminant concentrations associated with the control technology. Typically, C is
expressed in mg/m3 or ppmv.
Among the various types of particulate control equipment are mechanical separa-
tors, typified by settling chambers and cyclones, electrostatic precipitators, fabric filters
such as baghouses, and wet scrubbers.The remainder of this section will briefly describe
how settling chambers and electrostatic precipitators work and provide general design
parameters and associated equations that can be used to predict removal efficiencies.
11.5.1 Mechanical Separators—Settling Chambers

Gravity settling chambers are used to remove the large-particle fraction from gas
streams. Collection in a settling chamber depends on the settling velocity (also
referred to as Stokes’ velocity) of the particles being removed. The terminal settling
velocity for particles can be estimated as:
g1rp - r2d2
vs = B R (11.3)
18 m
where:
vs =
terminal settling velocity or Stokes’ settling velocity, m/s,
g =
gravitational acceleration, 9.81 m/s2,
rp =
particle density, kg/m3,
r =
density of the displaced fluid (in environmental applications, this will
frequently be air), kg/m3,
d = particle diameter, m, and
m = fluid viscosity, kg/1m # s2.
EXAMPLE 11.1
Stokes’ law application
Assume a point-source particulate emission having an effective stack height of 200 feet.
The plume contains particles having a density of 2.3 g/cm3, the stack-gas temperature is
80ºF, and the wind speed is constant at 5 mph. Assuming the terrain is flat, calculate the
distance downwind that a 5-, 10-, and 100-mm particle will travel.
Solution
Determine the Stokes’ settling velocity for each size particle using Equation (11.3).
At 80ºF, the viscosity and density for air are assumed as 6.66 * 10-2 kg/1m # hr2 and
0.0012 g/cm3, respectively. For the 5-mm particle, Stokes’ equation predicts:
g1rp - r2d2
vs = B R
18 m
m g g -6 1 kg 1003 cm3
9.81 ¢ 2.3 - 0.0012 ≤ 15 * 10 m22
* *
s2 cm3 cm3 1000 g 1 m3
vs 15 mm2 =
kg 1 hr
18a6.66 * 10-2 # b
m hr 3600 s
m
= 1.69 * 10-3
s
Similarly, Stokes’ velocity can be determined for the 10- and 100-mm particles:
vs 110 mm2 = 6.67 * 10-3 m/s
vs 1100 mm2 = 6.67 * 10-1 m/s
Converting the average wind speed to m/s yields
1 hr 5280 ft 1m m
5 mph * * * = 2.235
3600 s 1 mi 3.281 ft s
The height each particle must drop is
1m
200 ft * L 61 m
3.281 ft
The time for each particle to drop is given by t = H/vs and the distance traveled
is equal to t times the average wind speed. Results are tabulated for each particle size
below.
H
Travel time, t =
Particle diameter vs Distance traveled,
(␮ m) (sec) D = t * wind speed (m)
5 36,100 8.07 * 104
10 9,150 2.05 * 104
100 91.5 205
Settling chambers are used to remove the relatively large particles in a gas
stream and are often used as a precleaner. Particles with diameters greater than 50 μm
to 100 mm are effectively removed, and settling chambers are typically designed
having a velocity less than or equal to 3 m/s (10 fps), best results being obtained
with velocities less than 0.3 m/s (1 fps). The simple schematic of a settling cham-
ber shown in Figure 11.3 can be used to consider the fate of a particle in a settling
chamber and to determine the minimum particle size that can theoretically be
removed with 100% efficiency. For a particle that enters the top of the collector
and is removed, the time for the particle to fall the collector height, H, must be
less than or equal to the time of the horizontal movement within the collector
such that:
time for particle to fall H distance = time of horizontal movement
H L
t = =
vs V
VH
vs =
L
where L is the length of the hopper and V is the horizontal flow- through velocity. Sub-
stituting this value for Stokes’ velocity into Equation (11.3), neglecting the density of
air (since it is very small compared to the density of the solid), and solving for the par-
ticle diameter that is 100% removed yields:
18 mHV 0.5
D = B R (11.4)
gLrp
Notice that reducing the H/L ratio will result in removing smaller particles.
For particles sizes below that predicted by Equation (11.4), the removal effi-
ciency, h, for laminar-flow situations is determined by:
vsLW
h = 100 (11.5)
Q
where Q = volumetric flow rate; m3/min 1ft3/s2.
Figure 11.3 L
Schematic of particle motion V
V
in a settling chamber.
Air inlet H
vs
Air outlet
Dust hopper
EXAMPLE 11.2
Settling chamber design
Design a settling chamber to collect particles 50 mm in diameter and 2000 kg/m3 in
density from an air stream with a volumetric flow of 1.5 m3/s. The chamber is to be
2.0 m in width and 2.0 m in height.
a. How long must the chamber be to give theoretical perfect collection
efficiency?
b. Determine the collection efficiency for particles of the same density that
are 25 mm in diameter.
Solution part a
Using Stokes’ law, determine the terminal settling velocity for the 50-mm particle.
Assume that the density and viscosity of air are 1.2 kg/m3 and 6.66 * 10-2 kg/1m # hr2,
respectively.
g1rp - r2d2
vs = B R
18 m
m kg kg
9.81 2
¢ 2000 3 - 1.2 3 ≤ 150 * 10-6 m22
s m m m
vs 150 mm2 = = 0.147
kg 1 hr s
18a6.66 * 10-2 ≤
m # hr 3600 s
Solve Equation (11.5) for the length of chamber required for theoretically
removing 100% of the 50-mm particles.
vsLW
h = 100
Q
m3
¢ 1.5 ≤ 11002
Qh s
L = = = 5.1 m
100vsW m
11002 ¢ 0.147 ≤ 12 m2
s
Solution part b
For the 25-mm particle, similarly, use Stokes’ law to determine the terminal settling
velocity.
g1rp - r2d2
vs = B R
18 m
m kg kg
9.81 2
¢ 2000 3 - 1.2 3 ≤ 125 * 10-6 m22
s m m m
vs 125 mm2 = = 0.037
kg 1 hr s
18a6.66 * 10-2 # b
m hr 3600 s
Use Equation (11.5) to determine the removal efficiency for the 25-mm particles.
m
a0.037 b15.1 m212 m2
vsLW s
h = 100 = 100 = 25%
Q m3
1.5
s
So, only 25% of the particles having a diameter of 25 mm are removed by the
settling chamber.
11.5.2 Electrostatic Precipitators (ESPs)

Electrostatic attraction is used to separate the particles from the gas stream in an
electrostatic precipitator (ESP). ESPs establish a field (or corona) to charge parti-
cles. The corona generates electrons, which are readily adsorbed by electronegative
gases such as oxygen or sulfur dioxide. The ions produced are adsorbed onto the
PM to be removed. The charged PM is passed through an electric field of grounded
collecting electrodes. The charged particles migrate toward the oppositely charged
electrode at right angles (perpendicular to the bulk gas flow) and are collected on
the electrodes (plates). Liquid particles are removed from the electrode by gravity
flow. Solid particles are removed by rapping or mechanically striking the plates
with a sharp, hammerlike blow. In some instances, water is used to flush solid and
liquid PM from the electrodes. Spacing between collecting electrodes is typically
8 to 10 inches (20 to 25 cm), typical collecting electrode length is between 20 and
Clean gas out
Negatively charged wire

Negative electrode connected
to electrical power source
Figure 11.4
Schematic of an electrostatic
Dry gas in
precipitator.
(Source: U.S. EPA, Principles
and Practices of Air Pollution Grounded collecting plate
Control, 2003). with positive charge Hopper to discharge
30 ft (6.1 and 9.1 m), and collecting electrode height commonly ranges between 30
and 40 ft (9.1 and 12.1 m). A schematic of an ESP is shown in Figure 11.4.
Advantages associated with ESP technology that make it popular in industry
(especially coal-fired electric-power generators) include:
1. Ability to handle large gas volumes with small pressure drops, up to 4 * 106
scfm 11.1 * 105 m3/min2.
2. Ability to handle small gas volumetric flow rates, exemplified by household air
conditioning systems.
3. High removal of both wet and dry small-diameter particles (removal efficiencies
can be 99% to 99.9%).
4. Ability to operate within a wide range of temperature.
5. Low operation and maintenance (O&M) costs, a result of low power require-
ment because of relatively low pressure drop (0.1 to 0.5 in. of H 2O).
6. Acts only on the particle, not on the gas stream.
Disadvantages for ESPs include the following:
1. Certain types of dust cannot be removed efficiently. Particles with electrical
resistivity less than 104 ohm-cm or greater than 1010 ohm-cm are not effectively
removed. Particles with low resistivity, such as carbon dust, too readily give up
their negative charge to the collecting electrode, assuming a positive charge
which repels them back into the main gas stream (reentrainment). Particles with
high resistivity, such as powdered sulfur, will not give up their negative charge,
and a layer of dust builds up on the collecting electrode, acting as an insulator.
The potential drop across the layer builds up, causing a “back discharge” or
“back corona.” In these instances, removal may occur only if conditioning agents
such as water vapor, ammonia, or sulfur trioxide are added to change resistivity.
2. Gas pollutants are not collected.

3. Inadaptibility to varying process conditions, such as PM load and volumetric
flow.
4. High capital cost.
5. Large space requirements.
6. Generation of ozone, which is undesirable for household air conditioning systems.
Information required for ESP design include characterization of emission
source, including particle distribution, gas composition, temperature and pressure,
particle-size distribution, dust concentration and resistivity, corrosive properties of
gas and particulates, and the volumetric flow rate. The Deutsch-Anderson equation
(Deutsch, 1922; Anderson, 1924) provides an estimate of collection efficiency of an
ESP under ideal conditions in relation to various operating parameters.
Av
h = 1 - expa - b (11.6)
Q
where:
A = area of collection electrodes, m2
v = drift velocity of particles towards the plates as estimated by Equation
(11.7) below, m/s
Q = volumetric flow rate, m3/s
Any internally consistent set of units must be used in the Deutsch-Anderson
equation.
The speed at which a charged particle migrates towards the collection elec-
trode is referred to as the particle-migration velocity or the drift velocity. Variables
influencing the magnitude of the drift velocity include particle size, the strength of
the electric field, and the viscosity of the gas. For standard air at 60ºF, the drift veloc-
ity can be estimated as:
v = 8.42 * 10-3E 2dP (11.7)
where:
v = drift velocity, fps,
d = particle diameter, mm,
E = potential applied to discharge electrodes, kV/in., and
3k
P = , where k = dielectric constant for the particle
k + 2
EXAMPLE 11.3
Electrostatic precipitator design
Process exhaust gas with a volumetric flow rate of 500,000 cfm that contains 2 gr/ft3
(recall that gr is the abbreviation for grain; 1 lb = 7000 gr) of cement PM is to be
treated with an ESP. Regulatory requirements dictate that the outlet PM concen-
tration must be … 0.02 gr/ft3. Assume a plate-to-plate spacing of 8 inches and an
applied voltage of 12,000 volts. The smallest particles in the gas stream are 2 mm in
diameter, and all particles have a dielectric constant of 5. Estimate (a) the particle
drift velocity and (b) the required collection plate area to meet regulations. Assume
a system temperature of 60ºF.
Solution part a
Knowing the dielectric constant for the dust, calculate the constant P.
3k 3152
P = = = 2.14
k + 2 5 + 2
Use Equation (11.7) to estimate the drift velocity for 2-mm particles.
v = 8.42 * 10-3 E 2 dP
1 kV 1 2
= 8.42 * 10 -3 a12,000 V * * b 12 mm212.142
1000 V 4 in.
ft
v = 0.32
s
Solution part b
Use the Deutsch-Anderson equation [Equation (11.6)] to determine the required
collector-plate surface area.
First, determine the required removal efficiency using Equation (11.2):
gr
12 - 0.022
PM in - PM out ft3
h = = = 0.99 or 99%
PM in gr
2
ft3
Convert units for the volumetric flow rate:
ft3 1 min ft3

Q = 500,000 * = 8,333
min 60 s s
Solve the Deutsch-Anderson Equation for collector area, A:
Av
h = 1 - expa - b
Q
Av
1 - h = expa - b
Q
Av
ln11 - h2 = -
Q
ft
- 8,333
-Q s
A = 3ln11 - h24 = 3ln11 - 0.9924
v ft
0.32
s
A = 119,922 ft2 of collection area required

Section 11.6 Gas and Vapor Control Technology 297
If a plate length of 30 ft with height of 40 ft is used, the plate area can be calcu-
lated. Recognize that both sides of the plates are utilized as collectors:
plate collection area = A plate = 130 ft * 40 ft2 * 2 = 2400 ft2
To determine the number of plates required:

A
number of plates required - 1 =
A plate
119,922 ft2
number of plates required - 1 =
ft2
2400
plate
number of plates needed = 51
11.6 GAS AND VAPOR CONTROL TECHNOLOGY

A number of industries are regulated by the EPA to control hazardous air pollu-
tant point-source emissions. For example, the National Emission Standards for
Hazardous Air Pollutants for Source Categories listed in 40 CFR Part 63 include
provisions for dry cleaning facilities emitting perchloroethylene (Subpart M) and
for air pollutants from petroleum refineries (Subpart CC), pharmaceuticals pro-
duction (Subpart GGG), and pesticide active ingredient production (Subpart
MMM). Incineration and absorption are two common mitigation technologies used
to remove hazardous gases from air streams. Both technologies are described
briefly in the sections that follow.
11.6.1 Incineration
Incineration is a high-efficiency process, occurring in the presence of oxygen, that
removes combustible pollutants (gases, vapors, or odors) from contaminated air and
other gas streams by raising the system temperature sufficiently high to autoignite
targeted pollutants, converting them primarily into carbon dioxide and water. It is
effective in streams containing either high or low concentration of contaminants.
Odorous pollutants (mercaptans, cyanide gases) and organic aerosol plumes, gases,
and vapors are effectively destroyed.
Thermal and catalytic are two common incinerator classes. Thermal incinera-
tors are also referred to as thermal oxidizers or direct-flame incinerators. If incin-
erators are properly designed, destruction efficiencies can be as high as 99.99%.
Critical design variables include combustion-chamber temperature, turbulence (or
degree of mixing), residence time, and concentration and type of contaminants
(U.S. EPA, 1992). Commonly, the factors affecting incinerator performance are
referred to as the 3 Ts (Time, Temperature, Turbulence). The EPA (1992) recom-
mends a residence time of 0.75 seconds combined with a chamber temperature of
1600ºF to effectively control a stream contaminated with VOCs. If halogenated
VOCs are present, the combustion temperature should be 2000ºF at a residence
time of 1 second. Use of a scrubber downstream of the incinerator to control the
acid gas effluent is desirable.
Advantages of thermal incinerators include:

1. When designed properly, removal of combustible pollutants is essentially
complete.
2. Equipment is moderately adaptable to changes in flow and contaminant
concentrations.
3. Performance is constant and predictable.
Disadvantages of incineration include:
1. High operating and capital costs.
2. Formation of secondary products during incineration of compounds contain-
ing elements other than carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen (such as chlorine and
sulfur), causing production of acidic gases that result in corrosion problems.
Potential emissions include CO, NOx , SOx , HCl, Cl 2 , heavy metals, aldehydes,
and furans.
3. Public opposition due to concern about emissions.
Catalytic and thermal incineration processes are very similar. The primary
difference is that, in the catalytic process, once the process gases pass through the
flame, they pass over a catalyst, which increases the rate of reaction and allows
the combustion chamber to operate at lower temperatures than those associated
with thermal incineration and with potentially less auxiliary fuel. Common cata-
lyst materials used for VOC oxidation include noble metals such as platinum,
palladium, and rhodium, which are frequently deposited on an aluminum oxide
(alumina) honeycomb support. Gas streams containing particulate matter are
often difficult to treat by catalytic incineration, because PM of any size may coat
the reactive sites on the catalyst, rendering it ineffective. This undesirable effect
from PM is referred to as blinding. Catalysts can also be deactivated by certain
gases and by high temperatures.
Typical emission-stream volumetric flow rates treated by catalytic incinerators
are similar to those treated by the thermal incineration process. As expected, opera-
tion temperatures are lower in catalytic than thermal incinerators. Typical incinera-
tion temperatures when a catalyst is used range from 320º to 430ºC (600º to 800ºF).
Capital costs for catalytic units are higher than for thermal systems, while operating
costs are lower because less supplemental fuel is needed (EPA-452/F-03-018).
Cooper and Alley (1994) and AWMA (1992) summarize the advantages and
disadvantages of catalytic incinerators versus other types of incinerators. Advan-
tages include a comparative reduction in required fuel and operating temperature, a
reduced risk of fire and flashbacks, and a reduction in combustion-chamber size.
Disadvantages include a relatively high capital cost and an inability of the catalytic
system to deal with emissions laden with PM, so that PM must be removed before
vapors are treated.
11.6.2 Absorption—Packed-Bed Scrubbers and Flue Gas Desulfurization

Absorption process equipment is used to control vapors in gas streams. When
used to control emissions of inorganic gases such as SOx or HCl, it is often
referred to as a “wet scrubber” or an “acid gas scrubber.” Absorption occurs when
a soluble gas or a mixture of soluble gases is contacted by and dissolved in a liquid
solvent. Physical absorption occurs when the soluble gas is dissolved into the liq-
uid phase, and chemical absorption when the absorbed compound and solvent
react. The driving force for this mass-transfer process is governed by the differ-
ence between the actual solute concentration in the solvent and the equilibrium
concentration. A variety of unit operation configurations take advantage of the

absorption process, including packed beds/packed towers, plate (or tray) columns,
venturi scrubbers, and spray towers. Packed towers are commonly used to control
VOC emissions, and spray towers (wet and dry) are often used to control acid-gas
emissions.
The extent of mass transfer, or absorption, depends on a properly designed
system that provides adequate surface area and contact time. Removal efficiencies
also depend on the solubility of the solute in the chosen scrubbing liquid. For con-
trol of inorganic contaminant-gas emissions and VOCs with relatively high water
solubilities, water is commonly used as the solvent. Hydrocarbon oils are frequently
used as the scrubbing liquid for hydrophobic VOCs. Other variables that control
the absorption rate include the concentration of contaminant and the liquid-to-gas
ratio. The rate of absorption is increased with an increase in surface area, contact
time, contaminant concentration, and liquid-to-gas ratio.
Packed towers are a commonly used device for control of gas emissions. These
units are filled with packing material to provide a large wetted surface area, result-
ing in good contact between the gas and the liquid. Common types of random pack-
ing materials, shown in Figure 11.5, include Berl and Intalox saddles, Pall rings, and
Raschig rings. As shown in Figure 11.6, the packing is contained in a column shell
equipped with a mist eliminator, liquid distributors, and packing support structures.
Mist eliminators, often just corrugated sheets, are installed at the top of the column
and cause any mist exiting with the high-velocity exiting gas stream to coalesce and
fall back into the column. The liquid distributor is designed to collect the scrubbing
fluid off the column walls and redistribute it toward the center of the column in
order to increase the contact between the solvent and gas. Many packed towers are
operated in countercurrent fashion, with the effected gas stream entering the bot-
tom of the device with the treated stream exiting the top. The solvent enters at the
top of the column, passes over the packing material, and exits near the bottom of the
column. If the solvent is costly, it may be processed to remove either the reactive
product or absorbed pollutant, and then be reused. Parameters needed for design
include: the waste-gas flow rate, contaminant composition and concentration, physi-
cal properties of pollutant and solvent, including the equilibrium relationship
between them, and the desired pollutant-removal efficiency. The inlet-gas tempera-
ture also affects performance. In general, an increase in temperature results in a
decrease in absorbance.
Figure 11.5
Typical packing material for
scrubbers.
(Source: U.S. EPA Air
Pollution Control Cost
Manual, 2002.)
Pall ring Tellerette Intalox saddle
Berl saddle Raschig ring

Gas out
Mist eliminator
Liquid in Liquid distributor
Spray nozzle
Packing
restrainer
Shell
Random
Packing
Liquid re-distributor
Packing support
Gas in
Figure 11.6
Schematic of packed tower
scrubber used for absorption
of gas contaminants.
(Source: U.S. EPA Air Liquid out
Pollution Control Cost
Manual, 2002.)
Advantages and disadvantages of packed-bed towers follow (EPA-CICA Fact

Sheet, Packed-Bed/Packed-Tower Wet Scrubber; AWMA, 1992):
1. Capital cost, pressure drop, and space requirement are relatively low.
2. Highly corrosive environments can be treated if towers are constructed with
fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP).
3. High mass-transfer efficiencies can be achieved.
4. PM can be removed from gas streams as well as gases.
Disadvantages:
1. Possible disposal problem with liquid effluent.

2. Relatively high maintenance costs.
3. PM in gas stream may cause plugging problems.
Spray-tower absorption systems are often used for flue-gas desulfurization

(FGD) to control sulfur-dioxide emissions. FGD is commonly utilized on coal- and
oil-combustion units and can also be found in petroleum refineries and metal smelt-
ing industries. This type of scrubbing process typically uses a calcium- or sodium-
based alkaline reagent as the solvent. Typical reagents include CaCO3 , Ca1OH22 ,
NaOH, and MgSO3 . The alkaline liquid is introduced to the spray tower and reacts
with the acid gas, producing either sodium sulfite, magnesium bisulfite, or calcium
sulfate as a waste product.
An FGD system is categorized as either a wet or a dry process, depending on
whether or not the active agent is contained in a liquid solution. Within these two
categories, FGD processes can either be considered as throwaway or regenerative
processes. In throwaway processes, the products are disposed of in a landfill, and
fresh alkaline reagents are continuously added to the scrubber makeup water. In
regenerative processes, the reagents can be regenerated in a closed-loop system.
One of the most common types of FGD processes combines either CaO or CaCO3
with wet scrubbing and the throwaway process. What follows is an overview of the
primary reactions occurring with each alkali substance.
The typical particle diameter of quick pebble lime (CaO) is Ú 75 mm. For the
FGD process, CaO is either ground into smaller particles or slaked, forming 2 – 5 mm
particles of Ca1OH22 . The exothermic slaking reaction is shown in Equation (11.8).
This decrease in particle size provides an increase in surface area, which increases
the dissolution rate of calcium hydroxide into the liquid slurry serving as the solvent
and increases the rate of reaction.
CaO + H 2O : Ca1OH22 + heat (11.8)
The following generalized reaction between SO2 and Ca1OH22, results in the
formation of calcium sulfite hemihydrate and occurs within the spray tower during
the removal of the acidic gas.
SO21g2 + Ca1OH221s2 + H 2O112 : CaSO3 #

1 3
H 2O1s2 + H 2O112 (11.9)
2 2
When limestone is used, the following generalized reaction occurs:
H 2O112 : CaSO3 # H 2O1s2 + CO21g2

1 1
SO21g2 + CaCO31s2 + (11.10)
2 2
The calcium sulfite hemihydrate produced by both reactions is often further

oxidized to calcium sulfate dihydrate, as follows:
CaSO3 # H 2O1s2 + H 2O112 + O21g2 : CaSO4 # 2H 2O1s2

1 3 1
(11.11)
2 2 2
Advantages of FGD systems include (EPA-452/F-03-034):
1. Excellent removal of SO2 .

2. Reactant products may have resale potential.
3. Alkali materials are inexpensive and readily available.
Disadvantages include:
1. High capital and O&M costs.
2. Wet wastes are generated.
3. Reactant product disposal is a significant cost.
S U M M A RY
Air pollution concerns related to anthropogenic emissions predate the modern era.
In the United States, the passage of the 1970 Clean Air Act provided the EPA with
statutory authority to establish and enforce guidelines for controlling air pollution.
Since the promulgation of the Act, national attention has been given to the estab-
lishment of criteria pollutant guidelines as well as to global issues such as acid rain,
stratospheric ozone, and the greenhouse effect. The chapter introduced end-of-pipe
pollution-control technologies used to mitigate gases containing particulates and
gas and vapors, and it provided preliminary operational and design criteria.
KEY WORDS ambient or community generally available National Ambient Air

air pollution control technologies Quality Standards
absorption (GACTs) (NAAQS)
aerodynamic size global warming natural sources
aerosol greenhouse effect nitrogen oxides
air pollution episode greenhouse gases ozone
albedo hazardous air pollutants particulate matter (PM)
anthropogenic emission (HAPs) primary pollutants
sources incineration primary standards
carbon monoxide insolation secondary pollutants
chlorofluorocarbons lead secondary standards
criteria pollutants maximum achievable settling velocity
electrostatic control technologies sulfur oxides
precipitators (MACT) volatile organic
fumes mists compounds (VOCs)
REFERENCES
Anderson, E. (1924). Report, Western Precipitator Co., Los Angeles, CA, 1919, Transactions
of the American Institute of Chemical Engineers, 16, 69.
AWMA (1992). Air & Waste Management Association, Air Pollution Engineering Manual,
Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York.
Cooper, C. David, and Alley, F.C. (1994). Air Pollution Control: A Design Approach, 2nd ed.,
Waveland Press, Inc., Prospect Heights, Illinois.
Deutsch, W. (1922). Annals of Physics (Leipzig), 68, 335.
EPA-CICA Fact Sheet, Catalytic Incinerator, EPA-452/F-03-018.
EPA-CICA Fact Sheet, Flue Gas Desulfurization (FGD), EPA-452/F-03-034.
EPA-CICA Fact Sheet, Packed-Bed/Packed-Tower Wet Scrubber, EPA-452/F-03-015.
EPA-CICA Fact Sheet, Thermal Incinerator, EPA-452/F-03-022.
Franek, W., and DeRose, L. (2003). Principles and Practices of Air Pollution Control Student
Manual, APTI Course 452, 2nd ed., Air Pollution Training Institute, Environmental
Research Center, MD, Research Triangle Park, NC.
Hansen, J., Sato Mki., Glascoe, J., and Ruedy, R. (1998). A Common Sense Climate Index: Is
Climate Changing Noticeably? Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 95, 4113–4120.
Exercises 303
Henderson-Sellers, A., and Robinson, P.J (1986). Contemporary Climatology, John Wiley &
Sons, New York, 439 pp.
Houghton, J.T., Filho, L.G.M., Callander, B.A., Harris, N., Kattenberg, A., and Maske, K.
(1996). Climate Change 1995: The Science of Climate Change, Intergovernmental Panel on
Climate Change, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, GA, 1996, 572 pp.
Keeling, C.D., and Whorf, T.P. (1998). Atmospheric CO2 concentrations—Mauna Loa Obser-
vatory, Hawaii, 1958–1997 (revised August 1998). NDP-001. Carbon Dioxide Information
Analysis Center, Oak Ridge National Laboratory, Oak Ridge, TN.
Kellogg, W.K. (1996). Greenhouse Effect, in Encyclopedia of Climate and Weather, Ed.
S.H. Schneider, pp. 368–371, Oxford University Press, New York.
NASA (1991). Environmental Control and Life Support System Architectural Control Docu-
ment, SSP-30262, Revision D, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Space Sta-
tion Freedom Program Office, Reston, Virginia, July 1991.
Peixoto, J.P., and Oort, A.H. (1992). Physics of Climate, American Institute of Physics,
New York, 530 pp.
Petit, J.R., Jouzel, J., Raynaud, D., Barkov, N.I., Barnola, J.-M., Basile, I., Benders, M., Chappellaz,
J., David, M., Delaygue, G., Delmotte, M., Kotlyakov,V.M., Legrand, M., Lipenkov,V.Y., Lorius,
C., Pépin, L., Ritz, C., Saltzman, E., and Stievenard, M. (1999). Climate and Atmospheric His-
tory of the Past 420,000 Years from the Vostok Ice Core,Antartica, Nature, 399, 429–436.
Shen, T.T. (1995). Industrial Pollution Prevention, Springer-Verlag, Berlin.
U.S. EPA (1992). Control Techniques for Volatile Organic Emissions from Stationary Sources,
U.S. EPA Research Triangle Park, NC, EPA-453/R-92-018.
U.S. EPA (1997). Exposure Factors Handbook, Volume 1, General Factors, August 1997,
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, National Center for Environmental Assess-
ment, Washington DC, EPA/600/P-95/002Fa.
U.S. EPA (2000). Estimated Per Capita Water Ingestion in the United States Based on Data
Collected by the United States Department of Agriculture’s 1994–96 Continuing Survey of
Food Intakes by Individuals, April 2007, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of
Water, Washington DC, EPA-822-R-00-008.
U.S. EPA (2002). Air Pollution Control Cost Manual, Office of Air Quality Planning and Stan-
dards, U.S. EPA Research Triangle Park, NC, EPA/452/B-02-001.
U.S. EPA (2003). Principles and Practices of Air Pollution Control, Student Manual, APTI
Course 452,Air Pollution Training Institute, Environmental Research Center, MD E142-01.
U.S. EPA (2007). Achievements in Stratospheric Ozone Protection, U.S. EPA Office of Air and
Radiation, Washington, DC, EPA-430-R-07-001.
Wark, K., Warner, C.F., and Davis, W.T. (1998). Air Pollution: Its Origin and Control, 3rd ed.,
Addison Wesley Longman, Inc.
EXERCISES
11.1 Browse the portion of the U.S. EPA website focused on the Office of Air
and Radiation (http://www.epa.gov/air/) and provide (a) a list of the current
criteria pollutants listed in the National Ambient Air Quality Standards,
(b) a distinction between primary and secondary standards, (c) a definition
of nonattainment and attainment areas, and (d) a list of current nonattain-
ment areas near your home town, and (e) a summary of the EPA required
plan for areas deemed nonattainment.
11.2 Identify a locally operated industrial facility that is regulated under Title V of
the Clean Air Act. Find their permit online and briefly summarize their per-
mitting requirements.
11.3 Summarize the chemical equations primarily responsible for acid rain. Use
online resources to determine the average pH of rainfall in proximity to your
university. Has the pH of rainfall changed during the last several decades?
11.4 Using only reputable online resources, describe the “hole in the ozone layer.”
Items to consider as you conduct your research include: the chemical reactions
that occur, how ozone is measured, units for quantifying ozone, historical evi-
dence of ozone depletion, where the ozone layer is most impacted, associated
environmental and human health effects, and what predictions are made
regarding the future of stratospheric ozone recovery.
11.5 Using your own words, describe the greenhouse effect and global warming.
11.6 Air pollution can influence the limit of visibility by both absorbing and scat-
tering light. Using the library and internet resources, determine how the 1970
Clean Air Act impacted visibility within the United States. What are the pri-
mary pollutants that contribute to this phenomenon?
11.7 Consider particles characterized with a density of 1.5 g/cm3. At 25ºC and 1 atm,
determine the terminal settling velocity of particles falling in air that are (a) 15,
(b) 25, and (c) 150 mm in diameter.
11.8 Consider a settling chamber to treat a particulate ladened air stream having a
volumetric flow of 1.0 m3/s. Design a settling chamber to collect particles
10 mm in diameter having a density of 1700 kg/m3. The chamber is to be 1.5 m
in width and 1.5 m in height. (a) How long must the settling chamber be to give
theoretical perfect collection efficiency? (b) Using the length determined in
part (a), determine the collection efficiency for 5-mm particles with the same
density.
11.9 Design a settling chamber to collect particles 50 mm in diameter and 111 lb/ft3 in
density from an air stream with a volumetric flow of 8 ft3/s. The cross-sectional
area of the square inlet is 9 ft2. (a) How long must the chamber be to give theo-
retical perfect collection efficiency? (b) Determine the collection efficiency for
10-mm particles with the same density. Assume the gas-stream temperature is
70ºF, such that the gas density and viscosity are 0.075 lb/ft3 and 1.23 * 10-5
lb/1ft # s2, respectively.
11.10 Process exhaust gas with a volumetric flow rate of 100,000 cfm that contains
5 gr/ft3 of cement PM is to be treated with an ESP. Regulatory requirements
dictate that the outlet PM concentration must be … 0.02 gr/ft3. Assume a
plate-to-plate spacing of 10 inches and an applied voltage of 15,000 volts. The
smallest particles in the gas stream are 2 mm in diameter, and all particles
have a dielectric constant of 5.5. Estimate (a) the particle drift velocity and
(b) the required collection-plate area to meet regulations. (c) Assume that
plates with length and height of 30 ft are used. Estimate the number of plates
required. Assume standard temperature and pressure.
CHAPTER
Fundamentals
of Hazardous Waste Site
12
Remediation
12.1 THE PROBLEM

Objectives
Environmental remediation is focused on removing hazardous pollutants from
In this chapter, you will environmental media, including soil, sediment, and surface and groundwater.
learn about: Cleanup efforts are typically regulatory driven, and cleanup standards are set
The magnitude of the to protect human health and the environment. In the United States, the legal
hazardous waste problem authority to prompt restoration of contaminated land toward productive use is
Contaminant managed by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) through the imple-
characteristics mentation of the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation,
and Liability Act (CERCLA, or Superfund) and the Resource Conservation
Microbiological
and Recovery Act (RCRA). For the European Union, the main initiative of the
considerations
European Commission’s Environment Directorate-General (DG) is to initiate
Basic features for and define new environmental legislation and to assume responsibility for
designing engineered implementation in the Member States. The European Environmental Agency
solutions to hazardous (EEA) and the Contaminated Land Rehabilitation Network for Environmen-
waste sites tal Technologies in Europe (CLARINET) provide reliable technical support
to regulatory agencies and the public regarding environmental issues. In much
of Europe, the “Dutch List” is used to provide guidance for soil cleanup stan-
dards. The Environment Congress for Asia and the Pacific (ECO ASIA) was
created by governments in Asia and the Pacific Region to support long-term
activities for environmental protection. The Environmental Information Net-
work for Asia and the Pacific (ACO ASIA NET) resulted from this effort and
provides a databank of environmental information created to support sustain-
able development for the 22 countries in the region.
12.1.1 Highlights in Hazardous Waste History

In the 1940s, chemical production expanded in the United States, and by 1962
Rachel Carson had published a socially critical book, Silent Spring, describing
the negative effects of the pesticide DDT. Silent Spring is often credited with
spurring the environmental movement and prompting the United States to
revisit its pesticide policies. A hazardous waste disposal facility was operated
306 Chapter 12 Fundamentals of Hazardous Waste Site Remediation
from 1956 until 1972 in Stringfellow, California, where it accepted over 34 million
gallons (129 million liters) of industrial waste, primarily from metal finishing, elec-
troplating, and pesticide production. Aqueous-based wastes sent to the facility were
disposed of in evaporating ponds. Because of excessive rainfall in 1969, the ponds
overflowed into the town of Glen Avon and resulted in the contamination of Pyrite
Creek. In 1970, the EPA was created, and by 1972, DDT had been banned and the
Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act enacted. Additional historical
highlights of hazardous waste history are given in Table 12.1.
CERCLA was created in 1980 in response to discoveries in the late 70s of
numerous abandoned, leaking, and hazardous waste dumps that threatened human
health and the environment. Possibly the most noted hazardous waste site associ-
ated with this time period was “Love Canal.” Located in Niagara Falls, New York,
the original intent of the canal, owned by Mr. William T. Love, was to provide hydro-
electricity to the region and to join the two sides of the Niagara River separated by
the Niagara Falls with a navigable waterway. When the project proved infeasible, the
land was acquired by Hooker Chemical and Plastics Corporation and was subse-
quently used as a hazardous waste repository. During a five-year span beginning in
1947, nearly 21,000 tons of hazardous material were buried in the area. Once the
canal was full, the land was sold to the City of Niagara Falls Board of Education. By
the late 70s, the land was surrounded by single-family and low-income housing as
well as three nearby schools. Public health concerns were realized in 1978 as a result
of reports published in the local newspaper and by the New York State Department
of Health. The publicity resulted in a school closure and demolition. Most residen-
tial dwellings in the impacted area were also demolished.
CERCLA, initially established as a five-year program, was created to identify
and take action to remedy hazardous waste sites, and to force responsible parties to
pay for the cleanup. In addition, CERCLA established a $1.6 billion “Superfund” to
support government cleanup actions and established guidelines for inclusion of sites
on the National Priorities List (NPL) based on the Hazardous waste site Ranking
System (HRS). The HRS ranks the hazardous character of sites based on risk. Risks
from the migration of toxic compounds through the air, groundwater, or surface
water, from direct contact with contaminated soils at the site, and from hazards asso-
ciated with potential fires or explosions are considered. In 1986, the Superfund
Reauthorization and Amendments (SARA) extended CERCLA five more years,
increased the fund to $8.5 billion, established the Leaky Underground Storage Tank
(LUST) trust fund, initiated the Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-
Know Act (EPCRA) and associated Toxic Release Inventory (TRI). EPCRA and TRI
were created in response to the 1984 release of methyl isocyanate (MIC) at the Union
Carbide pesticide production facility located in Bhopal, India. The MIC gas, a lung irri-
tant, caused up to 2,000 deaths and 350,000 injuries, leaving 100,000 people with per-
manent disabilities. As a consequence of EPCRA and the TRI, companies which
process more than 25,000 lb/year (11,340 kg/year) or use 10,000 lb/year (4536 kg/year)
of any of the 654 EPA listed hazardous chemicals must report all waste generated
and all releases and transfers of hazardous chemicals. Companies are also required to
develop an emergency response plan that allows the surrounding communities to pro-
tect themselves from catastrophic accidents associated with toxic chemical release.
Appropriations for SARA continue today.
Additional provisions of CERCLA include the National Contingency Plan
(NCP), developed as the federal government’s blueprint for responding to both oil
spills and the unintended release of hazardous substances. CERCLA also allows the
EPA to conduct or require both “Removal” and “Remedial” Actions. A CERCLA
Section 12.1 The Problem 307
Table 12.1 Historical Events Relevant to the History of Hazardous Wastes Management
Year Significant Event
1940s Increase in chemical production
1962 Rachel Carson published Silent Spring
1970 EPA Created
1972 FIFRA Created and DDT banned

Iraq—grain coated with a mercury fungicide was ground into bread, exposing over 50,000 people;
459 were reported dead and over 6000 hospitalized.
Bangladesh—Arsenic-contaminated drinking-water wells affected millions
1976 Toxic Substance Control Act (TSCA) and RCRA created
1977 End of 30 years of PCB contamination in the Hudson River, during which the General Electric
Company (GE) discharged as much as 1.3 million pounds of PCBs directly into the river from
facilities located in Hudson Falls and Fort Edward, NY
1978 Love Canal
1980 CERCLA (Superfund)—allowing the EPA to clean up, order abatement, and recover the cost of cleanup
1982 Times Beach, MO—largest civilian exposure to dioxin in the U.S. resulting from spraying oil to
control dust. The town was evacuated and registered as a Superfund site.
1984 Bhopal, India—MIC release
1986 Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act (EPCRA)

Toxic Release Inventory (TRI)
Chernobyl nuclear disaster produced a plume of radioactive debris that spread to Ukraine, eastern
Europe, Scandinavia, UK, and eastern United States
Superfund Amendments (SARA)
Because of the magma lying beneath it, Lake Nyos in Cameroon is saturated with carbon dioxide.
The lake released an extreme amount of carbon dioxide suffocating 1800 people in addition to
livestock in surrounding villages.
1988 Indoor Radon Abatement Act passed

Ocean Dumping Ban Act passed
1989 Exxon Valdez oil spill
1990 Oil Pollution Act

Pollution Prevention Act passed
1990s Continued public awareness highlighted by film makers

• A Civil Action
• Erin Brokovich
Radioactive waste disposal problems
• New Mexico, Waste Isolation Pilot Plant (WIPP)
• Hanford, Washington
• Rocky Flats, Colorado
1994 Chemical Industries Air Toxic Reduction Rule passed
2002 Small Business Liability Relief and Brownfields Revitalization Act—provides relief from Superfund
liability for small businesses, and promotes the revitalization of ”brownfields,” properties where
redevelopment is hindered by the presence of contamination.
Removal Action is triggered by a release of a dangerous substance into the environ-

ment by an incident such as a tanker truck accident or damage to a drum filled with
hazardous waste. Removal Actions are designed to address emergencies and are
typically short-term endeavors designed to remove the immediate threat. CERCLA
Remedial Actions are designed to provide a permanent solution and are usually
longer-term, higher-dollar projects.
In 1987, the quantities of hazardous chemicals released to streams, disposed
of in landfills, and discharged to wastewater treatment plants were 4 million, 1.2
million, and 0.87 million tons, respectively (Alvarez and Illman, 2006). According
Table 12.2 Top 20 Environmental Contaminants Associated with the 2005 CERCLA Priority List of
Hazardous Substances
2005
Rank Substance Common current and historical uses and sources
1 Arsenic Wood preservative, pesticide
2 Lead Burning gasoline, lead-based paint and solder, batteries, ammunition
3 Mercury Production of chlorine gas and caustic soda, burning coal
4 Vinyl chloride Used in the production of PVC, wire and cable coating, packaging
materials
5 Polychlorinated biphenyls Insulator, coolant, and lubricant in transformers and capacitors
6 Benzene Gasoline, plastics, resins, synthetic fibers, rubber, lubricants, dyes
7 Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons Incomplete combustion of fossil fuels and other organics
8 Cadmium Batteries, pigments, metal coating, plastics
9 Benzo(a)pyrene Is not manufactured and has no industrial use; formed during

combustion of organic matter
10 Benzo(b)fluoranthene Leaches from water-distribution system tanks lined with coal tar or
asphalt; from combustion of organic matter; no industrial use
11 Chloroform Inhaled anesthetic, chemical manufacturing
12 p,p¿-DDT Pesticide
(dichlorodiphenyltrichlorethane)
13 Aroclor 1254 Lubricant, hydraulic fluid, insulator, plasticizer, dedusting agent,

transformer fluid
14 Aroclor 1260
15 Dibenzo(a,h)anthracene No known use or application; found in vehicle exhaust, cigarette

smoke condensate, soot, coal tar
16 Trichloroethylene Degreaser, paint remover, typewriter correction fluid
17 Dieldrin Insecticide; breakdown product of aldrin
18 Chromium, hexavalent Chrome plating, dyes, pigments, leather tanning, wood preserving
19 Phosphorus, white Ammunition, fertilizers, food additives, pesticides
20 p,p¿-DDE Microbial and industrial processing byproduct of DDT; has no

(dichlorodiphenyldichloroethane) commercial use
Section 12.2 Contaminant Characteristics and Phase Distribution 309
to the U.S. EPA RCRAInfo National Database, the quantity of RCRA hazardous
waste generated in the United States decreased by 29% between 1999 and 2003.
The National Biennial RCRA Hazardous Waste Report estimated that the United
States produced approximately 38.3 million tons of hazardous waste in 2005 (EPA
National Analysis, 2005). In that same year, 21.8 million tons of RCRA hazardous
wastes were disposed of by deep well or underground injection. The EPA has
projected that approximately 294,000 contaminated sites need to be remediated
within the United States and have an estimated cleanup cost of $209 billion. Most
of this cost will be assumed by the property owners and those deemed potentially
responsible for the contamination. Most sites are contaminated with solvents and
other organics, metals, and petroleum products (U.S. EPA, 2004). Table 12.2 lists
the top 20 hazardous substances on the CERCLA Priority List of Hazardous
Substances for 2005. The complete list can be obtained online at www.atsdr.cdc.
gov/cercla/05list.html.
12.2 CONTAMINANT CHARACTERISTICS AND PHASE DISTRIBUTION

This section describes the structures of organic compounds commonly found at
hazardous waste sites, and the properties that influence their fate in the environ-
ment. The concept of contaminant partitioning within the soil:water matrix is also
introduced.
12.2.1 Contaminants of Concern

Soil and groundwater can be contaminated by a single organic compound, or a mix-
ture of such compounds, that are either pure product or dissolved in the aqueous
phase. This section describes the structures of organic compounds commonly found
at hazardous waste sites and provides examples of potential sources. Table 12.3 lists
the names and associated properties of some hazardous organic chemicals com-
monly found at waste sites.
The behavior of the carbon atom is the focus of organic chemistry. The most
elementary organic compounds contain just carbon and hydrogen and are called
hydrocarbons (HC), but many organics of environmental concern contain addi-
tional elements such as oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, and halogens such as chlorine,
fluorine, and/or bromine. Hydrocarbons can be classified as either aliphatic, aro-
matic, or polycyclic aromatic, depending on the nature of the carbon-carbon
bonds.
Aliphatic Hydrocarbons
Aliphatic hydrocarbons contain either straight or branched chains of single-, double-,
or triple-bonded carbon atoms. If the backbone in the aliphatic contains only single-
bonded carbon atoms, the hydrocarbon is termed saturated and is referred to as an
alkane or paraffin. Alkanes can generically be described with the chemical formula
C nH 2n+2 , where n represents the number of carbon atoms in the chain. Figure 12.1a
Figure 12.1a
H H H H H Pentane is an example of a
H C C C C C H straight-chain aliphatic
hydrocarbon with chemical
H H H H H formula C5H12 .
shows pentane, a five-carbon aliphatic, as an example of a straight-chain alkane.

Hydrocarbons that contain a carbon-carbon double bond are called alkenes and have
the general formula C nH 2n . Alkynes are characterized by having a carbon-carbon
triple bond.
As a result of high use and historically questionable disposal practices, chlori-
nated methanes, ethanes, and ethenes, such as trichloroethylene (TCE), tetra-
chloroethylene (PCE or Perc), dichloroethylene (DCE), and vinyl chloride (VC),
are now among the most prevalent contaminants in groundwater. Chlorinated
aliphatics are used in a variety of industrial settings. For example, VC is used in the
manufacturing process of poly vinyl chloride (PVC), and both TCE and PCE have
been widely used in the dry cleaning industry and for metal degreasing. The NPL
lists VC, TCE, and chloroform as three of the most frequently reported organic con-
taminants at hazardous waste sites. Many of these chlorinated compounds are
known or suspected carcinogens, and regulatory cleanup requirements approach
analytically detectable limits. Chlorinated aliphatics have variable vapor pressures,
are minimally soluble in aqueous systems, and often are more dense than water. A
variety of chlorinated aliphatics of environmental concern are shown in Table 12.3a
with associated chemical characteristics important to determining their fate in the
environment.
Aromatic and Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons (PAHs)

As shown in Figure 12.1b, aromatic compounds are characterized by the benzene ring.
The benzene ring contains six carbon atoms, arranged in a hexagonal form, joined by
Table 12.3a Names, Structures, and Properties of Short-Chain Aliphatic Hydrocarbons Commonly Found at
Contaminated Sites (Chlorinated Alkanes and Alkenes are Emphasized)
Compound name Molecular Henry’s law constant
(Acronym) Structure weight (unitless) Log K OW T (°C)
Vinyl chloride (VC) Cl H 62.5 3.35 1.38 25
C C
H H
Trichloroethylene (TCE) Cl H 131.4 0.372 2.38 25

C C
Cl Cl
Chloroform (CF) H 119.4 0.141 1.97 20

Cl C Cl
Cl
Carbon tetrachloride (CT) Cl 153.8 0.957 2.64 20

Cl C Cl
Cl
Tetrachloroethylene (PCE) Cl Cl 165.8 1.08 2.6 20

C C
Cl Cl
Sources (for Tables 12.3a–d): U.S. EPA, 1990, Kuo, J., 1999, LaGrega, et al., 1994., Mackey, et al., 1997.
Figure 12.1b
Both ring structures shown are commonly used to represent benzene, the base for all aromatic
and polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons. The benzene ring contains six carbon atoms joined by
alternating single and double bonds and the molecule contains six hydrogen atoms. The posi-
tions of the bonds are known to change, resulting in benzene often being depicted as a hexa-
gon with an internal ring that represents the shifting bond positions, causing all the bonds to
have an equal length.
alternating single and double bonds. Other aromatic compounds are formed by the
addition of functional groups onto the aromatic ring. Table 12.3b shows several aro-
matic compounds that are commonly found at contaminated sites. Benzene, Toluene,
Ethyl benzene, and Xylene (BTEX) are often associated with petroleum products and
typically enter the environment as a result of LUSTs. Many states use the concentra-
tion of BTEX compounds for cleanup standards of petroleum-contaminated sites. In
addition to its prominence in petroleum-based products, benzene is used by a variety
of other industries to manufacture plastics, resins, detergents, pesticides, and synthetic
fibers; it is ranked sixth on the 2005 CERCLA NPL list and is believed to be a human
carcinogen. Aromatics are less dense than water, have a high vapor pressure and are
thus considered volatile, and are sparingly soluble in water.
Table 12.3b Names, Structures, and Properties of Aromatic Hydrocarbons Commonly Found at Contaminated Sites
Molecular Henry’s law constant
Compound name Structure weight (unitless) Log K OW T (°C)
Benzene 78.1 0.227 2.13 25
Toluene CH3 92.1 0.279 2.73 20
Ethyl benzene C2H5 106.2 0.268 3.15 20
m-xylene CH3 106.2 0.212 3.0 20
CH3
Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH) contain two or more fused benzene

rings, and adjacent rings share two or more carbons. For example, when two benzene
rings are joined, naphthalene is formed (see Figure 12.1c). PAHs are formed through
the incomplete combustion of fossil fuels and are associated with industrial processes
such as petroleum refining and coal gasification. Characteristics common among
PAHs include high molecular weight and low volatility and solubility, and they read-
ily sorb to soil matrices. Table 12.3c highlights several PAH compounds commonly
found at hazardous waste sites.
Figure 12.1C
Napthalene and phenan-
threne are common two- Naphthalene
and three-ring polycyclic
Phenanthrene
aromatic hydrocarbons.
Table 12.3c Names, Structures, and Properties of Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons Commonly Found at
Contaminated Sites
Henry’s
law
Molecular constant
Compound name Structure weight (unitless) Log K OW T (°C)
Naphthalene 128.2 1.977 * 10-2 3.36 25
Phenanthrene 178.2 1.15 * 10-2 4.46 25
Benzo(a)pyrene (BaP) 252.3 4.624 * 10-5 6.2 25
Dibenzo(a,h)anthracene 278.4 6.016 * 10-7 6.5 25

Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs)

The biphenyl structure consists of two aromatic rings connected at one carbon site in
each ring, as shown in Figure 12.1d. Ten sites are available on the biphenyl molecule
for potential inclusion of one or more chlorine atoms. The term polychlorinated
biphenyl (PCB) is used to refer to the biphenyl molecule with one to ten chlorine
substitutions. The acronym PCB is often used generically to describe a mixture of the
209 possible congeners (or isomers) of substituted biphenyl molecules. In the United
States, Monsanto began production of PCBs in 1929 under the trade name Aroclor®
combined with a numerical designation that specified the amount of chlorine present
in a particular mixture. For example Aroclor® 1260 contains 60% chlorine, while Aro-
clor® 1254 is 54% by weight chlorine.The number 12 in the Aroclor® designation indi-
cates that there are twelve carbon atoms per molecule. PCBs are oily liquids or solids
that appear colorless to light yellow and are chemically stable (even at high temper-
atures), do not burn easily, are sparingly soluble in water, viscous, adsorb strongly to
soil and organics, and have a high dielectric constant. These characteristics make
them ideal for use as coolants and lubricants in transformers, capacitors, and other
electrical equipment. As a result of their chemical stability, PCBs tend to be recalci-
trant in the environment and are also known to bioaccumulate and biomagnify in the
food chain. As a result, PCB production in the United States was suspended in 1977.
Worldwide, more than 1.5 million tons of PCBs have been produced, and it is
unknown what quantity has been released to the environment (UNEP, 1999). The
EPA has stated that PCBs are probably carcinogenic to humans.
Additional Hydrocarbons of Concern: Explosives, Pesticides, Fuel Additives

Pesticides are a group of agents that destroy or control pest organisms and include
insecticides, fungicides, and herbicides. Approximately 500,000 tons are applied
each year in the United States to prevent the spread of disease (malaria, typhus,
yellow fever) and to increase agriculture production. DDT (dichlorodiphenyl-
trichloroethane) is an organochlorine insecticide that was commonly used through-
out World War II and saved lives through preventing malaria by controlling the
mosquito population that carried and transmitted the disease. Use was banned in
the United States in 1972 as a result of its bioaccumulation in the food chain. DDT
has been found in marine sediments, wildlife, and in humans. It is known to cause
the thinning of eggshells in birds, significantly affecting the population of apex preda-
tors, and has been cited as a major cause of the decline of the bald eagle population
during the 1950s and 1960s. It is estimated that approximately 2 million tons of DDT
have been produced worldwide and it is twelfth on the 2005 CERCLA NPL listing.
Dichlorodiphenyldichloroethane (DDE), a commercial byproduct and microbial
metabolite of DDT, is listed twentieth on the NPL list.
Biphenyl
X represents possible Cl sites
Figure 12.1d
Possible sites for chlorine atoms to be bonded to a biphenyl molecule are shown. From 1 to 10
chlorine atoms can be bonded to a biphenyl molecule for a total of 209 possible congeners.
Explosives are usually made of aliphatic or aromatic ring compounds that con-
tain a nitro functional group 1-NO22. Environmental contamination from this
group of compounds is associated primarily with military production and storage,
but it is also widely used by the mining and construction industries. Explosives tend
to be environmentally persistent and they are considered toxic. One of the most
common bulk explosives is 2,4,6-trinitrotoluene (TNT). TNT has been an important
military explosive since World War I because of its relative safety during manufac-
turing, loading, transportation, and storage. It is often mixed with other explosives,
such as Royal Demolition Explosive (RDX) and High Melting Explosive (HMX).
Wastewaters from munitions programs, often referred to as “pink water,” may be
difficult to remediate and are often colored pink as a result of the presence of TNT
and RDX. TNT is known to be poisonous and is listed as a possible human carcino-
gen. Prolonged exposure may result in anemia and abnormal liver functions, and it
is thought to be harmful to the immune system if ingested or breathed. Skin contact
causes irritation that turns the skin a bright yellow-orange color.
As a result of the promulgation of the 1970 Clean Air Act (CAA), additives
were blended with gasoline in an effort to reduce pollution from vehicles by burning
cleaner fuels. Additives included octane enhancers, antiknock compounds, corrosion
inhibitors, detergents, and oxygenates. Reformulated gasoline (RFG) also contained
a higher concentration of benzene, a carcinogenic compound. RFG is required
in cities exhibiting the worst smog problems and is now used in 17 states and the
District of Columbia. Two of the most common fuel oxygenates are acetone and
methyl tertiary butyl ether (MTBE). It was anticipated that with the reduction of
HC emissions caused by the addition of oxygenates to the mixture, the production
of the secondary air pollutant, ozone, would be diminished. The anticipated drop in
tropospheric ozone concentrations was not realized in most regions. Also, as a
result of MTBE’s high aqueous solubility, it travels farther and faster in water than
other gasoline constituents and it now contaminates many subsurface waters and
drinking water supplies.
Representative chemical structures and characteristics for pesticides, explo-
sives, and fuel additives are shown in Table 12.3d.
Inorganics of Concern
Metal contamination is commonly found in both solid and aqueous environments.
The 2005 CERCLA NPL ranks arsenic, lead, and mercury as the top three contam-
inants most frequently found at hazardous waste sites. Metals are used in a variety
of industrial activities and therefore have varied pathways into the environment.
Organic arsenic is used to make herbicides and fungicides and is used in semicon-
ductor production, while inorganic arsenic in the form of copper chromated arsenic
(CCA) is used during the preservation process of pressure-treated wood.
Lead is ubiquitous to the environment. Much lead contamination is a result of
the burning of gasoline in vehicles before the forced phase-out by the CAA of the
organometallic compound tetraethyl lead (TEL). Water pipes in some older houses
may contain lead solder, and deteriorating lead-based paints are of concern. Lead is
also commonly used in the production of auto batteries, ammunition, electronics,
and plastics.
Mercury is found in three forms, including elemental, inorganic, and organic.
Metallic and inorganic mercury compounds enter the environment as a result of mining,
burning coal, and waste disposal from manufacturing facilities. Metallic mercury is used
to produce chlorine gas and caustic soda and is also used in thermometers and batteries.
Table 12.3d Names, Structures, and Properties of Additional Organic Compounds Commonly Found at
Contaminated Sites. Structures Include PCBs, Explosives, Gasoline Additives, and Insecticides
Henry’s
law
Compound name Molecular constant Log T
(acronym) Structure weight (unitless) K OW (°C)
Aroclor® 1254 n.a.* n.a. 0.155 6.03 20
Dichlorodiphenyltrichlorethane H 354.5 3.315 * 10-4 6.19 25

1p,p¿-DDT2 Cl Cl
CCl3
Methyl ethyl ketone (MEK) CH2CH3 72.1 1.81 * 10-3 0.256 20

O C
CH3
2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (TNT) O2N NO2 227.13 8.6 * 10-7 1.6 20
NO2
…
n.a.—not applicable, as Aroclors contain a mixture of PCBs, not just a single compound.
Metals such as arsenic, lead, and mercury are potentially toxic to the kidneys,
decrease mental capabilities, and can cause weakness, headaches, abdominal cramps,
diarrhea, and anemia (U.S. EPA, 2004). While these compounds cannot be destroyed
through a bioremediation process in the environment, they can be transformed by
methylation, complexation, sorption, and change of valence state to affect their solu-
bility (and therefore their mobility and bioavailability) or toxicity.
12.2.2 Contaminant Characteristics

As shown in Figure 12.2, the fate of contaminants released into the environment is
varied and depends on a variety of factors. Once released to the soil or aqueous
matrix, they can volatilize, dissolve into solution and potentially enter the ground-
water, adsorb to the soil matrix, or be biologically altered. The parameters described
below help engineers project the fate of contamination in the environment.
Solubility and Nonaqueous Phase Liquids

The solubility of a compound describes its tendency to dissolve into the liquid phase
(for environmental concerns, the solvent is usually water) and is important when
determining its distribution within the environment. Solubility is defined as the
maximum amount of compound dissolved in a unit volume of solvent when the sys-
tem is at equilibrium.
Sparingly soluble chemicals, when released, may form a layer of nonaqueous-
phase liquid (NAPL) either on the water table or at an impervious layer within an
aquifer. A NAPL phase persists when the mass of contaminant exceeds its solubility
limit in groundwater. If the density of the spilled organic is less dense than water
(e.g., gasoline and oil products), then a light nonaqueous-phase liquid (LNAPL) will
Prevailling wind direction

Exposure Transport
point medium (air)
Release mechanism
(volatilization)
Exposure
Exposure Inhalation point
point exposure
route
Ingestion Release
exposure mechanism
(spill) Water pile
route
Exposure (source)
medium
(soil) Release mechanism
(site leaching)
Water table
Transport medium
(ground water)
Ground-water flow
Figure 12.2
Cartoon depicting a leaky underground storage tank and resulting contaminant fate in the environment.
(Source: U.S. EPA. 1989.)
form on the water table and provide a continual source of contamination to the
aquifer if not removed. Similarly, compounds that have a specific gravity greater
than one, such as TCE and PCE, will tend to sink to a nonpervious layer within the
subsurface and form a dense nonaqueous-phase liquid (DNAPL) pool.
Partitioning Coefficients
Partition coefficients are used to describe how organic compounds distribute
between the solid, liquid, and gas phases of the environment. Many compounds
released into the environment are bound or sorbed in the soil and sediment present.
The octanol-water partition coefficient, KOW , describes a compound’s hydrophobic-
ity and how it partitions between the organic and aqueous phase. The KOW is deter-
mined by quantifying the ratio of the compound in both phases of an immiscible
mixture of octanol and water.
Concentration in octanol phase

KOW = (12.1)
Concentration in aqueous phase
Values of KOW are unitless, vary widely from 10-3 to 107, and tend to increase
with the size of the molecule. Large KOW values indicate that the compound is rela-
tively hydrophobic and tends to partition to the organic phase. Organic compounds
with low KOW values are hydrophilic and thus tend to stay in the aqueous phase,
showing minimal soil adsorption.
Soil-Distribution Coefficient
The sorption, or the distribution of nonpolar hydrophobic organic compounds to a par-
ticular soil matrix can often be well characterized by a linear relationship (recognize
this relationship as the linear Freundlich isotherm) described by the soil-distribution

coefficient 1KSD2.
s
KSD = (12.2)
CL
where:
KSD = soil-distribution coefficient (often referred to as the partition
coefficient), L/mg or m3/g,
s = mass of solute sorbed per unit mass of dry soil, unitless, and
CL = liquid-phase equilibrium concentration of the targeted compound,
mg/L or g/m3.
The soil-distribution coefficient is strongly dependent on the hydrophobicity
of the solute as well as the organic content of the soil, such that the partition coeffi-
cient is not the same for every soil. Eweis et al., (1998), provide a relationship for the
partition coefficient that requires knowledge of the KOW and the mass fraction of
organic carbon in the soil, fOC .
KSD = 6.3 * 10-7 focKOW (12.3)
mass of carbon
where fOC = fraction of organic carbon in solids, a b
mass of solid
EXAMPLE 12.1
Estimation of sorption to soil
Groundwater is contaminated with 150 mg/L (150 ppb) TCE. Assume the aquifer
solids contain 1% organic carbon (i.e., fOC = 0.01) and that sorption is adequately
described by a linear model. Estimate the mass of TCE sorbed to the solid material.
Solution
From Table 12.3a, the log KOW for TCE is 2.38. Use Equation (12.3) to estimate the
soil-distribution coefficient, KSD .
L
KSD = 6.3 * 10-7 fOCKOW = 6.3 * 10-7 10.0121102.382 = 1.51 * 10-6
mg
L 106 mg L
KSD = ¢ 1.51 * 10-6 ≤¢ ≤ = 1.51
mg kg kg
Using Equation (12.2), which describes linear sorption, and the KSD value
obtained from Equation (12.3), determine the equilibrium TCE concentration
sorbed to the solid phase in the aquifer.
L mg mg mg TCE sorbed
s = KSDCL = a1.51 b a 150 b a b = 0.23
kg L 1000 mg kg soil
Henry’s Law Constant

Henry’s law can be used to determine how a contaminant will distribute between
the liquid and gas phases. The law states that the concentration of the solute in the
liquid phase is proportional to the partial pressure or the concentration of the gas in
which it is in equilibrium, such that:
Cg = kH,A CL (12.4)
where:
kH,A = dimensionless Henry’s constant,
Cg = equilibrium gas-phase concentration, mg/L, and
CL = equilibrium liquid-phase concentration, mg/L.
Care should be taken when using Henry’s law constants, as their values
depend on the concentration units for the gas and liquid phases.
EXAMPLE 12.2
U s i n g H e n r y ’s l a w t o e s t i m a t e e q u i l i b r i u m c o n c e n t r a t i o n s
Results from a soil-vapor study showed a soil-vapor concentration for toluene of
1000 ppmv. Use Henry’s law to estimate the surrounding liquid-phase toluene con-
centration. The dimensionless kH,A for toluene is 0.279.
Solution
The molecular formula for toluene is C 7H 8 . Determine the molecular weight for
toluene as shown.
MW = 71122 + 8112 = 92
Use the equation shown below to convert the volume-based vapor-phase con-
centration to a mass-per-unit volume basis when the gas temperature is 20°C.
mg ppmv * MW * 103
3
= 1at 20°C2
m 24
mg ppmv * MW * 103 1000 * 92 * 103 mg mg
= = = 3.83 * 106 3 = 3.83
m3 24 24 m L
Use Henry’s law to calculate the aqueous-phase concentration,
Cg = kH,A CL
mg
Cg 3.83
L mg
CL = = = 13.7 toluene in the aqueous phase
kH,A 0.279 L
Important Physical Properties of Soil

To adequately describe the fate and transport of contaminants in the subsurface,
several physical properties of soil must be defined. Refer to Figure 12.3 for a sim-
plistic representation of a soil sediment and associated variables that will be used to
mathematically describe the soil matrix. Table 12.4 provides a brief definition of
Volume Mass
relationships relationships
Va Air
Ww
Vv Water
Vw rw 1.0 g/cm3
Wt
Vt
Figure 12.3
Vs Solids Phase diagram for a par-
Ws
rs 2.65 g/cm3 tially saturated soil. Volume
and mass relationships are
identified.
Table 12.4 Volume-Mass Relationships of Soil Constituents

Mathematical
Property Symbol Definition Expressions
Porosity h volume of voids Vv
h =
total volume Vt
Volumetric water content (at ® volume of water Vw

® =
saturation ® = h) total volume Vt
Bulk density rw total weight Wt

rw =
total volume Vt
Dry bulk density rb mass of solids Ms

rb =
total volume Vt
each property, its Greek symbolic reference, and a mathematical description. From
the figure, notice that the total weight of the soil is equal to the weight of the water
plus the weight of the solids. The weight of air is neglected, such that the total weight
is given mathematically as Wt = Ww + Ws . The void volume in the soil is equal to
the sum of the volumes of air and water, such that Vv = Va + Vw . The total soil vol-
ume can be represented as Vt = Vv + Vs = Va + Vw + Vs .
EXAMPLE 12.3
Determine mass and volume relationships in soil
A sample of moist soil having a wet weight of 1000 g and volume of 650 cm3 was
oven dried and found to have a dry mass of 800 g. Determine the soil’s dry bulk den-
sity and porosity and the volumetric water content.
Solution
From the problem statement, recognize that:
Mt = 1000 g, Ms = 800 g, and Vt = 650 cm3
Assume a soil density of rs = 2.65 g/cm3. Given that the mass of the solid is
800 g, the volume of the soil is Vs = 1800 g2/12.65 g/cm32 = 301.9 cm3.
Assume that the mass of the air is negligible, so Ma = 0. The mass of the water
present in the sample can be determined as Mw = 11000 - 8002g = 200 g. Assuming
the density of water is 1 g/cm3, the volume of water in the sample is Vw = 200 cm3.
Recognize that the total sample volume is Vt = 650 cm3 = Va + Vw + Vs .
Knowing the volumes of the water and solid phases, we can algebraically determine
Va = 148.1 cm3.
With Vt = 650 cm3, Vw = 200 cm3, Vs = 301.9 cm3, and Va = 148.1 cm3, we
can determine the unknown mass and volume soil relationships. Use Figure 12.3 and
Table 12.4 to determine appropriate definitions and equations.
Ms 800 g g
dry bulk density = rb = = 3
= 1.23 3
Vt 650 cm cm
Vv Va + Vw 1148.1 + 2002cm3
porosity = h = = = = 0.54
Vt Vt 650 cm3
Vw 200 cm3
volumetric water content = ® = = = 0.31
Vt 650 cm3
12.2.3 Darcy’s Law

Fate and transport models simulate the movement and chemical/biological alter-
ations of contaminants as they move with groundwater through the subsurface.
Most models consider three main mechanisms associated with contaminant trans-
port: advection, mechanical dispersion, and molecular diffusion. Advective trans-
port, or convection, is the process where contaminants are carried along with the
bulk movement of the flowing groundwater. Mechanical dispersion describes the
mixing of the groundwater containing contaminant(s) as it flows around the solids
in the soil matrix. Without dispersion, flow through an aquifer would behave like a
plug flow reactor. But the variations in velocity caused by dispersion actually allow
the contaminant to reach some distance x from the source sooner than by seepage
velocity alone. Molecular diffusion is controlled by a concentration gradient, such
that the movement of the contaminant is from an area of greater concentration
toward an area where it is less concentrated.
Darcy’s law is often used to describe flux (discharge per unit area with typical
units in m/s) in porous media.
dh
q = KC (12.5)
dL
where:
q = Darcy flux along the flow path (often called the superficial velocity,
discharge velocity, specific discharge, or Darcy’s velocity), m/s,
KC = hydraulic conductivity, m/s, and
dh
= hydraulic gradient, dimensionless.
dL
The porosity 1h2 relates the actual pore velocity (v) to the Darcy flux (q). The
flux is divided by the porosity in recognition that the flow through the subsurface is
limited by the available pore space in the matrix, such that the average velocity
through the porous media is larger than the Darcy flux. The pore velocity, v (also
referred to as the average linear velocity and the seepage velocity), is equal to
Darcy’s velocity (q) divided by porosity 1h2, shown as:
q
v = (12.6)
h
Sorption to sediments is mathematically characterized by the concept of retardation

and is fundamental to understanding contaminant transport. The retardation factor,
R, relates the groundwater seepage velocity to the velocity of the contaminant
plume 1vp2.
v
R = (12.7)
vp
Flow of a conservative, inert material that travels at the speed of the seepage
velocity has an R value equal to 1. In a given environment, the plume of a hydropho-
bic compound with R = 2 is estimated to travel at half the groundwater seepage
velocity. If the flow system is assumed to be at equilibrium and sorption can be char-
acterized as linear and reversible, the retardation coefficient can be estimated as:
rb
R = 1 + K (12.8)
h SD
EXAMPLE 12.4
G ro u n d w a t e r m i g r a t i o n a n d r e t a r d a t i o n o f c o n t a m i n a n t s
Assume a leak in a 200-L underground storage tank containing water contaminated
with methyl tertiary-butyl ether, benzene, and benzo(b)fluoranthene. Estimate how
far each contaminant will travel in one year. Assume the following hydrogeologic
characteristics:
Soil porosity = 0.5 Specific gravity of soil = 2.5

Hydraulic gradient = 0.05 ft/ft Aquifer conductivity = 0.0001 cm/s
Fraction of organic content in the soil = 1% Dry bulk density = 1.25 g/mL
Benzene KOW = 102.13 MTBE KOW = 101.24
Benzo(b)fluoranthene KOW = 106.12
Solution
Use Equation (12.5) to calculate the Darcy velocity:
dh cm ft cm
q = KC = a 0.0001 b a0.05 b = 5 * 10-6
dL s ft s
From Equation (12.6), the pore velocity can be estimated as:
cm
5 * 10-6
q s cm
v = = = 1 * 10-5
h 0.5 s
Develop a summary table for the compounds spilled.
Compound KOW fOC KSD(L/mg) R vp (cm/s) Distance (cm)

-7 -6
MTBE 101.24
0.01 1.09 * 10 1.27 7.9 * 10 250
Benzene 102.13 0.01 8.5 * 10-7 3.13 3.2 * 10-6 100
benzo(b)fluoranthene 106.12 0.01 8.31 * 10-3 20,776 4.8 * 10-10 0.015
Calculate the KSD for each compound using Equation (12.3). For example, the
KSD for MTBE is found as follows:
L
KSD = 6.3 * 10-7 fOCKOW = 16.3 * 10-7210.0121101.242 = 1.09 * 107
mg
Use Equation (12.8) to determine the retardation factor for each compound. The
calculation is demonstrated with MTBE.
g 1000 ml L 1000 mg
a1.25 ba b a1.09 * 10-7 ba b
rb ml L mg g
R = 1 + K = 1 +
h SD 0.5
= 1.27
Relying on Equation (12.7), calculate the velocity of each contaminant. For MTBE:
cm
1 * 10-5
v s cm
vp = = = 7.9 * 10-6
R 1.27 s
Now, determine an estimate of the distance traveled in one year. Again, MTBE is
used as an example:
distance = vp * time
cm 365 d 24 hr 60 min 60 s
distance = a7.9 * 10-6 b11 yr2a ba ba ba b = 250 cm
s yr d hr min
Notice the role sorption plays for benzo(b)fluoranthene! Recognize that due to sub-
surface heterogeneities, assumptions of uniform fOC , differences in sorption of dif-
ferent soil organics, and the linear sorption assumption in the retardation-factor
formula, these results are simply estimates. Therefore, do not report too many sig-
nificant figures when providing your answers.
Section 12.3 Overview of Microbial Processes 323
12.3 OVERVIEW OF MICROBIAL PROCESSES

Biological processes are used in conjunction with many remediation schemes to
treat contaminated soil and groundwater. Bioremediation processes use living
organisms to clean up or prevent the introduction of hazardous chemicals in the
environment. To this end, an understanding of some microbiological systems is
required to appropriately design and analyze remediation processes.
12.3.1 An Overview of Bacteria

A variety of types of organisms are used in bioremediation processes, including:
plants, fungi, algae, actinomycetes (filamentous bacteria), and—possibly the most
important group—bacteria. Bacteria are single-cell prokaryotic (lacking internal
membrane structure) microorganisms that reproduce primarily by binary fusion,
such that daughter cells are identical to the parent cell. Bacteria are classified by
shapes that include rods (bacillus), spheres (coccus), and spirals (spirillum), and
they range in size from 0.5 to 3.0 mm.
Nutritional requirements for microorganisms can be divided into two general,
often overlapping categories: those that supply energy and those that supply carbon.
Nutrients may be supplied to organisms as an element or as a specific combination
of elements (compound) required for growth and repair. Organisms are often classi-
fied according to their nutritional choice of energy and carbon sources. The energy
source provides a supply of high-energy electrons used to make adenosine triphos-
phate (ATP), which is required for the biosynthesis of cell material. Common
organic energy sources include glucose, lipids, amino acids, and other carbohydrates,
while inorganic sources include sulfur, ammonia, and hydrogen. A chemotroph is an
organism whose energy sources are electron-donating organic and inorganic com-
pounds such as those listed in the previous sentence. A phototroph is an organism
whose energy source is light. The carbon source is used by the microbe as a building
block for the organic compounds found in the organism. An autotroph is an organ-
ism whose principle carbon source is carbon dioxide, which it uses to make non-CO2
carbon compounds. A heterotroph is an organism which uses organic compounds as
its principle source of carbon. As a result, many organisms used in bioremediation
are heterotrophs.
12.3.2 Environmental Factors Affecting Microbial Metabolism

Microorganisms transform organic contaminants during their growth and reproduc-
tion processes. Organics provide carbon used to build cell material, and electrons
are used as a source of energy. The cells act as a catalyst in the oxidation of organic
chemicals (electron donors), causing transfer of electrons from the organic chemical
to some electron acceptor. In aerobic oxidation, the acceptor is oxygen. In anaerobic
environments, the possible acceptors include (with decreasing efficiency): nitrate,
sulfate, and carbon dioxide. Microorganims also require essential nutrients such as
nitrogen and phosphorus to sustain viability. Chemical, physical, and biological fac-
tors influence an organism’s viability, the target compound bioavailability, and
therefore the degradation capacity of microorganisms. This section provides a syn-
opsis of the most influential of these environmental factors.
Important variables that effect microbial activity include the system tempera-
ture and pH, soil moisture content, availability of a suitable electron acceptor and
required nutrients, and an appropriate and adequate bacterial population. The site
must also exhibit nontoxic conditions for the organisms, and there should be an
absence of competitive organisms.
Bacterial metabolic reactions are mediated by enzymes that serve as reaction

catalysts. Enzyme activity increases linearly as substrate concentration increases, up
to a value that represents saturation of enzyme activity. Above saturation, no addi-
tional increase in enzymatic activity is observed. Bacteria can grow over a wide
range of temperatures; some can grow at 0ºC while others thrive in boiling water.
Different classes of organisms show different temperature optima. For example,
psychrophilic bacteria grow optimally around 20ºC, while mesophilic bacteria grow
well between 20 to 45ºC, and thermophilic bacteria grow well at temperatures above
45ºC. In general, for each class of bacteria, enzyme activity and growth rate increase
linearly with an increase in temperature, up to their optimal conditions. Above that
temperature, activity drops abruptly as enzymes are destroyed/denatured. Favorable
conditions for bioremediation typically occur when the temperature is from 15 to
45ºC. Environmental pH will also affect microbial activity. The most desirable pH
will be site or process specific, but most systems have a pH optimum around neutral-
ity, as enzymes often denature at pH extremes. As a rule of thumb, an acceptable pH
range for most systems is 5.5 to 8.5.
The availability of the contaminant to the microorganisms is complicated and
is a function of compound solubility, polarity, soil pore structure, and the pres-
ence of water. Moisture content is important, because microbes obtain all of their
nutrients and carbon requirements for growth from solution. So, nutritionally for
the microbe, water is essential. In many remediation systems, oxygen is the elec-
tron acceptor of choice. Unfortunately, the solubility of oxygen in water is low
( ' 9.0 mg/L at 20ºC). So, a high soil moisture content may result in poor oxygen
availability. Optimal soil moisture content ranges from 15% to 25% (mass basis,
i.e., 150 to 250 g water per kg of dry soil). At higher soil water concentrations, air-
flow is inhibited, possibly resulting in limited oxygen availability. The molecular
structure of the target compound is an additional chemical factor for consideration
in bioremediation process design.
12.4 INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERED REMEDIATION PROCESSES

In any environmental remediation process, especially those that emphasize biologi-
cal remediation, the behavior and fate of contaminants are site specific, making it
difficult to generalize treatment efficacy from one case to another. To add complex-
ity to the site-specific nature of remediation, recognize that the convolution of the
hydrocarbon mixture, and perhaps its age, may affect the rate and extent (end
point) of treatment; and that there are typically large variations in the biological
removal of pollutants between large- and small-scale studies. In essence, determin-
ing the effectiveness of bioremediation, beyond mere compound removal, requires
well-designed experiments that can be analyzed statistically. This section provides
general application and design guidelines for selected widely used treatment tech-
nologies that combine bioremediation with a physical and/or chemical treatment
option.
12.4.1 In situ Remediation Schemes

In situ remediation schemes are introduced for treatment of both groundwater and
the vadose zone. The vadose zone is the unsaturated zone (except in the capillary
fringe) between the land surface and the water table. Air-sparging and pump-and-
treat technologies are commonly used to remediate groundwater. Soil-vapor extrac-
tion and bioventing are popular treatment schemes used in the vadose zone.
Section 12.4 Introduction to Engineered Remediation Processes 325
Groundwater Remediation Technologies—Air Sparging and Pump and Treat

Pump-and-treat technology is the most common form of groundwater remediation.
Between 1982 and 1992, it was used in almost 75% of the Superfund sites requiring
groundwater treatment. Pump-and-treat systems remove the contaminated ground-
water from the subsurface. Once at the surface, the groundwater is treated to remove
the contaminants, and then the treated water is either recharged back into the ground
or discharged into a receiving stream or municipal wastewater treatment plant. Once
at the surface, a variety of physical, chemical, and biological processes have been
used to treat the water. For example, organic compounds may be treated through air
stripping, carbon adsorption, chemical oxidation, membrane filtration, or biodegra-
dation. Inorganics may be removed from the groundwater through precipitation, ion
exchange, adsorption, or reverse osmosis.
Pump-and-treat systems can be designed to provide either hydraulic contain-
ment or treatment, and often a combination of both. When focused on hydraulic con-
tainment, the objective is to control the movement of contaminated groundwater,
preventing expansion of the contaminated zone, and/or to redirect the contaminated
plume to protect potential receptors. When designed for treatment, the overarching
goal is to reduce the concentration of contaminants in the groundwater, such that
cleanup objectives are realized. Figure 12.4 provides a generalized diagram of a
pump-and-treat system. When designing such a system, important considerations
include: selection of a pumping rate, estimation of the mass of contamination in the
pumping zone, estimation of oxygen requirements and time for bioremediation if
appropriate, and the number and placement of additional wells needed for sampling,
monitoring, and containment. The pumping rate depends on the time available for
remediation, the aquifer hydraulic conductivity, the size of the contaminated zone,
and the soil-distribution coefficient of the contaminants.
Air sparging is an in situ groundwater remediation technology that involves
injecting pressurized air into the saturated zone to strip volatile contaminants from
the dissolved and sorbed states, and to provide an electron acceptor for promotion
of bioremediation. Once in the gas phase, contaminants migrate into the vadose
zone, where they are extracted by a soil-vapor extraction system. Air sparging can
Figure 12.4
Typical pump-and-treat
ee
k Treatment system.
Cr Discharge pipe
building (Source: U.S. EPA, 2001.)
Extraction wells
Plume
employ both vertical and horizontal wells to enhance contaminant extraction, with
air bubbles traveling both horizontally and vertically through the subsurface. Sys-
tems should be designed such that the uncontrolled release of volatiles into the
atmosphere is minimized. The treatment of offgas may be required.
Sites contaminated with VOCs and fuels are often amenable to air sparging.
The lower-molecular-weight constituents in gasoline, such as BTEX, are generally
mitigated well with this technology, while less volatile, heavier mixtures such as
diesel fuel do not respond adequately. Appropriate geologic and hydrogeologic site
conditions are crucial to the application of an air-sparging system. Site considera-
tions dictate the ability to effectively deliver air to the treatment area. In general,
site conditions that favor air sparging include a moderate to high permeability, often
correlating to relatively coarse-grained materials. Low-permeability (fine-grained)
soils limit the migration of air into the subsurface and reduce the effectiveness of
the treatment strategy. A typical air-sparging system is shown in Figure 12.5.
Vadose Zone Treatment Schemes—Soil Vapor Extraction and Bioventing

Soil vapor extraction (SVE) is an effective and cost-efficient technology for remov-
ing VOCs from the vadose zone. In the SVE process, a vacuum is supplied to unsat-
urated soils, causing air movement that encourages NAPL, aqueous, or sorbed
VOCs to volatilize and be removed. Once removed, the exit gas is treated (if neces-
sary) and subsequently discharged. Recognize that SVE is a remediation, not a
treatment process, as the goal is volatilization of the VOCs, although some bioreme-
diation occurs indirectly. SVE systems consists of one or more extraction wells
screened in the unsaturated zone, blowers or vacuum pumps, and often also a low-
permeability cap at the ground surface, an air/water separator, and an offgas treat-
ment system. If the site is capped, ventilation wells may also be installed. Offgas
treatment systems may include adsorption on granular activated carbon, catalytic
oxidation, or incineration. If required, offgas treatment comprises typically over
50% of the SVE remediation cost. Figure 12.6 provides a typical schematic of an
SVE system.
Figure 12.5 Vent gas

Typical air-sparging collection channels
Air treatment
treatment system.
Air blower
(Source: FRTR, 2002.) To further treatment
or discharge
Groundwater
extraction wells
Vadose zone
Contaminated
Injection well groundwater
Saturated zone
Submersible
pump
Clean air
Vacuum Vapor
blower treatment
(5)
(4)
Extracted
vapor Vapor- Process residual
liquid
separator
(3)
Clean water
Extraction Liquid
well treatment
(6)
(1)
Process residual
Air vent or
Air vent or injection well
injection well
(2) Impermeable cap (7) Ground surface
Contaminated
vadoss
zone
Water table
Figure 12.6
Generic soil-vapor extraction system.
(Source: U.S. EPA, 1991.)
Most SVE systems are installed to treat shallow contamination, where the site
targeted for cleanup is less than 10 m deep. Typical vacuums of 0.1 to 0.2 atm (1.5 to
2.9 psi) are applied, resulting in extraction flow rates between 1 to 6 m3/min (35 to
212 ft3/min). In the vadose zone, recall that the contaminant is partitioned between
three phases (possibly four phases, if pure product is available). Soils with high
organic content tend to sorb VOCs, making SVE much more difficult, and desorp-
tion from the solid phase is considered rate limiting. SVE in the preferential path-
ways will be achieved primarily due to advection, while in the dead-end pores
removal will be achieved primarily due to diffusion. Soil conditions should be dry
enough so that air moves freely. However, the drier the soil, the more the compound
will partition to the solid phase. Also recognize that many spills contain multiple
compounds, each having a different vapor pressure. Typically, the more volatile com-
pounds evaporate first, leaving the less volatile ones. This fractionalization process is
sometimes called “weathering” the product.
Bioventing (BV) treats contaminants in the unsaturated zone and, like SVE,
forces air through the treatment area. But, as the focus in SVE is removal by
volatilization followed by above-ground treatment, BV is designed to treat contami-
nants through bioremediation in situ. A BV system is designed to enhance the activ-
ity of indigenous bacteria, effectively stimulating the natural in situ biological
degradation of hydrocarbons. To encourage biodegradation rather than removal
through volatilization, bioventing systems are generally operated at vapor extrac-
tion or injection rates lower than those used for SVE systems, in an effort to provide
only enough oxygen to sustain microbial activity. Bioventing can be used to treat all
aerobically biodegradable constituents; however, it has proven to be particularly

effective in remediating releases of petroleum products, including gasoline, jet fuels,
kerosene, and diesel fuel. The technology is often applied to sites contaminated with
midweight petroleum products, such as diesel and jet fuel. Lighter products such as
gasoline tend to volatilize readily and are therefore more amenable to the SVE process.
Heavier products such as lubricating oils generally take longer to biodegrade, making
bioventing a less effective option. A BV system consists of one or more extraction or
injection wells screened in the unsaturated zone, and blowers or vacuum pumps.
Figure 12.7 shows a schematic of a typical bioventing system. Almost exclusively, air is
injected. Extraction would be used only if there were a nearby subsurface structure or
property boundary that an injected air source might seep into. Injection is preferred to
prevent extracting volatile compounds from the well.
12.4.2 Ex situ Remediation Schemes – Composting and Landfarming

Composting and landfarming are two common remediation schemes used to treat
soils excavated from contaminated sites. In addition to treating contaminated soils,
both technologies are extensively used for stabilization of wastewater sludges
(biosolids). Composting is a controlled, biologically mediated process that trans-
forms contaminants into innocuous, stable end products and has been shown effective
at treating a wide range of contaminants, including PAHs, propellants, pharmaceuti-
cal wastes, and explosives. A wide range of soil and sediment types including sand,
gravel, soils, clay, and lagoon and marine sediments, can be effectively remediated by
composting.
Soils to be composted are excavated and mixed with supplemental organics
and amendments. The addition of the supplemental organics serves three main
Atomospheric
Vapor discharge
treatment
(if needed)
Nutrient tank
UST Blower
Legend:
Vapor phase
Air Adsorbed phase

Nutrients
Air flow
flow Dissolved phase
Optional depending
on the site conditions
Groundwater
gradient
Figure 12.7
Typical bioventing system using vapor extraction.
(Source: U.S. EPA, 2004.)
purposes: to serve as a simple food source to support a diverse microbial popula-

tion, to provide a bulking agent useful for maintaining aerobic conditions, and to
promote high bioactivity levels in the thermophilic range. Fresh manure, a supple-
ment high in organic content, is often used to help increase the pile temperature.
Additional amendments are typically applied to composting piles to serve as a
bulking agent and as a nutrient and energy source. One of the most common bulk-
ing agents is wood chips; added at a volumetric ratio of 1 part wood chip to 2 to 10
parts soil, with a 1:3 ratio being most typical. Other frequently used bulking agents
include sawdust, ground corncobs, straw, and vermiculite. Manure is often added
as the nutrient and energy source. A C:N:P weight ratio of 100:10:1 is desired and
is obtained by adding 1 part manure to 1 to 50 parts soil (by volume). Typically,
manure is added at a ratio of 1:5. Other nutrient and energy amendments include
dewatered municipal sludge, dry molasses, and grass clippings. Good mixing of all
amendments with the contaminated soil is critical.
Configurations for composting include piles, windrows, and in-vessel. Figure 12.8
provides a cartoon of a typical windrow composting facility. Windrows may span up to
100 yards (91 m) if space is available. Pile shape has an important effect on moisture
content and oxygen availability. The top of the pile may be either concave or peaked.
The concave pile traps rainfall and replenishes water lost from piles as steam. This type
of configuration might be useful if anaerobic conditions are desirable. Peaked piles tend
Form Windrow
Excavate Periodic
windrows Windrow Compost disassembly
and screen turning of
w/soil and monitoring analysis and
soils windrow
amendments disposition
Figure 12.8
Typical windrow composting process.
(Source: FRTR, 2002.)
to shed rainwater. To remain aerobic, the oxygen content needs to be approximately

10% in the large pores. Air can be supplied by either passive or active means. Passive
oxygenation takes advantage of natural convection driven by the chimney effect. Nat-
ural air circulation through the pile is driven by warm, less dense air rising out of the top
of the center of the pile, causing cool fresh air to be sucked in at the bottom and sides.
Oxygen can also be added by mixing with a front end loader or by using a blower.
Landfarming is a bioremediation activity that can be used for treatment of
contaminated soil by spreading it on the ground surface, tilling the soil for aeration
and/or for potential mixing with native surface soil. Landfarming is widely used to
treat petroleum-impacted soils. Abiotic losses through volatilization and leaching
are difficult to quantify. Although landfarming is a “low-tech” system, operational
variables still significantly affect treatment time and total cost and as a consequence
should not be ignored. Critical operational variables include: (1) soil application
rates such that highly contaminated soils are appropriately diluted with native soil,
bulking agents, or additional nutrients so that bioactivity can occur, (2) tilling fre-
quency, since it is important to ensure aerobic conditions, (3) nutrient addition fre-
quency, (4) control of moisture by irrigation or spraying, and (5) buffering of soil pH
near neutral by addition of crushed limestone or dolomite.
Figure 12.9 provides a schematic for a typical landfarming unit. Several factors
may limit the applicability and effectiveness of the process. For instance, a large
amount of space is required, and conditions affecting biological degradation of con-
taminants (e.g., temperature, rainfall) are largely uncontrolled, which increases the
length of time to complete remediation. Inorganics are not treated in landfarming
systems, and volatile organics, such as solvents, must be pretreated, because of their
likeliness to volatilize into the atmosphere, causing air pollution. Dust control dur-
ing tilling and other material-handling operations is an additional consideration.
Poly tunnel (optional)
Exiting
ground Microbes
surface nutrients
Waste
Manhole
Concrete
1% Slope retaining
wall footing
Polyethylene
Compacted sand geomembrane
Leachate
collection
pipe
To wastewater Compacted
treatment subgrade
plant surface
Figure 12.9
Typical landfarming treatment unit.
(Source: FRTR, 2002.)
References 331
S U M M A RY
There are an estimated 294,000 CERCLA and RCRA contaminated sites in the
United States. Cleanup costs are predicted to reach $209 billion. This chapter pro-
vided a brief historical perspective and presented regulatory requirements associated
with hazardous waste. An introduction to organic chemistry was given to provide
context for the significant compounds contributing to hazardous waste. Contaminant
partitioning was introduced and its effect on the fate and transport of targeted com-
pounds within the environment was discussed. An overview was given of microbial
systems and environmental factors that affect metabolism. Both in situ and ex situ
treatment schemes for soil and groundwater were presented.
air sparging Right-to-Know Act Resource Conservation KEY WORDS

alkane (EPCRA) and Recovery Act
alkenes Hazardous waste site (RCRA)
alkynes Ranking System soil-vapor extraction
autotroph (HRS) Superfund
bioventing heterotroph Reauthorization and
chemotroph hydrocarbons Amendments (SARA)
composting landfarming Toxic Release Inventory
Comprehensive leaky underground (TRI)
Environmental storage tank (LUST)
Response, National Priorities List
Compensation, and (NPL)
Liability Act octanol-water partition
(CERCLA, or coefficient
Superfund) phototroph
Emergency Planning remedial action
and Community removal action
REFERENCES
Alvarez, P.J., and Illman, W.A. (2006). Bioremediation and Natural Attenuation Process Fun-
damental and Mathematical Models, Eds. J.L. Schnoor and A. Zehnder, Wiley-Interscience,
Hoboken, NJ.
EPA National Analysis (2005). The National Biennial RCRA Hazardous Waste Report:
Based on 2005 Data. Available online at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/data.
Eweis, J.B., Ergas, S.J., Chang, D.P.Y., and Schroeder, E.D. (1998). Bioremediation Principles,
WCB/McGraw-Hill.
Federal Remediation Technology Roundtable (FRTR) (2002). Remediation Technologies Screen-
ing Matrix and Reference Guide, 4th ed., prepared by J. Van Deuren, T. Lloyd, S. Chhetry,
R. Liou, and J. Peck of Platinum International, Inc., for U.S. Army Environmental Center,
SFIM-AEC-ET-CR-97053.Available online at www.frtr.gov.
Kuo, J. (1999). Practical Design Calculations for Groundwater and Soil Remediation, Lewis
Publishers, Boca Raton, FL.
LaGrega, M.D., Buckingham, P.L., and Evans, J.C. (1994). Hazardous Waste Management,
McGraw-Hill, New York.
Mackay, D., Shiu, W. Y., and Ma, K. C. (1997). Illustrated Handbook of Physical and Chemical
Properties and Environmental Fate for Organic Chemicals, Volumes I, II, and V, Lewis
Publishers, New York.
UNEP (United Nations Environment Programme): UNEP 1999 Report.
U.S. EPA (1989). Risk Assessment Guidance for Superfund, Volume 1, Human Health Evalua-
tion Manual (Part A), Interim Final, EPA/540/1-89/002, Office of Emergency and Remedial
Response, Washington, DC, December, 1989.
U.S. EPA (1990). CERCLA Site Discharges to POTWs Treatability Manual, EPA 540/2-90-007,
Office of Water, U.S. EPA, Washington, DC.
U.S. EPA (1991). Guide for Conducting Treatability Studies Under CERCLA: Soil Vapor Extrac-
tion, Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response, Office of Emergency and Remedial
Response Quick Reference Fact, Hazardous Site Control Division OS-220, September 1991,
EPA/540/2-91/019B.
U.S. EPA (2001). Groundwater Pump and Treat Systems: Summary of Selected Cost and Per-
formance Information at Superfund-financed Sites, Office of Solid Waste and Emergency
Response. EPA 542-R-01-021b. Available online at www.clu-in.org.
U.S. EPA (2004). How to Evaluate Alternative Cleanup Technologies for Underground Storage
Tank Sites. A Guide for Corrective Action Plan Reviewers. Solid Waste and Emergency
Response, EPA 510-B-94-003; EPA 510-B-95-007; and EPA 510-R-04-002, May 2004,
Available online at www.epa.gov/oust/pubs/tums.htm.
EXERCISES
12.1 Visit the Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response EPA website (http://
www.epa.gov/superfund/) and research CERCAL NPL sites within your state
of residence. Review the information provided online and write a summary
paragraph describing your findings.
12.2 From Table 12.2, select a metal, a chlorinated aliphatic, and a PAH compound
of choice. Use the internet or library to write a paragraph summary describing
potential uses, contamination sources, and health effects for each compound.
12.3 Describe the difference between a CERCLA removal and remedial action.
12.4 Research the regulations associated with deep-well injection of hazardous
waste. Write a paragraph outlining these provisions that includes your opin-
ion of this type of disposal practice.
12.5 Groundwater is contaminated with 300 mg/L (300 ppb) of toluene. Assume
that the aquifer solids contain 1.5% organic carbon and that sorption is ade-
quately described by a linear model. Estimate the mass of toluene sorbed to
the solid material.
12.6 Results from a soil-vapor study showed a soil-vapor concentration for vinyl
chloride of 1500 ppmv. Use Henry’s law to estimate the surrounding liquid-
phase VC concentration.
12.7 A sample of moist soil having a wet weight of 1500 g and volume of 1000 cm3
was oven dried and found to have a dry mass of 1150 g. Determine the soil: dry
bulk density, porosity, and volumetric water content. Assume a soil density of
rs = 2.65 g/cm3.
12.8 Assume a leak in a 500-gal underground storage tank containing water conta-
minated with Aroclor® 1254 and acetone. Estimate how far each contaminant
will travel in one year. Assume the following hydrogeologic characteristics:
Soil porosity = 0.45 Specific gravity of soil = 2.5

Hydraulic gradient = 0.06 ft/ft Aquifer conductivity = 0.0001 cm/s
Fraction of organic content in the soil = 0.5% rb = 1.3 g/mL
Acetone log KO W = - 0.23
CHAPTER
Introduction to Solid
13
Waste Management
13.1 INTRODUCTION
Objectives
Western world civilizations realized as early as 500 B.C.E. the importance of
In this chapter, you will solid waste disposal. The Greeks knew that garbage attracted rats and other
learn about: vectors that contributed to the spread of disease, and in 320 B.C.E they passed
Municipal solid waste the first known refuse-disposal decree, banning disposal in the streets of
(MSW) management Athens. Athenian citizens were required to dispose of their waste at least one
options mile from the city walls. The Romans learned from the Greeks and followed a
The magnitude of MSW similar waste management plan. Interestingly, the fall of the Roman Empire
issues coincided with an increased mismanagement of waste disposal. During the mid-
dle ages, septic wastes and their inherent disease threat were routed directly to
Federal regulations
a moat that surrounded the inhabitants of the castle. In colonial America, peo-
pertinent to solid waste
ple pushing west had few possessions and therefore not much waste was pro-
management
duced. People in towns and cities of America and Europe, however, tossed
Quantification of MSW their garbage out of windows and doors. The consequences of this practice
Components of a landfill were heightened by the industrial revolution, as a relatively large number of
people moved to the city and for the first time in history were able to buy
products made in mass quantity. Tossing trash from windows and doors contin-
ued through the mid 1800s, until piled garbage began to hinder access to cities,
and citizens finally became concerned about unsanitary and malodorous con-
ditions. By the early 1900s, several hundred solid waste incinerators were used
in the United States. Industrial growth in the U.S. during WWII increased solid
waste emissions. Plastics were developed and their many uses exploited, lead-
ing to new disposal problems. Postwar waste emissions became a national
concern, resulting in a federal government response. In 1965, the first solid
waste regulation directed at protecting public health in the United States was
passed, the Solid Waste Disposal Act. In 1979, the Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) prohibited open dumping, and initial standards for landfills were
mandated.Ten years later, the EPA initiated a goal to reduce waste nationally by
25% and to concentrate on recycling. This chapter provides an overview of
municipal solid waste (MSW) management options, current regulations, and
related issues.
334 Chapter 13 Introduction to Solid Waste Management
Waste generated Landfill disposal

U.S. population Recovered for recycle
Figure 13.1
350
Historical population and
Millions of tons of waste or

waste generation and 300
population in millions
handling trends. 250
(Source for waste generation
trends: Municipal Solid 200
Waste in the United States: 150
2005 Facts and Figures;
Source for historical 100
population trends: www. 50
census.gov; Source for
population projections in 0
1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010
years beyond 2000: Census
Time (year)
Release-T1, 2000)
To develop a perspective on current solid waste management issues, consider

Figure 13.1, which shows historical trends in waste generation, recovery, and dis-
posal, along with population growth in the United States. Over 200 million tons of
solid waste were generated in 2000, some 32 million tons more than a decade earlier.
By 2005, the refuse generated amounted to 245.7 million tons. Of this, 32% was
either recycled or composted—an increase of 16% from the 1990 observed rate. In
2005, Americans produced, on a per-capita basis, 4.54 lb (2.1 kg) of refuse per day.
Figure 13.2 summarizes the most recent data available on how U.S.-produced waste
is disposed.
What are the major components of trash or municipal solid waste (MSW)?
The EPA categorizes MSW by material and product categories. Materials are items
such as paper and paperboard, yard trimmings, food waste, wood, rubber, leather,
and others. In 2005, 34.2% (on a weight basis) of the MSW produced was materially
categorized as paper and paperboard, 13.1% as yard trimmings, 11.8% as plastics,
and 11.9% as food scraps. The products category includes include groupings of con-
tainers and packaging, durable and nondurable goods, and food scraps. Figure 13.3
shows the waste production by product category in 2005 and Table 13.1 gives an
idea of items associated within each category.
What does waste disposal cost? In 1982, the National Solid Waste Management
Association (NSWMA) began investigating and tracking such costs. Historically,
landfilling has cost less than incineration. In 2004, the national average tipping fee
was reported as $34.29 per ton for landfill versus $61.64 a ton for incineration (Repa,
2005). This cost is for disposal only and does not include costs of recycling, collection,
and transport. Consider the waste generation and waste management data presented
in Figures 13.1 and 13.2. Using the tipping fees provided above; about how much
does the United States spend on waste disposal every year?
Figure 13.2 Combusted

Management of municipal with energy
recovery
solid waste in the United 13.6%
States, 2005. Discarded
primarily
(Source: Municipal Solid through
Waste in the United States: landfill
2005 Facts and Figures.) Recycled 54.3%
32.1%
Section 13.2 Regulations and Solid Waste Management 335
Durable
Other wastes
goods Containers &
1.5%
16.4% packaging
Yard 31.2% Figure 13.3
trimmings Waste generated by product
13.1% category in the United
States, 2005.
Food scraps (Source: Municipal Solid
11.9% Nondurable
goods Waste in the United States:
25.9% 2005 Facts and Figures.)
Table 13.1 Examples of Products in Waste Categories Shown in Figure 13.3

Waste Category
Durable goods Nondurable goods Containers and packaging
Steel Paper Steel
Aluminum Plastics Aluminum
Glass Rubber and leather Glass
Plastics Textiles Paper
Rubber and leather Plastics
Wood Wood
Textiles
Source: Municipal Solid Waste in the United States: 2005 Facts and Figures.
13.2 REGULATIONS AND SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT

The American legislative system is based on common law, that is, based on court
rulings. Theoretically, the law develops and evolves as needed. But it has a signifi-
cant weakness in that it cannot act preemptively. As a remedy, the government
(federal, state, or local) may pass laws to provide environmental guidelines or reg-
ulations before a situation arrives in a courtroom. When legislators determine that
a law is required, it is developed, as shown in Figure 13.4. State regulatory require-
ments have to be at least as stringent as the federal requirements. In many cases,
states have simply adopted the federal requirements.
The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), promulgated in 1976,
is the primary federal legislation governing solid and hazardous waste. RCRA regu-
lations are outlined in 40 CFR Parts 240-99 and are easily accessed through an EPA-
maintained website (http://www.epa.gov/epacfr40/chapt-I.info/). The pervasive goal
of RCRA is to protect human health by providing an umbrella of safety from the
hazards posed by waste disposal. RCRA is also focused on recycling, recovering,
and reducing the amount of waste generated and ensuring that wastes are managed
in an environmentally safe manner. Solid waste, hazardous waste, and underground
storage tanks (USTs) are managed by RCRA.
13.2.1 RCRA Solid Waste Definition

According to EPA regulations, solid waste means any garbage, or refuse, sludge
from a wastewater treatment plant (biosolids), water supply treatment plant, or air
pollution control facility, and any other discarded material, including solid, liquid,
Federal house or senate bill
Federal act
Federal regulations State bill
Federal rules or guidelines Regional or local ordinance State act
Local regulations State rules or guidelines

Figure 13.4
Process overview for the
United States environmental Local rules or guidelines
legislation.
semisolid, or contained gaseous material resulting from industrial, commercial, min-

ing, and agricultural operations and community activities. But more practically, solid
waste is defined as the waste generated by a community.
13.2.2 RCRA Hazardous Waste Definition

Hazardous waste is regulated under the RCRA Subtitle C. By definition, RCRA
defines hazardous waste as [RCRA §1004(5) definition]:
A solid waste, or combination of solid waste, which because of its quan-

tity, concentration, or physical, chemical, or infectious characteristics
may (a) cause, or significantly contribute to, an increase in mortality or
an increase in serious irreversible, or incapacitating reversible, illness;
or (b) pose a substantial present or potential hazard to human health
or the environment when improperly treated, stored, transported, or
disposed of, or otherwise managed.
To provide a more practical definition, regulations state that to be regulated

under RCRA as a hazardous waste, a waste must first be a solid waste as defined
by RCRA. A waste is an RCRA hazardous waste if it meets the solid waste stip-
ulation, it is not specifically excluded from regulation under RCRA, and it is
either:
1. A LISTED RCRA hazardous waste. (These are wastes from various industrial
processes, wastes from specific sectors of industry, or wastes in the form of spe-
cific chemical formulations.)
• F list—wastes from certain common industrial or manufacturing processes.
Because the processes producing these wastes can occur in different sec-
tors of industry, the F list wastes are known as wastes from nonspecific
sources.
• K list—wastestreams from certain specific industries. K list wastes are known
as wastes from specific sources.
• P list and U list—pure or commercial-grade formulations of certain specific
unused chemicals.
Section 13.3 Waste Generation (Quantifying MSW Generation) 337
2. A waste with a CHARACTERISTIC property that poses a sufficient threat

to deserve regulation as hazardous. The four (4) characteristics that identify a
waste as hazardous are:
• Toxicity (codes D004 to D043): leachate from the sample obtained using the
Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) contains any of 39 differ-
ent toxic chemicals above specified regulatory levels.
• Reactivity (code D003): can explode or violently react when exposed to water
or under normal handling conditions, can create toxic fumes or gases when
exposed to water or under common handling conditions, meets the criteria for
classification as an explosive under Department of Transportation rules.
• Ignitability (code D001): flashpoint 6 140°F, can spontaneously combust
and sustain combustion, is an oxidizer.
• Corrosivity (code D002): pH greater than or equal to 12.5 or less than or
equal to 2 or the ability to corrode steel in an EPA-approved test.
3. A waste DECLARED to be hazardous by the generator.
13.2.3 RCRA Nonhazardous Waste

RCRA’s nonhazardous solid waste management program, Subtitle D, is focused
on source reduction, recycling, combustion, and landfilling. Sound environmen-
tal practices for solid waste management are encouraged. By definition, the term
solid waste includes not only municipal garbage but also some hazardous waste
(excluded from Subtitle C regulations) generated by households and condition-
ally exempt small-quantity generators (CESQGs). This solid waste management
(SWM) program is responsible for the collection and disposal of municipal
wastes generated by households and businesses that are typically disposed of in
municipal solid waste landfills (MSWLFs). Subtitle D also contains technical
criteria for the design of MSW landfills (40 CFR Part 258, Subchapter I). This
chapter focuses on the management of municipal solid waste (nonhazardous,
subtitle-D wastes).
13.3 WASTE GENERATION (QUANTIFYING MSW GENERATION)

The quantification of MSW generation is important, as this knowledge facilitates
compliance with federal and state diversion requirements, aids in equipment
selection and with collection and management decisions, and is critical to proper
facilities design. The objective of this section is to develop an appreciation for
topics associated with MSW generation. It introduces two methodologies used to
quantify MSW generation and shows differences among global production rates.
Factors affecting waste generation are explored and per-capita generation rates
highlighted.
Two approaches are commonly used to quantify waste generation, (1) materials-
flow methodology and, (2) load-count analysis. The application of either approach
requires that wastes be categorized using the following mass balance:
generated waste = disposed waste + recycled waste + diverted waste (13.1)
where:
generated waste = all solid waste materials generated,
disposed waste = solid waste materials collected and taken to ultimate
disposal (landfill or waste incinerator),
recycled waste = solid waste materials separated for recycling, and

diverted waste = solid waste materials not processed through the munic-
ipal waste-management channels.
The materials-flow methodology for determining waste-generation rates is
based on materials production or flow. Production data are gathered on a weight
basis for each material and product category. For example, detailed material bal-
ances are performed for each generation source, such as an individual home or spe-
cific industry. The Franklin Study, a nickname for a 2001 Facts and Figures report on
MSW in the United States, used this method. Several problems are associated with
this methodology. For example, residue such as food materials or detergent remain-
ing in a disposed container is not accounted for. Also, this method measures the
amount of waste collected, not the actual amount generated and possibly disposed
of at an alternate location. For load-count analysis, the number of vehicle loads
hauled to a transfer center, materials recovery facility (MRF), incinerator, or landfill
is noted along with corresponding vehicle size, types of waste, and estimated volume
and weight recorded, if available. This calculation represents the quantity collected
(delivered), not generated. Recycling, alternative disposal methods, and storage are
not identified, making it difficult to discern whether the data collected properly rep-
resent waste generation.
EXAMPLE 13.1
Solid waste generation
(Example adapted from Tchobanoglous et al., 1993.) Use the following informa-
tion to estimate the unit waste generation rate per week and the recycling effi-
ciency for a residential area consisting of 1200 homes. The average occupancy is
3.5 persons per home. Two observation locations were used, each for a period of
one week. The local transfer station collected all of the waste for disposal, and a
recycling facility was also monitored. According to estimates by the local waste-
water treatment facility, 7,350 pounds of food waste is disposed of in home food
grinders every week.
Additional Data from the Transfer Station:
• Number of compactor truck loads = 9

• Average size of compactor truck = 20 yd3
• Estimated specific weight of waste on compactor truck = 500 lb/yd3
• Number of flatbed loads = 7
• Average flatbed volume = 2 yd3
• Estimated specific weight of waste on flatbed truck = 225 lb/yd3
• Number of loads from individual residents’ private vehicles = 20
• Estimated average volume per domestic vehicle = 8 ft3
• Estimated specific weight of waste from domestic vehicle = 150 lb/yd3
Data from the Recycling Station:
• Number of truck loads received = 12

• Average weight of each load = 1,420 lb
Section 13.3 Waste Generation (Quantifying MSW Generation) 339
Solution
Develop a computation table to estimate the total weight of waste disposed during
this week.
Computation Table for Example 13.1

Number of Average Waste specific Waste total
Waste source loads volume, yd3 weight, lb/yd3 weight, lb
Compactor Truck 9 20 500 90,000
Flatbed truck 7 2 225 3,150
Private vehicle 20 0.3 150 900
Total, lb/week = 94,050
Determine the weight of recycled waste produced during this week.

lb
Total recycled waste = 12 trucks * 1,420 = 17,040 lb recycled material
truck
Remembering to account for ground-food disposal waste by including data
from wastewater treatment facilities, estimate the unit waste generation:
wk
A 94,050 lb冫wk + 17,040 lb冫wk + 7350 lb冫wk B *
7d
unit or per-capita generation rate =
3.5 persons
a 1200 homes * b
home
lb
capita # d
unit or per-capita generation rate = 4.03
Determine the recycling efficiency for the residential area:

weight of recycled material
total recycled waste =
total weight of waste collected
17,040 lb
recycle rate = * 100 = 14.4%
194,050 + 17,040 + 7,3502 lb
Figure 13.5 provides information on global MSW production rates of major

countries. The United States has the largest average production rate at 4.6 lb gener-
ated per capita per day. The average waste generation for the countries presented is
3.5 lb per capita per day. Figure 13.6 depicts how the rate of total and per-capita gen-
eration of waste increased in the United States between 1960 and 2005. In 1960, per
capita waste generation was 2.7 pounds per person per day, and total waste genera-
tion was 88.1 million tons. By 2005, per-capita generation of waste was 4.5 pounds
per person per day, and total waste generation was 245.7 million tons.
Historically, increases in waste-generation rates correlate with increases of the
Gross National Product, and population increase typically explains one-third of the
increase in MSW generation. Other factors that affect generation rates include geo-
graphic location, source reduction and recycling, season, home food-waste grinders,
frequency of collection, legislation, public attitudes, per-capita income, and size of
household. Pay As You Throw (PAYT) programs that charge curbside residential
Average 3.5
Japan 2.5
Sweden 2.7
Finland 2.8
Italy 3.0
France 3.1
Germany 3.3
Belgium 3.3
Country
United Kingdom 3.4
Ireland 3.4
Australia 3.4
Netherlands 3.7
Norway 3.7
Canada 3.9
Switzerland 3.9
Denmark 4.0
Figure 13.5 Austrailia 4.2
Municipal waste-generation United States 4.6
rates of major countries. 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
(Source: OECD, 2002.) lb MSW generated per capita per day
Total waste generation

Per capita generation (lb/person/day)
300 5
Millions of tons
lb/(capita-day)
250 4
200
3
Figure 13.6 150
MSW generation in the 100 2
United States.
50 1
(Source: Municipal Solid 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010
Waste in the United States: Time (years)
2005 Facts and Figures.)
customers on a per-bag/can or weight basis have been shown to decrease produc-

tion, mirrored by an increase in the recycle rate.
13.4 SOLID WASTE COLLECTION

Solid waste (SW) collection is conducted primarily by individuals manning trucks that
traverse a specified area, collecting refuse from homes or other generation sites. The
collected refuse is transported to a transfer station, disposal site, or materials-recovery
facility. In 1992, approximately 50% to 70% of the SW budget (including collection,
transportation, and disposal) was spent on the collection.As fuel costs continue to esca-
late, the efficient collection of SW will become increasingly important. Solid waste col-
lection can be considered a five-stage process that includes (1) transport of the waste
inside the house to an outside can, (2) pickup, or loading the can contents onto the truck,
(3) maneuvering the truck from house to house, (4) truck routing, and (5) maneuvering
the truck and collected refuse to the disposal site.This section introduces the tasks and
logistics of MSW collection and addresses the problems and concerns.
13.4.1 Types of Collection Systems

Two general types of collection systems can be defined. The Hauled Container
System (HCS) is often used at commercial, construction, industrial, institutional,
Section 13.4 Solid Waste Collection 341
and other sources characterized as having a high rate of waste generation. In the
HCS, large containers are used to store waste at the generation site, and the con-
tainer with its waste contents is then transported to the disposal site, emptied, and
returned into service. In the Stationary Container System (SCS) operation, the con-
tainers used to store the waste remain at the generation site, except when moved to
the curb or elsewhere to be emptied. Both residential and some commercial genera-
tors use the SCS process.
13.4.2 Equipment
Vehicles and containers are required for both HCS and SCS collection systems.
When the HCS is used, only one truck and a driver are required to accomplish col-
lection. Each pickup, however, requires a trip to the disposal site underlying the
importance of container size and utilization to the economic viability of this process.
Three types of vehicles are used in HCS collection:
1. Hoist trucks are generally used to handle commercial wastes, in what is often
characterized as a small operation with a few pickup locations that generate con-
siderable amounts of waste. Scrap metal, construction debris, and other bulky
items are also often picked up by hoist trucks. Containers used in conjunction
with hoist trucks may vary in size from 2 to 12 yd3 (1.5 to 9.2 m3).
2. Vehicles equipped with a tilt frame are frequently used to collect solid waste
from dumpsters, the large steel containers commonly used at apartment com-
plexes and commercial sites.
3. Large dumpsters, often referred to as roll-off containers, are used to collect
heavy rubbish and are often observed at construction and demolition sites.
Roll-off container size can vary from 10 to 40 yd3 (7.6 to 30.6 m3). Trash-trailer
systems equipped with a tilt frame are used for this type of collection.
Packer trucks are commonly used in the SCS process for pickup of residential
waste. Although packers can vary in design, most are covered vehicles having inter-
nal compactors. Packers vary in size from 16 to 20 yd3 (12.2 to 15.3 m3) and most are
rear loaded, although some designs now incorporate side loading. Once loaded, the
waste is compacted to approximately 600 to 700 lb/yd3 (357 to 416 kg/m3). On aver-
age, packers usually service approximately 200 customers before the truck is full and
a trip is made to the landfill (Vesilind et al., 2002).
13.4.3 Problems and Concerns

A variety of problems and concerns are commonly associated with solid waste col-
lection. Waste-collection laborers are considered unskilled, yet the labor is inten-
sive, and a high employee turnover can be expected. Injuries and poor working
conditions are common, and there is limited opportunity for career advancement.
And although the use of automated, mechanical equipment for curbside collection
is becoming more prevalent, the prospect for the mechanical replacement of man-
ual labor is dim.
Customer-service issues related to refuse collection include the frequency of ser-
vice, container and storage concerns, pickup location, and questions on how to deal
with special wastes. Collection frequency has been declining since the 1950s. By the
1970s, once-a-week (1/wk) collection was common in half of the United States. This
trend continued into the 1980s, but at a reduced rate. Some parts of the South still use
twice-a-week collection (2/wk). Reasons for declining collection frequency include:
• Decline in proportion of putrescible waste because of increased use of food grinders
• Better design of collection vehicles to control odors and flies
Table 13.2 Advantages and Disadvantages of Different Collection Frequencies

Collection Potential Potential Favoring
frequency advantages disadvantages conditions
Once per week Less expensive Improperly stored waste Cold to moderate
or less Requires less fuel can create odor and climate
vector problems
Twice per week Reduces litter More expensive Warm climate

Reduces storage Requires more fuel
requirements
More than twice Reduces litter More expensive Dense population

per week Reduces storage Requires more fuel
requirements
• Increased service costs

• Decreased time between collection and disposal
• Better management
Advantages and disadvantages of different collection frequencies are summa-
rized in Table 13.2. Management of solid waste disposal must deal with inflation and
with changes associated with promulgation of new regulations. With the lack of con-
sistent quality management, collection is often given a low priority, and collectors are
often resistant to change and to implementing new technologies. Technical issues
important to effectively managing the solid waste collection process include:
• Collection of recyclables, yard waste, and special wastes
• Yard waste containers—bagged material must be debagged prior to composting
• Automated collection (still requires an operator)
• Development of efficient routes
• Vehicle weight restrictions
• Vehicle turning radius and clearance
The various factors affecting decisions and calculations associated with solid
waste collection are characterized as either fixed or variable. Fixed factors include the
climate, topography, and layout of the collection area influencing container access
(alley, curbside, rear of house). The type of transportation systems, traffic, and roads
available are also considered fixed. For instance, in Venice, Italy, boats are used, and in
the Bahamas, barges are used to transport collection trucks from island to island to
landfills. The population density and the types of waste collected are also considered
fixed factors. Variable factors include the storage techniques employed, recycling, col-
lection frequency, and crew size.
EXAMPLE 13.2
Solid waste collection
Assume that each pickup location produces 75 lb of waste per week and the packer
vehicle can compact the waste to a density of 750 lb/yd3. Estimate the number of cus-
tomers that have their waste collected prior to making a trip to the landfill. Assume
the truck capacity is 20 yd3.
Section 13.5 Landfill Containment and Monitoring Systems 343
Solution
Determine the weight of waste on the truck when full:
lb
20 yd3 * 750 = 15,000 lb
yd3
Then the number of customers served can be calculated as:
15,000 lb
= 200 customers
lb
75
customer
EXAMPLE 13.3
Solid waste collection
Assume a truck and crew are observed to service customers at a rate of 1.25 customers
per minute, and the actual time spent per day collecting waste is 5 hours (recognizing
that some time is spent each 8-hr day traveling to and from the garage and taking
breaks). Estimate the number of customers that can be served per day.
Solution
If 1.25 customers are served per minute, then the number of customers served in
5 hours can be estimated as:
customers 60 min 5 collection hr customers
a1.25 b * a b * a b = 375
min hr d d
13.5 LANDFILL CONTAINMENT AND MONITORING SYSTEMS

This section outlines the components of a landfill and the processes that take place
in a landfill. You will gain a general familiarity with modern landfills and be able to
describe their main components. By definition, a landfill is an engineered method of
disposing of solid waste on land in a manner that protects the environment. Landfill
operation includes the spreading of refuse in a thin layer, followed by compaction. A
cover material such as soil, foam, geotextile, or tarp is placed over the waste at the end
of each day. The EPA has developed a booklet, Criteria for Solid Waste Disposal Facili-
ties: A Guide for Owners/Operators, available online at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/
non-hw/muncpl, that provides an excellent summary of provisions of the Agency’s
Municipal Solid Waste Landfill (MSWLF) Criteria (for additional details, refer to
40 CFR, Part 258 and the Federal Register, October 9, 1991, 56FR50978). The booklet
discusses the major regulatory requirements, how the rule is implemented and
enforced, and where to obtain more information. Federal MSWLF standards include:
• Location restrictions—ensure that landfills are built in suitable geological areas
away from faults, wetlands, flood plains, or other restricted areas.
• Composite liners requirements—to protect groundwater and the underlying soil
from leachate releases, include a flexible membrane (geomembrane) overlaying
two feet of compacted clay soil lining the bottom and sides of the landfill.
• Leachate collection and removal systems—rests on top of the composite liner and
removes leachate from the landfill for treatment and disposal.
• Operating practices—that help protect public health, include compacting and
covering waste frequently with several inches of soil to help reduce odors; control
litter, insects, and rodents; and decrease leachate formation by increasing runoff.
• Groundwater monitoring requirements—requires testing groundwater wells to
determine whether waste materials have escaped from the landfill.
• Closure and postclosure care requirements—include covering landfills and provid-
ing long-term care of closed landfills.
• Corrective-action provisions—control and clean up landfill releases and achieve
groundwater protection standards.
• Financial assurance—provides funding for environmental protection during and
after landfill closure (i.e., closure and postclosure care).
Site selection for a landfill is paramount. The site should be large enough to
accommodate the SW needs of the area it serves for a lifetime of approximately
10 years. It must be compatible with the local SW management programs, such that
public health, safety, welfare, and the environment are protected. Every effort is
made during site selection to minimize adverse impacts on the surrounding area,
property value, and traffic flow. When selecting the site, the potential for fire, spills,
and accidents must be realized. The site must be located outside of the 100-year
flood plain and far from airports, because of the increased risk of birds in the land-
fill area and potential impact on planes. Landfills must be sited at least 10,000 ft
(3050 m) from jetports and 5,000 ft (1524 m) from other airports. Other factors
affecting site selection include land availability, haul distance, soil conditions, and
topography. Geological restrictions on landfill sites require that no landfill should
exist within 200 ft (61 m) of a fault or unstable area characterized by seismic activity.
Leachate concerns dictate hydrological conditions associated with surface water
and groundwater issues. Also considered are climate (rainfall and wind), environ-
mental, and ecological conditions, public input and concerns, as well as the potential
use for the site after closure are considered.
Landfills can be classified as either wet or dry. A dry landfill is designed to keep
waste dry in an effort to limit biological activity, while a wet landfill, often called a
bioreactor, uses leachate recirculation to moisten and facilitate microbial degrada-
tion of the waste. Landfills are designed to accept either municipal (sanitary) or haz-
ardous wastes. Controlled landfills may be used for co-disposal of both municipal and
hazardous wastes.
Three construction techniques used for landfills include excavation, above
ground, and canyon/depression. The excavation method can be used only when the
groundwater table (GWT) is distant from the surface. Trenches with typical dimen-
sions of length = 100- 400 ft 130.5- 122 m2, width = 15- 25 ft 14.6 -7.6 m2, and
depth = 10-15 ft 13-4.6 m2 are excavated, and the SW is dumped into the trenches
for disposal. Tractors and compactors spread and compact the refuse by pushing it up
the working face. Multiple passes are made with compaction equipment to maxi-
mize compaction density. Soil cover, obtained from excavation, is placed on the
refuse. When the excavation method is not feasible, the above-ground method is
used. SW is unloaded and spread in long narrow strips (15–30 inches or 38–76 cm
thick). SW placement in strips is repeated multiple times until a predetermined cell
thickness is reached (usually 5–20 ft or 1.5–6.1 m). Cover soil is applied (6–12 inches
or 15–30 cm) at the end of each day. Geotextiles, foams, ground tires, compost, and
other materials are also often used as cover. The embankment (working face) slope
for a landfill is limited by the capabilities of the equipment used and is typically
References 345
3:1 or 4:1 (run:rise). The canyon/depression method is similar in operational tech-

nique to the above-ground method and is often used in areas where depressions
exist (natural or artificial—canyons, valleys, ravines, borrow pits).
Modern landfills may be equipped with a leachate recirculation system (LRS),
which can be used to store leachate in the waste mass and/or enhance biological activ-
ity and improve decomposition of organic SW, resulting in a reduced time for landfill
stabilization. Such landfills often accept biosolids to provide moisture, microorgan-
isms, buffering capacity, and nutrients to further enhance the decomposition of wastes.
Modern landfills have in situ storage and treatment facilities for leachate collection,
show an increase in biogas production, and are equipped with facilities for gas/energy
recovery. Such facilities also exhibit a reduction of liability, care, and costs associated
with post-closure activities.
S U M M A RY
This chapter provided an overview of solid waste management issues, options, and
current governing regulations. Historical data were presented, providing insight
concerning yearly increases in refuse production and the need for well-engineered
solutions for disposal and reuse. RCRA characteristics for hazardous waste were
presented and the concept of MSW generation (quantification) was introduced.
The hauled container and stationary container systems were introduced as com-
mon collection schemes. Municipal solid waste landfill operations and basic design
concepts were discussed. An overview was given of appropriate regulatory infor-
mation regarding landfill siting, design, operation, and closure.
hauled-container materials-flow roll-off container KEY WORDS

system methodology stationary container
hazardous waste municipal solid waste system
hoist trucks nonhazardous waste underground storage
landfill packer trucks tanks (USTs)
load-count analysis Resource Conservation
material and product and Recovery Act
categories (RCRA)
REFERENCES
Census Release -T1 (2000). ”Annual Projections of the Total Resident Population as of July;
Lowest, Middle, High Series: 1999 to 2100,” Population Estimates Program, Population
Division, U.S. Census Bureau, Washington, D.C. 20233, February 14, 2000.
Municipal Solid Waste in the United States: 2005 Facts and Figures. United States Environ-
mental Protection Agency, Office of Solid Waste (5306P) EPA530-R-06-011 October 2006,
www.epa.gov.
OECD, 2002. OECD Environmental Data. Waste. Compendium 2002. Environmental Perfor-
mance and Information Division, Environment Directorate, Organization for Economic
Cooperation and Development (OECD), Working Group on Environmental Information
and Outlooks. URL: http://www.oecd.org
Repa, E.W. NSWMA’s 2005 Tip Fee Survey, NSWMA Research Bulletin 05-3 March 2005.
National Solid Waste Management Association, Washington, DC, www.nswma.org.
Tchobanoglous, G., Theisen, H., and Vigil, S. (1993). Integrated Solid Waste Management Engi-
neering Principles and Management Issues, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Vesilind, P.A., Worrell, W.A., and Reinhart, D.R. (2002). Solid Waste Engineering, Brooks/Cole,
Pacific Grove, CA.
EXERCISES
13.1 Use your text and online information available from the U.S. EPA Office of Solid
Waste (http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/osw/) to answer the following questions:
(a) Define the acronym RCRA. Describe the difference between RCRA-
subtitle C and RCRA-subtitle D.
(b) Which federal agency is responsible for enforcing RCRA?
(c) If an RCRA solid waste material is reused, is it still considered an RCRA
solid waste?
(d) Do RCRA regulations and verbiage address only hazardous and non-
hazardous solid wastes? Provide examples to support your answer.
(e) List the four physical characteristics which may result in a waste being
categorized as hazardous.
(f) Define the acronym CERCLA and briefly describe the main focus of this
federal regulation.
(g) In the early 2000s, the amount of hazardous waste generated in the United
States was (greater than, the same as, or less than) the amount of municipal
solid waste generated in the United States today. Please provide the data
and source(s) used to support your response.
(h) In 2005, approximately how many tons of waste did the United States
generate? Please provide source(s) used.
(i) How much waste is generated on a percapita basis in the United States?
How does this generation rate correspond to the rates observed in other
major countries?
(j) What is the main component of waste generated in the United States?
13.2 The terms generated, disposed, recycled, and diverted wastes are commonly
used in relation to solid waste management. Briefly define these terms in your
own words.
13.3 The EPA recognizes a variety of waste management methods, including:
(1) source reduction, (2) composting, (3) waste combustion, (4) landfilling, and
(5) recycling. (a) Briefly define each of these methods and (b) identify the
EPA’s preferred method for waste management.
13.4 Consider the most recent waste-generation and waste-management data
available to you. Using the 2004 national average landfill tipping fee, reported
as $34.29 per ton, estimate the amount of money the United States spends on
waste disposal by landfilling every year.
13.5 For both your home state and the state in which you reside while in college,
determine the name of the state agency that enforces the rules for solid waste
management.
13.6 What is the difference between a listed and a characteristic hazardous waste?
13.7 The accompanying table contains information on the composition of the resid-
ual (disposed) waste stream generated by a community and the recycling effi-
ciencies achieved for various components in the waste stream. Calculate the
overall recycling efficiency achieved by the community to one decimal place.
Composition of the residual Individual recycling

Component (disposed) waste, % by wt. efficiencies, %
Food waste 15 0
Mixed paper 30 30
Glass 7 20
Plastics 5 15
Exercises 347
Metal 3 60
Textiles 7 0
Wood 8 0
Yard waste 25 30
Sum 100
[Hint: Use Equation (13.1) and assume 0% diverted.]
13.8 Assume that each pickup location produces 125 lb of waste per week, and the
packer vehicle can compact the waste to a density of 800 lb/yd3. Estimate the
number of customers that have their waste collected before the vehicle makes
a trip to the landfill. Assume the truck capacity is 20 yd3.
13.9 Assume that a truck and crew are observed to service customers at a rate of
1.32 customers per minute, and the actual time spent per day collecting waste
is 6 hours (recognizing that some time is spent each 8-hr day traveling to and
from the garage and taking breaks). Estimate the number of customers that
can be served per day.
13.10 A community needs to decrease the amount of waste being sent to the local
landfill. A city engineer has proposed the installation of food grinders and the
implementation of a recycling program. Using the following information, deter-
mine the reduction (as a percentage) in the waste being disposed (give your
answer to one decimal place). Consider that food grinders will be installed in
70% of the homes. It is estimated that, through the food grinder, these homes
will dispose of 45% of the food waste currently generated. [Note: Initially, the
amount of waste disposed is the same as the amount of waste generated. Both
the food grinders and recycling reduce the quantity of waste disposed.]
Composition of the generated Anticipated recycling

Component waste, % by wt. efficiency, %
Food waste 15 0
Mixed paper 30 60
Glass 11 70
Plastics 8 40
Metal 4 80
Yard waste 19 70
Misc. 13 0
Sum 100
Index
A Advanced wastewater treatment (AWT):

ABET-accredited engineering program, 7, 13 facilities, 245
Absolute system (cg), 15 systems, 246
Absorption, 298–302 Advective transport, 320
Academia, projects/work for, 5 Aerator systems, 258–260
Acaryote, 60 Aerobic digestion, 266, 272–275
Accuracy, 28–29 Aerobic digestion design (example), 273–275
Acid, 42–46 Aerosols, 283
Acid gas scrubber, 298 anthropogenic generation of, 289
Acid mine drainage, 81 Agricultural exposure factors, 109
Acidity, classification of surface water susceptibility Agricultural runoff, 176, 183
to, 48 Air and Waste Management Association (AWMA), 9
Acidogenesis, 270 Air, land, and water environments/resources, 2, 12
Activated sludge, 253–258 Air pollution, 4–5, 7, 9, 279–304
biochemical kinetics of, in completely mixed anthropogenic emission sources, 282
systems, 255–256 carbon monoxide, 284
design and operational parameters, 254 chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs), 286
design (example), 256–258 community (ambient), 279
mean cell residence time (MCRT), 254 gas and vapor control technology, 297–302
oxygen requirements, 256 generally available control technologies
waste activated sludge (WAS), 254 (GACTs), 281–282
Actual oxygen transfer rate (AOTR), 260 global warming, 286–288
Adenosine triphosphate (ATP), 323 greenhouse effect, 286–287
Advanced Integrated Wastewater Pond System hazardous air pollutants (HAPs), 281
(AIWPS), 167–169 health/environmental effects from exposure to
facultative pond, 168 criteria pollutants (table), 284
high-rate pond (HRP), 168 history, 280–281
Hollister (California) AIWPS, 169 lead, 285
maturation pond, 168 maximum achievable control technologies
settling pond, 168 (MACT), 281–282
St. Helena (California), 169 natural sources, 282
type 2 AIWPS, 168 nitrogen oxides, 283
349
350 Index
Air pollution, (Continued) Apparent color, 181

ozone, 285 Archimedes’ principle, 19
particulate matter (PM), 282–283 Aroclor®, 313
pollution-prevention activities, 289 Aromatic hydrocarbons, 310–311
primary national ambient air quality standards, Arsenic, 195
summary of, 282 ASCE, See American Society of Civil Engineers
primary pollutants, 282 (ASCE)
primary standards, 281 Association of Environmental Engineering and
regulations/standards, 281–282 Science Professors (AEESP), 9
secondary pollutants, 282 Atomic number (Z), 32, 159
secondary standards, 281 determining (example), 160–161
sulfur oxides, 284–285 Atomic shell, 32
volatile organic compounds (VOCs), 281, 286 Atomic weight (AW), 34
Air pollution episodes, 280–281 Atoms, 32
Air sparging, 325–326 Autotroph, 70, 323
AIWPS, See Advanced Integrated Wastewater Pond Average linear velocity, 321
System (AIWPS) Avogadro’s number, 21
Alachlor, 195 AWT, See Advanced wastewater treatment (AWT)
ALARA, 162 AWWA, See American Water Works Association
Albedo, 287 (AWWA)
Algae, 59, 61–62, 70, 76
Aliphatic hydrocarbons, 309–310 B
Alkalinity, 209 Bacillus, 62
and carbonate system, 47–48 Bacteria, 62, 233, 323
defined, 47 Bar screens, 248
Alkanes, 309–310 Bases, 43
Alkenes, 310 Batch reactors, 134–135
Alkynes, 310 Beneficial use, of water, 172–175
Alpha particles, 159–160 Benzene, 195
Alternative disinfectants, 237–238 Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl benzene, and Xylene
chlorine dioxide, 238 (BTEX), 311, 326
high-pH treatment, 238 Berl and Intalox saddles, 299
ozone, 237 Beryllium-7 (Be-7), 161
UV radiation, 238 Beta particles, 160
Aluminum, 209–210 Bias, 28–29
American Academy of Environmental Engineers, 9 Bioaccumulation, 74
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), 2–3, 9 Bioassays, 102
Report Card on America’s Infrastructure, 2 Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD), 3, 130,
and sustainability, 154 177, 185, 245
American Water Works Association (AWWA), 9, 203 calculating for a “seeded” sample (example), 190
Amino acids, 59 calculating for an “unseeded” sample
Ammonification, 79 (example), 190–191
Amoebic dysentery, 233 calculating given BODu (example), 187–188
Amphoteric compounds, 44 chemical oxygen demand (COD), 177, 191
Anaerobic digestion, 266, 269–271 derivation of equation, 186–187
design (example), 271–272 laboratory procedures, 188–189
Analytical problem solving, 30 pathogens and indicator organisms, 191–192
Animalia kingdom, 61 Biochemical reactions, 120–130
Anionic polymers, 210 Biological denitrification, 201
Annelida, 64 Biological dissimilatory denitrification, 78
Anthropogenic emission sources, of air pollution, 282 Biological nitrification, 201
Index 351
Biological water treatment technologies, 201 Chemical reactions, 37–42, 120–130

Biomagnification, 74 balancing, 38–40
Biomass, 253 first-order reactions, 123–125
Bioreactors, 344 rate law, 121
Biosolids, See Sludge rates of reaction, 121
Bioventing (BV), 327–328 reaction order, 121–122
BOD, See Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) second-order reactions, 125–126
Bohr, Niels, 32 temperature corrections, 128–130
Boyle’s law, 52 zero-order reactions, 122–123
Breakpoint chlorination, 236–237 Chemical water treatment technologies, 201
Breeder reactors, 162 Chemoheterotrophic organisms, 71
British thermal unit (BTU), 143 Chemotroph, 323
Brønsted, J. N., 43 Chernobyl nuclear disaster, 6, 7
Brønsted-Lowry acid, 43–44 Chick’s law, 234
BTEX, 311, 326 Chloramines, 236
Buffering capacity, 47 Chlorination, 264
chemistry of, 235
C Chlorine, 14, 227, 264
Cadmium, 195 chlorine species, ranking of, 237
Calcium hypochlorite, 235 problems in using, 237
Calorie (cal), 143 Chlorine contact basin, 264–266
Carbon, 75–76 example, 265–266
Carbon-14 (C-14), 161 Chlorine dioxide, 238
Carbon cycle, 75–76 Chlorine residual, types of, 237
Carbon dioxide, 47, 76 Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs), 286
Carbon monoxide, 284 Chronic daily intake (CDI), 107–110, 116
Carbonate system, and alkalinity, 47 calculating (example), 109–110
Carcinogenic effects, 103–104 risk calculations using (example), 110–111
Carcinogens, 74, 102 Chronic toxicity, 102
risk characterization for, 110 Clapeyron, Paul Émile, 51
Carman-Kozeny equation, 228 Clays, 208, 210
Carson, Rachel, 305 Clean Air Act (CAA), 281, 314
Catalytic incineration, 297–298 Clean Water Act, 195
Cationic polymers, 210 Coagulant aids, 210
CDI, See Chronic daily intake (CDI) Coagulants, 209–210
Cell structure, 60 Coagulation, 207–210
Cell yield, microbes, 69 colloidal particles, 208–209
Centi-, 16 defined, 207
Centrifuge, 267, 275 Coal vs. nuclear energy, 167
CERCLA, See Comprehensive Environmental Coarse-bubble diffusers, 258–259
Response, Compensation, and Liability Act COD, See Chemical oxygen demand (COD)
(CERCLA/Superfund) Coliform bacteria, 192
Cesspools, 244 Colloidal destabilization, 208–209
Cgs (centimeter-gram-second) system, 15 Colloidal particles, 208–209
Charles’ law, 52 Color, in water, 181–182, 208
Chemical concepts, 32–58 Color unit (c.u.), 182
atoms, 32 Combination reactions, 37
elements, 32 Combined gas law, 52
Chemical equations, 37 Combustion reactions, 37
Chemical oxygen demand (COD), 177, 191 Commercial/industrial exposure factors, 109
Chemical precipitation, 215–216 Common ion effect, 48
352 Index
Community, 70 Decomposers, 59, 66, 71

Completely mixed, batch reactor (CMBR), 135 Decomposition reactions, 37
design (example), 137 Dedicated disposal, 275
Completely mixed flow, 134 Deka-, 16
Completely mixed flow reactor (CMFR), 137–139 Denitrification, 78–79, 246
design (example), 139–140 Denitrification stoichiometric coefficients (example), 79
Composting, 328–330 Dense nonaqueous-phase liquid (DNAPL) pool, 316
Comprehensive Environmental Response, Density, 18–20
Compensation, and Liability Act of common substrates, 19
(CERCLA/Superfund), 305–306 example, 19
hazardous substances on Priority List of problem solving with, 20
Hazardous Substances, 308–309 Deoxygenation, 86–88, 90
Remedial Actions, 308 Deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), 60, 66, 102
Removal Actions, 308 Detention time, 210–211, 250, See Residence time
Concentration, defined, 103 Detention time equation, 135–136
Concentrations, 20–26 Dewatering, 275
Condensed phosphate, 184 Diaptomus, 63
Conditionally exempt small-quantity generators Diarrhea, 233
(CESQGs), 337 Dichlorodiphenyldichloroethane (DDE), 313
Conservative substance, 130 Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane (DDT), 74, 208
Consulting firms, 4 Dichloroethylene (DCE), 310
Contaminated Land Rehabilitation Network for Diffuse layer, 208
Environmental Technologies in Europe Diffused aeration systems, 258
(CLARINET), 305 Dimensions, 15
Continuing education, 9 Direct-flame incinerators, 297
Continuous flow, 134 Discrete settling, 220–221
Continuously stirred tank reactors (CSTR), 138 Disinfection, 233–238
Control rods, 162 alternative disinfectants, 237–238
Control volume, 120 breakpoint chlorination, 236–237
Controlled landfills, 344 calcium hypochlorite, 235
Convection, 320 Chick’s law, 234
Conversion factors, 17–18 chloramines, 236
Corrosivity, wastes, 337 chlorination, chemistry of, 235
Cosmogenic radionuclides, 161 chlorine, problems in using, 237
Criteria pollutants, 281 chlorine residual, types of, 237
Crustaceans, 63 mechanisms of disinfectants, 235
Cryptosporidium parvum (parasite), 6, 66, 192, 195 regulatory requirements, 234
Cultural eutrophication, 84 sodium hypochlorite, 235
Curie (C), 161 Surface Water Treatment Rule (SWTR), 234
Cyclops, 63 of wastewater, 264–266
Disinfection and Disinfection By-Products Rule (D-
D DBP), 234
Dalton’s law, 26, 53 Disinfection by-products (DDBPs), 207
Daphnia, 63 Dispersed plug flow, 134
Darcy’s law, 320–321 Dispersed plug flow reactors, 134
Data collection and evaluation, 102 Disposal, of sludge, 275–276
Deamination, 79 Dissociation constant, 45
Death: Dissolution, 48
leading causes of, 99 Dissolved-oxygen depletion in streams, 85–88
probability of, calculating, 98 Dissolved-oxygen (DO) concentration, and water
Deci-, 16 quality, 185
Index 353
Domestic wastewater, 176, 183, 187, 198 landfarming, 330

characteristics of, 243–244 pump-and-treat systems, 325
treatment, 243–278 in situ remediation schemes, 324–328
Domestic water supply, 174 soil vapor extraction (SVE), 326–327
Dose, defined, 103 vadose zone treatment schemes, 326–328
Dose-response assessment, 102–103 Engineering ethics, 8–9
Dose-response curves, mathematical modeling Enhanced biological phosphorus removal (EBPR)
of, 105–107 systems, 246
Double-layer electrical theory, 208 wastewater treatment processes, 79
Double-replacement reactions, 37 Entamoeba histolytica, 66
Drift velocity, 295 Enteroviruses, 192
Drinking water standards, 194–195, 202–203 Enthalpy, 144
primary, 194, 202–203 Environment Congress for Asia and the Pacific (ECO
secondary, 195–196, 203 ASIA), 305
Dual-media filters, 227 Environmental calamities, 5–7
Bhopal, India, 6, 306
E Chernobyl nuclear disaster, 6–7
EBPR, See Enhanced biological phosphorus removal Exxon Valdez, 6
(EBPR) Great Smokey Mountains smog, 6
Ecological balance, 3 Hurricane Katrina, 6
Ecological systems (ecosystems), 69–75 Love Canal, 5–6, 306
energy flow in, 70–71 Milwaukee Cryptosporidium Outbreak, 6
Ecology, defined, 69 Environmental engineering:
Edward I (king of England), 280 academia, 5
Effective size, filter media, 230 continuing education, 9
Einstein’s energy-mass-equivalence equation, 160 defined, 12
EIS, See Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) definitions of, 1
Electrical double layer, 208 educational requirements, 7–8
Electrons, 32 and engineering consulting firms, 4
Electrostatic precipitators (ESPs), 289, 293–295 government/municipality projects/work, 4
design (example), 295–297 industries, 5
Elements, 32 as lifelong journey, 7–9
periodic table of, 33 matching your interests, 5
Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know multidisciplinary teams, 4
Act (EPCRA), 306 outdoor work, 4
Endocrine disruptors, 75 problem solving, 10
in sewage/water supply, 203 professional licensure, 7
Endogenous decay, 68 regulatory agencies, 5
Energy, 143 undergraduate curriculum, 8
conversion factors, 18 Environmental engineers:
Energy balance and efficiency (example), 73 characteristics of, 3–5
Energy balances, 143–149 demand for, 2
and coal-fired power plant mass (example), duties of, 3–5
146–149 new challenges for, 3
Engineered remediation processes, 324–330 Environmental impact analysis, 113–117
air sparging, 325–326 simplified environmental assessment problem
bioventing (BV), 327–328 (example), 114–115
composting, 328–330 Environmental impact statement (EIS), 12, 113–116
ex situ remediation schemes, 328–330 alternatives including the proposed action, 116
groundwater remediation technologies, assessment, 113–114
325–328 defined, 113
354 Index
Environmental impact statement (EIS), (Continued) Filter media, 230

environmental consequences, 116 specifications, 231
evaluation, 114 Filtration, 226–233
format, 115–116 backwashing of filters, 230
inventory, 113 defined, 227
Environmental Information Network for Asia and the filter dimensions and backwash quantity
Pacific (ACO ASIA NET), 305 (example), 232–233
Environmental management, 12 filter media, 230
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), 12, 20, 98, gravity-type granular media filtration, 227–228
110, 116, 203, 279, 281, 306 head loss through a clean filter, 228–229
Criteria for Solid Waste Disposal Facilities: A number of filters, 230
Guide for Owners/Operators (booklet), 343 rates of, 232
hazard index (HI), 111–112 size of filters, 231
Environmental remediation, 305–332 Fine-bubble diffusers, 258–259
Environmental systems: First law of thermodynamics, 143–144
chemical and biochemical reactions, 120–130 First-order reactions, 123–125
design and modeling of, 120–153 First-order removal reaction, 137–138
energy balances, 143–149 Fish, 63
flow regimes and reactors, 134–142 Fission, 162, 164, 169
material balances, 120, 130–133 Fission fragments, 162–163, 169
Environmentally intelligent design: “Flash” mixing, of coagulants, 210
Advanced Integrated Wastewater Pond System Flocculants, 209
(AIWPS), 167–169 Flocculation, 227
beverage container material selection, 166–167 defined, 207
coal vs. nuclear energy, 167 Flocculation basin design (example), 214–215
Haworth and Steelcase office chairs, 165 Flocculation tanks, 213–215
paper vs. plastic bags, 165–166 Flocculent settling, 221
EPA, See Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Flow rate, 26–27
Epilimnion, 82–84 calculating (example), 27
Equilibrium constants, 45 Flow regimes, 134
for acids/conjugate base in environment, 46 defined, 134
Equivalent, use of term, 35 Flue-gas desulfurization (FGD) systems,
Equivalent weight (EW), 34–35 advantages/disadvantages of, 301–302
calculating (example), 35 Food chain, 59, 71–73, 93
Escherichia coli (E. coli), 194, 234 energy use through (example), 73
ESPs, See Electrostatic precipitators (ESPs) Food-to-microorganism ratio (F:M), 255
Ethanes, 310 Food web, 71–72
Ethenes, 310 Force mains, 245
Ethics, 8–9, 154 Franklin Study, 338
Eukaryotic cells, 60 Free/discrete settling, 220–221
Eutrophic lakes, 84 Free radicals, 34
Eutrophication, 84 Free settling, 220–221
Explosives, 314 Fuel additives, 314
Exposure, 101 Fumes, 283
Exposure assessment, 107–109 Fundamentals of Engineering (FE) examination, 7
External dose, 161 Fungi, 63
Fungi kingdom, 61
F
F list (RCRA), 336 G
Fahrenheit (°F), 15 Gamma (γ) radiation (gamma rays), 160
Fall turnover, 83, 85 Gas and vapor control technology, 297–302
Index 355
absorption, 298–302 contaminant characteristics, 315–320

incineration, 297–298 contaminants, 309–322
Gas-phase chemistry, 51–56 Darcy’s law, 320–321
Gas-phase concentration units, 23 engineered remediation processes, 324–330
conversion of, 25–26 estimation of sorption to soil (example), 317
Gastrointestinal problems, 233 groundwater migration and retardation of
Gay-Lussac law, 52 contaminants (example), 321–322
Genera, 61 hazardous waste history, highlights in, 305–307
Generally available control technologies Henry’s law constant, 318
(GACTs), 281–282 hydrocarbons (HC), 309–314
Giardia lamblia, 66, 192, 195, 234 inorganics, 314–315
Gibbs, Lois, 6 mass and volume relationships in soil
Giga-, 16 (example), 319–320
Global warming, 286–288 microbial processes, 323–324
Godwin, Mills, 197 partition coefficients, 316
Government projects/work, 4 physical properties of soil, 318–319
Grams per equivalent (g/eq), 35 soil-distribution coefficient (KSD), 316–317
Granular media filters, 230 solubility and nonaqueous phase liquids, 315–316
Gravity belt thickener (GBT) design Hazards, 101
(example), 267–269 HC, See Hydrocarbons (HC)
Gravity sewer, 245 Heat, 144
Gravity-type granular media filtration, 227–228 Helminth parasites, 233
Gray (Gy), 162 Helminths, 64, 192
Green engineering, 154–156, 158 Henry’s law, 47, 54–57, 76, 87
defined, 155 using to determine equilibrium and
principles of, 155–156 concentrations (example), 55–56
Green Lights Program, 289 using to estimate equilibrium concentration
Greenhouse effect, 286–287 (example), 318
Greenhouse gases, 76, 286, 288 Henry’s law constant, 318
Green plants, 70 Hepatitis, 233
Grit removal, 248–249 Hepatitis A virus, 192
GRIT SNAIL™ Quiescent Dewatering Escalator, 249 Herpes Simplex virus, 66
Groundwater migration and retardation of Heterogeneous culture, net growth rate of, 69
contaminants (example), 321–322 High Melting Explosive (HMX), 314
Groundwater, quality of, 205 High-pH treatment, 238
Groundwater remediation technologies, 325–326 High-rate pond (HRP), 168
Groundwater treatment systems, 205–207 Hoist trucks, 341
lime-soda ash treatment, 206 Hooker Chemical and Plastics Corporation, 6, 306
reverse osmosis treatment, 206–207 Hookworm, 233
Horticultural runoff, 174
H Hydrocarbons (HC), 75, 309–314
Half-life, 125, 163 aliphatic hydrocarbons, 309–310
Hard water, 202, 215 aromatic hydrocarbons, 310–311
Hauled Container System (HCS), 340–341 explosives, 314
Haworth and Steelcase office chairs, 165 fuel additives, 314
Hazard identification, 102 pesticides, 313
Hazard index (HI), 117 polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), 313
calculating (example), 111–112 polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs), 312
Hazardous air pollutants (HAPs), 281 Hydrogen-3 (H-3), 161
Hazardous waste site Ranking System (HRS), 306 Hydrologic cycle, 175
Hazardous waste site remediation, 305–332 Hydrology, 14
356 Index
Hydrolysis, 269–270 Landfill containment and monitoring systems,

Hypolimnion, 83 343–345
construction techniques, 344–345
I controlled landfills, 344
Ideal completely mixed flow, 134 dry landfill, 344
Ideal gas law, 24, 51 federal MSWLF standards, 343–344
Ideal gases, 51 leachate recirculation system (LRS), 345
Ideal settling basin, 221–224 site selection, 344
Ignitability, wastes, 337 wet landfill, 344
Imperial Units, 15 Landfill, defined, 343
Incineration, 297–298 Law of the conservation of energy, 130
advantages of, 298 Law of the conservation of mass, 38, 130
catalytic, 297–298 Leachate recirculation system (LRS), 345
disadvantages of, 298 Lead, 285, 314
thermal, 297–298 Leaky Underground Storage Tank (LUST), 4
Incremental lifetime cancer risk, 107 trust fund, 306
Indicator organisms, 191–192 Liebig’s law of the minimum, 85
Industrial water use, 174 Lifelong learning, 7–9
Inorganic-P, 184 Light nonaqueous-phase liquid (LNAPL), 315–316
Insolation, 287 Lime-soda ash treatment, 206
Integrated Risk Information System (IRIS), 106 softening equations, 216–218
Internal dose, 161 Lime stabilization, 266
Internal energy (U), 143 Limnology:
International Organization for Standardization defined, 81
(ISO), 12 stratification, 82–84
International System of Units (SI), 15, 162 Linearized multistage model, 106
Ions, associated with environmental chemistry, 35 “Liquid” treatment train, 201
IRIS, 110 Livestock water, 174
Iron salts, 209 Load-count analysis, 337–338
Irrigation, 174 Love Canal, 5–6, 306
Isotopes, 32, 159 Love, William T., 5–6, 306
Lowest observed-adverse-effect level (LOAEL), 104
J LUST, 306
James River, kepone contamination of, 197–198
M
Joule (J), 16, 143
Macrophytes, 64–65, 82
K Manure, and composts, 329
Mass, conversion factors, 17
K list (RCRA), 336 Mass number (A), 32, 159
Kaolinite, 208 determining (example), 160–161
Kepone contamination of the James River, 197–198 Mass percent, 21
Kilograms (kg), 15 Mass removal rates (example), calculating, 11–12
Kinetic energy (KE), 143 Master of Engineering (ME)/Master of Science (MS)
Kinetics, 120 in Environmental Engineering, 7
Material balances (mass balances), 120, 130–133
L on air flow and particulates (example), 132–133
Lag phase, 67 defined, 130
Lake stratification, 84–85 on flows and solids (example), 131–132
Land application, 266 Material selection, 156–158
reuse of biosolids through, 275 Materials-flow methodology, 338
Landfarming, 330 Maturation pond, 168
Index 357
Maximum achievable control technologies Mole (mol), 34

(MACT), 281–282 Molecular weight (MW), 34
Maximum contaminant level goals (MCLGs), 194 Monera kingdom, 61
Maximum contaminant levels (MCLs), 194, 198 Monod, 68
Mean cell residence time (MCRT), 254 Monomedia filters, 227
Mechanical dispersion, 320 Montmorillonite, 208
Median lethal dose, 103 Most probable number (MPN), 193
Mega-, 16 calculating (example), 193–194
Membrane-filter technique, 192–193 MTBE, See Methyl tertiary butyl ether (MTBE)
Membrane filtration, 205 Multidisciplinary teams, 4
Membrane softening, 206–207 Multimedia filters, 227
Mercury, 314–315 Multiple “liquid” treatment trains, 201
Metalimnion, 83 Multiple-tube fermentation technique, 193
Metathesis reactions, 37 Municipal solid waste landfills (MSWLFs), 337
Meters (m), 15 Municipal solid waste (MSW) management, 333–334
Methanes, 310 materials category, 334
Methanogenesis, 270 products category, 334
Methanogens, 270 Municipality projects/work, 4
Methyl isocyanate (MIC), release of, in Bhopal, Mushrooms, 63
India, 6, 306 Mutagenesis, 102
Methyl tertiary butyl ether (MTBE), 203, 314
in sewage/water supply, 203 N
Metric system, 15 N-nitrosodimethylamine (NDMA), 203
Micro-, 16 Nano-, 16
Microbial metabolism, environmental factors NASA Mars Climate Observer, 15
affecting, 323–324 National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS),
Microbial processes, 323–324 281
Micrococcus, 62 National Biennial RCRA Hazardous Waste Report,
Microconstituents, 203 309
Microcrustaceans, 63 National Contingency Plan (NCP), 306
Micrograms per cubic meter (μg/m3), 20 National Council of Examiners for Engineering and
Micrograms per liter (μg/L), 20 Surveying (NCEES), 7
Microorganisms, 66–68, 76, 130, 252–253 National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air
activated sludge, 253–258 Pollutants (NESHAPS), 281
microbial growth equations, 67–68 National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA), 12, 113
specific growth rate, 68 National Industrial Competitiveness through Energy,
Milli-, 16 Environment and Economics (NICE3)
Milligrams per liter (mg/L), 20–21 program, 289
relationship between ppm and (example), 21 National Pollution Discharge Elimination System
Milligrams per milliequivalent (mg/meq), 35 (NPDES) permit, 195–196, 198, 245
Millirem (mrem), 162 National Priorities List (NPL), 306
Milorganite, 275 National Society of Professional Engineers (NSPE),
Milwaukee Cryptosporidium Outbreak, 6 fundamental canons promulgated by, 8–9
Mining water, 175 National Solid Waste Management Association
Mist eliminators, 299 (NSWMA), 334
Mists, 283 Natural aging, 84
Mixed liquor suspended solids (MLSS), 253 Naturally occurring radioactive material (
MKS (meter-kilogram-second) system, 15 NORM), 161
Moderators, 162 Nematoda, 64
Molarity, 21 Nephelometric turbidity units (NTUs), 178
Molarity (M), 35 Neptunium-239 (Np-239), 162–163
358 Index
Nerst potential, 208 Nutrient cycles, 75–81

Neutrons, 32, 159 carbon cycle, 75–76
Newton (N), 16 nitrogen cycle, 76–77
Nitrification, 61, 77–78 phosphorus cycle, 79–80
Nitrification stoichiometric coefficients sulfur cycle, 80–81
(example), 78
Nitrobacter, 77 O
Nitrogen (N): Occupational Safety and Health Administration
forms of, 183 (OSHA), 279
in water, 183–184 Octanol-water partition coefficient (KOW), 316
Nitrogen cycle, 76–77 Odor, water, 182
deamination, 79 Oligotrophic lakes, 84
denitrification, 78–79 Organic-P, 184
nitrification, 77–78 Organic phosphate, 184–185
Nitrogen oxides, 283 Organisms:
Nitrogenous oxygen demand, 256 algae, 61–62
Nitrosomonas, 77 bacteria, 62
No-observable-adverse-effect level (NOAEL), classification of, 60–61, 70
104–105 crustaceans, 63
Nominal detention time, 254–255 fish, 63
Nonaqueous-phase liquid (NAPL), 315–316 fungi, 63
Noncarcinogenic effects, 104–105 helminths, 64
Noncarcinogens, risk characterization for, 111 macrophytes, 64–65
Nonionic polymers, 210 major groups of, 61
Nonpoint sources of pollution, 243 microcrustaceans, 63
Nonreactive substance, 130 microorganisms, 66–69
Normality (N), 35 protozoans, 66
calculation of concentration in (example), 36–37 rotifers, 66
Norris Lake (Tennessee), 82 viruses, 66
NPDES permit, See National Pollution Discharge Orthophosphates, 184
Elimination System (NPDES) permit Oswald, William, 167
Nuclear fission, 162–163 Overflow rate, 222, 250
Nuclear physics, 158–165 Ozone, 237, 285
alpha particles, 159–160
beta particles, 160 P
breeder reactors, 162 P list (RCRA), 336
Einstein’s energy-mass-equivalence equation, 160 Packed-bed towers, 299–300
millirem (mrem), 162 advantages/disadvantages of, 300
nuclear fission, 162–163 Packer trucks, 341
nuclear reactors, 162–163 Pall rings, 299
nuclear waste immobilization and storage, Paper vs. plastic bags, 165–166
164–165 Parallel treatment trains, 201
primordial radionuclides, 161 Paratyphoid, 233
radiation absorbed dose (rad), 162 Particulate matter (PM), 282–283
radioactive elements, identifying (example), 159 aerodynamic size of a particle, 289
radioactivity, sources of, 161 electrostatic precipitators (ESPs), 293–295
radioactivity, units of, 161–162 settling chambers, 290–293
roentgen equivalent man (rem), 162 stationary sources, 289–292
Nuclear reactors, 162–163 Partition coefficients, 317
Nuclear waste immobilization and storage, 164–165 Parts per billion (ppb), 20
Nucleus, 32 Parts per million on a volume basis (ppmv), 23
Index 359
Parts per million (ppm), 20 Population, 70

Pascal (Pa), 16 Pore velocity, 321
Pathogens, 191–192 Potassium-40, 161
and pH, 233 Potency factor (PF), 106
process for significant reduction of pathogens Potential energy (PE), 143
(PSRP), 272 Powdered activated carbon (PAC), 210
Pay As You Throw (PAYT) programs, 339–340 Power, 143
PCBs, See Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) conversion factors, 18
Periodic table of the elements, 33 Precipitation, 37, 48
Personal care products, in sewage/water supply, 203 Precision, 28–29
Pesticides, 313 Preliminary wastewater treatment systems, 247–249
pH, 42–45 grit removal, 248–249
calculating (example), 44–45 screening, 248
for a strong acid (example), 46 Pressure, conversion factors, 17
high-pH treatment, 238 Primary clarifiers, 250
of water, 194 design (example), 251–252
Pharmaceuticals, in sewage/water supply, 203 Primary consumers, 71
Phosphorus cycle, 79–80 Primary drinking water standards, 194
Phosphorus (P): Primary pollutants, 282
phosphorus accumulating organisms (PAOs), 79 Primary producers, 70–71
in water, 184 Primary wastewater treatment, 249–252
Photosynthesis, 59 Primordial radionuclides, 161
Phototroph, 323 Probability of death, calculating, 98
Phylogeny, 61 Problem solving, 10
Physical forces, 201 analytical, 30
Phytoplankton, 59, 71 Process for significant reduction of pathogens
Pico-, 16 (PSRP), 272
picoCurie (pCi), 161 Producers, 70
Pink water, 314 Professional engineer (PE), 7
Pipe flow, See Plug flow; Plug flow reactor (PR) societies and organizations, 9
PISTA® Grit Removal System, 249 Professional Engineering (PE) exam, 7
Plankton, 81–82 Prokaryotic, 60
Plantae kingdom, 61 Prokaryotic cells, 60
Plants, 59, 70, 76 Proteins, 59
Platyhelminthes, 64 Protista kingdom, 61
Plug flow, 264 Protons, 32, 159
defined, 134 Protozoan parasites, 233
Plug flow reactor (PFR), 140–142 Protozoans, 66
design (example), 142 Pu-239, 163, 164
second-order removal reaction, 140–142 Public water supply, 173–174
PM, See Particulate matter (PM) Publicly owned treatment works (POTWs), 176
pOH, calculating (example), 44–45 Pump-and-treat systems, 325
Poliomyelitis, 233 Pumping stations, 245
Pollution, 4–5, 7, 12, See also Air pollution
nonpoint sources of, 243 R
water, 175–177 Radiation absorbed dose (rad), 162
Pollution Prevention Act (1990), 289 Radicals, 34
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), 310 associated with environmental chemistry, 35
Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), 74, 208, 313 Radioactive atoms, 159
Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs), 312 Radioactive decay, calculating (example), 164
Polymers, as coagulant aids, 210 Radioactive elements, identifying (example), 159
360 Index
Radioactivity: Risk:
sources of, 161 calculating (example), 99–100
units of, 161–162 defined, 98, 116
Radionuclides, 159 Risk assessment, 98–119
half-lives of, 163 data collection and evaluation, 102
Radium-226 and radium-228, 195 defined, 101, 116
Raoult’s law, 54–56 dose-response assessment, 102–103
Rapid-mix basin design (example), 212–213 environmental impact statement (EIS),
Rapid mixing, of coagulants, 210 12, 113–116
Raschig rings, 299 exposure, 101
RCRA, See Resource Conservation and Recovery exposure assessment, 107–109
Act (RCRA) hazard identification, 102
Reaction order, 121–122 hazards, 101
and k determination (example), 126–128 and pollution prevention, 156
Reaction stoichiometry, 38–42 risk characteristics, 110–111
Reactive unit, 34 risk management, 112–113
Reactivity, wastes, 337 toxicology, 102
Reactors, 134–142 Risk management, 101
batch reactors, 134–137 Roentgen equivalent man (rem), 162
completely mixed batch-reactor design Roentgen (R), 161–162
(example), 137 Roll-off containers, 341
completely mixed flow reactor (CMFR), 137–139 Rotating biological contactors (RBCs), 245
completely mixed reactor design (example), Rotifers, 66
139–140 Royal Demolition Explosive (RDX), 314
defined, 134
first-order removal reaction, 137–139 S
plug flow reactor (PFR), 140–142 Safe Drinking Water Act, 194
second-order removal reaction, 137 Safety, defined, 98
zero-order removal reaction, 135–137 Saltwater, 202
Reaeration, 87 Saprophytes, 63
coefficients, 87 Screening, 248
Reasonable maximum exposure (RME), 107–109 Second law of thermodynamics, 144
Recreational exposure factors, 109 Second-order reactions, 125–126
Recycle flow, 253 Second-order removal reaction, 137, 140–142
Reference dose (RfD), 104–105, 111 Secondary clarifier design protocol, 262–263
Regulatory agencies, 5 example, 263
Rem, 162 Secondary consumers, 71
Reproducibility, 28 Secondary drinking water standards, 195–196
Residence time, 27–28 Secondary effluent, 253
calculating (example), 28 Secondary pollutants, 282
Residential exposure, 109 Secondary wastewater treatment, 245–246, 252–258
Residential exposure equations, for various trickling filters, 260–261
pathways, 108 Seconds (s), 15
Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), Sedimentation, 220–226
305, 335–337 flocculent settling, 221
hazardous waste definition, 336–337 free/discrete settling, 220–221
nonhazardous waste definition, 337 overflow rate, 222
Retention time, See Residence time settling basin, 221–222
Return activated sludge (RAS) flow, 253 settling-basin design criteria, 224–225
Reverse osmosis treatment, 206–207 settling velocity, 222–224
Ribonucleic acid (RNA), 66 weir loading rate, 224
Index 361
Seepage velocity, 321 collection frequency, decline in, 341–342

Seneca, 280 collection systems, 340–341
Septic tanks, 244 customer-service issues, 341–342
Settling basin, 221–222 Hauled Container System (HCS), 340–341
Settling-basin design criteria, 224–225 hazardous waste, 336
rectangular settling basin (example), 226 history of, 333
Settling chambers, 290–292 hoist trucks, 341
design (example), 292–293 landfill containment and monitoring
Settling velocity, 222–224, 290 systems, 343–345
Sewerage system, 245 load-count analysis, 337–338
SI, See International System of Units (SI) materials-flow methodology, 338
SI system of units, 15–16 packer trucks, 341
prefixes, 16 problems/concerns, 341–342
Sievert (Sv), 162 regulations, 335–337
Significant figures, 29–30 roll-off containers, 341
Silent Spring (Carson), 305 Stationary Container System (SCS), 341
Single-replacement reactions, 37 underground storage tanks (USTs), 335
Slaking, 37
waste generation, 337–340
Slope factor (SF), 106–107
Solids:
risk calculations using (example), 110–111
analyses (example), 180–181
Sludge:
solubility of (example), 49–50
aerobic digestion, 272–275
in water, 179–180
aerobic digestion design (example), 273–275
Solids loading rate (SLR), 262–263
anaerobic digestion, 266, 269–271
Solution chemistry (aqueous phase), 42
anaerobic digestion design (example), 271–272
dewatering, 275 acid-base chemistry, 42–45
disposal, 275–276 strong acids and bases vs. weak acids and
gravity belt thickener (GBT) design (example), bases, 45–46
267–269 Solution chemistry (gas phase), 51–56
sludge weight and volume relationships, 266–267 general gas laws, 51–53
stabilization, 269–275 Solution concentration, determining
thickening of, 267–269 (example), 21–23
treatment and disposal, 266–275 Species, 61
Sludge age, 254 Spray-tower absorption systems, 301
Sludge blanket, 253 Spring turnover, 82–83, 85
Sludge-only landfills/monofills, 275 Stabilization:
Sludge trains, 201 lime, 266
SLURRYCUP™ grit washing and classification sludge, 269–275
unit, 249 Standard Methods for the Examination of Water
Sodium hypochlorite, 235 and Wastewater (APHA), 177
Soft water, 202 Standard Model (of the atom), 32
Soil: Starches, 59
estimation of sorption to (example), 317 Stationary Container System (SCS), 341
physical properties of, 318–319 Sterilization, 233
Soil-distribution coefficient (KSD), 316–317 Stern layer, 208
Soil vapor extraction (SVE), 326–327 Stoichiometry, 38–42
Solid-phase equilibrium reactions, 48 reaction, 40–42
Solid Waste Association of North America, 9 Stokes’ velocity, See also Settling velocity
Solid waste management, 333–347 example, 290–291
collection equipment, 341 Stratification, 82–84
collection examples, 342–343 Stream standards, 196
362 Index
Streams: Tera-, 16
calculating the critical deficit point in (example), Teratogens, 102
90–92 Tetrachloroethylene (PCE/Perc), 310
dissolved-oxygen depletion in, 85–87 Tetraethyl lead (TEL), 314
Streeter-Phelps DO depletion model, 88–90, 93 Theoretical oxygen demand, calculating (example),
Streptococcus, 62 185–186
Strong acids and bases vs. weak acids and bases, 45–46 Thermal discharges to river (example), 145–146
Substrate adsorption and utilization, 253 Thermal incinerators (oxidators), 297–298
Substrate utilization, 255 Thermodynamics, 143
Sugars, 59 Thermoelectric power, 175
Sulfur cycle, 80–81 water for, 175
acid mine drainage, 81 Thorium-232 (Th-232), 163
sulfur dioxide emissions, 81 Thorium (Th), 161
Sulfur dioxide emissions, 81 Threshold number (FTN), 182
Sulfur oxides, 284–285 Threshold odor number (TON), 182
Summer stratification, 85 TNT, 314
Superficial velocity, 320 Total dissolved solids (TDS), 179, 182
Superfund Reauthorization and Amendments Total energy (E), 143
(SARA), 306 Total Kjeldahl nitrogen (TKN), 183
Surface water quality standards, 196 Total maximum daily loads (TMDLs), 176
Surface water treatment processes, 207–238 Total nitrogen (TN), 245
coagulation, 207–210 Total phosphorus (TP), 245
filtration, 225–233 Total reaction order, 122
flocculation tanks, 213–215 Total solids (TS), 179
mixing, 210–213 Total suspended solids (TSS), 179, 245
sedimentation, 220–226 Total trihalomethanes (TTHMs), 195, 234
water softening, 215–220 Toxic Release Inventory (TRI), 306
Surface Water Treatment Rule (SWTR), 234 Toxic Substance Control Act (1976), 289
Surface water treatment systems, 203–205 Toxicants, 102
conventional, 203–204 Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP),
membrane treatment, 205 337
Suspended solids (SS), 3, 179 Toxicity, wastes, 337
removal, 221 Toxicology, 102
Sustainability, 156 Trichloroethylene (TCE), 310
Sustainable development, 154–171 Trickling filters, 260–261
defined, 155 Trihalomethanes (THMs), 233, 237, 264
design, 155 Trimedia filters, 227
material selection, 156–158 Trophic level, 59
Sweep coagulation, 210 True color, 181
Synthesis reactions, 37 Turbidity, 178, 208
Synthetic organic compounds (SOCs), 5 nephelometric turbidity units (NTUs), 178
Systems of units, 15 Typhoid fever, 233
T U
Taste, water, 182 U-235, 164
Teacup system (EUTEK Systems), 249 U-238/U-239, 162–163, 164
Temperature: U list (RCRA), 336
conversion factors, 18 Ultimate BOD, 187–188
water, 183 Uncertainty, in calculating risk, 98
Temperature corrections, 128–130 Underground storage tanks (USTs), 335
example, 129–130 Uniformity coefficient, 230
Index 363
Unit conversion, 24 Water, 172–200

Unit operation, 201, 220, 225–233, 245 beneficial uses of, 172–175
Unit processes, 201, 215, 245 biochemical oxygen demand (BOD), 185–191
Universal Gas Constant (R), 23 chemical oxygen demand (COD), 191
Uranium (U), 161 classification based on best beneficial use for the
Urban runoff, 176, 183 state of Florida, 197
U.S. Customary units, 15 color, 181–182, 208
U.S. EPA RCRAInfo National Database, 309 condensed phosphate, 184
U.S. Geological Survey, water-use report, 172–174 conventional water quality assessment
UV radiation, 238 parameters, 177–194
dissolved-oxygen (DO) concentration, 185
V domestic water supply, 174
Vadose zone, 324 drinking water standards, 194–195, 202–203
treatment schemes, 326–328 estimated world water supply and budget
Valence, 34 (table), 173
Velocity gradient, 210–212 hydrologic cycle, 175
Velocity of flow in a pipe, computing importance of, 172
(example), 10–11 industrial water use, 174
Viruses, 60, 66, 233 integrated watershed management, 176–177
VOCs, See Volatile organic compounds (VOCs) irrigation, 174
Volatile organic compounds (VOCs), 281, 286, 326 kepone contamination of the James River,
Volume, conversion factors, 17 197–198
Volume percent, 21 livestock, 174
Vortex grit removal systems, 248–249 membrane-filter technique, 192–193
Vostok (Russia) ice core, 288 mining water, 175
multiple-tube fermentation technique, 193
W nitrogen (N), 183–184
Waste activated sludge (WAS), 254, 267 odor, 182
Waste generation, 337–340 organic phosphate, 184–185
example, 338–339 orthophosphates, 184
Pay As You Throw (PAYT) programs, 339–340 pathogens and indicator organisms, 191–192
Wastewater: pH of, 194
defined, 243 phosphorus (P), 184–185
types of, 243 physical, chemical, biological, and radiological
Wastewater collection system., 245 characteristics of (table), 178
Wastewater effluent standards, 195–196 pollution, 175–177
Wastewater treatment: public water supply, 173–174
advanced wastewater treatment (AWT) quality, 202
systems, 246 quality parameters, 177–194
categorization, 245–246 quality standards, 194–195
chlorination, 264 solids in, 179–181
chlorine contact basis, 264–266 surface water quality standards, 196
disinfectants used in, 264 taste, 182
preliminary treatment systems, 247–249 temperature, 183
primary treatment, 249–252 thermoelectric power, 175
secondary wastewater treatment, 245–246, Total Coliform Rule in the Safe Drinking Water
252–258 Act, 194
systems, 246–247 turbidity, 178
Wastewater treatment plants (WWTPs), 79, 176, 245 wastewater effluent standards, 195–196
design capacity of, 247 wastewater treatment plant (WWTP), 176
Wastewaters, 47 water treatment plant (WTP), 176
364 Index
Water Environment Federation (WEF), 9 Weathering, 327

Water Infrastructure Network (WIN), 3 Weir loading rate, 224, 250
Water pollution, 175–177 Wet scrubber, 298
types of, 175–176 Winkler method, 185
Water softening, 215–220 Winter stratification, 83, 85
chemical precipitation, 215–218 Work, 143
excess-lime and soda-ash softening problem Worms, 192
(example), 218–219 WWTPs, See Wastewater treatment plants (WWTPs)
ion exchange, 220
lime-soda ash softening equations, 216–218 Y
semipermeable membrane, passage through, 220
Yeasts, 63
Water treatment, 201–242
Yield coefficient:
disinfection, 233–238
growth, 253, 258
groundwater treatment systems, 205–207
microbes, 69
microconstituents, 203
selecting appropriate technology, 202–203
surface water treatment systems, 203–205 Z
water source and quality, 202 Zero-order reactions, 122–123
Water treatment plant residuals, treatment of, 238–239 Zero-order removal reaction, 135–137
Water treatment plant (WTP), 176 Zeta potential, 208–209

Introduction To Environmental Engineering 0132347474 9780132347471 Compress

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Introduction To Environmental Engineering 0132347474 9780132347471 Compress

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Introduction to

RICHARD O. MINES, Jr., Ph.D., P.E.

LAURA W. LACKEY, Ph.D., P.E.

Editorial Director, ECS: Marcia Horton

Pearson Education Ltd., London

ISBN 10: 0-13-234747-4

ABOUT THIS BOOK xiv

1 • ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING AS A PROFESSION 1

2 • INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING

3 • ESSENTIAL CHEMICAL CONCEPTS 32

4 • BIOLOGICAL AND ECOLOGICAL CONCEPTS 59

4.2.1 Cell Structure 60

5.1 Concept or Perception of Risk 98

6 • DESIGN AND MODELING OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS 120

6.1 Introduction 120

6.4 Flow Regimes and Reactors 134

7 • SUSTAINABILITY AND GREEN DEVELOPMENT 154

7.1 Introduction 154

8 • WATER QUALITY AND POLLUTION 172

8.1 Importance of Water 172

8.7 Kepone Contamination of the James River 197

9 • WATER TREATMENT 201

9.1 Introduction 201

10 • DOMESTIC WASTEWATER TREATMENT 243

10.1 Introduction 243

10.8.1 Disinfectants Used in Wastewater Treatment 264

11 • AIR POLLUTION 279

11.1 Introduction 279

12 • FUNDAMENTALS OF HAZARDOUS WASTE SITE REMEDIATION 305

12.1 The Problem 305

12.4 Introduction to Engineered Remediation Processes 324

13 • INTRODUCTION TO SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 333

13.1 Introduction 333

Christopher Rowe, Vanderbilt University Dennis Truax, Mississippi State University

Introduction to Environmental Engineering aims to excite freshman-level students

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERS MAKE A DIFFERENCE

1.3.1 Jobs in Demand

1.3.2 A Lousy Report Card

Table 1.1 ASCE Report Card on America’s Infrastructure

1.3.3 Basic Necessities—New Challenges

1.4 DUTIES AND IMPORTANT CHARACTERISTICS

science, math, and engineering. Professionals integrate knowledge in these areas to

1.4.1 Multidisciplinary Teams

1.4.2 Work Outdoors

1.4.3 Consulting Firms

1.4.5 Regulatory Agencies

1.4.8. Does Environmental Engineering Match My Interests?

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CALAMITIES

1.5.1 Love Canal

Table 1.2 Environmental Calamities in Recent History

Chernobyl Radiation April 26, 1986 www.chernobyl.com/info.htm

Love Canal Toxic wastes 1920 to 1950s www.epa.gov/history/topics/lovecanal/01.htm

Bhopal, India Methyl December 2–3, www.bhopal.org/whathappened.html

Exxon Valdez Crude oil March 23, 1989 www.bytesurgery.com/missionpossible/mp/text/exxon.html

Smog in Great Ozone and 1991 to 2001 www.aldha.org/smoky2.htm

1.5.2 Milwaukee Cryptosporidium Outbreak

1.5.3 Chernobyl Nuclear Disaster

1.6 BECOMING AN ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEER: A LIFELONG PROCESS

1.6.1 College Education

1.6.2 Professional Licensure

Table 1.3 Undergraduate Environmental Engineering Curriculum

Freshman Chemistry I Chemistry II

Computer Programming Introduction to Design